diff --git a/en_tn_41-MAT.tsv b/en_tn_41-MAT.tsv
index 4f31e7088..2aa0ac6b6 100644
--- a/en_tn_41-MAT.tsv
+++ b/en_tn_41-MAT.tsv
@@ -1,6 +1,6 @@
Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNote
-MAT front intro sa9c 0 # Introduction to the Gospel of Matthew
## Part 1: General Introduction
### Outline of the Book of Matthew
1. The birth of Jesus Christ and the beginning of his ministry (1:1-4:25)
1. Jesus’ Sermon on the Mount (5:1-7:28)
1. Jesus illustrates the kingdom of God through acts of healing (8:1-9:34)
1. Jesus’ teaching about mission and the kingdom (9:35-10:42)
1. Jesus’ teaching about the gospel of the kingdom of God. The beginning of opposition to Jesus. (11:1-12:50)
1. Jesus’ parables about the kingdom of God (13:1-52)
1. Further opposition to Jesus and misunderstanding of the kingdom of God (13:53-17:57)
1. Jesus’ teaching about life in the kingdom of God (18:1-35)
1. Jesus ministers in Judea (19:1-22:46)
1. Jesus’ teaching about the final judgment and salvation (23:1-25:46)
1. The crucifixion of Jesus, his death and resurrection (26:1-28:19)
### What is the book of Matthew about?
The Gospel of Matthew is one of four books in the New Testament that describe some of the life of Jesus Christ. The authors of the gospels wrote about different aspects of who Jesus was and what he did. Matthew showed that Jesus was the Messiah, and God would save Israel through him. Matthew often explained that Jesus fulfilled the Old Testament prophecies about the Messiah. This may indicate that he expected most of his first readers to be Jewish. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/christ]])
### How should the title of this book be translated?
Translators may choose to call this book by its traditional title, “The Gospel of Matthew,” or “The Gospel according to Matthew.” Or they may choose a title that may be clearer, such as, “The Good News about Jesus that Matthew wrote.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
### Who wrote the Book of Matthew?
The book does not give the name of the author. However, since early Christian times, most Christians have thought that the author was the Apostle Matthew.
## Part 2: Important Religious and Cultural Concepts
### What is the “kingdom of heaven?”
Matthew spoke of the kingdom of heaven in the same way that other gospel writers spoke of the kingdom of God. The kingdom of heaven represents God ruling over all people and all creation everywhere. Those whom God accepts into his kingdom will be blessed. They will live with God forever.
### What were Jesus’ teaching methods?
The people regarded Jesus as a rabbi. A rabbi is a teacher of God’s law. Jesus taught in similar ways as other religious teachers in Israel. He had students who followed him wherever he went. These students were called disciples. He often told parables. Parables are stories that teach moral lessons. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/lawofmoses]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/disciple]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/parable]])
## Part 3: Important Translation Issues
### What are the Synoptic Gospels?
The Gospels of Matthew, Mark, and Luke are called the Synoptic Gospels because they have many similar passages. The word “synoptic” means to “see together.”
The texts are considered “parallel” when they are the same or almost the same among two or three gospels. When translating parallel passages, translators should use the same wording and make them as similar as possible.
### Why does Jesus refer to himself as the “Son of Man”?
In the gospels, Jesus calls himself the “Son of Man.” It is a reference to Daniel 7:13-14. In this passage there is a person described as a “son of man.” That means the person was someone who looked like a human being. God gave authority to the son of man to rule over the nations forever. And all the people will worship him forever.
Jews of Jesus’ time did not use “Son of Man” as a title for anyone. Therefore, Jesus used it for himself to help them understand who he truly was. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/sonofman]])
Translating the title “Son of Man” can be difficult in many languages. Readers may misunderstand a literal translation. Translators can consider alternatives, such as “The Human One.” It may also be helpful to include a footnote to explain the title.
### What are the major issues in the text of the Book of Matthew?
The following verses are found in older versions of the Bible but are not included in most modern versions:
* “Bless those who curse you, do good to those who hate you” (5:44)
* “For yours is the kingdom and the power and the glory forever. Amen” (6:13)
* “But this kind of demon does not go out except with prayer and fasting” (17:21)
* “For the Son of Man came to save that which was lost” (18:11)
* “Many are called, but few are chosen” (20:16)
* “Woe to you, scribes and Pharisees, hypocrites! for you devour widows’ houses, while you make a show of long prayers. You will therefore receive greater condemnation.” (23:14)
Translators are advised not to include these passages. However, if in the translators’ region, there are older versions of the Bible that include one or more of these passages, the translators can include them. If they are included, they should be put inside square brackets ([]) to indicate that they were probably not original to Matthew’s Gospel. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants]])
-MAT 1 intro y7kk 0 # Matthew 01 General Notes
## Structure and formatting
Some translations set a quotation from the Old Testament farther to the right on the page than the rest of the text. The ULT does this for the quoted material in 1:23.
## Special concepts in this chapter
### Genealogy
A genealogy is a list that records a person’s ancestors or descendants. Jews used genealogies to choose the right man to become king. They did this because only a son of a king could become king. Most important people had records of their genealogies.
## Important figures of speech in this chapter
### Use of the passive voice
Matthew uses the passive voice very purposefully in this chapter to indicate that Mary did not have a sexual relationship with anyone. She became pregnant with Jesus because the Holy Spirit performed a miracle. Many languages do not have a passive voice, so translators in those languages must find other ways to present the same truths. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
+MAT front intro sa9c 0 # Introduction to the Gospel of Matthew
## Part 1: General Introduction
### Outline of the Book of Matthew
1. The birth of Jesus Christ and the beginning of his ministry (1:1-4:25)
1. Jesus’ Sermon on the Mount (5:1-7:28)
1. Jesus illustrates the kingdom of God through acts of healing (8:1-9:34)
1. Jesus’ teaching about mission and the kingdom (9:35-10:42)
1. Jesus’ teaching about the gospel of the kingdom of God. The beginning of opposition to Jesus. (11:1-12:50)
1. Jesus’ parables about the kingdom of God (13:1-52)
1. Further opposition to Jesus and misunderstanding of the kingdom of God (13:53-17:57)
1. Jesus’ teaching about life in the kingdom of God (18:1-35)
1. Jesus ministers in Judea (19:1-22:46)
1. Jesus’ teaching about the final judgment and salvation (23:1-25:46)
1. The crucifixion of Jesus, his death and resurrection (26:1-28:19)
### What is the book of Matthew about?
The Gospel of Matthew is one of four books in the New Testament that describe some of the life of Jesus Christ. The authors of the gospels wrote about different aspects of who Jesus was and what he did. Matthew showed that Jesus was the Messiah, and God would save Israel through him. Matthew often explained that Jesus fulfilled the Old Testament prophecies about the Messiah. This may indicate that he expected most of his first readers to be Jewish. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/christ]])
### How should the title of this book be translated?
Translators may choose to call this book by its traditional title, “The Gospel of Matthew,” or “The Gospel according to Matthew.” Or they may choose a title that may be clearer, such as, “The Good News about Jesus that Matthew wrote.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
### Who wrote the Book of Matthew?
The book does not give the name of the author. However, since early Christian times, most Christians have thought that the author was the Apostle Matthew.
## Part 2: Important Religious and Cultural Concepts
### What is the “kingdom of heaven?”
Matthew spoke of the kingdom of heaven in the same way that other gospel writers spoke of the kingdom of God. The kingdom of heaven represents God ruling over all people and all creation everywhere. Those whom God accepts into his kingdom will be blessed. They will live with God forever.
### What were Jesus’ teaching methods?
The people regarded Jesus as a rabbi. A rabbi is a teacher of God’s law. Jesus taught in similar ways as other religious teachers in Israel. He had students who followed him wherever he went. These students were called disciples. He often told parables. Parables are stories that teach moral lessons. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/lawofmoses]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/disciple]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/parable]])
## Part 3: Important Translation Issues
### What are the Synoptic Gospels?
The Gospels of Matthew, Mark, and Luke are called the Synoptic Gospels because they have many similar passages. The word “synoptic” means to “see together.”
The texts are considered “parallel” when they are the same or almost the same among two or three gospels. When translating parallel passages, translators should use the same wording and make them as similar as possible.
### Why does Jesus refer to himself as the “Son of Man”?
In the gospels, Jesus calls himself the “Son of Man.” It is a reference to Daniel 7:13-14. In this passage there is a person described as a “son of man.” That means the person was someone who looked like a human being. God gave authority to the son of man to rule over the nations forever. And all the people will worship him forever.
Jews of Jesus’ time did not use “Son of Man” as a title for anyone. Therefore, Jesus used it for himself to help them understand who he truly was. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/sonofman]])
Translating the title “Son of Man” can be difficult in many languages. Readers may misunderstand a literal translation. Translators can consider alternatives, such as “The Human One.” It may also be helpful to include a footnote to explain the title.
### What are the major issues in the text of the Book of Matthew?
The following verses are found in older versions of the Bible but are not included in most modern versions:
* “Bless those who curse you, do good to those who hate you” (5:44)
* “For yours is the kingdom and the power and the glory forever. Amen” (6:13)
* “But this kind of demon does not go out except with prayer and fasting” (17:21)
* “For the Son of Man came to save that which was lost” (18:11)
* “Many are called, but few are chosen” (20:16)
* “Woe to you, scribes and Pharisees, hypocrites! for you devour widows’ houses, while you make a show of long prayers. You will therefore receive greater condemnation.” (23:14)
Translators are advised not to include these passages. However, if in the translators’ region, there are older versions of the Bible that include one or more of these passages, the translators can include them. If they are included, they should be put inside square brackets ([]) to indicate that they were probably not original to Matthew’s Gospel. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants]])
+MAT 1 intro y7kk 0 # Matthew 01 General Notes
## Structure and formatting
Some translations set a quotation from the Old Testament farther to the right on the page than the rest of the text. The ULT does this for the quoted material in 1:23.
## Special concepts in this chapter
### Genealogy
A genealogy is a list that records a person’s ancestors or descendants. Jews used genealogies to choose the right man to become king. They did this because only a son of a king could become king. Most important people had records of their genealogies.
## Important figures of speech in this chapter
### Use of the passive voice
Matthew uses the passive voice very purposefully in this chapter to indicate that Mary did not have a sexual relationship with anyone. She became pregnant with Jesus because the Holy Spirit performed a miracle. Many languages do not have a passive voice, so translators in those languages must find other ways to present the same truths. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
MAT 1 1 ava1 0 General Information: The author begins with Jesus’ genealogy in order to show that he is a descendant of King David and of Abraham. The genealogy continues through [Matthew 1:17](../01/17.md).
MAT 1 1 y31w βίβλος γενέσεως Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ 1 The book of the genealogy of Jesus Christ You could translate this as a complete sentence. Alternate translation: “This is the list of the ancestors of Jesus Christ”
MAT 1 1 vpg1 Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ, υἱοῦ Δαυεὶδ, υἱοῦ Ἀβραάμ 1 of Jesus Christ, son of David, son of Abraham There were many generations between Jesus, David, and Abraham. Here the word **son** means “descendant.” Alternate translation: “Jesus Christ, a descendant of David, who was a descendant of Abraham”
@@ -50,7 +50,7 @@ MAT 1 24 nr5e παρέλαβεν τὴν γυναῖκα αὐτοῦ 1 he took
MAT 1 25 i7p5 figs-euphemism οὐκ ἐγίνωσκεν αὐτὴν 1 he did not know her This is a euphemism. Alternate translation: “he did not have sexual relations with her” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-euphemism]])
MAT 1 25 dlm9 υἱόν 1 a son “a male baby” or “her son.” Make sure it is clear that Joseph is not portrayed as the actual father.
MAT 1 25 jtz8 καὶ ἐκάλεσεν τὸ ὄνομα αὐτοῦ, Ἰησοῦν 1 And he called his name Jesus “And Joseph named the child Jesus”
-MAT 2 intro dz1c 0 # Matthew 02 General Notes
## Structure and formatting
Some translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with the poetry in verses 6 and 18, which are words from the Old Testament.
## Special concepts in this chapter
### “His star”
These words probably refer to a star that the learned men believed to be the sign of a new king of Israel. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/sign]])
## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter
### “Learned men”
English translations use many different words to translate this phrase. These words include “magi” and “wise men.” These men could have been scientists or astrologers. If you can, you should translate this with the general word “learned men.”
+MAT 2 intro dz1c 0 # Matthew 02 General Notes
## Structure and formatting
Some translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with the poetry in verses 6 and 18, which are words from the Old Testament.
## Special concepts in this chapter
### “His star”
These words probably refer to a star that the learned men believed to be the sign of a new king of Israel. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/sign]])
## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter
### “Learned men”
English translations use many different words to translate this phrase. These words include “magi” and “wise men.” These men could have been scientists or astrologers. If you can, you should translate this with the general word “learned men.”
MAT 2 1 j9yn 0 General Information: A new part of the story begins here and continues through the end of the chapter. Matthew tells about Herod’s attempt to kill the new King of the Jews.
MAT 2 1 k518 Βηθλέεμ τῆς Ἰουδαίας 1 Bethlehem of Judea “the town of Bethlehem in the province of Judea”
MAT 2 1 id55 ἐν…ἡμέραις Ἡρῴδου τοῦ βασιλέως 2 in the days of Herod the king “when Herod was king there”
@@ -121,7 +121,7 @@ MAT 2 22 h4cq translate-names Ἀρχέλαος 1 Archelaus This is the name of
MAT 2 22 zk37 ἐφοβήθη 1 he was afraid “Joseph was afraid”
MAT 2 23 dx5i figs-activepassive τὸ ῥηθὲν διὰ τῶν προφητῶν 1 what had been spoken through the prophets This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: “what the Lord spoke long ago through the prophets” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
MAT 2 23 hc8g translate-names Ναζωραῖος κληθήσεται 1 he will be called a Nazarene Here, **he** refers to Jesus. The prophets before the time of Jesus would have referred to him as the Messiah or the Christ. Alternate translation: “people would say that the Christ is a Nazarene” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
-MAT 3 intro a6h3 0 # Matthew 03 General Notes
## Structure and formatting
Some translations set quotations from the Old Testament farther to the right on the page than the rest of the text. The ULT does this with the quoted material in verse 3.
## Special concepts in this chapter
### “Bear fruit worthy of repentance”
Fruit is a common picture word in the scriptures. Writers use it to describe the results of either good or bad behavior. In this chapter, good fruit is the result of living as God commands. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/other/fruit]])
## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter
### “The kingdom of heaven is near”
No one knows for sure whether the “kingdom of heaven” was present or still coming when John spoke these words. English translations often use the phrase “at hand,” but these words can be difficult to translate. Other versions use the phrases “is coming near” and “has come near.”
+MAT 3 intro a6h3 0 # Matthew 03 General Notes
## Structure and formatting
Some translations set quotations from the Old Testament farther to the right on the page than the rest of the text. The ULT does this with the quoted material in verse 3.
## Special concepts in this chapter
### “Bear fruit worthy of repentance”
Fruit is a common picture word in the scriptures. Writers use it to describe the results of either good or bad behavior. In this chapter, good fruit is the result of living as God commands. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/other/fruit]])
## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter
### “The kingdom of heaven is near”
No one knows for sure whether the “kingdom of heaven” was present or still coming when John spoke these words. English translations often use the phrase “at hand,” but these words can be difficult to translate. Other versions use the phrases “is coming near” and “has come near.”
MAT 3 1 xp3z 0 General Information: This is the beginning of a new part of the story where Matthew tells of the ministry of John the Baptist. In verse 3, Matthew quotes the prophet Isaiah to show that John the Baptist was God’s appointed messenger to prepare for Jesus’ ministry.
MAT 3 1 d74m ἐν…ταῖς ἡμέραις ἐκείναις 1 in those days This is many years after Joseph and his family left Egypt and went to Nazareth. This is probably near the time that Jesus begins his ministry. Alternate translation: “some time later” or “some years later”
MAT 3 2 w7e9 figs-you μετανοεῖτε 1 Repent This is plural in form. John is speaking to the crowds. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-you]])
@@ -171,7 +171,7 @@ MAT 3 16 jh1v figs-activepassive ἀνεῴχθησαν αὐτῷ οἱ οὐρ
MAT 3 16 e3na figs-simile καταβαῖνον ὡσεὶ περιστερὰν 1 coming down like a dove Possible meanings are (1) this is simply a statement that the Spirit was in the form of a **dove** or (2) this is a simile that compares the Spirit coming down upon Jesus gently, the way a **dove** would. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-simile]])
MAT 3 17 m2wk figs-metonymy φωνὴ ἐκ τῶν οὐρανῶν λέγουσα 1 a voice from the heavens saying “Jesus heard a voice from heaven saying.” Here, **voice** refers to God speaking. Alternate translation: “God spoke from heaven saying” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
MAT 3 17 myz8 guidelines-sonofgodprinciples ὁ Υἱός μου 1 my Son This is an important title for Jesus that describes his relationship to God. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples]])
-MAT 4 intro hgw2 0 # Matthew 04 General Notes
## Structure and formatting
Some translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with the poetry in verses 6, 15 and 16, which are words from the Old Testament.
Some translations set quotations from the Old Testament farther to the right on the page than the rest of the text. The ULT does this with the quotation in verse 10.
## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter
### “the kingdom of heaven has come near”
No one knows for use whether the “kingdom of heaven” was present or still coming when Jesus spoke these words. English translations often use the phrase “at hand,” but these words can be difficult to translate. Other versions use the phase “is coming near” and “has come near.”
### “If you are the Son of God”
The reader should not understand these words in verses 3 and 6 to mean that Satan did not know whether Jesus was the Son of God. God had already said that Jesus was his Son ([Matthew 3:17](../../mat/03/17.md)), so Satan knew who Jesus was. He also knew that Jesus could make stones become bread and could throw himself off of high places and not be hurt. He was trying to make Jesus do these things and so disobey God and obey Satan. These words can be translated as “Because you are the Son of God” or “You are the Son of God. Show me what you can do.” (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/satan]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/sonofgod]])
+MAT 4 intro hgw2 0 # Matthew 04 General Notes
## Structure and formatting
Some translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with the poetry in verses 6, 15 and 16, which are words from the Old Testament.
Some translations set quotations from the Old Testament farther to the right on the page than the rest of the text. The ULT does this with the quotation in verse 10.
## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter
### “the kingdom of heaven has come near”
No one knows for use whether the “kingdom of heaven” was present or still coming when Jesus spoke these words. English translations often use the phrase “at hand,” but these words can be difficult to translate. Other versions use the phase “is coming near” and “has come near.”
### “If you are the Son of God”
The reader should not understand these words in verses 3 and 6 to mean that Satan did not know whether Jesus was the Son of God. God had already said that Jesus was his Son ([Matthew 3:17](../../mat/03/17.md)), so Satan knew who Jesus was. He also knew that Jesus could make stones become bread and could throw himself off of high places and not be hurt. He was trying to make Jesus do these things and so disobey God and obey Satan. These words can be translated as “Because you are the Son of God” or “You are the Son of God. Show me what you can do.” (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/satan]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/sonofgod]])
MAT 4 1 k51m 0 General Information: Here Matthew begins a new part of the story in which Jesus spends 40 days in the wilderness, where Satan tempts him. In verse 4, Jesus rebukes Satan with a quotation from Deuteronomy.
MAT 4 1 aq3s figs-activepassive ὁ Ἰησοῦς ἀνήχθη…ὑπὸ τοῦ Πνεύματος 1 Jesus was led up by the Spirit This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: “the Spirit led Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
MAT 4 1 wy4b figs-activepassive πειρασθῆναι ὑπὸ τοῦ διαβόλου 1 to be tempted by the devil This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: “so the devil could tempt Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
@@ -234,7 +234,7 @@ MAT 4 24 i296 figs-activepassive δαιμονιζομένους 1 being possesse
MAT 4 24 p3nf figs-genericnoun σεληνιαζομένους 1 the epileptic This refers to anyone there who had epilepsy, not to a particular **epileptic**. Alternate translation: “those who sometimes have seizures” or “those who sometimes become unconscious and move uncontrollably” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-genericnoun]])
MAT 4 24 qk4c figs-genericnoun καὶ παραλυτικούς 1 and the paralytic This refers to anyone there who was paralyzed, not to a particular **paralytic**. Alternate translation: “and any who are paralyzed” or “and those who can not walk” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-genericnoun]])
MAT 4 25 i9m7 translate-names Δεκαπόλεως 1 the Decapolis This name means “the Ten Towns.” This is the name of a region to the southeast of the Sea of Galilee. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
-MAT 5 intro awz8 0 # Matthew 05 General Notes
## Structure and formatting
Many people call the words in Matthew 5-7 the Sermon on the Mount. This is one long lesson that Jesus taught. Bibles divide this lesson into three chapters, but this can sometimes confuse the reader. If your translation divides the text into sections, be sure that the reader understands that the whole sermon is one large section.
Matthew 5:3-10, known as the Beatitudes or Blessings, has been set apart by being set farther to the right on the page than the rest of the text, with each line beginning with the word “blessed.” This way of placing the words on the page highlights the poetic form of this teaching.
Jesus spoke about many different subjects in this sermon, so you may wish to help the reader by putting an empty line into the text whenever Jesus changed the subject.
## Special concepts in this chapter
### “His disciples”
It is possible to refer to anyone who followed Jesus as a follower or disciple. Jesus selected twelve of his followers to become his closest disciples, “the twelve disciples.” They would later become known as the apostles.
+MAT 5 intro awz8 0 # Matthew 05 General Notes
## Structure and formatting
Many people call the words in Matthew 5-7 the Sermon on the Mount. This is one long lesson that Jesus taught. Bibles divide this lesson into three chapters, but this can sometimes confuse the reader. If your translation divides the text into sections, be sure that the reader understands that the whole sermon is one large section.
Matthew 5:3-10, known as the Beatitudes or Blessings, has been set apart by being set farther to the right on the page than the rest of the text, with each line beginning with the word “blessed.” This way of placing the words on the page highlights the poetic form of this teaching.
Jesus spoke about many different subjects in this sermon, so you may wish to help the reader by putting an empty line into the text whenever Jesus changed the subject.
## Special concepts in this chapter
### “His disciples”
It is possible to refer to anyone who followed Jesus as a follower or disciple. Jesus selected twelve of his followers to become his closest disciples, “the twelve disciples.” They would later become known as the apostles.
MAT 5 1 hz26 0 General Information: In verse 3, Jesus begins to describe the characteristics of people who are blessed.
MAT 5 1 c5rq 0 Connecting Statement: This is the beginning of a new part of the story in which Jesus begins to teach his disciples. This part continues through the end of chapter 7 and is frequently called the Sermon on the Mount.
MAT 5 2 q9mm figs-idiom ἀνοίξας τὸ στόμα αὐτοῦ 1 having opened his mouth This is an idiom. Alternate translation: “when Jesus began to speak” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
@@ -386,7 +386,7 @@ MAT 5 47 ba6e figs-rquestion τί περισσὸν ποιεῖτε? 1 what do y
MAT 5 47 ben5 ἀσπάσησθε 1 you might greet This is a general term for showing a desire for the well-being of the hearer.
MAT 5 47 elw9 figs-rquestion οὐχὶ καὶ οἱ ἐθνικοὶ τὸ αὐτὸ ποιοῦσιν? 1 Do not even the Gentiles do the same thing? This question can be translated as a statement. Alternate translation: “Even the Gentiles do the same thing.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
MAT 5 48 l6pa guidelines-sonofgodprinciples Πατὴρ 1 Father This is an important title for God. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples]])
-MAT 6 intro jrj2 0 # Matthew 06 General Notes
## Structure and formatting
Matthew 6 continues Jesus’ extended teaching known as “The Sermon on the Mount.”
You may wish to set apart the prayer in 6:9-11 by placing it farther to the right on the page than the rest of the text.
Jesus spoke about many different subjects in this sermon, so you may wish to help the reader by putting an empty line into the text whenever Jesus changed the subject.
+MAT 6 intro jrj2 0 # Matthew 06 General Notes
## Structure and formatting
Matthew 6 continues Jesus’ extended teaching known as “The Sermon on the Mount.”
You may wish to set apart the prayer in 6:9-11 by placing it farther to the right on the page than the rest of the text.
Jesus spoke about many different subjects in this sermon, so you may wish to help the reader by putting an empty line into the text whenever Jesus changed the subject.
MAT 6 1 zvn1 figs-you 0 General Information: Jesus is talking to a group of people about what they as individuals should and should not do. All occurrences of “you” and “your” are plural. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-you]])
MAT 6 1 at4q 0 Connecting Statement: Jesus continues to teach his disciples in his Sermon on the Mount, which began in [Matthew 5:3](../05/03.md). In this section, Jesus addresses the “acts of righteousness” of alms, prayer, and fasting.
MAT 6 1 bgc7 figs-explicit ἔμπροσθεν τῶν ἀνθρώπων, πρὸς τὸ θεαθῆναι αὐτοῖς 1 before men to be seen by them It is implied that those who see the person will honor him. Alternate translation: “in front of people to be seen by them so they will give you honor for what you have done” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
@@ -484,7 +484,7 @@ MAT 6 33 ep2c figs-metonymy ζητεῖτε…πρῶτον τὴν βασιλε
MAT 6 33 ak39 figs-activepassive ταῦτα πάντα προστεθήσεται ὑμῖν 1 all these things will be added to you This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: “God will provide all these things for you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
MAT 6 34 qm2a οὖν 1 Therefore “Because of all this”
MAT 6 34 xdg7 figs-personification ἡ…αὔριον μεριμνήσει ἑαυτῆς 1 tomorrow will be anxious for itself Jesus speaks of **tomorrow** as if it were a person who could worry. Jesus means that a person will have enough to worry about when the next day comes. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
-MAT 7 intro bz7e 0 # Matthew 07 General Notes
## Structure and formatting
Jesus spoke about many different subjects in this sermon, so you may wish to help the reader by putting an empty line into the text whenever Jesus changed the subject.
## Special concepts in this chapter
### Matthew 5-7
Many people call the words in Matthew 5-7 the Sermon on the Mount. This is one long lesson that Jesus taught. Bibles divide this lesson into three chapters, but this can sometimes confuse the reader. If your translation divides the text into sections, be sure that the reader understands that the whole sermon is one large section.
### “By their fruits you will know them”
Fruit is a common image in the scriptures. It is used to describe the results of either good or bad actions. In this chapter, good fruit is the result of living as God commands. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/other/fruit]])
+MAT 7 intro bz7e 0 # Matthew 07 General Notes
## Structure and formatting
Jesus spoke about many different subjects in this sermon, so you may wish to help the reader by putting an empty line into the text whenever Jesus changed the subject.
## Special concepts in this chapter
### Matthew 5-7
Many people call the words in Matthew 5-7 the Sermon on the Mount. This is one long lesson that Jesus taught. Bibles divide this lesson into three chapters, but this can sometimes confuse the reader. If your translation divides the text into sections, be sure that the reader understands that the whole sermon is one large section.
### “By their fruits you will know them”
Fruit is a common image in the scriptures. It is used to describe the results of either good or bad actions. In this chapter, good fruit is the result of living as God commands. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/other/fruit]])
MAT 7 1 jav3 figs-you 0 General Information: Jesus is talking to a group of people about what they as individuals should and should not do. The instances of “you” and the commands are plural. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-you]])
MAT 7 1 f4fe 0 Connecting Statement: Jesus continues to teach his disciples in his Sermon on the Mount, which began in [Matthew 5:3](../05/03.md).
MAT 7 1 xk6w figs-explicit μὴ κρίνετε 1 Do not judge It is implied here that **judge** has the strong meaning of “condemn harshly” or “declare guilty.” Alternate translation: “Do not condemn people harshly” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
@@ -563,7 +563,7 @@ MAT 7 27 k4hi ἦν ἡ πτῶσις αὐτῆς μεγάλη 1 its destructi
MAT 7 28 jrh7 writing-endofstory 0 General Information: These verses describe how the people in the crowds reacted to Jesus’ teaching in the Sermon on the Mount. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-endofstory]])
MAT 7 28 hu6z καὶ ἐγένετο, ὅτε 1 And it came about that when This phrase shifts the story from Jesus’ teachings to what happened next. Alternate translation: “And when” or “Now after”
MAT 7 28 b321 ἐξεπλήσσοντο…ἐπὶ τῇ διδαχῇ αὐτοῦ 1 were astonished by his teaching It is clear in 7:29 that they were amazed not just at what Jesus taught but also the way he taught it. Alternate translation: “were amazed by the way he taught”
-MAT 8 intro f33a 0 # Matthew 08 General Notes
## Structure and formatting
This chapter begins a new section.
## Special concepts in this chapter
### Miracles
Jesus performed miracles to show that he could control things that no other people could control. He also showed that it is proper to worship him because he performed miracles. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/authority]])
+MAT 8 intro f33a 0 # Matthew 08 General Notes
## Structure and formatting
This chapter begins a new section.
## Special concepts in this chapter
### Miracles
Jesus performed miracles to show that he could control things that no other people could control. He also showed that it is proper to worship him because he performed miracles. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/authority]])
MAT 8 1 qb1d writing-newevent 0 General Information: This is the beginning of a new part of the story that contains several accounts of Jesus healing people. This theme continues through [Matthew 9:35](../09/35.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]])
MAT 8 1 clf8 καταβάντος δὲ αὐτοῦ ἀπὸ τοῦ ὄρους, ἠκολούθησαν αὐτῷ ὄχλοι πολλοί 1 Now when he had come down from the hill, large crowds followed him “After Jesus came down from the hill, a large crowd followed him.” The crowd may have included both people who had been with him on the mountain and people who had not been with him.
MAT 8 2 vas8 ἰδοὺ 1 behold The word **behold** alerts us to a new person in the story. Your language may have a way of doing this.
@@ -982,7 +982,7 @@ MAT 10 42 lza6 εἰς ὄνομα μαθητοῦ 1 in the name of a disciple
MAT 10 42 wx29 ἀμὴν, λέγω ὑμῖν 1 truly I say to you “I tell you the truth.” This phrase adds emphasis to what Jesus says next.
MAT 10 42 y1ie οὐ μὴ ἀπολέσῃ τὸν μισθὸν αὐτοῦ 1 he may certainly not lose his reward Here, **he** and **his** refer to the one who is giving.
MAT 10 42 d61l οὐ μὴ ἀπολέσῃ 1 he may certainly not lose “God will not deny him.” This has nothing to do with having a possession taken away. It can be stated in positive form. Alternate translation: “God will certainly give him”
-MAT 11 intro puf4 0 # Matthew 11 General Notes
## Structure and formatting
Some translations set quotations from the Old Testament farther to the right on the page than the rest of the text. The ULT does this with the quoted material in 11:10.
Some scholars believe that [Matthew 11:20](../../mat/11/20.md) begins a new stage in the ministry of Christ because of Israel’s rejection of him.
## Special concepts in this chapter
### Hidden revelation
After [Matthew 11:20](../../mat/11/20.md), Jesus begins to reveal information about himself and about the plans of God the Father, while hiding this information from those who reject him ([Matthew 11:25](../../mat/11/25.md)).
## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter
### “The kingdom of heaven is near”
No one knows for sure whether the “kingdom of heaven” was present or still coming when John spoke these words. English translations often use The phrase **at hand**, but these words can be difficult to translate. Other versions use the phrases “is coming near” and “has come near.”
+MAT 11 intro puf4 0 # Matthew 11 General Notes
## Structure and formatting
Some translations set quotations from the Old Testament farther to the right on the page than the rest of the text. The ULT does this with the quoted material in 11:10.
Some scholars believe that [Matthew 11:20](../../mat/11/20.md) begins a new stage in the ministry of Christ because of Israel’s rejection of him.
## Special concepts in this chapter
### Hidden revelation
After [Matthew 11:20](../../mat/11/20.md), Jesus begins to reveal information about himself and about the plans of God the Father, while hiding this information from those who reject him ([Matthew 11:25](../../mat/11/25.md)).
## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter
### “The kingdom of heaven is near”
No one knows for sure whether the “kingdom of heaven” was present or still coming when John spoke these words. English translations often use The phrase **at hand**, but these words can be difficult to translate. Other versions use the phrases “is coming near” and “has come near.”
MAT 11 1 z2y7 writing-newevent 0 General Information: This is the beginning of a new part of the story where Matthew tells of how Jesus responded to disciples of John the Baptist. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]])
MAT 11 1 dr3u καὶ ἐγένετο ὅτε 1 It came about that when This phrase shifts the story from Jesus’ teachings to what happened next. Alternate translation: “And when” or “After”
MAT 11 1 ki7f ἐτέλεσεν…διατάσσων 1 had finished giving orders “had finished teaching” or “had finished commanding”
@@ -1115,7 +1115,7 @@ MAT 11 29 s0tr figs-idiom ταπεινὸς τῇ καρδίᾳ 1 humble in hear
MAT 11 29 i3ls figs-synecdoche εὑρήσετε ἀνάπαυσιν ταῖς ψυχαῖς ὑμῶν 1 you will find rest for your souls Here, **souls** refers to the entire person. Alternate translation: “you will find rest for yourselves” or “you will be able to rest” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
MAT 11 30 ynf1 figs-parallelism ὁ γὰρ ζυγός μου χρηστὸς καὶ τὸ φορτίον μου ἐλαφρόν ἐστιν 1 For my yoke is easy and my burden is light Both of these phrases mean the same thing. Jesus is emphasizing that it is easier to obey him than it is the Jewish law. Alternate translation: “For what I place on you, you will be able to carry because it is light” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]])
MAT 11 30 tc2g τὸ φορτίον μου ἐλαφρόν ἐστιν 1 my burden is light The word **light** here is the opposite of heavy, not the opposite of dark.
-MAT 12 intro y7z6 0 # Matthew 12 General Notes
## Structure and formatting
Some translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with the poetry in 12:18-21, which are words from the Old Testament.
## Special concepts in this chapter
### The Sabbath
This chapter has much to say about how God’s people are to obey the Sabbath. Jesus said that the rules that the Pharisees made up did not help people obey the Sabbath the way God wanted them to. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/sabbath]])
### “Blasphemy against the Spirit”
No one knows for sure what actions people perform or what words they say when they commit this sin. However, they probably insult the Holy Spirit and his work. Part of the Holy Spirit’s work is to make people understand that they are sinners and that they need to have God forgive them. Therefore, anyone who does not try to stop sinning is probably committing blasphemy against the Spirit. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/blasphemy]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/holyspirit]])
## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter
### Brothers and sisters
Most people call those who have the same parents “brother” and “sister” and think of them as the most important people in their lives. Many people also call those with the same grandparents “brother” and “sister.” In this chapter Jesus says that the most important people to him are those who obey his Father in heaven. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/brother]])
+MAT 12 intro y7z6 0 # Matthew 12 General Notes
## Structure and formatting
Some translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with the poetry in 12:18-21, which are words from the Old Testament.
## Special concepts in this chapter
### The Sabbath
This chapter has much to say about how God’s people are to obey the Sabbath. Jesus said that the rules that the Pharisees made up did not help people obey the Sabbath the way God wanted them to. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/sabbath]])
### “Blasphemy against the Spirit”
No one knows for sure what actions people perform or what words they say when they commit this sin. However, they probably insult the Holy Spirit and his work. Part of the Holy Spirit’s work is to make people understand that they are sinners and that they need to have God forgive them. Therefore, anyone who does not try to stop sinning is probably committing blasphemy against the Spirit. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/blasphemy]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/holyspirit]])
## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter
### Brothers and sisters
Most people call those who have the same parents “brother” and “sister” and think of them as the most important people in their lives. Many people also call those with the same grandparents “brother” and “sister.” In this chapter Jesus says that the most important people to him are those who obey his Father in heaven. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/brother]])
MAT 12 1 u1f2 0 General Information: This is the beginning of a new part of the story where Matthew tells of growing opposition to Jesus’ ministry. Here, the Pharisees criticize his disciples for picking grain on the Sabbath.
MAT 12 1 m2n1 ἐν ἐκείνῳ τῷ καιρῷ 1 At that time This marks a new part of the story. Alternate translation: “A little later”
MAT 12 1 tvt9 translate-unknown τῶν σπορίμων 1 the grainfields This is a place to plant grain. If wheat is unknown and “grain” is too general, then you can use “fields of the plant they made bread from.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
@@ -1308,7 +1308,7 @@ MAT 12 49 rxe8 figs-metaphor ἡ μήτηρ μου καὶ οἱ ἀδελφοί
MAT 12 50 e25c ὅστις…ἂν ποιήσῃ 1 whoever may do “anyone who does”
MAT 12 50 mq9r guidelines-sonofgodprinciples τοῦ Πατρός μου 1 of my Father **Father** is an important title for God. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples]])
MAT 12 50 gn31 figs-metaphor αὐτός μου ἀδελφὸς, καὶ ἀδελφὴ, καὶ μήτηρ ἐστίν 1 he is my brother, and sister, and mother This is a metaphor meaning that those who obey God belong to Jesus’ spiritual family. This is more important than belonging to his physical family. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
-MAT 13 intro s3lu 0 # Matthew 13 General Notes
## Structure and formatting
Some translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with the poetry in 13:14-15, which are words from the Old Testament.
This chapter begins a new section. It contains some of Jesus’ parables about the kingdom of heaven.
## Important figures of speech in this chapter
### Metonymy
Jesus often says The word **heaven** when he wants his hearers to think of God, who lives in heaven ([Matthew 13:11](../../mat/13/11.md)).
### Implicit information
Speakers usually do not say things that they think their hearers already understand. When Matthew wrote that Jesus “sat beside the sea” ([Matthew 13:1](../../mat/13/01.md)), he probably expected his hearers to know that Jesus was about to teach the people. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
### Metaphor
Speakers often use words for things that can be touched to speak of things that cannot be touched. Jesus spoke of a bird eating a seed to describe how Satan kept people from understanding Jesus’ message ([Matthew 13:19](../../mat/13/19.md)).
## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter
### Passive voice
Many sentences in this chapter tell that a person had something happen to him without saying who caused that something to happen. For example, “they were scorched” ([Matthew 13:6](../../mat/13/06.md)). You may have to translate the sentence so that it tells the reader who performed the action. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
### Parables
The parables were short stories that Jesus told so that people would easily understand the lesson he was trying to teach them. He also told the stories so that those who did not want to believe in him would not understand the truth ([Matthew 13:11-13](./11.md)).
+MAT 13 intro s3lu 0 # Matthew 13 General Notes
## Structure and formatting
Some translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with the poetry in 13:14-15, which are words from the Old Testament.
This chapter begins a new section. It contains some of Jesus’ parables about the kingdom of heaven.
## Important figures of speech in this chapter
### Metonymy
Jesus often says The word **heaven** when he wants his hearers to think of God, who lives in heaven ([Matthew 13:11](../../mat/13/11.md)).
### Implicit information
Speakers usually do not say things that they think their hearers already understand. When Matthew wrote that Jesus “sat beside the sea” ([Matthew 13:1](../../mat/13/01.md)), he probably expected his hearers to know that Jesus was about to teach the people. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
### Metaphor
Speakers often use words for things that can be touched to speak of things that cannot be touched. Jesus spoke of a bird eating a seed to describe how Satan kept people from understanding Jesus’ message ([Matthew 13:19](../../mat/13/19.md)).
## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter
### Passive voice
Many sentences in this chapter tell that a person had something happen to him without saying who caused that something to happen. For example, “they were scorched” ([Matthew 13:6](../../mat/13/06.md)). You may have to translate the sentence so that it tells the reader who performed the action. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
### Parables
The parables were short stories that Jesus told so that people would easily understand the lesson he was trying to teach them. He also told the stories so that those who did not want to believe in him would not understand the truth ([Matthew 13:11-13](./11.md)).
MAT 13 1 r4xv 0 General Information: This is the beginning of a new part of the story where Jesus begins to teach the crowds, using parables, about the kingdom of heaven.
MAT 13 1 vx5y ἐν τῇ ἡμέρᾳ ἐκείνῃ 1 On that day These events happened on the same day as those in the previous chapter.
MAT 13 1 cy1t ἐξελθὼν…τῆς οἰκίας 1 having gone out of the house It is not mentioned at whose house Jesus was staying.
@@ -1510,7 +1510,7 @@ MAT 13 57 azn4 figs-doublenegatives οὐκ ἔστιν προφήτης ἄτι
MAT 13 57 sq8j τῇ πατρίδι 1 his hometown “his own region”
MAT 13 57 w4x8 ἐν τῇ οἰκίᾳ αὐτοῦ 1 in his own family “in his own home”
MAT 13 58 e2cp οὐκ ἐποίησεν ἐκεῖ δυνάμεις πολλὰς 1 he did not do many miracles there “Jesus did not do many miracles in his own hometown”
-MAT 14 intro g5mc 0 # Matthew 14 General Notes
## Structure and formatting
Verses 1 and 2 continue the account from chapter 13. Verses 3-12 stop the account and speak of things that happened earlier, possibly soon after Satan tempted Jesus (see [Matthew 4:12](../../mat/04/12.md)). Verse 13 continues the account from verse 2. Be sure to have words in verses 3-12 that tell the reader that Matthew has stopped his account to give new information before he continues. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-background]])
## Possible translation difficulties in this chapter
### Passive voice
Many sentences in this chapter tell that a person had something happen to him without saying who caused that something to happen. For example, the writer does not tell who brought John’s head to Herodias’s daughter ([Matthew 14:11](../../mat/14/11.md)). You may have to translate the sentence so that it tells the reader who performed the action. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
+MAT 14 intro g5mc 0 # Matthew 14 General Notes
## Structure and formatting
Verses 1 and 2 continue the account from chapter 13. Verses 3-12 stop the account and speak of things that happened earlier, possibly soon after Satan tempted Jesus (see [Matthew 4:12](../../mat/04/12.md)). Verse 13 continues the account from verse 2. Be sure to have words in verses 3-12 that tell the reader that Matthew has stopped his account to give new information before he continues. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-background]])
## Possible translation difficulties in this chapter
### Passive voice
Many sentences in this chapter tell that a person had something happen to him without saying who caused that something to happen. For example, the writer does not tell who brought John’s head to Herodias’s daughter ([Matthew 14:11](../../mat/14/11.md)). You may have to translate the sentence so that it tells the reader who performed the action. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
MAT 14 1 zl7x figs-events 0 General Information: These verses explain Herod’s reaction when he heard about Jesus. This event happens some time after the events that follow in the narrative. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-events]])
MAT 14 1 q8h5 ἐν ἐκείνῳ τῷ καιρῷ 1 At that time “In those days” or “While Jesus was ministering in Galilee”
MAT 14 1 l9ur ἤκουσεν…τὴν ἀκοὴν Ἰησοῦ 1 heard the news about Jesus “heard reports about Jesus” or “heard about the fame of Jesus”
@@ -1592,7 +1592,7 @@ MAT 14 35 xd7c ἀπέστειλαν 1 sent “sent messages”
MAT 14 36 ql3y καὶ παρεκάλουν αὐτὸν 1 And they were begging him “And the sick people were begging him”
MAT 14 36 x8jv τοῦ ἱματίου αὐτοῦ 1 of his garment “of his robe” or “of what he was wearing”
MAT 14 36 mw8n figs-activepassive διεσώθησαν 1 were healed This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: “became well” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
-MAT 15 intro i9a5 0 # Matthew 15 General Notes
## Structure and formatting
Some translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with the poetry in 15:8-9, which are words from the Old Testament.
## Special concepts in this chapter
### The “traditions of the elders”
The “traditions of the elders” were oral laws that the Jewish religious leaders developed because they wanted to make sure that everyone obeyed the law of Moses. However, they often worked harder to obey these rules than to obey the law of Moses itself. Jesus rebuked the religious leaders for this, and they became angry as a result. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/lawofmoses]])
### Jews and Gentiles
The Jews of Jesus’ time thought that only Jews could please God by the way they lived. Jesus healed a Canaanite Gentile woman’s daughter to show his followers that he would accept both Jews and Gentiles as his people.
## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter
### Sheep
The Bible often speaks of people as if they were sheep because sheep need someone to take care of them. This is because they do not see well and they often go to where other animals can kill them easily. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
+MAT 15 intro i9a5 0 # Matthew 15 General Notes
## Structure and formatting
Some translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with the poetry in 15:8-9, which are words from the Old Testament.
## Special concepts in this chapter
### The “traditions of the elders”
The “traditions of the elders” were oral laws that the Jewish religious leaders developed because they wanted to make sure that everyone obeyed the law of Moses. However, they often worked harder to obey these rules than to obey the law of Moses itself. Jesus rebuked the religious leaders for this, and they became angry as a result. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/lawofmoses]])
### Jews and Gentiles
The Jews of Jesus’ time thought that only Jews could please God by the way they lived. Jesus healed a Canaanite Gentile woman’s daughter to show his followers that he would accept both Jews and Gentiles as his people.
## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter
### Sheep
The Bible often speaks of people as if they were sheep because sheep need someone to take care of them. This is because they do not see well and they often go to where other animals can kill them easily. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
MAT 15 1 q6af writing-newevent 0 General Information: The scene shifts to events that occurred some time after events of the previous chapter. Here Jesus responds to the criticisms of the Pharisees. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]])
MAT 15 2 j1b8 figs-rquestion διὰ τί οἱ μαθηταί σου παραβαίνουσιν τὴν παράδοσιν τῶν πρεσβυτέρων? 1 Why do your disciples violate the traditions of the elders? The Pharisees and scribes use this question to criticize Jesus and his disciples. Alternate translation: “Your disciples do not respect the rules that our ancestors have given us.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
MAT 15 2 yn6l τὴν παράδοσιν τῶν πρεσβυτέρων 1 the traditions of the elders This is not the same as the law of Moses. This refers to later teachings and interpretations of the law given by religious leaders after Moses.
@@ -2062,7 +2062,7 @@ MAT 20 32 f5mw ἐφώνησεν αὐτοὺς 1 called to them “called to t
MAT 20 33 yb39 figs-metaphor ἵνα ἀνοιγῶσιν οἱ ὀφθαλμοὶ ἡμῶν 1 that our eyes may be opened The men speak of becoming able to see as if their **eyes** were to **be opened**. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
MAT 20 33 xdgl figs-ellipsis ἵνα ἀνοιγῶσιν οἱ ὀφθαλμοὶ ἡμῶν 1 that our eyes may be opened Because of Jesus’ previous question, we understand that they were expressing their desire. Alternate translation: “we want you to open our eyes” or “we want to be able to see” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
MAT 20 34 q9iq σπλαγχνισθεὶς 1 having been moved with compassion “having compassion on them” or “feeling compassion for them”
-MAT 21 intro ni1x 0 # Matthew 21 General Notes
## Structure and formatting
Some translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with the poetry in 21:5,16 and 42, which are words from the Old Testament.
## Special concepts in this chapter
### The donkey and the colt
Jesus rode into Jerusalem on an animal. In this way he was like a king who came into a city after he had won an important battle. Also, the kings of Israel in the Old Testament rode on a donkeys. Other kings rode on horses. So Jesus was showing that he was the king of Israel and that he was not like other kings.
Matthew, Mark, Luke, and John all wrote about this event. Matthew and Mark wrote that the disciples brought Jesus a donkey. John wrote that Jesus found a donkey. Luke wrote that they brought him a colt. Only Matthew wrote that there were both a donkey had a colt. No one knows for sure whether Jesus rode the donkey or the colt. It is best to translate each of these accounts as it appears in the ULT without trying to make them all say exactly the same thing. (See: [Matthew 21:1-7](../../mat/21/01.md) and [Mark 11:1-7](../../mrk/11/01.md) and [Luke 19:29-36](../../luk/19/29.md) and [John 12:14-15](../../jhn/12/14.md))
### Hosanna
This is what the people shouted to welcome Jesus into Jerusalem. This word meant “Save us,” but people used it to praise God.
## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter
### “The kingdom of God will be taken away from you”
No one knows for sure what this phrase means. No one knows if Jesus meant that God would someday give the kingdom back or not.
+MAT 21 intro ni1x 0 # Matthew 21 General Notes
## Structure and formatting
Some translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with the poetry in 21:5,16 and 42, which are words from the Old Testament.
## Special concepts in this chapter
### The donkey and the colt
Jesus rode into Jerusalem on an animal. In this way he was like a king who came into a city after he had won an important battle. Also, the kings of Israel in the Old Testament rode on a donkeys. Other kings rode on horses. So Jesus was showing that he was the king of Israel and that he was not like other kings.
Matthew, Mark, Luke, and John all wrote about this event. Matthew and Mark wrote that the disciples brought Jesus a donkey. John wrote that Jesus found a donkey. Luke wrote that they brought him a colt. Only Matthew wrote that there were both a donkey had a colt. No one knows for sure whether Jesus rode the donkey or the colt. It is best to translate each of these accounts as it appears in the ULT without trying to make them all say exactly the same thing. (See: [Matthew 21:1-7](../../mat/21/01.md) and [Mark 11:1-7](../../mrk/11/01.md) and [Luke 19:29-36](../../luk/19/29.md) and [John 12:14-15](../../jhn/12/14.md))
### Hosanna
This is what the people shouted to welcome Jesus into Jerusalem. This word meant “Save us,” but people used it to praise God.
## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter
### “The kingdom of God will be taken away from you”
No one knows for sure what this phrase means. No one knows if Jesus meant that God would someday give the kingdom back or not.
MAT 21 1 f8fs 0 Connecting Statement: This begins the account of Jesus’ entry into Jerusalem. Here he gives his disciples instructions about what they are to do.
MAT 21 1 p3g6 translate-names Βηθφαγὴ 1 Bethphage This is a village near Jerusalem. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
MAT 21 2 wen2 figs-activepassive ὄνον δεδεμένην 1 a donkey tied up You can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “a donkey that someone has tied up” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
@@ -2165,7 +2165,7 @@ MAT 21 44 ghz2 figs-parallelism ἐφ’ ὃν δ’ ἂν πέσῃ, λικμή
MAT 21 44 fonh figs-metaphor ἐφ’ ὃν δ’ ἂν πέσῃ, λικμήσει αὐτόν 1 but on whomever it may fall, it will crush him This is a metaphor that means the Christ will have the final judgment and will destroy everyone who rebels against him. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
MAT 21 45 gh8w 0 Connecting Statement: The religious leaders react to the parable that Jesus told.
MAT 21 45 qpy9 τὰς παραβολὰς αὐτοῦ 1 his parables “Jesus’ parables”
-MAT 22 intro k5ze 0 # Matthew 22 General Notes
## Structure and formatting
Some translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with the poetry in verse 44, which are words from the Old Testament.
## Special concepts in this chapter
### Wedding Feast
In the parable of the wedding feast ([Matthew 22:1-14](./01.md)), Jesus taught that when God offers to save a person, that person needs to accept the offer. Jesus spoke of life with God as a feast that a king prepares for his son, who has just gotten married. In addition, Jesus emphasized that not everyone whom God invites will properly prepare themselves to come to the feast. God will throw these people out from the feast.
## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter
### Implicit information
Speakers usually do not say things that they think their hearers already understand. When the king in the parable said, “My oxen and fattened calves have been killed” ([Matthew 22:4](../../mat/22/04.md)), he assumed that the hearers would understand that those who had killed the animals had also cooked them.
### Paradox
A paradox is a true statement that appears to describe something impossible. To the Jews, the ancestors were the masters of the descendants, but in one psalm David calls one of his descendants “Lord.” Jesus tells the Jewish leaders that this is a paradox, saying, “If David then calls the Christ ‘Lord,’ how is he David’s son?” ([Matthew 22:45](../../mat/22/45.md)).
+MAT 22 intro k5ze 0 # Matthew 22 General Notes
## Structure and formatting
Some translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with the poetry in verse 44, which are words from the Old Testament.
## Special concepts in this chapter
### Wedding Feast
In the parable of the wedding feast ([Matthew 22:1-14](./01.md)), Jesus taught that when God offers to save a person, that person needs to accept the offer. Jesus spoke of life with God as a feast that a king prepares for his son, who has just gotten married. In addition, Jesus emphasized that not everyone whom God invites will properly prepare themselves to come to the feast. God will throw these people out from the feast.
## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter
### Implicit information
Speakers usually do not say things that they think their hearers already understand. When the king in the parable said, “My oxen and fattened calves have been killed” ([Matthew 22:4](../../mat/22/04.md)), he assumed that the hearers would understand that those who had killed the animals had also cooked them.
### Paradox
A paradox is a true statement that appears to describe something impossible. To the Jews, the ancestors were the masters of the descendants, but in one psalm David calls one of his descendants “Lord.” Jesus tells the Jewish leaders that this is a paradox, saying, “If David then calls the Christ ‘Lord,’ how is he David’s son?” ([Matthew 22:45](../../mat/22/45.md)).
MAT 22 1 z8vz figs-parables 0 Connecting Statement: To rebuke the religious leaders and to illustrate their unbelief, Jesus tells a parable about a marriage feast. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parables]])
MAT 22 1 bc6y αὐτοῖς 1 to them “to the people”
MAT 22 2 xps3 ὡμοιώθη ἡ Βασιλεία τῶν Οὐρανῶν 1 The kingdom of the heavens is like This is the beginning of a parable. See how you translated this in [Matthew 13:24](../13/24.md).
@@ -2355,7 +2355,7 @@ MAT 23 38 r6ss ἀφίεται ὑμῖν ὁ οἶκος ὑμῶν ἔρημ
MAT 23 38 ck2z figs-metonymy ὁ οἶκος ὑμῶν 1 your house Possible meanings are (1) “the city of Jerusalem” or (2) “the temple.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
MAT 23 39 i14n λέγω γὰρ ὑμῖν 1 For I say to you This adds emphasis to what Jesus says next.
MAT 23 39 ig61 figs-metonymy εὐλογημένος ὁ ἐρχόμενος ἐν ὀνόματι Κυρίου! 1 Blessed is the one coming in the name of the Lord! Here, **in the name** means “in the power” or “as a representative.” See how you translated this in [Matthew 21:9](../21/09.md). Alternate translation: “He who comes in the power of the Lord is blessed” or “He who comes as the representative of the Lord will be blessed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
-MAT 24 intro h2a2 0 # Matthew 24 General Notes
## Structure and formatting
In this chapter, Jesus begins to prophesy about the future from that time until he returns as king of everything. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/prophet]])
## Special concepts in this chapter
### “The end of the age”
In this chapter, Jesus gives an answer to his disciples when they ask how they will know when he will come again. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-apocalypticwriting]])
### The example of Noah
In the time of Noah, God sent a great flood to punish people for their sins. He warned them many times about this coming flood, but it actually began suddenly. In this chapter, Jesus draws a comparison between that flood and the last days. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/sin]])
## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter
### “Let”
The ULT uses this word to begin several commands of Jesus, such as “let those who are in Judea flee to the mountains” (24:16), “let him who is on the housetop not go down to take anything out of his house” (24:17), and “let him who is in the field not return to take his cloak” (24:18). There are many different ways to form a command. Translators must select the most natural ways in their own languages.
+MAT 24 intro h2a2 0 # Matthew 24 General Notes
## Structure and formatting
In this chapter, Jesus begins to prophesy about the future from that time until he returns as king of everything. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/prophet]])
## Special concepts in this chapter
### “The end of the age”
In this chapter, Jesus gives an answer to his disciples when they ask how they will know when he will come again. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-apocalypticwriting]])
### The example of Noah
In the time of Noah, God sent a great flood to punish people for their sins. He warned them many times about this coming flood, but it actually began suddenly. In this chapter, Jesus draws a comparison between that flood and the last days. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/sin]])
## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter
### “Let”
The ULT uses this word to begin several commands of Jesus, such as “let those who are in Judea flee to the mountains” (24:16), “let him who is on the housetop not go down to take anything out of his house” (24:17), and “let him who is in the field not return to take his cloak” (24:18). There are many different ways to form a command. Translators must select the most natural ways in their own languages.
MAT 24 1 dh7u 0 Connecting Statement: Jesus begins to describe events that will happen before he comes again during the end times.
MAT 24 1 ke79 figs-explicit ἀπὸ τοῦ ἱεροῦ 1 from the temple It is implied that Jesus was not in the **temple** itself. He was in the courtyard around the temple. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
MAT 24 2 mh5y figs-rquestion οὐ βλέπετε ταῦτα πάντα? 1 Do you not see all these things? Jesus uses a question to make the disciples think deeply about what he will tell them. Alternate translation: “Let me tell you something about all these buildings.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
@@ -2455,7 +2455,7 @@ MAT 24 50 bz5k figs-parallelism ἐν ἡμέρᾳ ᾗ οὐ προσδοκᾷ,
MAT 24 51 jj2z figs-idiom διχοτομήσει αὐτὸν 1 he will cut him in pieces This is an idiom that means to make the person suffer terribly. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
MAT 24 51 pm18 τὸ μέρος αὐτοῦ μετὰ τῶν ὑποκριτῶν θήσει 1 will assign his place with the hypocrites “will put him with the hypocrites” or “will send him to the place where hypocrites are sent”
MAT 24 51 rwd5 translate-symaction ἔσται ὁ κλαυθμὸς καὶ ὁ βρυγμὸς τῶν ὀδόντων 1 there will be the weeping and the grinding of the teeth Here, **the grinding of the teeth** is a symbolic act, representing extreme suffering. See how you translated this in [Matthew 8:12](../08/12.md). Alternate translation: “people will weep and grind their teeth because of their suffering” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]])
-MAT 25 intro qe8a 0 # Matthew 25 General Notes
## Structure and formatting
This chapter continues the teaching of the previous chapter.
## Special concepts in this chapter
### The parable of the ten virgins
Jesus told the parable of the ten virgins ([Matthew 25:1-13](./01.md)) to tell his followers to be ready for him to return. His hearers could understand the parable because they knew Jewish wedding customs.
When the Jews arranged marriages, they would plan for the wedding to take place weeks or months later. At the proper time, the young man would go to his bride’s house, where she would be waiting for him. The wedding ceremony would take place, and then the man and his bride would travel to his home, where there would be a feast. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-apocalypticwriting]])
+MAT 25 intro qe8a 0 # Matthew 25 General Notes
## Structure and formatting
This chapter continues the teaching of the previous chapter.
## Special concepts in this chapter
### The parable of the ten virgins
Jesus told the parable of the ten virgins ([Matthew 25:1-13](./01.md)) to tell his followers to be ready for him to return. His hearers could understand the parable because they knew Jewish wedding customs.
When the Jews arranged marriages, they would plan for the wedding to take place weeks or months later. At the proper time, the young man would go to his bride’s house, where she would be waiting for him. The wedding ceremony would take place, and then the man and his bride would travel to his home, where there would be a feast. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-apocalypticwriting]])
MAT 25 1 em28 figs-parables 0 Connecting Statement: Jesus tells a parable about wise and foolish virgins to illustrate that his disciples should be prepared for his return. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parables]])
MAT 25 1 pg5i figs-metonymy ὁμοιωθήσεται ἡ Βασιλεία τῶν Οὐρανῶν 1 the kingdom of the heavens will be like Here, **kingdom of the heavens** refers to God’s rule as king. The phrase **kingdom of the heavens** is used only in Matthew. if possible, use **heavens** in your translation. See how you translated this in [Matthew 13:24](../13/24.md). Alternate translation: “when our God in heaven shows himself to be king, it will be like” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
MAT 25 1 uhj1 λαμπάδας 1 lamps These could have been (1) lamps or (2) torches made by putting cloth around the end of a stick and wetting the cloth with oil.
@@ -2553,7 +2553,7 @@ MAT 25 45 whu5 οὐδὲ ἐμοὶ ἐποιήσατε. 1 you did not do for
MAT 25 46 m6me καὶ ἀπελεύσονται οὗτοι εἰς κόλασιν αἰώνιον 1 These will go away into eternal punishment “The King will send these to a place where they will receive punishment that never ends”
MAT 25 46 nj72 figs-ellipsis οἱ δὲ δίκαιοι εἰς ζωὴν 1 but the righteous into eternal life The understood information can be made clear. Alternate translation: “but the King will send the righteous to the place where they will live forever with God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
MAT 25 46 kq5b figs-nominaladj οἱ…δίκαιοι 1 the righteous This nominative adjective can be stated as an adjective. Alternate translation: “the righteous people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
-MAT 26 intro mtq8 0 # Matthew 26 General Notes
## Structure and formatting
Some translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with the poetry in 26:31, which is words from the Old Testament.
## Special concepts in this chapter
### Sheep
Sheep are a common image used in Scripture to refer to the people of Israel. In [Matthew 26:31](../../mat/26/31.md), however, Jesus used the words “the sheep” to refer to his disciples and to say that they would run away when he was arrested.
### Passover
The Passover festival was when the Jews would celebrate the day God killed the firstborn sons of the Egyptians but “passed over” the Israelites and let them live.
### The eating of the body and blood
[Matthew 26:26-28](./26.md) describes Jesus’ last meal with his followers. At this time, Jesus told them that what they were eating and drinking were his body and his blood. Nearly all Christian churches celebrate “the Lord’s Supper,” the “Eucharist”, or “Holy Communion” to remember this meal.
## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter
### Judas’ kiss for Jesus
[Matthew 26:49](../../mat/26/49.md) describes how Judas kissed Jesus so the soldiers would know whom to arrest. The Jews would kiss each other when they greeted each other.
### “I am able to destroy the temple of God”
Two men accused Jesus of saying that he could destroy the temple in Jerusalem and then rebuild it “in three days” ([Matthew 26:61](../../mat/26/61.md)). They were accusing him of insulting God by claiming that God had given him the authority to destroy the temple and the power to rebuild it. What Jesus actually said was that if the Jewish authorities were to destroy this temple, he would certainly raise it up in three days ([John 2:19](../../jhn/02/19.md)).
+MAT 26 intro mtq8 0 # Matthew 26 General Notes
## Structure and formatting
Some translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with the poetry in 26:31, which is words from the Old Testament.
## Special concepts in this chapter
### Sheep
Sheep are a common image used in Scripture to refer to the people of Israel. In [Matthew 26:31](../../mat/26/31.md), however, Jesus used the words “the sheep” to refer to his disciples and to say that they would run away when he was arrested.
### Passover
The Passover festival was when the Jews would celebrate the day God killed the firstborn sons of the Egyptians but “passed over” the Israelites and let them live.
### The eating of the body and blood
[Matthew 26:26-28](./26.md) describes Jesus’ last meal with his followers. At this time, Jesus told them that what they were eating and drinking were his body and his blood. Nearly all Christian churches celebrate “the Lord’s Supper,” the “Eucharist”, or “Holy Communion” to remember this meal.
## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter
### Judas’ kiss for Jesus
[Matthew 26:49](../../mat/26/49.md) describes how Judas kissed Jesus so the soldiers would know whom to arrest. The Jews would kiss each other when they greeted each other.
### “I am able to destroy the temple of God”
Two men accused Jesus of saying that he could destroy the temple in Jerusalem and then rebuild it “in three days” ([Matthew 26:61](../../mat/26/61.md)). They were accusing him of insulting God by claiming that God had given him the authority to destroy the temple and the power to rebuild it. What Jesus actually said was that if the Jewish authorities were to destroy this temple, he would certainly raise it up in three days ([John 2:19](../../jhn/02/19.md)).
MAT 26 1 t5mz 0 General Information: This is the beginning of a new part of the story that tells of Jesus’ crucifixion, death, and resurrection. Here he tells his disciples how he will suffer and die.
MAT 26 1 i35c καὶ ἐγένετο ὅτε 1 It came about that when “After” or “Then, after.” This phrase shifts the story from Jesus’ teachings to what happened next.
MAT 26 1 xiv4 πάντας τοὺς λόγους τούτους 1 all these words This refers to all that Jesus taught starting in [Matthew 24:3](../24/03.md).
diff --git a/en_tn_42-MRK.tsv b/en_tn_42-MRK.tsv
index 183a199db..8b938ec67 100644
--- a/en_tn_42-MRK.tsv
+++ b/en_tn_42-MRK.tsv
@@ -1,6 +1,6 @@
Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNote
-MRK front intro r2f2 0 # Introduction to the Gospel of Mark
## Part 1: General Introduction
### Outline of the Book of Mark
1. Introduction (1:1-13)
1. The ministry of Jesus in Galilee
- Early ministry (1:14-3:6)
- Jesus becomes more popular among the people (3:7-5:43)
- Moving away from Galilee and then returning (6:1-8:26)
1. Progress toward Jerusalem, repeated times when Jesus predicts his own death; the disciples misunderstand, and Jesus teaches them how difficult it will be to follow him (8:27-10:52)
1. Last days of ministry and preparation for final conflict in Jerusalem (11:1-13:37)
1. The death of Christ and the empty tomb (14:1-16:8)
### What is the Book of Mark about?
The Gospel of Mark is one of four books in the New Testament that describe some of the life of Jesus Christ. The authors of the gospels wrote about different aspects of who Jesus was and what he did. Mark wrote much about how Jesus suffered and died on the cross. He did this to encourage his readers who were being persecuted. Mark also explained Jewish customs and some Aramaic words. This may indicate that Mark expected most of his first readers to be Gentiles.
### How should the title of this book be translated?
Translators may choose to call this book by its traditional title, “The Gospel of Mark,” or “The Gospel according to Mark.” They may also choose a title that may be clearer, such as, “The Good News about Jesus that Mark wrote.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
### Who wrote the Book of Mark?
The book does not give the name of the author. However, since early Christian times, most Christians have thought that the author was Mark. Mark was also known as John Mark. He was a close friend of Peter. Mark may not have witnessed what Jesus said and did. But many scholars think that Mark wrote in his gospel what Peter told him about Jesus.
## Part 2: Important Religious and Cultural Concepts
### What were Jesus’ teaching methods?
The people regarded Jesus as a rabbi. A rabbi is a teacher of God’s law. Jesus taught in similar ways as other religious teachers in Israel. He had students who followed him wherever he went. These students were called disciples. He often told parables. Parables are stories that teach moral lessons. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/lawofmoses]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/disciple]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/parable]])
## Part 3: Important Translation Issues
### What are the Synoptic Gospels?
The Gospels of Matthew, Mark, and Luke are called the Synoptic Gospels because they have many similar passages. The word “synoptic” means to “see together.”
The texts are considered “parallel” when they are the same or almost the same among two or three gospels. When translating parallel passages, translators should use the same wording and make them as similar as possible.
### Why does Jesus refer to himself as the “Son of Man”?
In the gospels, Jesus calls himself the “Son of Man.” It is a reference to Daniel 7:13-14. In this passage there is a person described as a “son of man.” That means the person was someone who looked like a human being. God gave authority to the son of man to rule over the nations forever. And all the people will worship him forever.
Jews of Jesus’ time did not use “Son of Man” as a title for anyone. Therefore, Jesus used it for himself to help them understand who he truly was. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/sonofman]])
Translating the title “Son of Man” can be difficult in many languages. Readers may misunderstand a literal translation. Translators can consider alternatives, such as “The Human One.” It may also be helpful to include a footnote to explain the title.
### Why does Mark frequently use terms indicating short periods of time?
The Gospel of Mark uses the word “immediately” forty-two times. Mark does this to make the events more exciting and vivid. It moves the reader quickly from one event to the next.
### What are the major issues in the text of the Book of Mark?
The following verses are found in older versions of the Bible but are not included in most modern versions. Translators are advised not to include these verses. However, if in the translators’ region, there are older versions of the Bible that include one or more of these verses, the translators can include them. If they are included, they should be put inside square brackets ([]) to indicate that they were probably not original to Mark’s Gospel.
* “If any man has ears to hear, let him hear.” (7:16)
* “where their worm never dies and the fire is never quenched” (9:44)
* “where their worm never dies and the fire is never quenched” (9:46)
* “And the scripture was fulfilled that says, ‘He was counted with the lawless ones’” (15:28)
The following passage in not found in the earliest manuscripts. Most Bibles include this passage, but modern Bibles put it in brackets ([]) or indicate in some way that this passage may not have been original to Mark’s Gospel. Translators are advised to do something similar as the modern versions of the Bible.
* “Early on the first day of the week, after he arose, he appeared first to Mary Magdalene, from whom he had cast out seven demons. She went and told those who were with him, while they were mourning and weeping. They heard that he was alive and that he had been seen by her, but they did not believe. After these things he appeared in a different form to two of them, as they were walking out into the country. They went and told the rest of the disciples, but they did not believe them. Jesus later appeared to the eleven as they were reclining at the table, and he rebuked them for their unbelief and hardness of heart, because they did not believe those who saw him after he rose from the dead. He said to them, ‘Go into all the world, and preach the gospel to the entire creation. He who believes and is baptized will be saved, and he who does not believe will be condemned. These signs will go with those who believe: In my name they will cast out demons. They will speak in new languages. They will pick up snakes with their hands, and if they drink anything deadly, it will not hurt them. They will lay hands on the sick, and they will get well.’ After the Lord had spoken to them, he was taken up into heaven and sat down at the right hand of God. The disciples left and preached everywhere, while the Lord worked with them and confirmed the word by the signs that went with them.” (16:9-20)
(See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants]])
-MRK 1 intro c6ep 0 # Mark 01 General Notes
## Structure and formatting
Some translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with the poetry in 1:2-3, which are words from the Old Testament.
## Special concepts in this chapter
### “You can make me clean”
Leprosy was a disease of the skin that made a person unclean and unable to properly worship God. Jesus is capable of making people physically “clean” or healthy as well as spiritually “clean” or right with God. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/clean]])
### “The kingdom of God is near”
Scholars debate whether the “kingdom of God” was present at this time or is something that is still coming. English translations frequently use the phrase “at hand,” but this can create difficulty for translators. Other versions use the phase “is coming” and “has come near.”
+MRK front intro r2f2 0 # Introduction to the Gospel of Mark
## Part 1: General Introduction
### Outline of the Book of Mark
1. Introduction (1:1-13)
1. The ministry of Jesus in Galilee
- Early ministry (1:14-3:6)
- Jesus becomes more popular among the people (3:7-5:43)
- Moving away from Galilee and then returning (6:1-8:26)
1. Progress toward Jerusalem, repeated times when Jesus predicts his own death; the disciples misunderstand, and Jesus teaches them how difficult it will be to follow him (8:27-10:52)
1. Last days of ministry and preparation for final conflict in Jerusalem (11:1-13:37)
1. The death of Christ and the empty tomb (14:1-16:8)
### What is the Book of Mark about?
The Gospel of Mark is one of four books in the New Testament that describe some of the life of Jesus Christ. The authors of the gospels wrote about different aspects of who Jesus was and what he did. Mark wrote much about how Jesus suffered and died on the cross. He did this to encourage his readers who were being persecuted. Mark also explained Jewish customs and some Aramaic words. This may indicate that Mark expected most of his first readers to be Gentiles.
### How should the title of this book be translated?
Translators may choose to call this book by its traditional title, “The Gospel of Mark,” or “The Gospel according to Mark.” They may also choose a title that may be clearer, such as, “The Good News about Jesus that Mark wrote.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
### Who wrote the Book of Mark?
The book does not give the name of the author. However, since early Christian times, most Christians have thought that the author was Mark. Mark was also known as John Mark. He was a close friend of Peter. Mark may not have witnessed what Jesus said and did. But many scholars think that Mark wrote in his gospel what Peter told him about Jesus.
## Part 2: Important Religious and Cultural Concepts
### What were Jesus’ teaching methods?
The people regarded Jesus as a rabbi. A rabbi is a teacher of God’s law. Jesus taught in similar ways as other religious teachers in Israel. He had students who followed him wherever he went. These students were called disciples. He often told parables. Parables are stories that teach moral lessons. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/lawofmoses]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/disciple]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/parable]])
## Part 3: Important Translation Issues
### What are the Synoptic Gospels?
The Gospels of Matthew, Mark, and Luke are called the Synoptic Gospels because they have many similar passages. The word “synoptic” means to “see together.”
The texts are considered “parallel” when they are the same or almost the same among two or three gospels. When translating parallel passages, translators should use the same wording and make them as similar as possible.
### Why does Jesus refer to himself as the “Son of Man”?
In the gospels, Jesus calls himself the “Son of Man.” It is a reference to Daniel 7:13-14. In this passage there is a person described as a “son of man.” That means the person was someone who looked like a human being. God gave authority to the son of man to rule over the nations forever. And all the people will worship him forever.
Jews of Jesus’ time did not use “Son of Man” as a title for anyone. Therefore, Jesus used it for himself to help them understand who he truly was. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/sonofman]])
Translating the title “Son of Man” can be difficult in many languages. Readers may misunderstand a literal translation. Translators can consider alternatives, such as “The Human One.” It may also be helpful to include a footnote to explain the title.
### Why does Mark frequently use terms indicating short periods of time?
The Gospel of Mark uses the word “immediately” forty-two times. Mark does this to make the events more exciting and vivid. It moves the reader quickly from one event to the next.
### What are the major issues in the text of the Book of Mark?
The following verses are found in older versions of the Bible but are not included in most modern versions. Translators are advised not to include these verses. However, if in the translators’ region, there are older versions of the Bible that include one or more of these verses, the translators can include them. If they are included, they should be put inside square brackets ([]) to indicate that they were probably not original to Mark’s Gospel.
* “If any man has ears to hear, let him hear.” (7:16)
* “where their worm never dies and the fire is never quenched” (9:44)
* “where their worm never dies and the fire is never quenched” (9:46)
* “And the scripture was fulfilled that says, ‘He was counted with the lawless ones’” (15:28)
The following passage in not found in the earliest manuscripts. Most Bibles include this passage, but modern Bibles put it in brackets ([]) or indicate in some way that this passage may not have been original to Mark’s Gospel. Translators are advised to do something similar as the modern versions of the Bible.
* “Early on the first day of the week, after he arose, he appeared first to Mary Magdalene, from whom he had cast out seven demons. She went and told those who were with him, while they were mourning and weeping. They heard that he was alive and that he had been seen by her, but they did not believe. After these things he appeared in a different form to two of them, as they were walking out into the country. They went and told the rest of the disciples, but they did not believe them. Jesus later appeared to the eleven as they were reclining at the table, and he rebuked them for their unbelief and hardness of heart, because they did not believe those who saw him after he rose from the dead. He said to them, ‘Go into all the world, and preach the gospel to the entire creation. He who believes and is baptized will be saved, and he who does not believe will be condemned. These signs will go with those who believe: In my name they will cast out demons. They will speak in new languages. They will pick up snakes with their hands, and if they drink anything deadly, it will not hurt them. They will lay hands on the sick, and they will get well.’ After the Lord had spoken to them, he was taken up into heaven and sat down at the right hand of God. The disciples left and preached everywhere, while the Lord worked with them and confirmed the word by the signs that went with them.” (16:9-20)
(See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants]])
+MRK 1 intro c6ep 0 # Mark 01 General Notes
## Structure and formatting
Some translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with the poetry in 1:2-3, which are words from the Old Testament.
## Special concepts in this chapter
### “You can make me clean”
Leprosy was a disease of the skin that made a person unclean and unable to properly worship God. Jesus is capable of making people physically “clean” or healthy as well as spiritually “clean” or right with God. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/clean]])
### “The kingdom of God is near”
Scholars debate whether the “kingdom of God” was present at this time or is something that is still coming. English translations frequently use the phrase “at hand,” but this can create difficulty for translators. Other versions use the phase “is coming” and “has come near.”
MRK 1 1 s8qp 0 General Information: The book of Mark begins with the prophet Isaiah’s foretelling of the coming of John the Baptist, who baptizes Jesus. The author is Mark, also called John Mark, who is the son of one of the several women named Mary mentioned in the four Gospels. He is also the nephew of Barnabas.
MRK 1 1 i3bc guidelines-sonofgodprinciples Υἱοῦ Θεοῦ 1 Son of God This is an important title for Jesus. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples]])
MRK 1 2 gu7i figs-idiom πρὸ προσώπου σου 1 before your face This is an idiom that means “ahead of you.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
@@ -227,7 +227,7 @@ MRK 3 32 wms6 ζητοῦσίν σε 1 looking for you “are asking for you”
MRK 3 33 qe8c figs-rquestion τίς ἐστιν ἡ μήτηρ μου, καὶ οἱ ἀδελφοί μου? 1 Who are my mother and my brothers? Jesus uses this question to teach the people. Alternate translation: “I will tell you who are really my mother and brothers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
MRK 3 35 dr45 ὃς…ἂν ποιήσῃ…οὗτος…ἐστίν 1 whoever does…that person is “those who do…they are”
MRK 3 35 yr9i figs-metaphor οὗτος ἀδελφός μου καὶ ἀδελφὴ καὶ μήτηρ ἐστίν 1 that person is my brother, and sister, and mother This is a metaphor that means Jesus’ disciples belong to Jesus’ spiritual family. This is more important than belonging to his physical family. Alternate translation: “that person is like a brother, sister, or mother to me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
-MRK 4 intro f5ua 0 # Mark 04 General Notes
## Structure and formatting
Mark 4:3-10 forms one parable. The parable is explained in 4:14-23.
Some translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with the poetry in 4:12, which are words from the Old Testament.
## Special concepts in this chapter
### Parables
The parables were short stories that Jesus told so that people would easily understand the lesson he was trying to teach them. He also told the stories so that those who did not want to believe in him would not understand the truth.
+MRK 4 intro f5ua 0 # Mark 04 General Notes
## Structure and formatting
Mark 4:3-10 forms one parable. The parable is explained in 4:14-23.
Some translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with the poetry in 4:12, which are words from the Old Testament.
## Special concepts in this chapter
### Parables
The parables were short stories that Jesus told so that people would easily understand the lesson he was trying to teach them. He also told the stories so that those who did not want to believe in him would not understand the truth.
MRK 4 1 a6pk figs-parables 0 Connecting Statement: As Jesus taught from a boat at the seaside, he told them the parable of the soils. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parables]])
MRK 4 1 i95e τὴν θάλασσαν 1 the sea This is the Sea of Galilee.
MRK 4 3 vqh3 ἀκούετε! ἰδοὺ…ὁ σπείρων 1 Listen! Behold, the farmer “Pay attention! A farmer”
@@ -488,7 +488,7 @@ MRK 6 56 a3i3 παρεκάλουν αὐτὸν 1 were begged him Possible mean
MRK 6 56 m366 ἅψωνται 1 touch The word **them** refers to the sick.
MRK 6 56 wd2u τοῦ κρασπέδου τοῦ ἱματίου αὐτοῦ 1 the edge of his garment “the hem of his robe” or “the edge of his clothes”
MRK 6 56 ugr3 ὅσοι ἂν 1 as many as “all those who”
-MRK 7 intro vq1j 0 # Mark 07 General Notes
## Structure and formatting
Some translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with the poetry in 7:6-7, which are words from the Old Testament.
## Special concepts in this chapter
### Hand washing
The Pharisees washed many things that were not dirty because they were trying to make God think that they were good. They washed their hands before they ate, even when their hands were not dirty. and even though the law of Moses did not say that they had to do it. Jesus told them that they were wrong and that people make God happy by thinking and doing the right things. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/lawofmoses]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/clean]])
## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter
### “Ephphatha”
This is an Aramaic word. Mark wrote it the way it sounds using Greek letters and then explained what it means. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-transliterate]])
+MRK 7 intro vq1j 0 # Mark 07 General Notes
## Structure and formatting
Some translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with the poetry in 7:6-7, which are words from the Old Testament.
## Special concepts in this chapter
### Hand washing
The Pharisees washed many things that were not dirty because they were trying to make God think that they were good. They washed their hands before they ate, even when their hands were not dirty. and even though the law of Moses did not say that they had to do it. Jesus told them that they were wrong and that people make God happy by thinking and doing the right things. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/lawofmoses]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/clean]])
## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter
### “Ephphatha”
This is an Aramaic word. Mark wrote it the way it sounds using Greek letters and then explained what it means. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-transliterate]])
MRK 7 1 hu3f 0 Connecting Statement: Jesus rebukes the Pharisees and scribes.
MRK 7 1 b9ul συνάγονται πρὸς αὐτὸν 1 gathered around him “gathered around Jesus”
MRK 7 2 b8qw writing-background 0 General Information: In verses 3 and 4, the author gives background information about the Pharisees’ washing traditions in order to show why the Pharisees were bothered that Jesus’ disciples did not wash their hands before eating. This information can be reordered in order to make it easier to understand, as in the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-background]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-versebridge]])
@@ -776,7 +776,7 @@ MRK 9 50 rb7r ἄναλον γένηται 1 becomes unsalty “its salty taste
MRK 9 50 fqb8 figs-rquestion ἐν τίνι αὐτὸ ἀρτύσετε? 1 with what will you season it? This can be written as a statement. Alternate translation: “you cannot make it salty again.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
MRK 9 50 t76n ἀρτύσετε 1 season it “taste salty again”
MRK 9 50 f34y figs-metaphor ἔχετε ἐν ἑαυτοῖς ἅλα 1 Have salt in yourselves Jesus speaks of doing good things for one another as if good things were salt that people possess. Alternate translation: “Do good to each other, like salt adds flavor to food” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
-MRK 10 intro bq25 0 # Mark 10 General Notes
## Structure and formatting
Some translations set quotations from the Old Testament farther to the right on the page than the rest of the text. The ULT does this with the quoted material in 10:7-8.
## Special concepts in this chapter
### Jesus’ teaching about divorce
The Pharisees wanted to find a way to make Jesus say that it is good to break the law of Moses, so they asked him about divorce. Jesus tells how God originally designed marriage to show that the Pharisees taught wrongly about divorce.
## Important figures of speech in this chapter
### Metaphor
Metaphors are pictures of visible objects that speakers use to explain invisible truths. When Jesus spoke of “the cup which I will drink,” he was speaking of the pain he would suffer on the cross as if it were a bitter, poisonous liquid in a cup.
## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter
### Paradox
A paradox is a true statement that appears to describe something impossible. Jesus uses a paradox when he says, “Whoever wishes to become great among you must be your servant” ([Mark 10:43](../../mrk/10/43.md)).
+MRK 10 intro bq25 0 # Mark 10 General Notes
## Structure and formatting
Some translations set quotations from the Old Testament farther to the right on the page than the rest of the text. The ULT does this with the quoted material in 10:7-8.
## Special concepts in this chapter
### Jesus’ teaching about divorce
The Pharisees wanted to find a way to make Jesus say that it is good to break the law of Moses, so they asked him about divorce. Jesus tells how God originally designed marriage to show that the Pharisees taught wrongly about divorce.
## Important figures of speech in this chapter
### Metaphor
Metaphors are pictures of visible objects that speakers use to explain invisible truths. When Jesus spoke of “the cup which I will drink,” he was speaking of the pain he would suffer on the cross as if it were a bitter, poisonous liquid in a cup.
## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter
### Paradox
A paradox is a true statement that appears to describe something impossible. Jesus uses a paradox when he says, “Whoever wishes to become great among you must be your servant” ([Mark 10:43](../../mrk/10/43.md)).
MRK 10 1 vf86 0 Connecting Statement: After Jesus and his disciples leave Capernaum, Jesus reminds the Pharisees, as well as his disciples, what God really expects in marriage and divorce.
MRK 10 1 qq93 figs-explicit ἐκεῖθεν ἀναστὰς 1 Jesus left that place Jesus’ disciples were traveling with him. They were leaving Capernaum. Alternate translation: “Jesus and his disciples left Capernaum” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
MRK 10 1 j5wa καὶ πέραν τοῦ Ἰορδάνου 1 and to the area beyond the Jordan River “and to the land on the other side of the Jordan River” or “and to the area east of the Jordan River”
@@ -890,7 +890,7 @@ MRK 10 51 i5an ἀποκριθεὶς αὐτῷ 1 answered him “answered the
MRK 10 51 dap1 ἀναβλέψω 1 to receive my sight “to be able to see”
MRK 10 52 s5d2 figs-explicit ἡ πίστις σου σέσωκέν σε 1 Your faith has healed you This phrase is written this way to place emphasis on the man’s faith. Jesus heals the man because he believes that Jesus can heal him. This can be made explicit. Alternate translation: “I am healing you because you believed in me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
MRK 10 52 ub7w ἠκολούθει αὐτῷ 1 he followed him “he followed Jesus”
-MRK 11 intro xg3t 0 # Mark 11 General Notes
## Structure and formatting
Some translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with the poetry in 11:9-10, 17, which are words from the Old Testament.
## Special concepts in this chapter
### The donkey and the colt
Jesus rode into Jerusalem on an animal. In this way he was like a king who came into a city after he had won an important battle. Also, the kings of Israel in the Old Testament rode on a donkeys. Other kings rode on horses. So Jesus was showing that he was the king of Israel and that he was not like other kings.
Matthew, Mark, Luke, and John all wrote about this event. Matthew and Mark wrote that the disciples brought Jesus a donkey. John wrote that Jesus found a donkey. Luke wrote that they brought him a colt. Only Matthew wrote that there were both a donkey had a colt. No one knows for sure whether Jesus rode the donkey or the colt. It is best to translate each of these accounts as it appears in the ULT without trying to make them all say exactly the same thing. (See: [Matthew 21:1-7](../../mat/21/01.md) and [Mark 11:1-7](../../mrk/11/01.md) and [Luke 19:29-36](../../luk/19/29.md) and [John 12:14-15](../../jhn/12/14.md))
+MRK 11 intro xg3t 0 # Mark 11 General Notes
## Structure and formatting
Some translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with the poetry in 11:9-10, 17, which are words from the Old Testament.
## Special concepts in this chapter
### The donkey and the colt
Jesus rode into Jerusalem on an animal. In this way he was like a king who came into a city after he had won an important battle. Also, the kings of Israel in the Old Testament rode on a donkeys. Other kings rode on horses. So Jesus was showing that he was the king of Israel and that he was not like other kings.
Matthew, Mark, Luke, and John all wrote about this event. Matthew and Mark wrote that the disciples brought Jesus a donkey. John wrote that Jesus found a donkey. Luke wrote that they brought him a colt. Only Matthew wrote that there were both a donkey had a colt. No one knows for sure whether Jesus rode the donkey or the colt. It is best to translate each of these accounts as it appears in the ULT without trying to make them all say exactly the same thing. (See: [Matthew 21:1-7](../../mat/21/01.md) and [Mark 11:1-7](../../mrk/11/01.md) and [Luke 19:29-36](../../luk/19/29.md) and [John 12:14-15](../../jhn/12/14.md))
MRK 11 1 ch4j καὶ ὅτε ἐγγίζουσιν εἰς Ἱεροσόλυμα, εἰς Βηθφαγὴ καὶ Βηθανίαν πρὸς τὸ Ὄρος τῶν Ἐλαιῶν 1 Now as they came to Jerusalem…Bethphage and Bethany, at the Mount of Olives “When Jesus and his disciples came near to Jerusalem, they came to Bethphage and Bethany near the Mount of Olives” They have come to Bethphage and Bethany in the vicinity of Jerusalem.
MRK 11 1 g1fy translate-names Βηθφαγὴ 1 Bethphage This is the name of a village. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
MRK 11 2 bi22 τὴν κατέναντι ὑμῶν 1 opposite us “ahead of us”
@@ -970,7 +970,7 @@ MRK 11 32 v2gs ἐξ ἀνθρώπων 1 From men “From people”
MRK 11 32 b5qb figs-explicit ἀλλὰ εἴπωμεν, ἐξ ἀνθρώπων…ἦν. 1 But if we say, ‘From men,’…. The religious leaders imply that they will suffer from the people if they give this answer. Alternate translation: “But if we say, ‘From men,’ that would not be good.” or “But we do not want to say that it was from men.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
MRK 11 32 z998 figs-explicit ἐφοβοῦντο τὸν ὄχλον 1 They were afraid of the people The author, Mark, explains why the religious leaders did not want to say that John’s baptism was from men. This can be stated clearly. “They said this to each other because they were afraid of the people” or “They did not want to say that John’s baptism was from men because they were afraid of the people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
MRK 11 33 us4a figs-ellipsis οὐκ οἴδαμεν 1 We do not know This refers to the baptism of John. This understood information may be supplied. Alternate translation: “We do not know where the baptism of John came from” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
-MRK 12 intro ne55 0 # Mark 12 General Notes
## Structure and formatting
Some translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with the poetry in 12:10-11, 36, which are words from the Old Testament.
## Important figures of speech in this chapter
### Hypothetical Situations
Hypothetical situations are situations that have not actually happened. People describe these situations so they learn what their hearers think is good and bad or right and wrong. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hypo]])
+MRK 12 intro ne55 0 # Mark 12 General Notes
## Structure and formatting
Some translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with the poetry in 12:10-11, 36, which are words from the Old Testament.
## Important figures of speech in this chapter
### Hypothetical Situations
Hypothetical situations are situations that have not actually happened. People describe these situations so they learn what their hearers think is good and bad or right and wrong. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hypo]])
MRK 12 1 w2hb figs-parables 0 Connecting Statement: Jesus speaks this parable against the chief priests, the scribes, and the elders. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parables]])
MRK 12 1 qa93 καὶ ἤρξατο αὐτοῖς ἐν παραβολαῖς λαλεῖν 1 Then Jesus began to speak to them in parables The word **them** here refers to the chief priests, the scribes, and the elders to whom Jesus had been talking in the previous chapter.
MRK 12 1 qap8 περιέθηκεν φραγμὸν 1 put a hedge around it He put a barrier around the vineyard. It could have been a row of shrubs, a fence, or a stone wall.
@@ -1087,7 +1087,7 @@ MRK 12 43 n8z5 πάντων…τῶν βαλλόντων εἰς 1 all of them
MRK 12 44 ui9a τοῦ περισσεύοντος 1 abundance much wealth, many valuable things
MRK 12 44 l4tp τῆς ὑστερήσεως αὐτῆς 1 her poverty “lack” or “the little she had”
MRK 12 44 p3as τὸν βίον αὐτῆς 1 she had to live on “to survive on”
-MRK 13 intro ti7d 0 # Mark 13 General Notes
## Structure and formatting
Some translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with the poetry in 13:24-25, which are words from the Old Testament.
## Special concepts in this chapter
### The return of Christ
Jesus said much about what would happen before he returned ([Mark 13:6-37](./06.md)). He told his followers that bad things would happen to the world and bad things would happen to them before he returned, but they needed to be ready for him to return at any time.
+MRK 13 intro ti7d 0 # Mark 13 General Notes
## Structure and formatting
Some translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with the poetry in 13:24-25, which are words from the Old Testament.
## Special concepts in this chapter
### The return of Christ
Jesus said much about what would happen before he returned ([Mark 13:6-37](./06.md)). He told his followers that bad things would happen to the world and bad things would happen to them before he returned, but they needed to be ready for him to return at any time.
MRK 13 1 rrv1 0 General Information: As they leave the temple area, Jesus tells his disciples what will happen in the future to the wonderful temple that Herod the Great has built.
MRK 13 1 ql81 figs-explicit ποταποὶ λίθοι καὶ ποταπαὶ οἰκοδομαί 1 What wonderful stones and wonderful buildings The “stones” refer to the stones that the buildings were built with. Alternate translation: “the wonderful buildings and the wonderful stones that they are made of” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
MRK 13 2 rez6 figs-rquestion βλέπεις ταύτας τὰς μεγάλας οἰκοδομάς? οὐ μὴ…λίθος 1 Do you see these great buildings? Not one stone This question is used to draw attention to the buildings. This can be written as a statement. Alternate translation: “Look at these great buildings! Not one stone” or “You see these great buildings now, but not one stone” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
@@ -1183,7 +1183,7 @@ MRK 13 34 a8ku ἑκάστῳ τὸ ἔργον αὐτοῦ 1 each one over hi
MRK 13 35 z7wi ἢ ὀψὲ 1 whether in the evening “he could return in the evening”
MRK 13 35 s8j9 ἀλεκτοροφωνίας 1 when the rooster crows The rooster is a bird that “crows” very early in the morning by making a loud call.
MRK 13 36 mh8t figs-metaphor εὕρῃ ὑμᾶς καθεύδοντας 1 he might find you sleeping Here Jesus speaks of not being ready as **sleeping**. Alternate translation: “find you not ready for his return” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
-MRK 14 intro uk36 0 # Mark 14 General Notes
## Structure and formatting
Some translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with the poetry in 14:27, 62, which are words from the Old Testament.
## Special concepts in this chapter
### The eating of the body and blood
[Mark 14:22-25](./22.md) describes Jesus’ last meal with his followers. At this time, Jesus told them that what they were eating and drinking were his body and his blood. Nearly all Christian churches celebrate “the Lord’s Supper,” the “Eucharist”, or “Holy Communion” to remember this meal.
## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter
### Abba, Father
“Abba” is an Aramaic word that the Jews used to speak to their fathers. Mark writes it as it sounds and then translates it. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-transliterate]])
### “Son of Man”
Jesus refers to himself as the “Son of Man” in this chapter ([Mark 14:20](../../mrk/14/20.md)). Your language may not allow people to speak of themselves as if they were speaking about someone else. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/sonofman]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]])
+MRK 14 intro uk36 0 # Mark 14 General Notes
## Structure and formatting
Some translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with the poetry in 14:27, 62, which are words from the Old Testament.
## Special concepts in this chapter
### The eating of the body and blood
[Mark 14:22-25](./22.md) describes Jesus’ last meal with his followers. At this time, Jesus told them that what they were eating and drinking were his body and his blood. Nearly all Christian churches celebrate “the Lord’s Supper,” the “Eucharist”, or “Holy Communion” to remember this meal.
## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter
### Abba, Father
“Abba” is an Aramaic word that the Jews used to speak to their fathers. Mark writes it as it sounds and then translates it. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-transliterate]])
### “Son of Man”
Jesus refers to himself as the “Son of Man” in this chapter ([Mark 14:20](../../mrk/14/20.md)). Your language may not allow people to speak of themselves as if they were speaking about someone else. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/sonofman]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]])
MRK 14 1 hwb4 0 Connecting Statement: Just two days before the Passover, the chief priests and scribes are secretly plotting to kill Jesus.
MRK 14 1 gd33 ἐν δόλῳ 1 by stealth without people noticing
MRK 14 2 em4q ἔλεγον γάρ 1 For they were saying The word **they** refers to the chief priests and the scribes.
diff --git a/en_tn_43-LUK.tsv b/en_tn_43-LUK.tsv
index 395d50241..60605371b 100644
--- a/en_tn_43-LUK.tsv
+++ b/en_tn_43-LUK.tsv
@@ -1,5 +1,5 @@
Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNote
-LUK front intro uk55 0 # Introduction to the Gospel of Luke
## Part 1: General Introduction
### Outline of the Book of Luke
1. Dedication to Theophilus (1:1–4)
2. Prologue
* The birth of John the Baptist (1:5–80)
* The birth and youth of Jesus (2:1–51)
* The ministry of John the Baptist (3:1–20)
* The baptism, genealogy, and temptation of Jesus (3:21–4:13)
3. The teaching and healing ministry of Jesus in Galilee (4:14–9:50)
4. Jesus teaches along his journey to Jerusalem
* Judgment by God, and people’s judgments about Jesus (9:51–13:21)
* Who will be part of the kingdom of God (13:22–17:10)
* Responding to Jesus by welcoming or rejecting him (17:11–19:27)
5. Jesus in Jerusalem
* Jesus’ entry into Jerusalem (19:28–44)
* Jesus teaches in the temple: conflict over his identity and authority (19:45–21:38)
* Jesus’ death, burial, and resurrection (22:1–24:53)
### What is the Gospel of Luke about?
The Gospel of Luke is one of four books in the New Testament that describe the life and teachings of Jesus Christ. These books are called “gospels,” which means “good news.” Their authors wrote about different aspects of who Jesus was and what he did. Luke wrote his gospel for a person named Theophilus and dedicated it to him. Luke wrote an accurate description of the life and teachings of Jesus so that Theophilus would be certain that what he had been taught about Jesus was true. However, Luke expected that what he wrote would encourage all followers of Jesus.
### How should the title of this book be translated?
Translators may choose to call this book by its traditional title, “The Gospel of Luke” or “The Gospel according to Luke.” Or they may choose a different title, such as “The Good News about Jesus that Luke Wrote.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
### Who wrote the Book of Luke?
This book does not give the name of its author. However, the same person who wrote this book also wrote the Book of Acts, which is also dedicated to Theophilus. In parts of the book of Acts, the author uses the word “we.” This indicates that the author traveled with Paul. Most scholars think that Luke was this person traveling with Paul. Therefore, since early Christian times, most Christians have recognized Luke as the author of both the Gospel of Luke and the book of Acts.
Luke was a medical doctor. His way of writing shows that he was an educated man. He was probably a Gentile. Luke himself probably did not witness what Jesus said and did. But he tells Theophilus in his dedication that he talked to many people who did.
## Part 2: Important Religious and Cultural Concepts
### The kingdom of God
“The kingdom of God” is a major concept in the Gospel of Luke. It is very rich in meaning. It includes the idea of eternal life in the presence of God, but it also includes the idea of what the earth will be like in the future when God rules everything, and the idea of life on earth right now, when and where God’s wishes are carried out fully. The unifying concept behind all of these ideas is that of God ruling and of people embracing God’s rule over their lives. Wherever the expression “the kingdom of God” occurs, translation notes will suggest communicating the idea behind the abstract noun “kingdom” with some phrase that uses the verb “rule.” UST models this approach consistently. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
### Why does Luke write so much about the final week of Jesus’ life?
Luke wrote much about Jesus’ final week. He wanted his readers to think deeply about Jesus’ final week and his death on the cross. He wanted people to understand that Jesus willingly died on the cross so that God could forgive them for sinning against him. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/sin]])
### What are the roles of women in the Gospel of Luke?
Luke described women in a very positive way in his gospel. For example, he often showed women being more faithful to God than most men. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/faithful]])
## Part 3: Important Translation Issues
### What are the Synoptic Gospels?
The Gospels of Matthew, Mark, and Luke are called the Synoptic Gospels because they tell the story of many of the same events. The word “synoptic” means to “see together.”
Passages are considered “parallel” when they are the same or almost the same among two or three gospels. When translating parallel passages, translators should use the same wording and make them as similar as possible.
### Why does Jesus refer to himself as the “Son of Man”?
In the gospels, Jesus calls himself the “Son of Man.” This is a reference to Daniel [7:13–14](../dan/07/13.md). In that passage, there is a person who is described as like a “son of man.” That means that the person was someone who looked like a human being. God gave authority to this “son of man” to rule over the nations forever. All people will worship him forever.
Jews of Jesus’ time did not use “Son of Man” as a title for anyone. But Jesus used it for himself to help them understand who he truly was. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/sonofman]])
Translating the title “Son of Man” can be difficult in many languages. Readers may misunderstand a literal translation. Translators can consider alternatives, such as “The Human One.” It may also be helpful to include a footnote to explain the title.
### Major issues in the text of the Book of Luke
ULT follows the readings of the most accurate ancient manuscripts of the Bible. However, there may already be older versions of the Bible in the translators’ regions that follow the readings of other manuscripts. In the most significant cases, the General Notes to the chapters in which these differences occur will discuss them and recommend approaches. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants]])
+LUK front intro uk55 0 # Introduction to the Gospel of Luke
## Part 1: General Introduction
### Outline of the Book of Luke
1. Dedication to Theophilus (1:1–4)
2. Prologue
* The birth of John the Baptist (1:5–80)
* The birth and youth of Jesus (2:1–51)
* The ministry of John the Baptist (3:1–20)
* The baptism, genealogy, and temptation of Jesus (3:21–4:13)
3. The teaching and healing ministry of Jesus in Galilee (4:14–9:50)
4. Jesus teaches along his journey to Jerusalem
* Judgment by God, and people’s judgments about Jesus (9:51–13:21)
* Who will be part of the kingdom of God (13:22–17:10)
* Responding to Jesus by welcoming or rejecting him (17:11–19:27)
5. Jesus in Jerusalem
* Jesus’ entry into Jerusalem (19:28–44)
* Jesus teaches in the temple: conflict over his identity and authority (19:45–21:38)
* Jesus’ death, burial, and resurrection (22:1–24:53)
### What is the Gospel of Luke about?
The Gospel of Luke is one of four books in the New Testament that describe the life and teachings of Jesus Christ. These books are called “gospels,” which means “good news.” Their authors wrote about different aspects of who Jesus was and what he did. Luke wrote his gospel for a person named Theophilus and dedicated it to him. Luke wrote an accurate description of the life and teachings of Jesus so that Theophilus would be certain that what he had been taught about Jesus was true. However, Luke expected that what he wrote would encourage all followers of Jesus.
### How should the title of this book be translated?
Translators may choose to call this book by its traditional title, “The Gospel of Luke” or “The Gospel according to Luke.” Or they may choose a different title, such as “The Good News about Jesus that Luke Wrote.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
### Who wrote the Book of Luke?
This book does not give the name of its author. However, the same person who wrote this book also wrote the Book of Acts, which is also dedicated to Theophilus. In parts of the book of Acts, the author uses the word “we.” This indicates that the author traveled with Paul. Most scholars think that Luke was this person traveling with Paul. Therefore, since early Christian times, most Christians have recognized Luke as the author of both the Gospel of Luke and the book of Acts.
Luke was a medical doctor. His way of writing shows that he was an educated man. He was probably a Gentile. Luke himself probably did not witness what Jesus said and did. But he tells Theophilus in his dedication that he talked to many people who did.
## Part 2: Important Religious and Cultural Concepts
### The kingdom of God
“The kingdom of God” is a major concept in the Gospel of Luke. It is very rich in meaning. It includes the idea of eternal life in the presence of God, but it also includes the idea of what the earth will be like in the future when God rules everything, and the idea of life on earth right now, when and where God’s wishes are carried out fully. The unifying concept behind all of these ideas is that of God ruling and of people embracing God’s rule over their lives. Wherever the expression “the kingdom of God” occurs, translation notes will suggest communicating the idea behind the abstract noun “kingdom” with some phrase that uses the verb “rule.” UST models this approach consistently. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
### Why does Luke write so much about the final week of Jesus’ life?
Luke wrote much about Jesus’ final week. He wanted his readers to think deeply about Jesus’ final week and his death on the cross. He wanted people to understand that Jesus willingly died on the cross so that God could forgive them for sinning against him. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/sin]])
### What are the roles of women in the Gospel of Luke?
Luke described women in a very positive way in his gospel. For example, he often showed women being more faithful to God than most men. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/faithful]])
## Part 3: Important Translation Issues
### What are the Synoptic Gospels?
The Gospels of Matthew, Mark, and Luke are called the Synoptic Gospels because they tell the story of many of the same events. The word “synoptic” means to “see together.”
Passages are considered “parallel” when they are the same or almost the same among two or three gospels. When translating parallel passages, translators should use the same wording and make them as similar as possible.
### Why does Jesus refer to himself as the “Son of Man”?
In the gospels, Jesus calls himself the “Son of Man.” This is a reference to Daniel [7:13–14](../dan/07/13.md). In that passage, there is a person who is described as like a “son of man.” That means that the person was someone who looked like a human being. God gave authority to this “son of man” to rule over the nations forever. All people will worship him forever.
Jews of Jesus’ time did not use “Son of Man” as a title for anyone. But Jesus used it for himself to help them understand who he truly was. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/sonofman]])
Translating the title “Son of Man” can be difficult in many languages. Readers may misunderstand a literal translation. Translators can consider alternatives, such as “The Human One.” It may also be helpful to include a footnote to explain the title.
### Major issues in the text of the Book of Luke
ULT follows the readings of the most accurate ancient manuscripts of the Bible. However, there may already be older versions of the Bible in the translators’ regions that follow the readings of other manuscripts. In the most significant cases, the General Notes to the chapters in which these differences occur will discuss them and recommend approaches. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants]])
LUK 1 intro f1b5 0 # Luke 01 General Notes
## Structure and formatting
1. Dedication to Theophilus (1:1–4)
2. The angel Gabriel announces to Zechariah that his wife Elizabeth is going to bear a son, John the Baptist (1:5–25)
3. The angel Gabriel announces to Mary that she is going to become the mother of Jesus (1:26–38)
4. Mary goes to visit Elizabeth (1:39–56)
5. John the Baptist is born (1:57–80)
Some translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. ULT does this with the poetry in Mary’s song about becoming the mother of Jesus in 1:46–55 and Zechariah’s song about the birth of his son John the Baptist in 1:68–79.
## Special concepts in this chapter
### “He will be called John”
Most people in the ancient Near East would give a child the same name as someone in their families. People were surprised that Elizabeth and Zechariah named their son John because there was no one else in their family with that name.
LUK 1 1 qhd9 figs-activepassive περὶ τῶν πεπληροφορημένων ἐν ἡμῖν πραγμάτων 1 concerning the things that have been fulfilled among us If it would be clearer in your language, you could say this with an active form. Alternate translation: “about those things that have happened among us” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
LUK 1 1 hyp6 figs-exclusive ἐν ἡμῖν 1 among us Luke dedicates this book to a man named Theophilus. It is no longer known exactly who he was. But since Luke says in [1:4](../01/04.md) that he wants Theophilus to know that the things he has been taught are reliable, it appears that he was a follower of Jesus. So here the word **us** would include him. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
diff --git a/en_tn_44-JHN.tsv b/en_tn_44-JHN.tsv
index 999abc248..2a7a8fb92 100644
--- a/en_tn_44-JHN.tsv
+++ b/en_tn_44-JHN.tsv
@@ -1,6 +1,6 @@
Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNote
-JHN front intro t6za 0 # Introduction to the Gospel of John
## Part 1: General Introduction
### Outline of the Gospel of John
1. Introduction about who Jesus is (1:1-18)
1. Jesus is baptized, and he chooses twelve disciples (1:19-51)
1. Jesus preaches, teaches, and heals people (2-11)
1. The seven days before Jesus’ death (12-19)
- Mary anoints the feet of Jesus (12:1-11)
- Jesus rides a donkey into Jerusalem (12:12-19)
- Some Greek men want to see Jesus (12:20-36)
- The Jewish leaders reject Jesus (12:37-50)
- Jesus teaches his disciples (13-17)
- Jesus is arrested and undergoes trial (18:1-19:15)
- Jesus is crucified and buried (19:16-42)
1. Jesus rises from the dead (20:1-29)
1. John says why he wrote his gospel (20:30-31)
1. Jesus meets with the disciples (21)
### What is the Gospel of John about?
The Gospel of John is one of four books in the New Testament that describe some of the life of Jesus Christ. The authors of the gospels wrote about different aspects of who Jesus was and what he did. John said that he wrote his gospel “so that people might believe that Jesus is the Christ, the Son of the living God” (20:31).
John’s Gospel is very different from the other three Gospels. John does not include some of the teachings and events that the other writers included in their gospels. Also, John wrote about some teachings and events that are not in the other gospels.
John wrote much about the signs Jesus did to prove that what Jesus said about himself was true. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/sign]])
### How should the title of this book be translated?
Translators may choose to call this book by its traditional title, “The Gospel of John” or “The Gospel According to John.” Or they may choose a title that may be clearer, such as, “The Good News About Jesus That John Wrote.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
### Who wrote the Gospel of John?
This book does not give the name of the author. However, since early Christian times, most Christians have thought that the Apostle John was the author.
## Part 2: Important Religious and Cultural Concepts
### Why does John write so much about the final week of Jesus’ life?
John wrote much about Jesus’ final week. He wanted his readers to think deeply about Jesus’ final week and his death on the cross. He wanted people to understand that Jesus willingly died on the cross so that God could forgive them for sinning against him. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/sin]])
## Part 3: Important Translation Issues
### What do the words “remain,” “reside,” and “abide” mean in the Gospel of John?
John often used the words “remain,” “reside”, and “abide” as metaphors. John spoke of a believer becoming more faithful to Jesus and knowing Jesus better as if Jesus’ word “remained” in the believer. Also, John spoke of someone being spiritually joined to someone else as if the person “remained” in the other person. Christians are said to “remain” in Christ and in God. The Father is said to “remain” in the Son, and the Son is said to “remain” in the Father. The Son is said to “remain” in believers. The Holy Spirit is also said to “remain” in the believers.
Many translators will find it impossible to represent these ideas in their languages in exactly the same way. For example, Jesus intended to express the idea of the Christian being spiritually together with him when he said, “He who eats my flesh and drinks my blood remains in me, and I in him” (John 6:56). The UST uses the idea of “will be joined to me, and I will be joined to him.” But translators may have to find other ways of expressing the idea.
In the passage, “If my words remain in you” (John 15:7), the UST expresses this idea as, “If you live by my message.” Translators may find it possible to use this translation as a model.
### What are the major issues in the text of the Gospel of John?
The following verses found in older versions of the Bible but are not included in most modern versions. Translators are advised not to translate these verses. However, if in the translators’ region, there are older versions of the Bible that include these verses, the translators can include them. If they are translated, they should be put inside square brackets ([]) to indicate that they were probably not original to John’s Gospel.
* “waiting for the moving of the water. For an angel of the Lord occasionally went down into the pool and stirred the water and whoever went first after the stirring of the water, was made well from the disease they had.” (5:3-4)
* “going through the midst of them, and so passed by” (8:59)
The following passage is included in most older and modern versions of the Bible. But it is not in the earliest copies of the Bible. Translators are advised to translate this passage. It should be put inside of square brackets ([]) to indicate that it may not have been original to John’s Gospel.
* The story of the adulterous woman (7:53–8:11)
(See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants]])
-JHN 1 intro k29b 0 # John 01 General Notes
## Structure and formatting
Some translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with the poetry in 1:23, which are words from the Old Testament.
## Special concepts in this chapter
### “The Word”
John uses the phrase “the Word” to refer to Jesus ([John 1:1, 14](./01.md)). John is saying that God’s most important message to all people is actually Jesus, a person with a physical body. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/wordofgod]])
### Light and darkness
The Bible often speaks of unrighteous people, people who do not do what pleases God, as if they were walking around in darkness. It speaks of light as if it were what enables those sinful people to become righteous, to understand what they are doing wrong and begin to obey God. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/righteous]])
### “Children of God”
When people believes in Jesus, they go from being “children of wrath” to “children of God.” They are adopted into the “family of God.”They are adopted into the “family of God.” This is an important image that will be unfolded in the New Testament. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/believe]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/adoption]])
## Important figures of speech in this chapter
### Metaphors
John uses the metaphors of light and darkness and of the Word to tell the reader that he will be writing more about good and evil and about what God wants to tell people through Jesus. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter
### “In the beginning”
Some languages and cultures speak of the world as if it has always existed, as if it had no beginning. But “very long ago” is different from “in the beginning,” and you need to be sure that your translation communicates correctly.
### “Son of Man”
Jesus refers to himself as the “Son of Man” in this chapter ([John 1:51](../../jhn/01/51.md)). Your language may not allow people to speak of themselves as if they were speaking about someone else. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/sonofman]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]])
+JHN front intro t6za 0 # Introduction to the Gospel of John
## Part 1: General Introduction
### Outline of the Gospel of John
1. Introduction about who Jesus is (1:1-18)
1. Jesus is baptized, and he chooses twelve disciples (1:19-51)
1. Jesus preaches, teaches, and heals people (2-11)
1. The seven days before Jesus’ death (12-19)
- Mary anoints the feet of Jesus (12:1-11)
- Jesus rides a donkey into Jerusalem (12:12-19)
- Some Greek men want to see Jesus (12:20-36)
- The Jewish leaders reject Jesus (12:37-50)
- Jesus teaches his disciples (13-17)
- Jesus is arrested and undergoes trial (18:1-19:15)
- Jesus is crucified and buried (19:16-42)
1. Jesus rises from the dead (20:1-29)
1. John says why he wrote his gospel (20:30-31)
1. Jesus meets with the disciples (21)
### What is the Gospel of John about?
The Gospel of John is one of four books in the New Testament that describe some of the life of Jesus Christ. The authors of the gospels wrote about different aspects of who Jesus was and what he did. John said that he wrote his gospel “so that people might believe that Jesus is the Christ, the Son of the living God” (20:31).
John’s Gospel is very different from the other three Gospels. John does not include some of the teachings and events that the other writers included in their gospels. Also, John wrote about some teachings and events that are not in the other gospels.
John wrote much about the signs Jesus did to prove that what Jesus said about himself was true. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/sign]])
### How should the title of this book be translated?
Translators may choose to call this book by its traditional title, “The Gospel of John” or “The Gospel According to John.” Or they may choose a title that may be clearer, such as, “The Good News About Jesus That John Wrote.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
### Who wrote the Gospel of John?
This book does not give the name of the author. However, since early Christian times, most Christians have thought that the Apostle John was the author.
## Part 2: Important Religious and Cultural Concepts
### Why does John write so much about the final week of Jesus’ life?
John wrote much about Jesus’ final week. He wanted his readers to think deeply about Jesus’ final week and his death on the cross. He wanted people to understand that Jesus willingly died on the cross so that God could forgive them for sinning against him. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/sin]])
## Part 3: Important Translation Issues
### What do the words “remain,” “reside,” and “abide” mean in the Gospel of John?
John often used the words “remain,” “reside”, and “abide” as metaphors. John spoke of a believer becoming more faithful to Jesus and knowing Jesus better as if Jesus’ word “remained” in the believer. Also, John spoke of someone being spiritually joined to someone else as if the person “remained” in the other person. Christians are said to “remain” in Christ and in God. The Father is said to “remain” in the Son, and the Son is said to “remain” in the Father. The Son is said to “remain” in believers. The Holy Spirit is also said to “remain” in the believers.
Many translators will find it impossible to represent these ideas in their languages in exactly the same way. For example, Jesus intended to express the idea of the Christian being spiritually together with him when he said, “He who eats my flesh and drinks my blood remains in me, and I in him” (John 6:56). The UST uses the idea of “will be joined to me, and I will be joined to him.” But translators may have to find other ways of expressing the idea.
In the passage, “If my words remain in you” (John 15:7), the UST expresses this idea as, “If you live by my message.” Translators may find it possible to use this translation as a model.
### What are the major issues in the text of the Gospel of John?
The following verses found in older versions of the Bible but are not included in most modern versions. Translators are advised not to translate these verses. However, if in the translators’ region, there are older versions of the Bible that include these verses, the translators can include them. If they are translated, they should be put inside square brackets ([]) to indicate that they were probably not original to John’s Gospel.
* “waiting for the moving of the water. For an angel of the Lord occasionally went down into the pool and stirred the water and whoever went first after the stirring of the water, was made well from the disease they had.” (5:3-4)
* “going through the midst of them, and so passed by” (8:59)
The following passage is included in most older and modern versions of the Bible. But it is not in the earliest copies of the Bible. Translators are advised to translate this passage. It should be put inside of square brackets ([]) to indicate that it may not have been original to John’s Gospel.
* The story of the adulterous woman (7:53–8:11)
(See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants]])
+JHN 1 intro k29b 0 # John 01 General Notes
## Structure and formatting
Some translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with the poetry in 1:23, which are words from the Old Testament.
## Special concepts in this chapter
### “The Word”
John uses the phrase “the Word” to refer to Jesus ([John 1:1, 14](./01.md)). John is saying that God’s most important message to all people is actually Jesus, a person with a physical body. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/wordofgod]])
### Light and darkness
The Bible often speaks of unrighteous people, people who do not do what pleases God, as if they were walking around in darkness. It speaks of light as if it were what enables those sinful people to become righteous, to understand what they are doing wrong and begin to obey God. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/righteous]])
### “Children of God”
When people believes in Jesus, they go from being “children of wrath” to “children of God.” They are adopted into the “family of God.”They are adopted into the “family of God.” This is an important image that will be unfolded in the New Testament. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/believe]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/adoption]])
## Important figures of speech in this chapter
### Metaphors
John uses the metaphors of light and darkness and of the Word to tell the reader that he will be writing more about good and evil and about what God wants to tell people through Jesus. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter
### “In the beginning”
Some languages and cultures speak of the world as if it has always existed, as if it had no beginning. But “very long ago” is different from “in the beginning,” and you need to be sure that your translation communicates correctly.
### “Son of Man”
Jesus refers to himself as the “Son of Man” in this chapter ([John 1:51](../../jhn/01/51.md)). Your language may not allow people to speak of themselves as if they were speaking about someone else. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/sonofman]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]])
JHN 1 1 er9g ἐν ἀρχῇ 1 In the beginning This refers to the very earliest time before God created the heavens and the earth.
JHN 1 1 z59q ὁ λόγος 1 the Word This refers to Jesus. Translate as “the Word” if possible. If “Word” is feminine in your language, it could be translated as “the one who is called the Word.”
JHN 1 3 gm5g figs-activepassive πάντα δι’ αὐτοῦ ἐγένετο 1 All things were made through him This can be translated with an active verb. Alternate translation: “God made all things through him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
@@ -175,7 +175,7 @@ JHN 3 35 hmk4 guidelines-sonofgodprinciples Πατὴρ…Υἱόν 1 Father…S
JHN 3 35 ha4e figs-idiom δέδωκεν ἐν τῇ χειρὶ αὐτοῦ 1 given…into his hand This means to be put in his power or control. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
JHN 3 36 u1ks ὁ πιστεύων 1 He who believes “A person who believes” or “Anyone who believes”
JHN 3 36 zy7u ἡ ὀργὴ τοῦ Θεοῦ μένει ἐπ’ αὐτόν 1 the wrath of God stays on him The abstract noun “wrath” can be translated with the verb “punish.” Alternate translation: “God will continue to punish him” (See: rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns)
-JHN 4 intro j1hv 0 # John 04 General Notes
## Structure and formatting
John 4:4-38 forms one story centered on the teaching of Jesus as the “living water” who gives eternal life to all who believe in him. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/believe]])
## Special concepts in this chapter
### “It was necessary for him to pass through Samaria”
Jews avoided traveling through the region of Samaria because the Samaritans were descendants of ungodly people. So Jesus had to do what most Jews did not want to do. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/godly]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/names/kingdomofisrael]])
### “The hour is coming”
Jesus used these words to begin prophecies about times that could be shorter or longer than sixty minutes. “The hour” in which true worshipers will worship in spirit and truth is longer than sixty minutes.
### The proper place of worship
Long before Jesus lived, the Samaritan people had broken the law of Moses by setting up a false temple in their land ([John 4:20](../../jhn/04/20.md)). Jesus explained to the woman that it was no longer important where people worshiped ([John 4:21-24](./21.md)).
### Harvest
Harvest is when people go out to get the food they have planted so they can bring it to their houses and eat it. Jesus used this as a metaphor to teach his followers that they need to go and tell other people about Jesus so those people can be part of God’s kingdom. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/faith]])
### “The Samaritan woman”
John probably told this story to show the difference between the Samaritan woman, who believed, and the Jews, who did not believe and later killed Jesus. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/believe]])
## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter
### “In spirit and truth”
The people who truly know who God is and enjoy worshiping him and love him for who he is are the ones who truly please him. Where they worship is not important.
+JHN 4 intro j1hv 0 # John 04 General Notes
## Structure and formatting
John 4:4-38 forms one story centered on the teaching of Jesus as the “living water” who gives eternal life to all who believe in him. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/believe]])
## Special concepts in this chapter
### “It was necessary for him to pass through Samaria”
Jews avoided traveling through the region of Samaria because the Samaritans were descendants of ungodly people. So Jesus had to do what most Jews did not want to do. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/godly]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/names/kingdomofisrael]])
### “The hour is coming”
Jesus used these words to begin prophecies about times that could be shorter or longer than sixty minutes. “The hour” in which true worshipers will worship in spirit and truth is longer than sixty minutes.
### The proper place of worship
Long before Jesus lived, the Samaritan people had broken the law of Moses by setting up a false temple in their land ([John 4:20](../../jhn/04/20.md)). Jesus explained to the woman that it was no longer important where people worshiped ([John 4:21-24](./21.md)).
### Harvest
Harvest is when people go out to get the food they have planted so they can bring it to their houses and eat it. Jesus used this as a metaphor to teach his followers that they need to go and tell other people about Jesus so those people can be part of God’s kingdom. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/faith]])
### “The Samaritan woman”
John probably told this story to show the difference between the Samaritan woman, who believed, and the Jews, who did not believe and later killed Jesus. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/believe]])
## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter
### “In spirit and truth”
The people who truly know who God is and enjoy worshiping him and love him for who he is are the ones who truly please him. Where they worship is not important.
JHN 4 1 jum6 writing-background 0 General Information: John 4:1-6 gives the background to the next event, Jesus’ conversation with a Samaritan woman. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-background]])
JHN 4 1 ci4n 0 Connecting Statement: A long sentence begins here.
JHN 4 1 b1vc ὡς οὖν ἔγνω ὁ Ἰησοῦς ὅτι ἤκουσαν οἱ Φαρισαῖοι, ὅτι Ἰησοῦς πλείονας μαθητὰς ποιεῖ καὶ βαπτίζει ἢ Ἰωάννης 1 Now when Jesus knew that the Pharisees had heard that he was making and baptizing more disciples than John “Now Jesus was making and baptizing more disciples than John. When he knew that the Pharisees had heard that he was doing this.”
@@ -445,7 +445,7 @@ JHN 6 67 bg2f figs-ellipsis τοῖς δώδεκα 1 the twelve This is an ellip
JHN 6 68 g9l4 figs-rquestion Κύριε, πρὸς τίνα ἀπελευσόμεθα 1 Lord, to whom shall we go? Simon Peter gives this remark in the form of a question to emphasize that he desires to follow only Jesus. Alternate translation: “Lord, we could never follow anyone but you!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
JHN 6 70 z9yc writing-background 0 General Information: Verse 71 is not part of the main story line as John comments on what Jesus said. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-background]])
JHN 6 70 m9ys figs-rquestion οὐκ ἐγὼ ὑμᾶς τοὺς δώδεκα ἐξελεξάμην, καὶ ἐξ ὑμῶν εἷς διάβολός ἐστιν 1 Did not I choose you, the twelve, and one of you is a devil? Jesus gives this remark in the form of a question to draw attention to the fact that one of the disciples will betray him. Alternate translation: “I chose you all myself, yet one of you is a servant of Satan!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
-JHN 7 intro l712 0 # John 07 General Notes
## Structure and formatting
This whole chapter concerns the concept of believing Jesus to be the Messiah. Some people believed this to be true while others rejected it. Some were willing to recognize his power and even the possibility that he was a prophet, but most were unwilling to believe that he was the Messiah. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/christ]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/prophet]])
Translators may wish to include a note at verse 53 to explain to the reader why they have chosen or chosen not to translate verses 7:53-8:11.
## Special concepts in this chapter
### “My time has not yet come”
This phrase and “his hour had not yet come” are used in this chapter to indicate that Jesus is in control of the events unfolding in his life.
### “Living water”
This is an important image used in the New Testament. It is a metaphor. Because this metaphor is given in a desert environment, it probably emphasizes that Jesus is able to give life sustaining nourishment. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
## Important figures of speech in this chapter
### Prophecy
Jesus gives a prophecy about his life without an explicit statement in John [John 7:33-34](./33.md).
### Irony
Nicodemus explains to the other Pharisees that the Law requires him to hear directly from a person before making a judgment about them. The Pharisees in turn made a judgment about Jesus without speaking to Jesus.
## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter
### “Did not believe in him”
Jesus’ brothers did not believe Jesus was the Messiah. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/believe]])
### “The Jews”
This term is used in two different ways in this passage. It is used specifically in reference to the opposition of the Jewish leaders who were trying to kill him ([John 7:1](../../jhn/07/01.md)). It is also used in reference to the people of Judea in general who had a positive opinion of Jesus ([John 7:13](../../jhn/07/13.md)). The translator may wish to use the terms “Jewish leaders” and “Jewish people” or “Jews (leaders)” and “Jews (in general).”
+JHN 7 intro l712 0 # John 07 General Notes
## Structure and formatting
This whole chapter concerns the concept of believing Jesus to be the Messiah. Some people believed this to be true while others rejected it. Some were willing to recognize his power and even the possibility that he was a prophet, but most were unwilling to believe that he was the Messiah. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/christ]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/prophet]])
Translators may wish to include a note at verse 53 to explain to the reader why they have chosen or chosen not to translate verses 7:53-8:11.
## Special concepts in this chapter
### “My time has not yet come”
This phrase and “his hour had not yet come” are used in this chapter to indicate that Jesus is in control of the events unfolding in his life.
### “Living water”
This is an important image used in the New Testament. It is a metaphor. Because this metaphor is given in a desert environment, it probably emphasizes that Jesus is able to give life sustaining nourishment. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
## Important figures of speech in this chapter
### Prophecy
Jesus gives a prophecy about his life without an explicit statement in John [John 7:33-34](./33.md).
### Irony
Nicodemus explains to the other Pharisees that the Law requires him to hear directly from a person before making a judgment about them. The Pharisees in turn made a judgment about Jesus without speaking to Jesus.
## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter
### “Did not believe in him”
Jesus’ brothers did not believe Jesus was the Messiah. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/believe]])
### “The Jews”
This term is used in two different ways in this passage. It is used specifically in reference to the opposition of the Jewish leaders who were trying to kill him ([John 7:1](../../jhn/07/01.md)). It is also used in reference to the people of Judea in general who had a positive opinion of Jesus ([John 7:13](../../jhn/07/13.md)). The translator may wish to use the terms “Jewish leaders” and “Jewish people” or “Jews (leaders)” and “Jews (in general).”
JHN 7 1 gg4v writing-background 0 General Information: Jesus is in Galilee speaking to his brothers. These verses tell about when this event occurred. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-background]])
JHN 7 1 b99m μετὰ ταῦτα 1 After these things These words tell the reader that the writer will begin talking about a new event. “After he finished speaking with the disciples” ([John 6:66-71](../06/66.md)) or “Some time later”
JHN 7 1 k5yv περιεπάτει 1 traveled The reader should understand that Jesus probably walked rather than riding an animal or in a vehicle.
@@ -542,7 +542,7 @@ JHN 7 52 pt91 figs-rquestion καὶ σὺ ἐκ τῆς Γαλιλαίας ε
JHN 7 52 k6pg figs-ellipsis ἐραύνησον καὶ ἴδε 1 Search and see This is an ellipsis. You may wish to include the information that does not appear. Alternate translation: “Search carefully and read what is written in the Scriptures” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
JHN 7 52 jm59 προφήτης ἐκ τῆς Γαλιλαίας οὐκ ἐγείρεται 1 no prophet comes from Galilee This probably refers to the belief that Jesus was born in Galilee.
JHN 7 53 s5fi translate-textvariants 0 General Information: The best early texts do not have 7:53 - 8:11. The ULT has set them apart in square brackets ([ ]) to show that John probably did not include them in his original text. Translators are encouraged to translate them, to set them apart with square brackets, and to include a footnote like the one written on [John 7:53](../07/53.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants]])
-JHN 8 intro e667 0 # John 08 General Notes
## Structure and formatting
Translators may wish to include a note at verse 1 to explain to the reader why they have chosen to translate or to not translate verses 8:1-11.
## Special concepts in this chapter
### A light and darkness
The Bible often speaks of unrighteous people, people who do not do what pleases God, as if they were walking around in darkness. It speaks of light as if it were what enables those sinful people to become righteous, to understand what they are doing wrong and begin to obey God. Here it is all Gentiles (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/righteous]])
### I AM
John records Jesus as saying these words four times in this book, three times in this chapter. They stand alone as a complete sentence, and they literally translate the Hebrew word for “I AM,” by which Yahweh identified himself to Moses. For these reasons, many people believe that when Jesus said these words he was claiming to be Yahweh. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/yahweh]]).
### The Scribes and Pharisees’ trap
The Scribes and Pharisees wanted to trick Jesus. They wanted him to say either that they should keep the law of Moses by killing a woman whom they had found committing adultery or that they should disobey the law of Moses and forgive her sin. Jesus knew that they were trying to trick him and that they did not really want to keep the law of Moses. He knew this because the law said that both the woman and the man should die, but they did not bring the man to Jesus. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/adultery]])
## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter
### “Son of Man”
Jesus refers to himself as the “Son of Man” in this chapter ([John 8:28](../../jhn/08/28.md)). Your language may not allow people to speak of themselves as if they were speaking about someone else. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/sonofman]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]])
+JHN 8 intro e667 0 # John 08 General Notes
## Structure and formatting
Translators may wish to include a note at verse 1 to explain to the reader why they have chosen to translate or to not translate verses 8:1-11.
## Special concepts in this chapter
### A light and darkness
The Bible often speaks of unrighteous people, people who do not do what pleases God, as if they were walking around in darkness. It speaks of light as if it were what enables those sinful people to become righteous, to understand what they are doing wrong and begin to obey God. Here it is all Gentiles (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/righteous]])
### I AM
John records Jesus as saying these words four times in this book, three times in this chapter. They stand alone as a complete sentence, and they literally translate the Hebrew word for “I AM,” by which Yahweh identified himself to Moses. For these reasons, many people believe that when Jesus said these words he was claiming to be Yahweh. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/yahweh]]).
### The Scribes and Pharisees’ trap
The Scribes and Pharisees wanted to trick Jesus. They wanted him to say either that they should keep the law of Moses by killing a woman whom they had found committing adultery or that they should disobey the law of Moses and forgive her sin. Jesus knew that they were trying to trick him and that they did not really want to keep the law of Moses. He knew this because the law said that both the woman and the man should die, but they did not bring the man to Jesus. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/adultery]])
## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter
### “Son of Man”
Jesus refers to himself as the “Son of Man” in this chapter ([John 8:28](../../jhn/08/28.md)). Your language may not allow people to speak of themselves as if they were speaking about someone else. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/sonofman]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]])
JHN 8 1 mkz2 0 General Information: While some texts have 7:53 - 8:11, the best and earliest texts do not include them.
JHN 8 12 m4ma writing-background 0 General Information: Jesus is speaking to a crowd near the treasury in the temple after either the events of [John 7:1-52](../07/01.md) or the events of [John 7:53-8:11](../07/53.md). The author neither gives background to this event nor marks the beginning of a new event. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-background]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]])
JHN 8 12 k5ib figs-metaphor ἐγώ εἰμι τὸ φῶς τοῦ κόσμου 1 I am the light of the world Here the **light** is a metaphor for the revelation that comes from God. Alternate translation: “I am the one who gives light to the world” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
@@ -877,7 +877,7 @@ JHN 11 56 a5kt figs-events 0 General Information: The content of verse 57 occur
JHN 11 56 kc75 ἐζήτουν…τὸν Ἰησοῦν 1 They were looking for Jesus The word **they** refers to the Jewish people who had traveled to Jerusalem.
JHN 11 56 p2wz figs-rquestion τί δοκεῖ ὑμῖν? ὅτι οὐ μὴ ἔλθῃ εἰς τὴν ἑορτήν 1 What do you think? That he will not come to the festival? These are rhetorical questions that express a strong element of doubt that Jesus will come to the Passover Festival. The second question is an ellipsis that leaves out the words “do you think.” The speakers here were wondering if Jesus would come to the festival since there was the danger of his being arrested. Alternate translation: “Jesus will probably not come to the festival. He might be afraid of getting arrested!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
JHN 11 57 glb6 writing-background δὲ οἱ ἀρχιερεῖς 1 Now the chief priests This is background information that explains why the Jewish worshipers were wondering if Jesus would come to the festival or not. If your language has a way to mark background information, use it here. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-background]])
-JHN 12 intro qzv4 0 # John 12 General Notes
## Structure and formatting
Some translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with the poetry in 12:38 and 40, which are words from the Old Testament.
Verse 16 is a commentary on these events. It is possible to put this entire verse in parentheses in order to set it apart from the narrative of the story.
## Special concepts in this chapter
### Mary anointed Jesus’ feet
The Jews would put oil on a person’s head to make that person feel welcome and comfortable. They would also put oil on a person’s body after the person had died but before they buried the body. But they would never think to put oil on a person’s feet, because they thought that feet were dirty.
### The donkey and the colt
Jesus rode into Jerusalem on an animal. In this way he was like a king who came into a city after he had won an important battle. Also, the kings of Israel in the Old Testament rode on a donkeys. Other kings rode on horses. So Jesus was showing that he was the king of Israel and that he was not like other kings.
Matthew, Mark, Luke, and John all wrote about this event. Matthew and Mark wrote that the disciples brought Jesus a donkey. John wrote that Jesus found a donkey. Luke wrote that they brought him a colt. Only Matthew wrote that there were both a donkey had a colt. No one knows for sure whether Jesus rode the donkey or the colt. It is best to translate each of these accounts as it appears in the ULT without trying to make them all say exactly the same thing. (See: [Matthew 21:1-7](../../mat/21/01.md) and [Mark 11:1-7](../../mrk/11/01.md) and [Luke 19:29-36](../../luk/19/29.md) and [John 12:14-15](../../jhn/12/14.md))
### Glory
Scripture often speaks of God’s glory as a great, brilliant light. When people see this light, they are afraid. In this chapter John says that the glory of Jesus is his resurrection ([John 12:16](../../jhn/12/16.md)).
## Important figures of speech in this chapter
### The metaphors of light and darkness
The Bible often speaks of unrighteous people, people who do not do what pleases God, as if they were walking around in darkness. It speaks of light as if it were what enables those sinful people to become righteous, to understand what they are doing wrong and begin to obey God. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/righteous]])
## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter
### Paradox
A paradox is a true statement that appears to describe something impossible. A paradox occurs in 12:25: “He who loves his life will lose it; but he who hates his life in this world will keep it for eternal life.” But in 12:26 Jesus explains what it means to keep one’s life for eternal life. ([John 12:25-26](./25.md)).
+JHN 12 intro qzv4 0 # John 12 General Notes
## Structure and formatting
Some translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with the poetry in 12:38 and 40, which are words from the Old Testament.
Verse 16 is a commentary on these events. It is possible to put this entire verse in parentheses in order to set it apart from the narrative of the story.
## Special concepts in this chapter
### Mary anointed Jesus’ feet
The Jews would put oil on a person’s head to make that person feel welcome and comfortable. They would also put oil on a person’s body after the person had died but before they buried the body. But they would never think to put oil on a person’s feet, because they thought that feet were dirty.
### The donkey and the colt
Jesus rode into Jerusalem on an animal. In this way he was like a king who came into a city after he had won an important battle. Also, the kings of Israel in the Old Testament rode on a donkeys. Other kings rode on horses. So Jesus was showing that he was the king of Israel and that he was not like other kings.
Matthew, Mark, Luke, and John all wrote about this event. Matthew and Mark wrote that the disciples brought Jesus a donkey. John wrote that Jesus found a donkey. Luke wrote that they brought him a colt. Only Matthew wrote that there were both a donkey had a colt. No one knows for sure whether Jesus rode the donkey or the colt. It is best to translate each of these accounts as it appears in the ULT without trying to make them all say exactly the same thing. (See: [Matthew 21:1-7](../../mat/21/01.md) and [Mark 11:1-7](../../mrk/11/01.md) and [Luke 19:29-36](../../luk/19/29.md) and [John 12:14-15](../../jhn/12/14.md))
### Glory
Scripture often speaks of God’s glory as a great, brilliant light. When people see this light, they are afraid. In this chapter John says that the glory of Jesus is his resurrection ([John 12:16](../../jhn/12/16.md)).
## Important figures of speech in this chapter
### The metaphors of light and darkness
The Bible often speaks of unrighteous people, people who do not do what pleases God, as if they were walking around in darkness. It speaks of light as if it were what enables those sinful people to become righteous, to understand what they are doing wrong and begin to obey God. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/righteous]])
## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter
### Paradox
A paradox is a true statement that appears to describe something impossible. A paradox occurs in 12:25: “He who loves his life will lose it; but he who hates his life in this world will keep it for eternal life.” But in 12:26 Jesus explains what it means to keep one’s life for eternal life. ([John 12:25-26](./25.md)).
JHN 12 1 elj4 0 General Information: Jesus is at dinner in Bethany when Mary anoints his feet with oil.
JHN 12 1 s1v2 writing-newevent πρὸ ἓξ ἡμερῶν τοῦ Πάσχα 1 Six days before the Passover The author uses these words to mark the beginning of a new event. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]])
JHN 12 1 z1jp figs-idiom ἤγειρεν ἐκ νεκρῶν 1 had raised from the dead This is an idiom. Alternate translation: “had made alive again” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
@@ -963,7 +963,7 @@ JHN 12 47 xvq6 figs-explicit καὶ ἐάν τίς μου ἀκούσῃ τῶ
JHN 12 48 b1ds ἐν τῇ ἐσχάτῃ ἡμέρᾳ 1 on the last day “at the time when God judges people’s sins”
JHN 12 49 ybm5 guidelines-sonofgodprinciples Πατὴρ 1 Father This is an important title for God. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples]])
JHN 12 50 tar2 οἶδα, ὅτι ἡ ἐντολὴ αὐτοῦ ζωὴ αἰώνιός ἐστιν 1 I know that his command is eternal life “I know that the words that he commanded me to speak are the words that give life forever”
-JHN 13 intro zk68 0 # John 13 General Notes
## Structure and formatting
The events of this chapter are commonly referred to as the last supper or the Lord’s supper. This Passover feast in many ways parallels Jesus’ sacrifice as the lamb of God. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/passover]])
## Special concepts in this chapter
### The washing of feet
People in the ancient Near East thought that feet were very dirty. Only servants would wash people’s feet. The disciples did not want Jesus to wash their feet because they considered him their master and themselves his servants, but he wanted to show them that they needed to serve each other. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]])
### I AM
John records Jesus as saying these words four times in this book, once in this chapter. They stand alone as a complete sentence, and they literally translate the Hebrew word for “I AM,” by which Yahweh identified himself to Moses. For these reasons, many people believe that when Jesus said these words he was claiming to be Yahweh. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/yahweh]]).
## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter
### “Son of Man”
Jesus refers to himself as the “Son of Man” in this chapter ([John 13:31](../../jhn/13/31.md)). Your language may not allow people to speak of themselves as if they were speaking about someone else. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/sonofman]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]])
+JHN 13 intro zk68 0 # John 13 General Notes
## Structure and formatting
The events of this chapter are commonly referred to as the last supper or the Lord’s supper. This Passover feast in many ways parallels Jesus’ sacrifice as the lamb of God. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/passover]])
## Special concepts in this chapter
### The washing of feet
People in the ancient Near East thought that feet were very dirty. Only servants would wash people’s feet. The disciples did not want Jesus to wash their feet because they considered him their master and themselves his servants, but he wanted to show them that they needed to serve each other. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]])
### I AM
John records Jesus as saying these words four times in this book, once in this chapter. They stand alone as a complete sentence, and they literally translate the Hebrew word for “I AM,” by which Yahweh identified himself to Moses. For these reasons, many people believe that when Jesus said these words he was claiming to be Yahweh. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/yahweh]]).
## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter
### “Son of Man”
Jesus refers to himself as the “Son of Man” in this chapter ([John 13:31](../../jhn/13/31.md)). Your language may not allow people to speak of themselves as if they were speaking about someone else. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/sonofman]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]])
JHN 13 1 wk2k writing-background 0 General Information: It is not yet Passover and Jesus is together with his disciples for supper. These verses explain the setting of the story and give background information about Jesus and Judas. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-background]])
JHN 13 1 w7w3 guidelines-sonofgodprinciples Πατέρα 1 Father This is an important title for God. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples]])
JHN 13 1 a1w4 ἀγαπήσας 1 loved This is the kind of love that comes from God, which is focused on the good of others, even when it does not benefit oneself. This kind of love cares for others, no matter what they do.
@@ -1080,7 +1080,7 @@ JHN 14 30 ah3s τοῦ κόσμου ἄρχων 1 ruler of this world Here, **r
JHN 14 30 ea6m figs-explicit ἔρχεται…ἄρχων 1 ruler…is coming Here Jesus implies that Satan is coming to attack him. Alternate translation: “Satan is coming to attack me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
JHN 14 31 jhq1 figs-metonymy ἵνα γνῷ ὁ κόσμος 1 in order that the world will know Here the **world** is a metonym for the people who do not belong to God. Alternate translation: “in order that the ones who do not belong to God may know” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
JHN 14 31 r9ub guidelines-sonofgodprinciples τὸν Πατέρα 1 the Father This is an important title for God. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples]])
-JHN 15 intro k9jd 0 # John 15 General Notes
## Structure and formatting
## Special concepts in this chapter
### Vine
Jesus used the vine as a metaphor for himself. This is because the vine of the grape plant is what takes water and minerals from the ground to the leaves and grapes. Without the vine, the grapes and leaves die. He wanted his followers to know that unless they loved and obeyed him, they would be unable to do anything that pleased God. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
+JHN 15 intro k9jd 0 # John 15 General Notes
## Structure and formatting
## Special concepts in this chapter
### Vine
Jesus used the vine as a metaphor for himself. This is because the vine of the grape plant is what takes water and minerals from the ground to the leaves and grapes. Without the vine, the grapes and leaves die. He wanted his followers to know that unless they loved and obeyed him, they would be unable to do anything that pleased God. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
JHN 15 1 aws2 0 Connecting Statement: The part of the story from the previous chapter continues. Jesus reclines at the table with his disciples and continues to speak to them.
JHN 15 1 fen5 figs-metaphor ἐγώ εἰμι ἡ ἄμπελος ἡ ἀληθινή 1 I am the true vine Here the **true vine** is a metaphor. Jesus compares himself to a vine or a vine stem. He is the source of life that causes people to live in a way that pleases God. Alternate translation: “I am like a vine that produces good fruit” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
JHN 15 1 w2d4 figs-metaphor ὁ Πατήρ μου ὁ γεωργός ἐστιν 1 my Father is the gardener The “gardener” is a metaphor. A “gardener” is a person who takes care of the vine to ensure it is as fruitful as possible. Alternate translation: “my Father is like a gardener” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
@@ -1196,7 +1196,7 @@ JHN 16 32 yza2 figs-activepassive σκορπισθῆτε 1 you will be scattere
JHN 16 32 k3br guidelines-sonofgodprinciples ὁ Πατὴρ μετ’ ἐμοῦ ἐστιν 1 the Father is with me This is an important title for God. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples]])
JHN 16 33 k6d6 figs-explicit ἵνα ἐν ἐμοὶ εἰρήνην ἔχητε 1 so that you will have peace in me Here, **peace** refers to inner peace. Alternate translation: “so that you may have inner peace because of your relationship with me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
JHN 16 33 z7wj figs-metonymy ἐγὼ νενίκηκα τὸν κόσμον 1 I have conquered the world Here, **the world** refers to the troubles and persecution that believers will endure from those who oppose God. Alternate translation: “I have conquered the troubles of this world” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
-JHN 17 intro nb2a 0 # John 17 General Notes
## Structure and formatting
This chapter forms one long prayer.
## Special concepts in this chapter
### Glory
Scripture often speaks of God’s glory as a great, brilliant light. When people see this light, they are afraid. In this chapter Jesus asks God to show his followers his true glory ([John 17:1](../../jhn/17/01.md)).
### Jesus is eternal
Jesus existed before God created the world ([John 17:5](../../jhn/17/05.md)). John wrote about this in [John 1:1](../../jhn/01/01.md).
## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter
### Prayer
Jesus is God’s one and only Son ([John 3:16](../../jhn/03/16.md)), so he could pray differently from the way other people pray. He used many words that sounded like commands. Your translation should make Jesus sound like a son speaking with love and respect to his father and telling him what the father needs to do so that the father will be happy.
+JHN 17 intro nb2a 0 # John 17 General Notes
## Structure and formatting
This chapter forms one long prayer.
## Special concepts in this chapter
### Glory
Scripture often speaks of God’s glory as a great, brilliant light. When people see this light, they are afraid. In this chapter Jesus asks God to show his followers his true glory ([John 17:1](../../jhn/17/01.md)).
### Jesus is eternal
Jesus existed before God created the world ([John 17:5](../../jhn/17/05.md)). John wrote about this in [John 1:1](../../jhn/01/01.md).
## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter
### Prayer
Jesus is God’s one and only Son ([John 3:16](../../jhn/03/16.md)), so he could pray differently from the way other people pray. He used many words that sounded like commands. Your translation should make Jesus sound like a son speaking with love and respect to his father and telling him what the father needs to do so that the father will be happy.
JHN 17 1 uf8z 0 Connecting Statement: The part of the story from the previous chapter continues. Jesus had been speaking to his disciples, but now he begins to pray to God.
JHN 17 1 b4pj figs-idiom ἐπάρας τοὺς ὀφθαλμοὺς αὐτοῦ εἰς τὸν οὐρανὸν 1 he lifted up his eyes to the heavens This is an idiom that means to look upward. Alternate translation: “he looked up to the sky” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
JHN 17 1 k7tb οὐρανὸν 1 heavens This refers to the sky.
@@ -1249,7 +1249,7 @@ JHN 17 25 ur9j guidelines-sonofgodprinciples Πάτερ δίκαιε 1 Righteous
JHN 17 25 xpf5 figs-metonymy ὁ κόσμος σε οὐκ ἔγνω 1 the world did not know you The “world” is a metonym for the people who do not belong to God. Alternate translation: “those who do not belong to you do not know what you are like” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
JHN 17 26 xpi3 figs-metonymy ἐγνώρισα αὐτοῖς τὸ ὄνομά σου 1 I made your name known to them The word **name** refers to God. Alternate translation: “I have revealed to them what you are like” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
JHN 17 26 gk2j ἀγάπη…ἠγάπησάς 1 love…loved This kind of love comes from God and focuses on the good of others, even when it does not benefit oneself. This kind of love cares for others, no matter what they do.
-JHN 18 intro ltl2 0 # John 18 General Notes
## Structure and formatting
Verse 14 says, “Now Caiaphas was the one who had given the advice to the Jews that it would be better that one man die for the people.” The author says this to help the reader understand why it was to Caiaphas that they took Jesus. You might want to put these words in parentheses. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-background]])
## Special concepts in this chapter
### “It is not lawful for us to put any man to death”
The Roman government did not allow the Jews to kill criminals, so the Jews needed to ask Pilate, the governor, to kill him ([John 18:31](../../jhn/18/31.md)).
### Jesus’ kingdom
No one knows for sure what Jesus meant when he told Pilate that his kingdom was not “of this world” ([John 18:36](../../jhn/18/36.md)). Some people think that Jesus means that his kingdom is only spiritual and that he has no visible kingdom on this earth, Other people think that Jesus meant that he would not build and rule his kingdom by force, the way other kings build theirs. It is possible to translate the words “is not of this world” as “is not from this place” or “comes from another place.”
### King of the Jews
When Pilate asked if Jesus were the King of the Jews ([John 18:33](../../jhn/18/33.md)), he was asking if Jesus were claiming to be like King Herod, whom the Romans were permitting to rule Judea. When he asked the crowd if he should release the King of the Jews ([John 18:39](../../jhn/18/39.md)), he is mocking the Jews, because the Romans and Jews hated each other. He was also mocking Jesus, because he did not think that Jesus was a king at all. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-irony]])
+JHN 18 intro ltl2 0 # John 18 General Notes
## Structure and formatting
Verse 14 says, “Now Caiaphas was the one who had given the advice to the Jews that it would be better that one man die for the people.” The author says this to help the reader understand why it was to Caiaphas that they took Jesus. You might want to put these words in parentheses. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-background]])
## Special concepts in this chapter
### “It is not lawful for us to put any man to death”
The Roman government did not allow the Jews to kill criminals, so the Jews needed to ask Pilate, the governor, to kill him ([John 18:31](../../jhn/18/31.md)).
### Jesus’ kingdom
No one knows for sure what Jesus meant when he told Pilate that his kingdom was not “of this world” ([John 18:36](../../jhn/18/36.md)). Some people think that Jesus means that his kingdom is only spiritual and that he has no visible kingdom on this earth, Other people think that Jesus meant that he would not build and rule his kingdom by force, the way other kings build theirs. It is possible to translate the words “is not of this world” as “is not from this place” or “comes from another place.”
### King of the Jews
When Pilate asked if Jesus were the King of the Jews ([John 18:33](../../jhn/18/33.md)), he was asking if Jesus were claiming to be like King Herod, whom the Romans were permitting to rule Judea. When he asked the crowd if he should release the King of the Jews ([John 18:39](../../jhn/18/39.md)), he is mocking the Jews, because the Romans and Jews hated each other. He was also mocking Jesus, because he did not think that Jesus was a king at all. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-irony]])
JHN 18 1 sq3t writing-background 0 General Information: Verses 1-2 give background information for the events that follow. Verse 1 tells where they took place, and verse 2 gives background information about Judas. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-background]])
JHN 18 1 cxz8 writing-newevent ταῦτα εἰπὼν, Ἰησοῦς 1 After Jesus spoke these words The author uses these words to mark the beginning of a new event. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]])
JHN 18 1 z9bw translate-names Κεδρὼν 1 Kidron Valley a valley in Jerusalem separating the Temple Mount from the Mount of Olives (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
@@ -1316,7 +1316,7 @@ JHN 18 38 zbm5 figs-rquestion τί ἐστιν ἀλήθεια 1 What is truth?
JHN 18 38 rma7 figs-synecdoche τοὺς Ἰουδαίους 1 the Jews Here, **Jews** is a synecdoche that refers to the Jewish leaders who opposed Jesus. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
JHN 18 40 a7pl figs-ellipsis μὴ τοῦτον, ἀλλὰ τὸν Βαραββᾶν 1 Not this man, but Barabbas This is an ellipsis. You can add the implied words. Alternate translation: “No! Do not release this man! Release Barabbas instead” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
JHN 18 40 h11k writing-background ἦν δὲ ὁ Βαραββᾶς λῃστής 1 Now Barabbas was a robber Here John provides background information about Barabbas. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-background]])
-JHN 19 intro u96u 0 # John 19 General Notes
## Structure and formatting
Some translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with the poetry in 19:24, which are words from the Old Testament.
## Special concepts in this chapter
### “Purple garment”
Purple is a color like red or blue. The people were mocking Jesus, so they put him in a purple garment. This was because kings wore purple garments. They spoke and acted like they were giving honor to a king, but everyone knew that they were doing it because they hated Jesus. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-irony]])
### “You are not Caesar’s friend”
Pilate knew that Jesus was not a criminal, so he did not want to have his soldiers kill him. But the Jews told him that Jesus was claiming to be a king, and anyone who did that was breaking Caesar’s laws ([John 19:12](../../jhn/19/12.md)).
### The tomb
The tomb in which Jesus was buried ([John 19:41](../../jhn/19/41.md)) was the kind of tomb in which wealthy Jewish families buried their dead. It was an actual room cut into a rock. It had a flat place on one side where they could place the body after they had put oil and spices on it and wrapped it in cloth. Then they would roll a large rock in front of the tomb so no one could see inside or enter.
## Important figures of speech in this chapter
### Sarcasm
The soldiers were insulting Jesus when they said, “Hail, King of the Jews.” Pilate was insulting the Jews when he asked, “Should I crucify your king?” He was probably also insulting both Jesus and the Jews when he wrote, “Jesus of Nazareth, King of the Jews.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-irony]])
## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter
### Gabbatha, Golgotha
These are two Hebrew words. After translating the meanings of these words (“The Pavement” and “The Place of a Skull”), the author transliterates their sounds by writing them with Greek letters.
+JHN 19 intro u96u 0 # John 19 General Notes
## Structure and formatting
Some translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with the poetry in 19:24, which are words from the Old Testament.
## Special concepts in this chapter
### “Purple garment”
Purple is a color like red or blue. The people were mocking Jesus, so they put him in a purple garment. This was because kings wore purple garments. They spoke and acted like they were giving honor to a king, but everyone knew that they were doing it because they hated Jesus. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-irony]])
### “You are not Caesar’s friend”
Pilate knew that Jesus was not a criminal, so he did not want to have his soldiers kill him. But the Jews told him that Jesus was claiming to be a king, and anyone who did that was breaking Caesar’s laws ([John 19:12](../../jhn/19/12.md)).
### The tomb
The tomb in which Jesus was buried ([John 19:41](../../jhn/19/41.md)) was the kind of tomb in which wealthy Jewish families buried their dead. It was an actual room cut into a rock. It had a flat place on one side where they could place the body after they had put oil and spices on it and wrapped it in cloth. Then they would roll a large rock in front of the tomb so no one could see inside or enter.
## Important figures of speech in this chapter
### Sarcasm
The soldiers were insulting Jesus when they said, “Hail, King of the Jews.” Pilate was insulting the Jews when he asked, “Should I crucify your king?” He was probably also insulting both Jesus and the Jews when he wrote, “Jesus of Nazareth, King of the Jews.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-irony]])
## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter
### Gabbatha, Golgotha
These are two Hebrew words. After translating the meanings of these words (“The Pavement” and “The Place of a Skull”), the author transliterates their sounds by writing them with Greek letters.
JHN 19 1 u3gi 0 Connecting Statement: The part of the story from the previous chapter continues. Jesus is standing before Pilate as he is being accused by the Jews.
JHN 19 1 yay2 figs-synecdoche τότε οὖν ἔλαβεν ὁ Πειλᾶτος τὸν Ἰησοῦν καὶ ἐμαστίγωσεν 1 Then Pilate took Jesus and whipped him Pilate himself did not whip Jesus. Here, **Pilate** is a synecdoche for the soldiers that Pilate ordered to whip Jesus. Alternate translation: “Then Pilate ordered his soldiers to whip Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
JHN 19 3 u4vw figs-irony χαῖρε, ὁ Βασιλεὺς τῶν Ἰουδαίων 1 Hail, King of the Jews The greeting “Hail” with a raised hand was only used to greet Caesar. As the soldiers use the crown of thorns and the purple robe to mock Jesus, it is ironic that they do not recognize that he is indeed a king. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-irony]])
diff --git a/en_tn_46-ROM.tsv b/en_tn_46-ROM.tsv
index 4ecb56884..3712eaf48 100644
--- a/en_tn_46-ROM.tsv
+++ b/en_tn_46-ROM.tsv
@@ -1,6 +1,6 @@
Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNote
-ROM front intro gtn1 0 # Introduction to Romans
## Part 1: General Introduction
### Outline of the Book of Romans
1. Introduction (1:1-15)
1. Righteousness by faith in Jesus Christ (1:16-17)
1. All mankind is condemned because of sin (1:18-3:20)
1. Righteousness through Jesus Christ by faith in him (3:21-4:25)
1. The fruits of the Spirit (5:1-11)
1. Adam and Christ compared (5:12-21)
1. Becoming like Christ in this life (6:1-8:39)
1. God’s plan for Israel (9:1-11:36)
1. Practical advice for living as Christians (12:1-15:13)
1. Conclusion and greetings (15:14-16:27)
### Who wrote the Book of Romans?
The Apostle Paul wrote the Book of Romans. Paul was from the city of Tarsus. He had been known as Saul in his early life. Before becoming a Christian, Paul was a Pharisee. He persecuted Christians. After he became a Christian, he traveled several times throughout the Roman Empire telling people about Jesus.
Paul probably wrote this letter while he was staying in the city of Corinth during his third trip through the Roman Empire.
### What is the Book of Romans about?
Paul wrote this letter to the Christians in Rome. Paul wanted to get them ready to receive him when he visited them. He said his purpose was to “bring about the obedience of faith” (16:26).
In this letter Paul most fully described the gospel of Jesus Christ. He explained that both Jews and non-Jews have sinned, and God will forgive them and declare them righteous only if they believe in Jesus (chapters 1-11). Then he gave them practical advice for how believers should live (chapters 12-16),
### How should the title of this book be translated?
Translators may choose to call this book by its traditional title, “Romans.” Or they may choose a clearer title, such as “Paul’s Letter to the Church in Rome,” or “A Letter to the Christians in Rome.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
## Part 2: Important Religious and Cultural Concepts
### What are the titles used to refer to Jesus?
In Romans, Paul described Jesus Christ by many titles and descriptions: Jesus Christ (1:1), the Seed of David (1:3), the Son of God (1:4), the Lord Jesus Christ (1:7), Christ Jesus (3:24), Propitiation (3:25), Jesus (3:26), Jesus our Lord (4:24), Lord of Hosts (9:29), a Stumbling Stone and Rock of Offence (9:33), the End of the Law (10:4), the Deliverer (11:26), Lord of the Dead and the Living (14:9), and the Root of Jesse (15:12).
### How should theological terms in Romans be translated?
Paul uses many theological terms that are not used in the four gospels. As early Christians learned more about the meaning of Jesus Christ and his message, they needed words and expressions for new ideas. Some examples of these words are “justification” (5:1), “works of the law” (3:20), “reconcile” (5:10), “propitiation” (3:25), “sanctification” (6:19), and “the old man” (6:6).
The “key terms” dictionary can help translators understand many of these terms. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
Terms such as those given above are difficult to explain. It is often hard or impossible for translators to find equivalent terms in their own languages. It can help to know that word equivalents of these terms are not necessary. Instead, translators can develop short expressions to communicate these ideas. For example, the term “gospel” can be translated as “the good news about Jesus Christ.”
Translators should also remember that some of these terms have more than one meaning. The meaning will depend on how the author is using the word in that particular passage. For example, “righteousness” sometimes means that a person obeys God’s law. At other times, “righteousness” means that Jesus Christ has perfectly obeyed God’s law for us.
### What did Paul mean by “a remnant” of Israel (11:5)?
The idea of a “remnant” is important both in the Old Testament and for Paul. Most of the Israelites were either killed or scattered among other people when the Assyrians and then the Babylonians conquered their land. Only a relatively few Jews survived. They were known as “the remnant.”
In 11:1-9, Paul speaks of another remnant. This remnant is the Jews whom God saved because they believed in Jesus. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/remnant]])
## Part 3: Important Translation Issues
### What did Paul mean by being “in Christ”?
The phrase “in Christ” and similar phrases occur in 3:24; 6:11, 23; 8:1,2,39; 9:1; 12:5,17; 15:17; and 16:3,7,9,10. Paul used these kinds of phrases as a metaphor to express that Christian believers belong to Jesus Christ. Belonging to Christ means the believer is saved and is made a friend with God. The believer is also promised to live with God forever. However, this idea can be difficult to represent in many languages.
These phrases also have specific meanings that depend on how Paul used them in a particular passage. For example, in 3:24 (“the redemption that is in Christ Jesus”), Paul referred to our being redeemed “because” of Jesus Christ. In 8:9 (“you are not in the flesh but in the Spirit”), Paul spoke of believers submitting “to” the Holy Spirit. In 9:1 (“I tell the truth in Christ”), Paul meant that he is telling the truth that “is in agreement with” Jesus Christ.
Nevertheless, the basic idea of our being united with Jesus Christ (and with the Holy Spirit) is seen in these passages as well. Therefore, the translator has a choice in many passages that use “in.” He will often decide to represent the more immediate sense of “in,” such as, “by means of,” “in the manner of,” or “in regard to.” But, if possible, the translator should choose a word or phrase that reprents the immediate sense and the sense of “in union with.” (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/inchrist]])
### How are the ideas of “holy,” “saints” or “holy ones,” and “sanctify” represented in Romans in the ULT?
The scriptures use such words to indicate any one of various ideas. For this reason, it is often difficult for translators to represent them well in their versions. In translating into English, the ULT uses the following principles:
* Sometimes the meaning in a passage implies moral holiness. Especially important for understanding the gospel is the fact that God considers Christians to be sinless because they are united to Jesus Christ. Another related fact is that God is perfect and faultless. A third fact is that Christians are to conduct themselves in a blameless and faultless manner in life. In these cases, the ULT uses “holy,” “holy God,” “holy ones” or “holy people.” (See: 1:7)
* Sometimes the meaning in a passage indicates a simple reference to Christians without implying any particular role filled by them. In cases where some other English versions have “saints” or “holy ones,” the ULT uses “believers.” (See: 8:27; 12:13; 15:25, 26, 31; 16:2, 15)
* Sometimes the meaning in a passage indicates the idea of someone or something set apart for God alone. In these cases, the ULT uses “set apart,” “dedicated to,” “consecrated,” or “reserved for.” (See: 15:16)
The UST will often be helpful as translators think about how to represent these ideas in their own versions.
### What are the major issues in the text of the Book of Romans?
For the following verses, modern version of the Bible differ from older versions. The ULT includes the modern reading and puts the older reading in a footnote.
* “he [God] works all things together for good” (8:28). Some older versions read, “All things work together for good.”
* “But if it is by grace, it is no longer by works. Otherwise grace would no longer be grace” (11:6). Some older versions read: “But if it is by works, then is it no more grace: otherwise work is no more work.”
The following verse is not in the best ancient copies of the Bible. Translators are advised not to include this verse. However, if in the translators’ region there are older Bible versions that have this verse, the translators can include it. If it is translated, it should be put inside square brackets ([]) to indicate that it is probably not original to the Book of Romans.
* “May the grace of our Lord Jesus Christ be with you all. Amen” (16:24).
(See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants]])
-ROM 1 intro hn5n 0 # Romans 01 General Notes
## Structure and formatting
The first verse is a type of introduction. People in the ancient Mediterranean region often started their letters this way. Sometimes this is called a “salutation.”
## Special concepts in this chapter
### The gospel
This chapter refers to the contents of the Book of Romans as “the gospel” ([Romans 1:2](../../rom/01/02.md)). Romans is not a gospel like Matthew, Mark, Luke and John. Instead, chapters 1-8 present the biblical gospel: All have sinned. Jesus died for our sins. He was raised again that we might have new life in him.
### Fruit
This chapter uses the imagery of fruit. The image of fruit usually refers to a person’s faith producing good works in their life. In this chapter, it refers to the results of Paul’s work among the Roman Christians. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/other/fruit]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/faith]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/righteous]])
### Universal Condemnation and the Wrath of God
This chapter explains that everyone is without excuse. We all know about the true God, Yahweh, from his creation all around us. Because of our sin and our sinful nature, every person justly deserves the wrath of God. This wrath was satisfied by Jesus dying on a cross for those who believe in him. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/believe]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/sin]])
## Important figures of speech in this chapter
### “God gave them over”
Many scholars view the phrases “God gave them over” and “God gave them up” as theologically significant. For this reason, it is important to translate these phrases with God playing a passive role in the action. God simply allows men to pursue their own desires, he does not force them. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter
### Difficult phrases and concepts
This chapter has many difficult ideas in it. How Paul writes makes many of the phrases in this chapter difficult to translate. The translator may need to use the UST to understand the meaning of the phrases. And it may be necessary to more freely translate these phrases. Some of the difficult phrases include: “obedience of faith,” “whom I serve in my spirit,” “from faith to faith” and “exchanged the glory of the imperishable God for the likenesses of an image of perishable man.”
+ROM front intro gtn1 0 # Introduction to Romans
## Part 1: General Introduction
### Outline of the Book of Romans
1. Introduction (1:1-15)
1. Righteousness by faith in Jesus Christ (1:16-17)
1. All mankind is condemned because of sin (1:18-3:20)
1. Righteousness through Jesus Christ by faith in him (3:21-4:25)
1. The fruits of the Spirit (5:1-11)
1. Adam and Christ compared (5:12-21)
1. Becoming like Christ in this life (6:1-8:39)
1. God’s plan for Israel (9:1-11:36)
1. Practical advice for living as Christians (12:1-15:13)
1. Conclusion and greetings (15:14-16:27)
### Who wrote the Book of Romans?
The Apostle Paul wrote the Book of Romans. Paul was from the city of Tarsus. He had been known as Saul in his early life. Before becoming a Christian, Paul was a Pharisee. He persecuted Christians. After he became a Christian, he traveled several times throughout the Roman Empire telling people about Jesus.
Paul probably wrote this letter while he was staying in the city of Corinth during his third trip through the Roman Empire.
### What is the Book of Romans about?
Paul wrote this letter to the Christians in Rome. Paul wanted to get them ready to receive him when he visited them. He said his purpose was to “bring about the obedience of faith” (16:26).
In this letter Paul most fully described the gospel of Jesus Christ. He explained that both Jews and non-Jews have sinned, and God will forgive them and declare them righteous only if they believe in Jesus (chapters 1-11). Then he gave them practical advice for how believers should live (chapters 12-16),
### How should the title of this book be translated?
Translators may choose to call this book by its traditional title, “Romans.” Or they may choose a clearer title, such as “Paul’s Letter to the Church in Rome,” or “A Letter to the Christians in Rome.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
## Part 2: Important Religious and Cultural Concepts
### What are the titles used to refer to Jesus?
In Romans, Paul described Jesus Christ by many titles and descriptions: Jesus Christ (1:1), the Seed of David (1:3), the Son of God (1:4), the Lord Jesus Christ (1:7), Christ Jesus (3:24), Propitiation (3:25), Jesus (3:26), Jesus our Lord (4:24), Lord of Hosts (9:29), a Stumbling Stone and Rock of Offence (9:33), the End of the Law (10:4), the Deliverer (11:26), Lord of the Dead and the Living (14:9), and the Root of Jesse (15:12).
### How should theological terms in Romans be translated?
Paul uses many theological terms that are not used in the four gospels. As early Christians learned more about the meaning of Jesus Christ and his message, they needed words and expressions for new ideas. Some examples of these words are “justification” (5:1), “works of the law” (3:20), “reconcile” (5:10), “propitiation” (3:25), “sanctification” (6:19), and “the old man” (6:6).
The “key terms” dictionary can help translators understand many of these terms. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
Terms such as those given above are difficult to explain. It is often hard or impossible for translators to find equivalent terms in their own languages. It can help to know that word equivalents of these terms are not necessary. Instead, translators can develop short expressions to communicate these ideas. For example, the term “gospel” can be translated as “the good news about Jesus Christ.”
Translators should also remember that some of these terms have more than one meaning. The meaning will depend on how the author is using the word in that particular passage. For example, “righteousness” sometimes means that a person obeys God’s law. At other times, “righteousness” means that Jesus Christ has perfectly obeyed God’s law for us.
### What did Paul mean by “a remnant” of Israel (11:5)?
The idea of a “remnant” is important both in the Old Testament and for Paul. Most of the Israelites were either killed or scattered among other people when the Assyrians and then the Babylonians conquered their land. Only a relatively few Jews survived. They were known as “the remnant.”
In 11:1-9, Paul speaks of another remnant. This remnant is the Jews whom God saved because they believed in Jesus. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/remnant]])
## Part 3: Important Translation Issues
### What did Paul mean by being “in Christ”?
The phrase “in Christ” and similar phrases occur in 3:24; 6:11, 23; 8:1,2,39; 9:1; 12:5,17; 15:17; and 16:3,7,9,10. Paul used these kinds of phrases as a metaphor to express that Christian believers belong to Jesus Christ. Belonging to Christ means the believer is saved and is made a friend with God. The believer is also promised to live with God forever. However, this idea can be difficult to represent in many languages.
These phrases also have specific meanings that depend on how Paul used them in a particular passage. For example, in 3:24 (“the redemption that is in Christ Jesus”), Paul referred to our being redeemed “because” of Jesus Christ. In 8:9 (“you are not in the flesh but in the Spirit”), Paul spoke of believers submitting “to” the Holy Spirit. In 9:1 (“I tell the truth in Christ”), Paul meant that he is telling the truth that “is in agreement with” Jesus Christ.
Nevertheless, the basic idea of our being united with Jesus Christ (and with the Holy Spirit) is seen in these passages as well. Therefore, the translator has a choice in many passages that use “in.” He will often decide to represent the more immediate sense of “in,” such as, “by means of,” “in the manner of,” or “in regard to.” But, if possible, the translator should choose a word or phrase that reprents the immediate sense and the sense of “in union with.” (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/inchrist]])
### How are the ideas of “holy,” “saints” or “holy ones,” and “sanctify” represented in Romans in the ULT?
The scriptures use such words to indicate any one of various ideas. For this reason, it is often difficult for translators to represent them well in their versions. In translating into English, the ULT uses the following principles:
* Sometimes the meaning in a passage implies moral holiness. Especially important for understanding the gospel is the fact that God considers Christians to be sinless because they are united to Jesus Christ. Another related fact is that God is perfect and faultless. A third fact is that Christians are to conduct themselves in a blameless and faultless manner in life. In these cases, the ULT uses “holy,” “holy God,” “holy ones” or “holy people.” (See: 1:7)
* Sometimes the meaning in a passage indicates a simple reference to Christians without implying any particular role filled by them. In cases where some other English versions have “saints” or “holy ones,” the ULT uses “believers.” (See: 8:27; 12:13; 15:25, 26, 31; 16:2, 15)
* Sometimes the meaning in a passage indicates the idea of someone or something set apart for God alone. In these cases, the ULT uses “set apart,” “dedicated to,” “consecrated,” or “reserved for.” (See: 15:16)
The UST will often be helpful as translators think about how to represent these ideas in their own versions.
### What are the major issues in the text of the Book of Romans?
For the following verses, modern version of the Bible differ from older versions. The ULT includes the modern reading and puts the older reading in a footnote.
* “he [God] works all things together for good” (8:28). Some older versions read, “All things work together for good.”
* “But if it is by grace, it is no longer by works. Otherwise grace would no longer be grace” (11:6). Some older versions read: “But if it is by works, then is it no more grace: otherwise work is no more work.”
The following verse is not in the best ancient copies of the Bible. Translators are advised not to include this verse. However, if in the translators’ region there are older Bible versions that have this verse, the translators can include it. If it is translated, it should be put inside square brackets ([]) to indicate that it is probably not original to the Book of Romans.
* “May the grace of our Lord Jesus Christ be with you all. Amen” (16:24).
(See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants]])
+ROM 1 intro hn5n 0 # Romans 01 General Notes
## Structure and formatting
The first verse is a type of introduction. People in the ancient Mediterranean region often started their letters this way. Sometimes this is called a “salutation.”
## Special concepts in this chapter
### The gospel
This chapter refers to the contents of the Book of Romans as “the gospel” ([Romans 1:2](../../rom/01/02.md)). Romans is not a gospel like Matthew, Mark, Luke and John. Instead, chapters 1-8 present the biblical gospel: All have sinned. Jesus died for our sins. He was raised again that we might have new life in him.
### Fruit
This chapter uses the imagery of fruit. The image of fruit usually refers to a person’s faith producing good works in their life. In this chapter, it refers to the results of Paul’s work among the Roman Christians. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/other/fruit]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/faith]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/righteous]])
### Universal Condemnation and the Wrath of God
This chapter explains that everyone is without excuse. We all know about the true God, Yahweh, from his creation all around us. Because of our sin and our sinful nature, every person justly deserves the wrath of God. This wrath was satisfied by Jesus dying on a cross for those who believe in him. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/believe]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/sin]])
## Important figures of speech in this chapter
### “God gave them over”
Many scholars view the phrases “God gave them over” and “God gave them up” as theologically significant. For this reason, it is important to translate these phrases with God playing a passive role in the action. God simply allows men to pursue their own desires, he does not force them. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter
### Difficult phrases and concepts
This chapter has many difficult ideas in it. How Paul writes makes many of the phrases in this chapter difficult to translate. The translator may need to use the UST to understand the meaning of the phrases. And it may be necessary to more freely translate these phrases. Some of the difficult phrases include: “obedience of faith,” “whom I serve in my spirit,” “from faith to faith” and “exchanged the glory of the imperishable God for the likenesses of an image of perishable man.”
ROM 1 1 x3em figs-explicit Παῦλος 1 Paul Your language may have a particular way of introducing the author of a letter. You may also need to tell in this same verse who the people are to whom Paul wrote the letter ([Romans 1:7](./07.md)). Alternate translation: “I, Paul, wrote this letter” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
ROM 1 1 v5b9 figs-activepassive κλητὸς ἀπόστολος, ἀφωρισμένος εἰς εὐαγγέλιον Θεοῦ 1 called to be an apostle and set apart for the gospel of God You can translate this in an active form. Alternate translation: “God called me to be an apostle and chose me to tell people about the gospel” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
ROM 1 1 sg88 κλητὸς 1 called This means that God has appointed or chosen people to be his children, to be his servants and proclaimers of his message of salvation through Jesus.
@@ -96,7 +96,7 @@ ROM 1 32 ytu6 figs-explicit ὅτι οἱ τὰ τοιαῦτα πράσσοντ
ROM 1 32 z12q ἄξιοι θανάτου εἰσίν 1 are deserving of death “deserve to die”
ROM 1 32 ama2 αὐτὰ 1 these things “these kinds of evil things”
ROM 1 32 iqg1 figs-explicit τοῖς πράσσουσιν 1 who do them Here the verb **do** refers to continuing to do things that are evil. Alternate translation: “who keep on doing evil things” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-ROM 2 intro dse2 0 # Romans 02 General Notes
## Structure and formatting
This chapter shifts its audience from Roman Christians to those who “judge” other people and do not believe in Jesus. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/judge]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/believe]])
### “Therefore you are without excuse”
This phrase looks back at Chapter 1. In some ways, it actually concludes what Chapter 1 teaches. This phrase explains why everyone in the world must worship the true God.
## Special concepts in this chapter
### “Doers of the Law”
Those who try to obey the law will not be justified by trying to obey it. Those who are justified by believing in Jesus show that their faith is real by obeying God’s commands. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/justice]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/lawofmoses]])
## Important figures of speech in this chapter
### Rhetorical Questions
Paul uses several rhetorical questions in this chapter. It appears the intent of these rhetorical questions is to make the reader see their sin so they will trust in Jesus. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]], [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/guilt]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/sin]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/faith]])
### Hypothetical Situation
In context, “he will give eternal life” in verse 7 is a hypothetical statement. If a person could live a perfect life, they would earn eternal life as a reward. But only Jesus was able to live a perfect life.
Paul gives another hypothetical situation in verses 17-29. Here he explains that even those who earnestly try to obey the law of Moses are guilty of violating the law. In English, this is about those who follow the “letter” of the law but cannot follow the “spirit” or general principles of the law. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hypo]])
## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter
### “You who judge”
At times, this could be translated in a simpler way. But it is translated in this relatively awkward way because when Paul refers to “people who judge” he is also saying that everyone judges. It is possible to translate this as “those who judge (and everyone judges).”
+ROM 2 intro dse2 0 # Romans 02 General Notes
## Structure and formatting
This chapter shifts its audience from Roman Christians to those who “judge” other people and do not believe in Jesus. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/judge]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/believe]])
### “Therefore you are without excuse”
This phrase looks back at Chapter 1. In some ways, it actually concludes what Chapter 1 teaches. This phrase explains why everyone in the world must worship the true God.
## Special concepts in this chapter
### “Doers of the Law”
Those who try to obey the law will not be justified by trying to obey it. Those who are justified by believing in Jesus show that their faith is real by obeying God’s commands. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/justice]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/lawofmoses]])
## Important figures of speech in this chapter
### Rhetorical Questions
Paul uses several rhetorical questions in this chapter. It appears the intent of these rhetorical questions is to make the reader see their sin so they will trust in Jesus. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]], [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/guilt]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/sin]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/faith]])
### Hypothetical Situation
In context, “he will give eternal life” in verse 7 is a hypothetical statement. If a person could live a perfect life, they would earn eternal life as a reward. But only Jesus was able to live a perfect life.
Paul gives another hypothetical situation in verses 17-29. Here he explains that even those who earnestly try to obey the law of Moses are guilty of violating the law. In English, this is about those who follow the “letter” of the law but cannot follow the “spirit” or general principles of the law. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hypo]])
## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter
### “You who judge”
At times, this could be translated in a simpler way. But it is translated in this relatively awkward way because when Paul refers to “people who judge” he is also saying that everyone judges. It is possible to translate this as “those who judge (and everyone judges).”
ROM 2 1 y6ts 0 Connecting Statement: Paul has affirmed all men are sinners and continues to remind them that all people are wicked.
ROM 2 1 d7pj figs-explicit διὸ ἀναπολόγητος εἶ 1 Therefore you are without excuse The word **therefore** marks a new section of the letter. It also makes a concluding statement based on what Paul has said in [Romans 1:1-32](../01/01.md). Alternate translation: “Since God will punish those who continually sin, he will certainly not excuse your sins” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
ROM 2 1 x3mi figs-apostrophe εἶ 1 you are Paul is writing here as if he were addressing a Jewish person who is arguing with him. Paul is doing this to teach his audience that God will punish everyone who continually sins, whether Jew or Gentile. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-apostrophe]])
@@ -188,7 +188,7 @@ ROM 2 29 v149 ἐν τῷ κρυπτῷ 1 inwardly This refers to the values an
ROM 2 29 dk8q figs-metonymy καρδίας 1 of the heart Here, **heart** is a metonym for the inner person. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
ROM 2 29 dd3p figs-synecdoche ἐν Πνεύματι, οὐ γράμματι 1 in the Spirit, not in the letter Here, **letter** is a synecdoche that refers to written Scripture. Alternate translation: “through the work of the Holy Spirit, not because you know the Scriptures” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
ROM 2 29 qa6b ἐν Πνεύματι 1 in the Spirit This refers to the internal, spiritual part of a person that “God’s Spirit” changes .
-ROM 3 intro y2kb 0 # Romans 03 General Notes
## Structure and formatting
Some translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with verses 4 and 10-18 of this chapter, which are words from the Old Testament.
## Special concepts in this chapter
Chapter 3 answers the question, “What advantage does being a Jew have over being a Gentile?” (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/lawofmoses]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/save]])
### “For all have sinned and come short of the glory of God”
Because God is holy, anyone with him in heaven must be perfect. Any sin at all will condemn a person. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/heaven]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/condemn]])
### The purpose of the law of Moses
Obeying the law cannot make a person right with God. Obeying God’s law is a way a person shows they believe in God. People have always been justified only by faith. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/justice]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/faith]])
## Important figures of speech in this chapter
### Rhetorical Questions
Paul frequently uses rhetorical questions in this chapter. It appears the intent of these rhetorical questions is to make the reader see their sin so they will trust in Jesus. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/guilt]])
+ROM 3 intro y2kb 0 # Romans 03 General Notes
## Structure and formatting
Some translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with verses 4 and 10-18 of this chapter, which are words from the Old Testament.
## Special concepts in this chapter
Chapter 3 answers the question, “What advantage does being a Jew have over being a Gentile?” (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/lawofmoses]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/save]])
### “For all have sinned and come short of the glory of God”
Because God is holy, anyone with him in heaven must be perfect. Any sin at all will condemn a person. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/heaven]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/condemn]])
### The purpose of the law of Moses
Obeying the law cannot make a person right with God. Obeying God’s law is a way a person shows they believe in God. People have always been justified only by faith. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/justice]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/faith]])
## Important figures of speech in this chapter
### Rhetorical Questions
Paul frequently uses rhetorical questions in this chapter. It appears the intent of these rhetorical questions is to make the reader see their sin so they will trust in Jesus. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/guilt]])
ROM 3 1 v788 0 Connecting Statement: Paul proclaims the advantage that Jews have because God gave them his law.
ROM 3 1 gcd6 figs-explicit τί οὖν τὸ περισσὸν τοῦ Ἰουδαίου, ἢ τίς ἡ ὠφέλια τῆς περιτομῆς 1 Then what advantage does the Jew have? And what is the benefit of circumcision? Paul presents ideas that people might have after they hear what he wrote in chapter 2. He does this in order to respond to them in verse 2. Alternate translation: “Some people might say, ‘Then what advantage does the Jew have? And what is the benefit of circumcision?’” or “Some people might say, ‘If that is true, then the Jews do not have any advantage, and there is no benefit in being circumcised.’” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
ROM 3 2 rri9 figs-explicit πολὺ κατὰ πάντα τρόπον 1 It is great in every way Paul now responds to the concerns brought up in verse 1. Here, **It** refers to being a member of the Jewish people. Alternate translation: “But there is great advantage to being a Jew” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
@@ -264,7 +264,7 @@ ROM 3 31 wb6r figs-rquestion νόμον οὖν καταργοῦμεν διὰ
ROM 3 31 jdq1 figs-rquestion μὴ γένοιτο 1 May it never be This expression gives the strongest possible negative answer to the preceding rhetorical question. You may have a similar express in your language that you could use here. Alternate translation: “This is certainly not true” or “Certainly not” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
ROM 3 31 y6qx νόμον ἱστάνομεν 1 we uphold the law “we obey the law”
ROM 3 31 nzr7 figs-exclusive καταργοῦμεν 1 we uphold This pronoun refers to Paul, other believers, and the readers. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
-ROM 4 intro f9jc 0 # Romans 04 General Notes
## Structure and formatting
Some translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with verses 7-8 of this chapter, which are words from the Old Testament.
## Special concepts in this chapter
### The purpose of the law of Moses
Paul builds upon material from chapter 3. He explains how Abraham, the father of Israel, was justified. Even Abraham could not be justified by what he did. Obeying the law of Moses does not make a person right with God. Obeying God’s commands is a way a person shows they believe in God. People have always been justified only by faith. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/justice]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/lawofmoses]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/faith]])
### Circumcision
Circumcision was important to the Israelites. It identified a person as a descendant of Abraham. It was also a sign of the covenant between Abraham and Yahweh. However, no person was justified only by being circumcised. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/circumcise]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/covenant]])
## Important figures of speech in this chapter
### Rhetorical Questions
Paul uses rhetorical questions in this chapter. It appears the intent of these rhetorical questions is to make the reader see their sin so they will trust in Jesus. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/guilt]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/sin]])
+ROM 4 intro f9jc 0 # Romans 04 General Notes
## Structure and formatting
Some translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with verses 7-8 of this chapter, which are words from the Old Testament.
## Special concepts in this chapter
### The purpose of the law of Moses
Paul builds upon material from chapter 3. He explains how Abraham, the father of Israel, was justified. Even Abraham could not be justified by what he did. Obeying the law of Moses does not make a person right with God. Obeying God’s commands is a way a person shows they believe in God. People have always been justified only by faith. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/justice]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/lawofmoses]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/faith]])
### Circumcision
Circumcision was important to the Israelites. It identified a person as a descendant of Abraham. It was also a sign of the covenant between Abraham and Yahweh. However, no person was justified only by being circumcised. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/circumcise]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/covenant]])
## Important figures of speech in this chapter
### Rhetorical Questions
Paul uses rhetorical questions in this chapter. It appears the intent of these rhetorical questions is to make the reader see their sin so they will trust in Jesus. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/guilt]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/sin]])
ROM 4 1 gw29 0 Connecting Statement: Paul confirms that even in the past believers were made right with God by faith and not by the law.
ROM 4 1 gwp3 figs-rquestion τί οὖν ἐροῦμεν, εὑρηκέναι Ἀβραὰμ τὸν προπάτορα ἡμῶν κατὰ σάρκα 1 What then will we say that Abraham, our forefather according to the flesh, found? Paul uses the question to catch the attention of the reader and to start talking about something new. Alternate translation: “This is what Abraham our physical ancestor found” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
ROM 4 3 w9i5 figs-rquestion τί γὰρ ἡ Γραφὴ λέγει 1 For what does the scripture say Paul uses this question to add emphasis. He speaks of the Scriptures as if they were alive and could talk. Alternate translation: “For we can read in the scripture” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
@@ -317,7 +317,7 @@ ROM 4 24 pfc9 figs-exclusive δι’ ἡμᾶς 1 for us The word **us** refers
ROM 4 24 nh4k figs-activepassive καὶ δι’ ἡμᾶς, οἷς μέλλει λογίζεσθαι, τοῖς πιστεύουσιν 1 also for us, for whom it will be counted, we who believe You can translate this in an active form. Alternate translation: “It was also for our benefit, because God will consider us righteous also if we believe” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
ROM 4 24 a6c7 figs-idiom τὸν ἐγείραντα Ἰησοῦν, τὸν Κύριον ἡμῶν, ἐκ νεκρῶν 1 him who raised Jesus our Lord from the dead **Raised…from the dead** here is an idiom for “caused to live again.” Alternate translation: “him who caused Jesus our Lord to live again” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
ROM 4 25 cca1 figs-activepassive ὃς παρεδόθη διὰ τὰ παραπτώματα ἡμῶν, καὶ ἠγέρθη διὰ τὴν δικαίωσιν ἡμῶν 1 who was delivered up for our trespasses and was raised for our justification You can translate this in an active form. Alternate translation: “whom God gave over to enemies for our trespasses and whom God brought back to life so he could make us right with him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
-ROM 5 intro i1dt 0 # Romans 05 General Notes
## Structure and formatting
Many scholars view verses 12-17 as some of the most important, but difficult, verses in Scripture to understand. Some of their richness and meaning has likely been lost while being translated from how the original Greek was constructed.
## Special concepts in this chapter
### Results of justification
How Paul explains the results of our being justified is an important part of this chapter. These results include having peace with God, having access to God, being confident about our future, being able to rejoice when suffering, being eternally saved, and being reconciled with God. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/justice]])
### “All sinned”
Scholars are divided over what Paul meant in verse 12: “And death spread to all people, because all sinned.” Some believe that all of mankind was present in the “seed of Adam.” So, as Adam is the father of all mankind, all of mankind was present when Adam sinned. Others believe that Adam served as a representative head for mankind. So when he sinned, all of mankind “fell” as a result. Whether people today played an active or passive role in Adam’s original sin is one way these views differ. Other passages will help one decide. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/other/seed]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/sin]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
### The second Adam
Adam was the first man and the first “son” of God. He was created by God. He brought sin and death into the world by eating the forbidden fruit. Paul describes Jesus as the “second Adam” in this chapter and the true son of God. He brings life and overcame sin and death by dying on the cross. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/sonofgod]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/other/death]])
+ROM 5 intro i1dt 0 # Romans 05 General Notes
## Structure and formatting
Many scholars view verses 12-17 as some of the most important, but difficult, verses in Scripture to understand. Some of their richness and meaning has likely been lost while being translated from how the original Greek was constructed.
## Special concepts in this chapter
### Results of justification
How Paul explains the results of our being justified is an important part of this chapter. These results include having peace with God, having access to God, being confident about our future, being able to rejoice when suffering, being eternally saved, and being reconciled with God. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/justice]])
### “All sinned”
Scholars are divided over what Paul meant in verse 12: “And death spread to all people, because all sinned.” Some believe that all of mankind was present in the “seed of Adam.” So, as Adam is the father of all mankind, all of mankind was present when Adam sinned. Others believe that Adam served as a representative head for mankind. So when he sinned, all of mankind “fell” as a result. Whether people today played an active or passive role in Adam’s original sin is one way these views differ. Other passages will help one decide. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/other/seed]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/sin]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
### The second Adam
Adam was the first man and the first “son” of God. He was created by God. He brought sin and death into the world by eating the forbidden fruit. Paul describes Jesus as the “second Adam” in this chapter and the true son of God. He brings life and overcame sin and death by dying on the cross. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/sonofgod]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/other/death]])
ROM 5 1 xmp3 0 Connecting Statement: Paul begins to tell many different things that happen when God makes believers right with him.
ROM 5 1 age4 δικαιωθέντες οὖν 1 Since we are justified “Because we are justified”
ROM 5 1 s6xd figs-exclusive …ἡμῶν 1 we…our All occurrences of “we” and “our” refer to all believers and should be inclusive. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
@@ -375,7 +375,7 @@ ROM 5 21 wmy8 figs-personification ὥσπερ ἐβασίλευσεν ἡ ἁμ
ROM 5 21 w4ut figs-personification οὕτως καὶ ἡ χάρις βασιλεύσῃ διὰ δικαιοσύνης, εἰς ζωὴν αἰώνιον διὰ Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ τοῦ Κυρίου ἡμῶν 1 even so grace might rule through righteousness for everlasting life through Jesus Christ our Lord Paul speaks of **grace** here as if it were a king that ruled. Alternate translation: “grace gave people everlasting life through the righteousness of Jesus Christ our Lord” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
ROM 5 21 m5by figs-personification οὕτως…ἡ χάρις βασιλεύσῃ διὰ δικαιοσύνης 1 so grace might rule through righteousness Paul speaks of **grace** here as if it were a king that ruled. The word **righteousness** refers to God’s ability to make people right with him. Alternate translation: “so God might give his free gift to people to make them right with him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
ROM 5 21 ew1b figs-exclusive τοῦ Κυρίου ἡμῶν 1 our Lord Paul includes himself, his readers, and all believers. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
-ROM 6 intro v522 0 # Romans 06 General Notes
## Structure and formatting
Paul begins this chapter by answering how someone might hypothetically object to what he taught in Chapter 5. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hypo]])
## Special concepts in this chapter
### Against the Law
In this chapter, Paul refutes the teaching that Christians can live however they want after they are saved. Scholars call this “antinomianism” or being “against the law.” To motivate godly living, Paul recalls the great price Jesus paid for a Christian to be saved. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/save]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/godly]])
### Servants of sin
Before believing in Jesus, sin enslaves people. God frees Christians from serving sin. They are able to choose to serve Christ in their lives. Paul explains that when Christians choose to sin, they willingly choose to sin. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/faith]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/sin]])
### Fruit
This chapter uses the imagery of fruit. The image of fruit usually refers to a person’s faith producing good works in their life. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/other/fruit]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/righteous]])
## Important figures of speech in this chapter
### Rhetorical Questions
Paul uses rhetorical questions in this chapter. It appears the intent of these rhetorical questions is to make the reader see their sin so they will trust in Jesus. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/guilt]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/sin]])
## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter
### Death
Paul uses “death” many different ways in this chapter: physical death, spiritual death, sin reigning in the heart of man, and to end something. He contrasts sin and death with the new life provided by Christ and the new way Christians are supposed to live after they are saved. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/other/death]])
+ROM 6 intro v522 0 # Romans 06 General Notes
## Structure and formatting
Paul begins this chapter by answering how someone might hypothetically object to what he taught in Chapter 5. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hypo]])
## Special concepts in this chapter
### Against the Law
In this chapter, Paul refutes the teaching that Christians can live however they want after they are saved. Scholars call this “antinomianism” or being “against the law.” To motivate godly living, Paul recalls the great price Jesus paid for a Christian to be saved. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/save]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/godly]])
### Servants of sin
Before believing in Jesus, sin enslaves people. God frees Christians from serving sin. They are able to choose to serve Christ in their lives. Paul explains that when Christians choose to sin, they willingly choose to sin. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/faith]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/sin]])
### Fruit
This chapter uses the imagery of fruit. The image of fruit usually refers to a person’s faith producing good works in their life. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/other/fruit]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/righteous]])
## Important figures of speech in this chapter
### Rhetorical Questions
Paul uses rhetorical questions in this chapter. It appears the intent of these rhetorical questions is to make the reader see their sin so they will trust in Jesus. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/guilt]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/sin]])
## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter
### Death
Paul uses “death” many different ways in this chapter: physical death, spiritual death, sin reigning in the heart of man, and to end something. He contrasts sin and death with the new life provided by Christ and the new way Christians are supposed to live after they are saved. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/other/death]])
ROM 6 1 x13n 0 Connecting Statement: Under grace, Paul tells those who believe in Jesus to live a new life as though dead to sin and alive to God.
ROM 6 1 pvg3 figs-rquestion τί οὖν ἐροῦμεν? ἐπιμένωμεν τῇ ἁμαρτίᾳ, ἵνα ἡ χάρις πλεονάσῃ 1 What then will we say? Should we continue in sin so that grace may abound? Paul asks these rhetorical questions to get the attention of his readers. Alternate translation: “So, what should we say about all of this? We certainly should not keep on sinning so that God will give us more and more grace! (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
ROM 6 1 fj9e figs-exclusive ἐροῦμεν 1 we say The pronoun “we” refers to Paul, his readers, and other people. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
@@ -438,7 +438,7 @@ ROM 6 22 npf3 figs-metaphor ἔχετε τὸν καρπὸν ὑμῶν εἰς
ROM 6 22 a478 τὸ δὲ τέλος ζωὴν αἰώνιον 1 The result is eternal life “The result of all of this is that you will live forever with God”
ROM 6 23 ze3f τὰ γὰρ ὀψώνια τῆς ἁμαρτίας θάνατος 1 For the wages of sin are death The word **wages** refers to a payment given to someone for their work. “For if you serve sin, you will receive spiritual death as payment” or “For if you continue sinning, God will punish you with spiritual death”
ROM 6 23 pf3s τὸ δὲ χάρισμα τοῦ Θεοῦ ζωὴ αἰώνιος ἐν Χριστῷ Ἰησοῦ, τῷ Κυρίῳ ἡμῶν 1 but the gift of God is eternal life in Christ Jesus our Lord “but God gives eternal life to those who belong to Christ Jesus our Lord”
-ROM 7 intro fl1y 0 # Romans 07 General Notes
## Structure and formatting
### “Or do you not know”
Paul uses this phrase to discuss a new topic, while connecting what follows with the previous teaching.
## Special concepts in this chapter
### “We have been released from the law”
Paul explains that the law of Moses is no longer in effect. While this is true, the timeless principles behind the law reflect the character of God. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/lawofmoses]])
## Important figures of speech in this chapter
### Marriage
Scripture commonly uses marriage as a metaphor. Here Paul uses it to describe how the church relates to the law of Moses and now to Christ. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter
### Flesh
This is a complex issue. “Flesh” is possibly a metaphor for our sinful nature. Paul is not teaching that our physical bodies are sinful. Paul appears to be teaching that as long as Christians are alive (“in the flesh”), we will continue to sin. But our new nature will be fighting against our old nature. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/flesh]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/sin]])
+ROM 7 intro fl1y 0 # Romans 07 General Notes
## Structure and formatting
### “Or do you not know”
Paul uses this phrase to discuss a new topic, while connecting what follows with the previous teaching.
## Special concepts in this chapter
### “We have been released from the law”
Paul explains that the law of Moses is no longer in effect. While this is true, the timeless principles behind the law reflect the character of God. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/lawofmoses]])
## Important figures of speech in this chapter
### Marriage
Scripture commonly uses marriage as a metaphor. Here Paul uses it to describe how the church relates to the law of Moses and now to Christ. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter
### Flesh
This is a complex issue. “Flesh” is possibly a metaphor for our sinful nature. Paul is not teaching that our physical bodies are sinful. Paul appears to be teaching that as long as Christians are alive (“in the flesh”), we will continue to sin. But our new nature will be fighting against our old nature. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/flesh]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/sin]])
ROM 7 1 nj1k 0 Connecting Statement: Paul explains how the law controls those who want to live under the law.
ROM 7 1 mk7w figs-rquestion ἢ ἀγνοεῖτε, ἀδελφοί (γινώσκουσιν γὰρ νόμον λαλῶ), ὅτι ὁ νόμος κυριεύει τοῦ ἀνθρώπου ἐφ’ ὅσον χρόνον ζῇ? 1 do you not know, brothers…that the law controls a person for as long as he lives? Paul asks this question to add emphasis. Alternate translation: “So you certainly know that people have to obey laws only while they are alive” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
ROM 7 1 r9fl ἀδελφοί 1 brothers Here this means fellow Christians, including both men and women.
@@ -505,7 +505,7 @@ ROM 7 24 nu6u με ῥύσεται 1 deliver me “rescue me”
ROM 7 24 md8e figs-metaphor τοῦ σώματος τοῦ θανάτου τούτου 1 this body of death This is a metaphor that means a body that will experience physical death. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
ROM 7 25 w9ui χάρις τῷ Θεῷ διὰ Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ τοῦ Κυρίου ἡμῶν 1 But thanks be to God through Jesus Christ our Lord This is the answer to the question in 7:24.
ROM 7 25 adx1 figs-metaphor ἄρα οὖν αὐτὸς ἐγὼ, τῷ μὲν νοῒ δουλεύω νόμῳ Θεοῦ; τῇ δὲ σαρκὶ, νόμῳ ἁμαρτίας 1 So then, I myself serve the law of God with my mind. However, with the flesh I serve the principle of sin The mind and flesh are used here to show how they compare to serve either God’s law or the principle of sin. With the mind or intellect one can choose to please and obey God and with the flesh or physical nature to serve sin. Alternate translation: “My mind chooses to please God, but my flesh chooses to obey sin” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
-ROM 8 intro ev4r 0 # Romans 08 General Notes
## Structure and formatting
The first verse of this chapter is a transitional sentence. Paul concludes his teaching of Chapter 7 and leads into the words of Chapter 8.
Some translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with verse 36. Paul quotes these words from the Old Testament.
## Special concepts in this chapter
### Indwelling of the Spirit
The Holy Spirit is said to live inside a person or inside their heart. If the Spirit is present, this signifies that a person is saved. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/save]])
### “These are sons of God”
Jesus is the Son of God in a unique way. God also adopts Christians to be his children. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/sonofgod]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/adoption]])
### Predestination
Many scholars believe Paul in this chapter teaches on a subject known as “predestination.” This is related to the biblical concept of “predestine.” Some take this to indicate that God has, from before the foundation of the world, chosen some to be eternally saved. Christians have different views on what the Bible teaches on this subject. So translators need to take extra care when translating this chapter, especially with regards to elements of causation. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/predestine]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/save]])
## Important figures of speech in this chapter
### Metaphor
Paul poetically presents his teaching in verses 38 and 39 in the form of an extended metaphor. He explains that nothing can separate a person from the love of God in Jesus. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter
### No condemnation
This phrase must be translated carefully to avoid doctrinal confusion. People are still guilty of their sin. God disapproves of acting sinfully, even after believing in Jesus. God still punishes the sins of believers, but Jesus has paid the punishment for their sin. This is what Paul expresses here. The word “condemn” has several possible meanings. Here Paul emphasizes that people who believe in Jesus are no longer punished eternally for their sin by being “condemned to hell.” (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/guilt]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/faith]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/condemn]])
### Flesh
This is a complex issue. “Flesh” is possibly a metaphor for our sinful nature. Paul is not teaching that our physical bodies are sinful. Paul appears to be teaching that as long as Christians are alive (“in the flesh”), we will continue to sin. But our new nature will be fighting against our old nature. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/flesh]])
+ROM 8 intro ev4r 0 # Romans 08 General Notes
## Structure and formatting
The first verse of this chapter is a transitional sentence. Paul concludes his teaching of Chapter 7 and leads into the words of Chapter 8.
Some translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with verse 36. Paul quotes these words from the Old Testament.
## Special concepts in this chapter
### Indwelling of the Spirit
The Holy Spirit is said to live inside a person or inside their heart. If the Spirit is present, this signifies that a person is saved. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/save]])
### “These are sons of God”
Jesus is the Son of God in a unique way. God also adopts Christians to be his children. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/sonofgod]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/adoption]])
### Predestination
Many scholars believe Paul in this chapter teaches on a subject known as “predestination.” This is related to the biblical concept of “predestine.” Some take this to indicate that God has, from before the foundation of the world, chosen some to be eternally saved. Christians have different views on what the Bible teaches on this subject. So translators need to take extra care when translating this chapter, especially with regards to elements of causation. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/predestine]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/save]])
## Important figures of speech in this chapter
### Metaphor
Paul poetically presents his teaching in verses 38 and 39 in the form of an extended metaphor. He explains that nothing can separate a person from the love of God in Jesus. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter
### No condemnation
This phrase must be translated carefully to avoid doctrinal confusion. People are still guilty of their sin. God disapproves of acting sinfully, even after believing in Jesus. God still punishes the sins of believers, but Jesus has paid the punishment for their sin. This is what Paul expresses here. The word “condemn” has several possible meanings. Here Paul emphasizes that people who believe in Jesus are no longer punished eternally for their sin by being “condemned to hell.” (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/guilt]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/faith]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/condemn]])
### Flesh
This is a complex issue. “Flesh” is possibly a metaphor for our sinful nature. Paul is not teaching that our physical bodies are sinful. Paul appears to be teaching that as long as Christians are alive (“in the flesh”), we will continue to sin. But our new nature will be fighting against our old nature. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/flesh]])
ROM 8 1 xq2y 0 Connecting Statement: Paul gives the answer to the struggle he has with sin and good.
ROM 8 1 xw65 figs-explicit οὐδὲν ἄρα νῦν κατάκριμα τοῖς ἐν Χριστῷ Ἰησοῦ 1 There is therefore now no condemnation for those who are in Christ Jesus Here, **condemnation** refers to punishing people. Alternate translation: “God will not condemn and punish those who are joined to Christ Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
ROM 8 1 i12t ἄρα 1 therefore “for that reason” or “because what I have just told you is true”
@@ -602,7 +602,7 @@ ROM 8 37 wcm6 figs-explicit διὰ τοῦ ἀγαπήσαντος ἡμᾶς 1
ROM 8 38 fch1 πέπεισμαι 1 I have been convinced “I am convinced” or “I am confident”
ROM 8 38 js9q ἀρχαὶ 1 governments Possible meanings are (1) demons or (2) human kings and rulers.
ROM 8 38 q7ti οὔτε δυνάμεις 1 nor powers Possible meanings are (1) spiritual beings with power or (2) human beings with power.
-ROM 9 intro w6f4 0 # Romans 09 General Notes
## Structure and formatting
In this chapter, Paul changes what he is teaching about. In Chapters 9-11, he focuses on the nation of Israel.
Some translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with verses 25-29 and 33 of this chapter. Paul quotes all of these words from the Old Testament.
## Special concepts in this chapter
### Flesh
Paul uses the word “flesh” in this chapter only to refer to Israelites, people physically descending from Abraham through Jacob, who God named Israel. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/flesh]])
In other chapters, Paul uses the word “brother” to mean fellow Christians. However, in this chapter, he uses “my brothers” to mean his kinsmen the Israelites.
Paul refers to those who believe in Jesus as “children of God” and “children of the promise.”
### Predestination
Many scholars believe Paul in this chapter teaches extensively on a subject known as “predestination.” This is related to the biblical concept of “predestine.” Some take this to indicate that God has, from before the foundation of the world, chosen some people to eternally save. Christians have different views on what the Bible teaches on this subject. So translators need to take extra care when translating this chapter. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/predestine]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/save]])
### Important figures of speech in this chapter
### Stone of stumbling
Paul explains that while some Gentiles accepted Jesus as their savior by believing in him, most Jews were trying to earn their salvation and so rejected Jesus. Paul, quoting the Old Testament, describes Jesus as a stone that the Jews stumble over when walking. This “stone of stumbling” causes them to “fall.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter
### “It is not everyone in Israel who truly belongs to Israel”
Paul uses the word “Israel” in this verse with two different meanings. The first “Israel” means the physical descendants of Abraham through Jacob. The second “Israel” means those who are God’s people through faith. The UST reflects this.
+ROM 9 intro w6f4 0 # Romans 09 General Notes
## Structure and formatting
In this chapter, Paul changes what he is teaching about. In Chapters 9-11, he focuses on the nation of Israel.
Some translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with verses 25-29 and 33 of this chapter. Paul quotes all of these words from the Old Testament.
## Special concepts in this chapter
### Flesh
Paul uses the word “flesh” in this chapter only to refer to Israelites, people physically descending from Abraham through Jacob, who God named Israel. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/flesh]])
In other chapters, Paul uses the word “brother” to mean fellow Christians. However, in this chapter, he uses “my brothers” to mean his kinsmen the Israelites.
Paul refers to those who believe in Jesus as “children of God” and “children of the promise.”
### Predestination
Many scholars believe Paul in this chapter teaches extensively on a subject known as “predestination.” This is related to the biblical concept of “predestine.” Some take this to indicate that God has, from before the foundation of the world, chosen some people to eternally save. Christians have different views on what the Bible teaches on this subject. So translators need to take extra care when translating this chapter. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/predestine]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/save]])
### Important figures of speech in this chapter
### Stone of stumbling
Paul explains that while some Gentiles accepted Jesus as their savior by believing in him, most Jews were trying to earn their salvation and so rejected Jesus. Paul, quoting the Old Testament, describes Jesus as a stone that the Jews stumble over when walking. This “stone of stumbling” causes them to “fall.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter
### “It is not everyone in Israel who truly belongs to Israel”
Paul uses the word “Israel” in this verse with two different meanings. The first “Israel” means the physical descendants of Abraham through Jacob. The second “Israel” means those who are God’s people through faith. The UST reflects this.
ROM 9 1 b89f 0 Connecting Statement: Paul tells of his personal desire that the people of the nation of Israel will be saved. Then he emphasizes the different ways in which God has prepared them to believe.
ROM 9 1 yg93 figs-doublet ἀλήθειαν λέγω ἐν Χριστῷ, οὐ ψεύδομαι 1 I tell the truth in Christ. I do not lie These two expressions mean basically the same thing. Paul uses them to emphasize that he is telling the truth. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
ROM 9 1 h9mp συνμαρτυρούσης μοι τῆς συνειδήσεώς μου ἐν Πνεύματι Ἁγίῳ 1 my conscience bears witness with me in the Holy Spirit “the Holy Spirit controls my conscience and confirms what I say”
@@ -681,7 +681,7 @@ ROM 9 33 kx9c figs-explicit καθὼς γέγραπται 1 as it has been writ
ROM 9 33 dy6x figs-metonymy ἐν Σιὼν 1 in Zion Here, **Zion** is a metonym that represents Israel. Alternate translation: “in Israel” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
ROM 9 33 u3dj figs-doublet λίθον προσκόμματος, καὶ πέτραν σκανδάλου 1 stone of stumbling and a rock of offense Both of these phrases mean basically the same thing and are metaphors that refer to Jesus and his death on the cross. It was as if the people stumbled over a stone because they were disgusted when they considered Jesus’ death on the cross. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
ROM 9 33 tu4i πιστεύων ἐπ’ αὐτῷ 1 believes in it Because the stone stands for a person, you may need to translate “believes in him.”
-ROM 10 intro c2li 0 # Romans 10 General Notes
## Structure and formatting
Some translations set prose quotations from the Old Testament farther to the right on the page than the rest of the text. The ULT does this with the quoted words in verse 8.
Some translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with verses 18-20 of this chapter, which are words from the Old Testament.
## Special concepts in this chapter
### God’s righteousness
Paul teaches here that while many Jews earnestly tried to be righteous, they did not succeed. We cannot earn God’s righteousness. God gives us Jesus’ righteousness when we believe in him. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/righteous]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/faith]])
## Important figures of speech in this chapter
### Rhetorical questions
Paul uses many rhetorical questions in this chapter. He does this to convince his readers that God does not save only the Hebrew people, so Christians must be ready to go and share the gospel with the whole world. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/save]])
## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter
### “I will provoke you to jealousy by what is not a nation”
Paul uses this prophecy to explain that God will use the church to make the Hebrew people jealous. This is so they will seek God and believe the gospel. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/prophet]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/jealous]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+ROM 10 intro c2li 0 # Romans 10 General Notes
## Structure and formatting
Some translations set prose quotations from the Old Testament farther to the right on the page than the rest of the text. The ULT does this with the quoted words in verse 8.
Some translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with verses 18-20 of this chapter, which are words from the Old Testament.
## Special concepts in this chapter
### God’s righteousness
Paul teaches here that while many Jews earnestly tried to be righteous, they did not succeed. We cannot earn God’s righteousness. God gives us Jesus’ righteousness when we believe in him. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/righteous]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/faith]])
## Important figures of speech in this chapter
### Rhetorical questions
Paul uses many rhetorical questions in this chapter. He does this to convince his readers that God does not save only the Hebrew people, so Christians must be ready to go and share the gospel with the whole world. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/save]])
## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter
### “I will provoke you to jealousy by what is not a nation”
Paul uses this prophecy to explain that God will use the church to make the Hebrew people jealous. This is so they will seek God and believe the gospel. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/prophet]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/jealous]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
ROM 10 1 pi37 0 Connecting Statement: Paul continues stating his desire for Israel to believe but emphasizes that both those who are Jews as well as everyone else can only be saved by faith in Jesus.
ROM 10 1 hj4b ἀδελφοί 1 Brothers Here this means fellow Christians, including both men and women.
ROM 10 1 tq7k figs-metonymy ἡ μὲν εὐδοκία τῆς ἐμῆς καρδίας 1 my heart’s desire Here, **heart** is a metonym for a person’s emotions or inner being. Alternate translation: “my greatest desire” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
@@ -742,7 +742,7 @@ ROM 10 20 t78j ἐμφανὴς ἐγενόμην 1 I appeared “I made myself
ROM 10 20 k8pp λέγει 1 he says “He” refers to God, who is speaking through Isaiah.
ROM 10 21 hw4w ὅλην τὴν ἡμέραν 1 All the day long This phrase is used to emphasize God’s continual effort. “continually”
ROM 10 21 il8s ἐξεπέτασα τὰς χεῖράς μου πρὸς λαὸν ἀπειθοῦντα καὶ ἀντιλέγοντα 1 I reached out my hands to a disobedient and stubborn people “I tried to welcome you and to help you, but you refused my help and continued to disobey”
-ROM 11 intro e9qz 0 # Romans 11 General Notes
## Structure and formatting
Some translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with verses 9-10, 26-27, and 34-35, which are words from the Old Testament.
## Special concepts in this chapter
### Grafting
Paul uses the image of “grafting” to refer to the place of the Gentiles and Jews in the plans of God. Making one plant to be permanently part of another plant is called “grafting.” Paul uses the picture of God grafting the Gentiles as a wild branch into his saving plans. But God has not forgotten about the Jews, who are spoken of as the natural plant. God will also save Jews who believe in Jesus.
## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter
### “Did God reject his people? May it never be”
Whether Israel (the physical descendants of Abraham, Isaac and Jacob) has a future in the plans of God, or if they have been replaced in the plans of God by the church, is a major theological issue in Chapters 9-11. This phrase is an important part of this section of Romans. It seems to indicate that Israel remains distinct from the church. Not all scholars arrive at this conclusion. Despite their currently rejecting Jesus as their Messiah, Israel has not exhausted the grace and mercy of God. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/christ]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/grace]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/mercy]])
+ROM 11 intro e9qz 0 # Romans 11 General Notes
## Structure and formatting
Some translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with verses 9-10, 26-27, and 34-35, which are words from the Old Testament.
## Special concepts in this chapter
### Grafting
Paul uses the image of “grafting” to refer to the place of the Gentiles and Jews in the plans of God. Making one plant to be permanently part of another plant is called “grafting.” Paul uses the picture of God grafting the Gentiles as a wild branch into his saving plans. But God has not forgotten about the Jews, who are spoken of as the natural plant. God will also save Jews who believe in Jesus.
## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter
### “Did God reject his people? May it never be”
Whether Israel (the physical descendants of Abraham, Isaac and Jacob) has a future in the plans of God, or if they have been replaced in the plans of God by the church, is a major theological issue in Chapters 9-11. This phrase is an important part of this section of Romans. It seems to indicate that Israel remains distinct from the church. Not all scholars arrive at this conclusion. Despite their currently rejecting Jesus as their Messiah, Israel has not exhausted the grace and mercy of God. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/christ]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/grace]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/mercy]])
ROM 11 1 p2h9 0 Connecting Statement: Though Israel as a nation has rejected God, God wants them to understand salvation comes by grace without works.
ROM 11 1 wp35 λέγω οὖν 1 I say then “I, Paul, say then”
ROM 11 1 p4zd figs-rquestion μὴ ἀπώσατο ὁ Θεὸς τὸν λαὸν αὐτοῦ 1 did God reject his people? Paul asks this question so that he can answer the questions of other Jews who are upset that God has included the Gentiles among his people, while the hearts of the Jewish people have been hardened. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
@@ -839,7 +839,7 @@ ROM 11 34 yy52 figs-metonymy νοῦν Κυρίου 1 the mind of the Lord Here,
ROM 11 35 j5cn figs-rquestion ἢ τίς προέδωκεν αὐτῷ, καὶ ἀνταποδοθήσεται αὐτῷ 1 Or who has first given anything to God, that God must repay him?” Paul uses this question to emphasize his point. Alternate translation: “No one has ever given anything to God that he did not first receive from God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
ROM 11 36 abc1 writing-pronouns ἐξ αὐτοῦ, καὶ δι’ αὐτοῦ, καὶ εἰς αὐτὸν, τὰ πάντα. αὐτῷ 1 For from him…through him…to him Here, all occurrences of “him” refers to God. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-you]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
ROM 11 36 rpx6 figs-explicit αὐτῷ ἡ δόξα εἰς τοὺς αἰῶνας 1 To him be the glory forever This expresses Paul’s desire for all people to honor God. You can make this explicit in your translation. Alternate translation: “May all people honor him forever” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-ROM 12 intro aky9 0 # Romans 12 General Notes
## Structure and formatting
Some translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with the words of verse 20, which are from the Old Testament.
Many scholars believe Paul uses the word **therefore** in [Romans 12:1](../../rom/12/01.md) to refer back to all of Chapters 1-11. Having carefully explained the Christian gospel, Paul now explains how Christians should live in light of these great truths. Chapters 12-16 focus on living out one’s Christian faith. Paul uses many different commands in these chapters to give these practical instructions. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/faith]])
## Special concepts in this chapter
### Christian living
Under the law of Moses, people were required to offer temple sacrifices of animals or grain. Now Christians are required to live their lives as a type of sacrifice to God. Physical sacrifices are no longer required. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/lawofmoses]])
## Important figures of speech in this chapter
### Body of Christ
The body of Christ is an important metaphor or image used in Scripture to refer to the church. Each church member plays a unique and important function. Christians need each other. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/body]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
+ROM 12 intro aky9 0 # Romans 12 General Notes
## Structure and formatting
Some translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with the words of verse 20, which are from the Old Testament.
Many scholars believe Paul uses the word **therefore** in [Romans 12:1](../../rom/12/01.md) to refer back to all of Chapters 1-11. Having carefully explained the Christian gospel, Paul now explains how Christians should live in light of these great truths. Chapters 12-16 focus on living out one’s Christian faith. Paul uses many different commands in these chapters to give these practical instructions. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/faith]])
## Special concepts in this chapter
### Christian living
Under the law of Moses, people were required to offer temple sacrifices of animals or grain. Now Christians are required to live their lives as a type of sacrifice to God. Physical sacrifices are no longer required. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/lawofmoses]])
## Important figures of speech in this chapter
### Body of Christ
The body of Christ is an important metaphor or image used in Scripture to refer to the church. Each church member plays a unique and important function. Christians need each other. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/body]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
ROM 12 1 rhs3 0 Connecting Statement: Paul tells what the life of a believer should be and how believers should serve.
ROM 12 1 d2y3 figs-explicit παρακαλῶ οὖν ὑμᾶς, ἀδελφοί, διὰ τῶν οἰκτιρμῶν τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 I urge you therefore, brothers, by the mercies of God Here, **brothers** refers to fellow believers, both male and female. Alternate translation: “Fellow believers, because of the great mercy that God has given you I very much want you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
ROM 12 1 w1mz figs-synecdoche παραστῆσαι τὰ σώματα ὑμῶν θυσίαν ζῶσαν 1 to present your bodies a living sacrifice Here Paul uses the word **bodies** to refer to the whole person. Paul is comparing a believer in Christ who completely obeys God to the animals that the Jews killed and then offered to God. Alternate translation: “to offer yourselves completely to God while you are alive as if you were a dead sacrifice on a temple altar” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
@@ -887,7 +887,7 @@ ROM 12 20 e49j ψώμιζε αὐτόν 1 feed him “give him some food”
ROM 12 20 wce6 figs-metaphor ἄνθρακας πυρὸς σωρεύσεις ἐπὶ τὴν κεφαλὴν αὐτοῦ 1 You will heap coals of fire on his head Paul speaks of the blessings that the enemies will receive as if someone were pouring hot coals on their heads. Possible meanings are (1) “make the person who harmed you feel badly about how he has mistreated you” or (2) “give God a reason to judge your enemy more harshly.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
ROM 12 21 q761 figs-personification μὴ νικῶ ὑπὸ τοῦ κακοῦ, ἀλλὰ νίκα ἐν τῷ ἀγαθῷ τὸ κακόν 1 Do not be overcome by evil, but overcome evil with good Paul describes “evil” as though it were a person. You can translate this in an active form. Alternate translation: “Do not let those who are evil defeat you, but defeat those who are evil by doing what is good” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
ROM 12 21 p7fd figs-you μὴ νικῶ ὑπὸ τοῦ κακοῦ, ἀλλὰ νίκα…τὸ κακόν 1 Do not be overcome by evil, but overcome evil These verbs are addressed as to one person and so are singular. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-you]])
-ROM 13 intro l4q7 0 # Romans 13 General Notes
## Structure and formatting
In the first part of this chapter, Paul teaches Christians to obey rulers who govern them. At that time, ungodly Roman rulers governed the land. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/godly]])
## Special concepts in this chapter
### Ungodly rulers
When Paul teaches about obeying rulers, some readers will find this difficult to understand, especially in places where rulers persecute the church. Christians must obey their rulers as well as obey God, unless the rulers do not allow Christians to do something God explicitly commands them to do. There are times when a believer must submit to these rulers and suffer at their hands. Christians understand that this world is temporary and they will ultimately be with God forever. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/eternity]])
## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter
### Flesh
This is a complex issue. “Flesh” is possibly a metaphor for our sinful nature. Paul is not teaching that our physical bodies are sinful. Paul appears to be teaching that as long as Christians are alive (“in the flesh”), we will continue to sin. But our new nature will be fighting against our old nature. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/flesh]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/sin]])
+ROM 13 intro l4q7 0 # Romans 13 General Notes
## Structure and formatting
In the first part of this chapter, Paul teaches Christians to obey rulers who govern them. At that time, ungodly Roman rulers governed the land. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/godly]])
## Special concepts in this chapter
### Ungodly rulers
When Paul teaches about obeying rulers, some readers will find this difficult to understand, especially in places where rulers persecute the church. Christians must obey their rulers as well as obey God, unless the rulers do not allow Christians to do something God explicitly commands them to do. There are times when a believer must submit to these rulers and suffer at their hands. Christians understand that this world is temporary and they will ultimately be with God forever. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/eternity]])
## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter
### Flesh
This is a complex issue. “Flesh” is possibly a metaphor for our sinful nature. Paul is not teaching that our physical bodies are sinful. Paul appears to be teaching that as long as Christians are alive (“in the flesh”), we will continue to sin. But our new nature will be fighting against our old nature. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/flesh]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/sin]])
ROM 13 1 v5ik 0 Connecting Statement: Paul tells believers how to live under their rulers.
ROM 13 1 b8nf figs-synecdoche πᾶσα ψυχὴ…ὑποτασσέσθω 1 Let every soul be obedient to Here, **soul** is a synecdoche for the whole person. “Every Christian should obey” or “Everyone should obey” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
ROM 13 1 g1by ἐξουσίαις ὑπερεχούσαις 1 higher authorities “government officials”
@@ -933,7 +933,7 @@ ROM 13 13 g117 ζήλῳ 1 jealousy This refers to negative feelings against an
ROM 13 14 sir6 figs-metaphor ἐνδύσασθε τὸν Κύριον Ἰησοῦν Χριστόν 1 put on the Lord Jesus Christ Paul speaks of accepting the moral nature of Christ as if he were our outer clothing that people can see. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
ROM 13 14 j795 ἐνδύσασθε 1 put on If your language has a plural form for commands, use it here.
ROM 13 14 xre7 figs-metonymy τῆς σαρκὸς πρόνοιαν μὴ ποιεῖσθε 1 make no provision for the flesh Here the **flesh** refers to the self-directed nature of people who oppose God. This is the sinful nature of human beings. Alternate translation: “do not allow your old evil heart any opportunity at all for doing wicked things” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
-ROM 14 intro kt8c 0 # Romans 14 General Notes
## Structure and formatting
Some translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with verse 11 of this chapter, which Paul quotes from the Old Testament.
## Special concepts in this chapter
### Weak in faith
Paul teaches that Christians can have real faith and at the same time be “weak in faith” in a given situation. This describes Christians whose faith is immature, not strong, or misunderstood. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/faith]])
### Dietary restrictions
Many religions in the ancient Near East restricted what was eaten. Christians have freedom to eat what they want. But they need to use this freedom wisely, in a way that honors the Lord and does not cause others to sin. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/sin]])
### The judgment seat of God
The judgment seat of God or Christ represents a time when all people, including Christians, will be held accountable for the way they lived their lives.
+ROM 14 intro kt8c 0 # Romans 14 General Notes
## Structure and formatting
Some translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with verse 11 of this chapter, which Paul quotes from the Old Testament.
## Special concepts in this chapter
### Weak in faith
Paul teaches that Christians can have real faith and at the same time be “weak in faith” in a given situation. This describes Christians whose faith is immature, not strong, or misunderstood. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/faith]])
### Dietary restrictions
Many religions in the ancient Near East restricted what was eaten. Christians have freedom to eat what they want. But they need to use this freedom wisely, in a way that honors the Lord and does not cause others to sin. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/sin]])
### The judgment seat of God
The judgment seat of God or Christ represents a time when all people, including Christians, will be held accountable for the way they lived their lives.
ROM 14 1 abm6 0 Connecting Statement: Paul encourages believers to remember that they are answerable to God.
ROM 14 1 jf8v ἀσθενοῦντα τῇ πίστει 1 weak in faith This refers to those who felt guilty over eating and drinking certain things.
ROM 14 1 p697 μὴ εἰς διακρίσεις διαλογισμῶν 1 without giving judgment about arguments “and do not condemn them for their opinions”
@@ -984,7 +984,7 @@ ROM 14 22 r53r μακάριος ὁ μὴ κρίνων ἑαυτὸν ἐν ᾧ
ROM 14 23 s1ph figs-activepassive ὁ δὲ διακρινόμενος, ἐὰν φάγῃ, κατακέκριται 1 He who doubts is condemned if he eats You can translate this in an active form. Alternate translation: “God will say that the person does wrong if he is not sure if it is right to eat a certain food, but he eats it anyway” or “The person who is not sure if it is right to eat a certain food, but then eats it anyway will have a troubled conscience” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
ROM 14 23 yr44 figs-explicit ὅτι οὐκ ἐκ πίστεως 1 because it is not from faith Anything that is **not from faith** is something that God does not want you to do. You can make explicit the full meaning here. Alternate translation: “God will say that he is wrong because he is eating something he believes God does not want him to eat” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
ROM 14 23 tr9i figs-explicit πᾶν δὲ ὃ οὐκ ἐκ πίστεως, ἁμαρτία ἐστίν 1 whatever is not from faith is sin Anything that is **not from faith** is something that God does not want you to do. You can make explicit the full meaning here. Alternate translation: “you are sinning if you do something that you do not believe God wants you to do” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-ROM 15 intro ae9u 0 # Romans 15 General Notes
## Structure and formatting
Some translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with verses 9-11 and 21 of this chapter, which are words from the Old Testament.
Some translations set prose quotations from the Old Testament farther to the right on the page to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with the quoted words in verse 12.
In [Romans 15:14](../../rom/15/14.md), Paul begins to speak more personally. He shifts from teaching to telling of his personal plans.
## Important figures of speech in this chapter
### Strong/Weak
These terms are used to refer to people who are mature and immature in their faith. Paul teaches that those who are strong in faith need to help those who are weak in faith. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/faith]])
+ROM 15 intro ae9u 0 # Romans 15 General Notes
## Structure and formatting
Some translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with verses 9-11 and 21 of this chapter, which are words from the Old Testament.
Some translations set prose quotations from the Old Testament farther to the right on the page to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with the quoted words in verse 12.
In [Romans 15:14](../../rom/15/14.md), Paul begins to speak more personally. He shifts from teaching to telling of his personal plans.
## Important figures of speech in this chapter
### Strong/Weak
These terms are used to refer to people who are mature and immature in their faith. Paul teaches that those who are strong in faith need to help those who are weak in faith. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/faith]])
ROM 15 1 cx66 0 Connecting Statement: Paul concludes this section about believers’ living for others with reminding them how Christ lived.
ROM 15 1 u19s δὲ 1 Now Translate this using the words your language uses to introduce a new idea into an argument.
ROM 15 1 u73x figs-explicit ἡμεῖς, οἱ δυνατοὶ 1 we who are strong Here, **strong** refers to the people who are strong in their faith. They believe that God allows them to eat any kind of food. Alternate translation: “we who are strong in faith” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
@@ -1050,7 +1050,7 @@ ROM 15 30 fy1v συναγωνίσασθαί 1 to strive together with “you wo
ROM 15 31 u7st figs-activepassive ῥυσθῶ ἀπὸ τῶν ἀπειθούντων 1 I may be rescued from those who are disobedient This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: “God may rescue me from those who are disobedient” or “God may keep those who are disobedient from harming me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
ROM 15 31 nw5h figs-explicit καὶ ἡ διακονία μου ἡ εἰς Ἰερουσαλὴμ εὐπρόσδεκτος τοῖς ἁγίοις γένηται 1 and that my service for Jerusalem may be acceptable to the believers Here Paul expresses his desire that the **believers** in **Jerusalem** will gladly accept the money from the believers in Macedonia and Achaia. Alternate translation: “pray that the believers in Jerusalem will be glad to receive the money that I am bringing them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
ROM 15 33 s947 figs-explicit ὁ…Θεὸς τῆς εἰρήνης μετὰ 1 May the God of peace be with The “God of peace” means the God who causes believers to have inner peace. Alternate translation: “I pray that God who causes all of us to have inner peace” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-ROM 16 intro qy96 0 # Romans 16 General Notes
## Structure and formatting
In this chapter, Paul gives personal greetings to some of the Christians in Rome. It was common to end a letter in the ancient Near East with this type of personal greeting.
## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter
Because of the personal nature of this chapter, much of the context is unknown. This will make translation more difficult. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+ROM 16 intro qy96 0 # Romans 16 General Notes
## Structure and formatting
In this chapter, Paul gives personal greetings to some of the Christians in Rome. It was common to end a letter in the ancient Near East with this type of personal greeting.
## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter
Because of the personal nature of this chapter, much of the context is unknown. This will make translation more difficult. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
ROM 16 1 sg6a 0 Connecting Statement: Paul then greets many of the believers in Rome by name.
ROM 16 1 vkg8 συνίστημι δὲ ὑμῖν Φοίβην 1 I commend to you Phoebe “I want you to respect Phoebe”
ROM 16 1 sry4 translate-names Φοίβην 1 Phoebe This is a woman’s name. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
diff --git a/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv b/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv
index 5e06f5b82..ab5a29f70 100644
--- a/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv
+++ b/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv
@@ -1,6 +1,6 @@
Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNote
-1CO front intro e8ey 0 # Introduction to 1 Corinthians
## Part 1: General Introduction
### Outline of the Book of 1 Corinthians
1. Divisions in the church (1:10-4:21)
1. Moral sins and irregularities (5:1-13)
1. Christians taking other Christians to court (6:1-20)
1. Marriage and related matters (7:1-40)
1. Misuse of Christian liberty; food sacrificed to idols, fleeing idolatry; women’s head coverings (8:1-13; 10:1-11:16)
1. Paul’s rights as an apostle (9:1-27)
1. The Lord’s Supper (11:17-34)
1. The gifts of the Holy Spirit (12:1-31)
1. Love (13:1-13)
1. The gifts of the Holy Spirit: prophecy and languages (14:1-40)
1. The resurrection of believers and the resurrection of Christ (15:1-58)
1. Closing: the contribution for Christians in Jerusalem, requests, and personal greetings (16:1-24)
### Who wrote the Book of 1 Corinthians?
Paul wrote 1 Corinthians. Paul was from the city of Tarsus. He had been known as Saul in his early life. Before becoming a Christian, Paul was a Pharisee. He persecuted Christians. After he became a Christian, he traveled several times throughout the Roman Empire telling people about Jesus.
Paul started the church that met in Corinth. He was staying in the city of Ephesus when he wrote this letter.
### What is the Book of 1 Corinthians about?
1 Corinthians is a letter that Paul wrote to the believers who were in the city of Corinth. Paul had heard that there were problems among the believers there. They were arguing with each other. Some of them did not understand some of the Christian teachings. And some of them were behaving badly. In this letter, Paul responded to them and encouraged them to live in a way that pleased God.
### How should the title of this book be translated?
Translators may choose to call this book by its traditional title, “First Corinthians.” Or they may choose a clearer title, such as “Paul’s First Letter to the Church in Corinth.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
## Part 2: Important Religious and Cultural Concepts
### What was the city of Corinth like?
Corinth was a major city located in ancient Greece. Because it was near the Mediterranean Sea, many travelers and traders came to buy and sell goods there. This resulted in the city having people from many different cultures. The city was famous for having people who lived in immoral ways. The people worshipped Aphrodite, the Greek goddess of love. As part of the ceremonies honoring Aphrodite, her worshipers had sexual intercourse with temple prostitutes.
### What was the problem with meat sacrificed to idols?
Many animals were slaughtered and sacrificed to the false gods in Corinth. Priests and worshipers kept some of the meat. Much of the meat was sold in markets. Many Christians disagreed with each other over whether it was right for them to eat this meat, because it had been dedicated to a false god. Paul writes about this problem in 1 Corinthians.
## Part 3: Important Translation Issues
### How are the ideas of “holy” and “sanctify” represented in 1 Corinthians in the ULT?
The scriptures use such words to indicate any one of various ideas. For this reason, it is often difficult for translators to represent them well in their versions. In translating into English, 1 Corinthians ULT uses the following principles:
* Sometimes the meaning in a passage implies moral holiness. Especially important for understanding the gospel is the fact that God considers Christians to be sinless because they are united to Jesus Christ. Another related fact is that God is perfect and faultless. A third fact is that Christians are to conduct themselves in a blameless, faultless manner in life. In these cases, the ULT uses “holy,” “holy God,” “holy ones,” or “holy people.” (See: 1:2; 3:17)
* Sometimes the meaning in a passage indicates a simple reference to Christians without implying any particular role filled by them. In these cases, the ULT uses “believer” or “believers.” (See: 6:1, 2; 14:33; 16:1, 15)
* Sometimes the meaning in the passage implies the idea of someone or something set apart for God alone. In these cases, the ULT uses “set apart,” “dedicated to,” “reserved for,” or “sanctified.” (See: 1:2; 6:11; 7:14, 34)
The UST will often be helpful as translators think about how to represent these ideas in their own versions.
### What is the meaning of “flesh?”
Paul frequently used the terms “flesh” or “fleshly” to refer to Christians who did sinful things. However, it is not the physical world that is evil. Paul also described Christians who lived in a righteous way as “spiritual.” This is because they did what the Holy Spirit taught them to do. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/flesh]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/righteous]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/spirit]])
### What did Paul mean by the expression “in Christ,” “in the Lord,” etc.?
This kind of expression occurs in 1:2, 30, 31; 3:1; 4:10, 15, 17; 6:11, 19; 7:22; 9:1, 2; 11:11, 25; 12:3, 9, 13, 18, 25; 14:16; 15:18, 19, 22, 31, 58; 16:19, 24. Paul meant to express the idea of a very close union with Christ and the believers. At the same time, he often intended other meanings as well. See, for example, “those who have been dedicated in Christ Jesus” (1:2), where Paul specifically meant that Christian believers have been dedicated to Christ.
Please see the introduction to the Book of Romans for more details about this kind of expression.
### What are the major issues in the text of the Book of 1 Corinthians?
For the following verses, modern versions of the Bible differ from older versions. Translators are advised to follow the modern versions of the Bible. However, if in the translators’ region there are Bibles that read according to older versions of the Bible, the translators can follow those. If so, these verses should be put inside square brackets ([]) to indicate that they were probably not original to 1 Corinthians.
* “Therefore glorify God with your body.” Some older versions read “Therefore glorify God with your body and in your spirit, which are God’s.” (6:20)
* “I did this even though I myself was not under the law” (9:20). Some older versions leave this passage out.
* “for the sake of conscience--the conscience of the other man.” Some older versions read “for the sake of conscience: for the earth and everything in it belong to the Lord: the conscience of the other man.” (10:28)
* “and that I give my body to be burned” (13:3). Some older versions read, “and that I give my body so that I might boast.”
* “But if anyone does not recognize this, let him not be recognized” (14:38). Some older versions read, “But if anyone is ignorant of this, let him be ignorant.”
(See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants]])
-1CO 1 intro ud5y 0 # 1 Corinthians 01 General Notes
## Structure and formatting
The first three verses are a greeting. In the ancient Near East, this was a common way of starting a letter.
Some translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with the words of verse 19, which are from the Old Testament.
## Special concepts in this chapter
### Disunity
In this chapter, Paul scolds the church for being divided and for following different apostles. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/apostle]])
### Spiritual gifts
Spiritual gifts are specific supernatural abilities to help the church. The Holy Spirit gives these gifts to Christians after they come to believe in Jesus. Paul lists spiritual gifts in Chapter 12. Some scholars believe the Holy Spirit gave some of these gifts only in the early church to help establish the developing church. Other scholars believe all the gifts of the Spirit are still available to help all Christians throughout the church history. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/faith]])
## Important figures of speech in this chapter
### Idioms
In this chapter, Paul refers to the return of Christ using two different phrases: “the revelation of our Lord Jesus Christ” and “the day of our Lord Jesus Christ.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
### Rhetorical questions
Paul uses rhetorical questions to scold the Corinthians for dividing into factions and for relying on human wisdom. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter
### Stumbling block
A stumbling block is a rock people stumble over. Here it means the Jews find it hard to believe that God allowed his Messiah to be crucified. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
+1CO front intro e8ey 0 # Introduction to 1 Corinthians
## Part 1: General Introduction
### Outline of the Book of 1 Corinthians
1. Divisions in the church (1:10-4:21)
1. Moral sins and irregularities (5:1-13)
1. Christians taking other Christians to court (6:1-20)
1. Marriage and related matters (7:1-40)
1. Misuse of Christian liberty; food sacrificed to idols, fleeing idolatry; women’s head coverings (8:1-13; 10:1-11:16)
1. Paul’s rights as an apostle (9:1-27)
1. The Lord’s Supper (11:17-34)
1. The gifts of the Holy Spirit (12:1-31)
1. Love (13:1-13)
1. The gifts of the Holy Spirit: prophecy and languages (14:1-40)
1. The resurrection of believers and the resurrection of Christ (15:1-58)
1. Closing: the contribution for Christians in Jerusalem, requests, and personal greetings (16:1-24)
### Who wrote the Book of 1 Corinthians?
Paul wrote 1 Corinthians. Paul was from the city of Tarsus. He had been known as Saul in his early life. Before becoming a Christian, Paul was a Pharisee. He persecuted Christians. After he became a Christian, he traveled several times throughout the Roman Empire telling people about Jesus.
Paul started the church that met in Corinth. He was staying in the city of Ephesus when he wrote this letter.
### What is the Book of 1 Corinthians about?
1 Corinthians is a letter that Paul wrote to the believers who were in the city of Corinth. Paul had heard that there were problems among the believers there. They were arguing with each other. Some of them did not understand some of the Christian teachings. And some of them were behaving badly. In this letter, Paul responded to them and encouraged them to live in a way that pleased God.
### How should the title of this book be translated?
Translators may choose to call this book by its traditional title, “First Corinthians.” Or they may choose a clearer title, such as “Paul’s First Letter to the Church in Corinth.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
## Part 2: Important Religious and Cultural Concepts
### What was the city of Corinth like?
Corinth was a major city located in ancient Greece. Because it was near the Mediterranean Sea, many travelers and traders came to buy and sell goods there. This resulted in the city having people from many different cultures. The city was famous for having people who lived in immoral ways. The people worshipped Aphrodite, the Greek goddess of love. As part of the ceremonies honoring Aphrodite, her worshipers had sexual intercourse with temple prostitutes.
### What was the problem with meat sacrificed to idols?
Many animals were slaughtered and sacrificed to the false gods in Corinth. Priests and worshipers kept some of the meat. Much of the meat was sold in markets. Many Christians disagreed with each other over whether it was right for them to eat this meat, because it had been dedicated to a false god. Paul writes about this problem in 1 Corinthians.
## Part 3: Important Translation Issues
### How are the ideas of “holy” and “sanctify” represented in 1 Corinthians in the ULT?
The scriptures use such words to indicate any one of various ideas. For this reason, it is often difficult for translators to represent them well in their versions. In translating into English, 1 Corinthians ULT uses the following principles:
* Sometimes the meaning in a passage implies moral holiness. Especially important for understanding the gospel is the fact that God considers Christians to be sinless because they are united to Jesus Christ. Another related fact is that God is perfect and faultless. A third fact is that Christians are to conduct themselves in a blameless, faultless manner in life. In these cases, the ULT uses “holy,” “holy God,” “holy ones,” or “holy people.” (See: 1:2; 3:17)
* Sometimes the meaning in a passage indicates a simple reference to Christians without implying any particular role filled by them. In these cases, the ULT uses “believer” or “believers.” (See: 6:1, 2; 14:33; 16:1, 15)
* Sometimes the meaning in the passage implies the idea of someone or something set apart for God alone. In these cases, the ULT uses “set apart,” “dedicated to,” “reserved for,” or “sanctified.” (See: 1:2; 6:11; 7:14, 34)
The UST will often be helpful as translators think about how to represent these ideas in their own versions.
### What is the meaning of “flesh?”
Paul frequently used the terms “flesh” or “fleshly” to refer to Christians who did sinful things. However, it is not the physical world that is evil. Paul also described Christians who lived in a righteous way as “spiritual.” This is because they did what the Holy Spirit taught them to do. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/flesh]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/righteous]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/spirit]])
### What did Paul mean by the expression “in Christ,” “in the Lord,” etc.?
This kind of expression occurs in 1:2, 30, 31; 3:1; 4:10, 15, 17; 6:11, 19; 7:22; 9:1, 2; 11:11, 25; 12:3, 9, 13, 18, 25; 14:16; 15:18, 19, 22, 31, 58; 16:19, 24. Paul meant to express the idea of a very close union with Christ and the believers. At the same time, he often intended other meanings as well. See, for example, “those who have been dedicated in Christ Jesus” (1:2), where Paul specifically meant that Christian believers have been dedicated to Christ.
Please see the introduction to the Book of Romans for more details about this kind of expression.
### What are the major issues in the text of the Book of 1 Corinthians?
For the following verses, modern versions of the Bible differ from older versions. Translators are advised to follow the modern versions of the Bible. However, if in the translators’ region there are Bibles that read according to older versions of the Bible, the translators can follow those. If so, these verses should be put inside square brackets ([]) to indicate that they were probably not original to 1 Corinthians.
* “Therefore glorify God with your body.” Some older versions read “Therefore glorify God with your body and in your spirit, which are God’s.” (6:20)
* “I did this even though I myself was not under the law” (9:20). Some older versions leave this passage out.
* “for the sake of conscience--the conscience of the other man.” Some older versions read “for the sake of conscience: for the earth and everything in it belong to the Lord: the conscience of the other man.” (10:28)
* “and that I give my body to be burned” (13:3). Some older versions read, “and that I give my body so that I might boast.”
* “But if anyone does not recognize this, let him not be recognized” (14:38). Some older versions read, “But if anyone is ignorant of this, let him be ignorant.”
(See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants]])
+1CO 1 intro ud5y 0 # 1 Corinthians 01 General Notes
## Structure and formatting
The first three verses are a greeting. In the ancient Near East, this was a common way of starting a letter.
Some translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with the words of verse 19, which are from the Old Testament.
## Special concepts in this chapter
### Disunity
In this chapter, Paul scolds the church for being divided and for following different apostles. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/apostle]])
### Spiritual gifts
Spiritual gifts are specific supernatural abilities to help the church. The Holy Spirit gives these gifts to Christians after they come to believe in Jesus. Paul lists spiritual gifts in Chapter 12. Some scholars believe the Holy Spirit gave some of these gifts only in the early church to help establish the developing church. Other scholars believe all the gifts of the Spirit are still available to help all Christians throughout the church history. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/faith]])
## Important figures of speech in this chapter
### Idioms
In this chapter, Paul refers to the return of Christ using two different phrases: “the revelation of our Lord Jesus Christ” and “the day of our Lord Jesus Christ.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
### Rhetorical questions
Paul uses rhetorical questions to scold the Corinthians for dividing into factions and for relying on human wisdom. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter
### Stumbling block
A stumbling block is a rock people stumble over. Here it means the Jews find it hard to believe that God allowed his Messiah to be crucified. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1CO 1 1 e8j3 Παῦλος 1 Paul Your language may have a particular way of introducing the author of a letter. Alternate translation: “I, Paul”
1CO 1 1 qp1n translate-names Σωσθένης, ὁ ἀδελφὸς 1 Sosthenes our brother This indicates that both Paul and the Corinthians knew Sosthenes. Alternate translation: “Sosthenes the brother you and I know” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1CO 1 2 r9kg τῇ ἐκκλησίᾳ τοῦ Θεοῦ…ἐν Κορίνθῳ 1 to the church of God at Corinth Your language may have a particular way of introducing the intended audience. Alternate translation: “wrote this letter to you in Corinth who believe in God”
@@ -77,7 +77,7 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo
1CO 1 30 a7bs figs-exclusive ἡμῖν 1 us These words refer to Paul, those with him, and the Corinthians. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
1CO 1 30 f1at figs-metonymy Χριστῷ Ἰησοῦ, ὃς ἐγενήθη σοφία ἡμῖν ἀπὸ Θεοῦ 1 Christ Jesus, who was made for us wisdom from God Possible meanings are (1) “Christ Jesus, who has made clear to us how wise God is” or (2) “Christ Jesus, who has given us God’s wisdom.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
1CO 1 31 fym9 ὁ καυχώμενος, ἐν Κυρίῳ καυχάσθω 1 Let the one who boasts, boast in the Lord “If a person boasts, he should boast about how great the Lord is”
-1CO 2 intro k86p 0 # 1 Corinthians 02 General Notes
## Structure and formatting
Some translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with the words of verses 9 and 16, which are from the Old Testament.
## Special concepts in this chapter
### Wisdom
Paul continues the discussion from the first chapter that contrasts human wisdom and God’s wisdom. For Paul, wisdom can be simple and human ideas foolish. He said the wisdom from the Holy Spirit is the only true wisdom. Paul uses the phrase “hidden wisdom” when he refers to previously unknown truths. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/wise]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/foolish]])
+1CO 2 intro k86p 0 # 1 Corinthians 02 General Notes
## Structure and formatting
Some translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with the words of verses 9 and 16, which are from the Old Testament.
## Special concepts in this chapter
### Wisdom
Paul continues the discussion from the first chapter that contrasts human wisdom and God’s wisdom. For Paul, wisdom can be simple and human ideas foolish. He said the wisdom from the Holy Spirit is the only true wisdom. Paul uses the phrase “hidden wisdom” when he refers to previously unknown truths. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/wise]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/foolish]])
1CO 2 1 kjc7 0 Connecting Statement: Paul contrasts human wisdom and God’s wisdom. He emphasizes that spiritual wisdom comes from God.
1CO 2 1 qvj7 ἀδελφοί 1 brothers Here this means fellow Christians, including both men and women.
1CO 2 2 a2g9 figs-hyperbole ἔκρινά τι εἰδέναι…εἰ μὴ Ἰησοῦν Χριστὸν 1 I decided to know nothing…except Jesus Christ When Paul said that he “decided to know nothing” he exaggerated to emphasize that he decided focus on and teach about nothing other than Jesus Christ. Alternate translation: “I decided to teach nothing…except Jesus Christ” or “I decided not to teach anything…except Jesus Christ” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
@@ -106,7 +106,7 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo
1CO 2 14 gwe3 ὅτι πνευματικῶς ἀνακρίνεται 1 because they are spiritually discerned “because understanding these things requires the aid of the Spirit”
1CO 2 15 w4q7 ὁ…πνευματικὸς 1 the one who is spiritual “The believer who has received the Spirit”
1CO 2 16 m4pu figs-rquestion τίς γὰρ ἔγνω νοῦν Κυρίου, ὃς συμβιβάσει αὐτόν? 1 For who can know the mind of the Lord, that he can instruct him? Paul uses this question to emphasize that no one knows the mind of the Lord. No one is as wise as the Lord. Alternate translation: “No one can know the mind of the Lord, so no one can teach him anything he does not already know” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
-1CO 3 intro g6ku 0 # 1 Corinthians 03 General Notes
## Structure and formatting
Some translations set quotations from the Old Testament farther to the right on the page to make them easier to read. The ULT does this with the quoted words of verses 19 and 20.
## Special concepts in this chapter
### Fleshly people
The Corinthian believers were immature because of their unrighteous actions. He calls them “fleshly,” meaning acting as nonbelievers. This term is used in opposition to those who are “spiritual.” Christians following their “flesh” are acting foolishly. They are following the wisdom of the world. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/righteous]], [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/flesh]], [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/spirit]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/foolish]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/wise]])
## Important figures of speech in this chapter
### Metaphor
There are many metaphors in this chapter. Paul uses “babies” and “milk” to illustrate spiritual immaturity. He uses the metaphors of planting and watering to describe the roles he and Apollos played in growing the church in Corinth. Paul uses other metaphors to help teach spiritual truths to the Corinthians and to help them to understand his teachings. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
+1CO 3 intro g6ku 0 # 1 Corinthians 03 General Notes
## Structure and formatting
Some translations set quotations from the Old Testament farther to the right on the page to make them easier to read. The ULT does this with the quoted words of verses 19 and 20.
## Special concepts in this chapter
### Fleshly people
The Corinthian believers were immature because of their unrighteous actions. He calls them “fleshly,” meaning acting as nonbelievers. This term is used in opposition to those who are “spiritual.” Christians following their “flesh” are acting foolishly. They are following the wisdom of the world. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/righteous]], [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/flesh]], [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/spirit]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/foolish]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/wise]])
## Important figures of speech in this chapter
### Metaphor
There are many metaphors in this chapter. Paul uses “babies” and “milk” to illustrate spiritual immaturity. He uses the metaphors of planting and watering to describe the roles he and Apollos played in growing the church in Corinth. Paul uses other metaphors to help teach spiritual truths to the Corinthians and to help them to understand his teachings. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1CO 3 1 a43d 0 Connecting Statement: Paul now reminds the Corinthian believers of how they are actually living instead of behaving as their position before God is. He then reminds them that the person who teaches them is not as important as God who gives their growth.
1CO 3 1 r4iw ἀδελφοί 1 brothers Here this means fellow Christians, including both men and women.
1CO 3 1 jx17 πνευματικοῖς 1 spiritual people people who obey the Spirit
@@ -199,7 +199,7 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo
1CO 4 21 ix5g figs-rquestion τί θέλετε? 1 What do you want? Paul was making a last appeal to the Corinthians, as he has been rebuking them for the errors they had made. Alternate translation: “Tell me what you want to happen now” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
1CO 4 21 wv61 figs-rquestion ἐν ῥάβδῳ ἔλθω πρὸς ὑμᾶς, ἢ ἐν ἀγάπῃ, πνεύματί τε πραΰτητος? 1 Shall I come to you with a rod or with love and in a spirit of gentleness? Paul is offering the Corinthians two opposing attitudes he could use when approaching them. Alternate translation: “If you want, I can come to punish you, or I can come to show you how much I love you by being gentle with you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
1CO 4 21 ix7l πραΰτητος 1 of gentleness “of kindness” or “of tenderness”
-1CO 5 intro vb3l 0 # 1 Corinthians 05 General Notes
## Structure and formatting
Some translations set quotations from the Old Testament farther to the right on the page to make them easier to read. The ULT does this with the quoted words of verse 13.
## Important figures of speech in this chapter
### Euphemisms
Paul uses euphemisms to describe sensitive topics. This chapter deals with sexual immorality of one church member. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-euphemism]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/other/fornication]])
### Metaphor
Paul uses an extended comparison using many metaphors. Yeast represents evil. The loaf probably represents the whole congregation. The unleavened bread represents living purely. So the whole passage means: Don’t you know that a little evil will affect the whole congregation? So get rid of the evil so you can live purely. Christ has been sacrificed for us. So let us be sincere and truthful and not wicked and behaving badly. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]], [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/evil]], [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/unleavenedbread]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/purify]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/passover]])
### Rhetorical questions
Paul uses rhetorical questions in this chapter. He uses them to emphasize important points as he teaches the Corinthians. (See: rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion)
+1CO 5 intro vb3l 0 # 1 Corinthians 05 General Notes
## Structure and formatting
Some translations set quotations from the Old Testament farther to the right on the page to make them easier to read. The ULT does this with the quoted words of verse 13.
## Important figures of speech in this chapter
### Euphemisms
Paul uses euphemisms to describe sensitive topics. This chapter deals with sexual immorality of one church member. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-euphemism]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/other/fornication]])
### Metaphor
Paul uses an extended comparison using many metaphors. Yeast represents evil. The loaf probably represents the whole congregation. The unleavened bread represents living purely. So the whole passage means: Don’t you know that a little evil will affect the whole congregation? So get rid of the evil so you can live purely. Christ has been sacrificed for us. So let us be sincere and truthful and not wicked and behaving badly. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]], [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/evil]], [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/unleavenedbread]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/purify]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/passover]])
### Rhetorical questions
Paul uses rhetorical questions in this chapter. He uses them to emphasize important points as he teaches the Corinthians. (See: rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion)
1CO 5 1 e66c 0 Connecting Statement: Paul now specifically states about what sin of theirs he has heard, and how the Corinthian believers are proud of their acceptance of that man and his sin.
1CO 5 1 dlj2 figs-activepassive ἥτις οὐδὲ ἐν τοῖς ἔθνεσιν 1 which does not even exist among the Gentiles This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: “that not even the Gentiles permit” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
1CO 5 1 b9xn γυναῖκά τινα τοῦ πατρὸς ἔχειν 1 a man has his father’s wife “A man among you is commiting adultery with his father’s wife”
@@ -281,7 +281,7 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo
1CO 6 19 d2mc figs-metaphor ναὸς τοῦ…Ἁγίου Πνεύματός 1 temple of the Holy Spirit A temple is dedicated to divine beings, and it is also where they dwell. In the same way, each Corinthian believer’s body is like a temple because the Holy Spirit is present within them. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1CO 6 20 qv47 figs-activepassive ἠγοράσθητε γὰρ τιμῆς 1 For you were bought with a price God paid for the freedom of the Corinthians from the slavery of sin. This can be stated as active. Alternate translation: “God paid for your freedom” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
1CO 6 20 y7fe δὴ 1 Therefore “Because what I have just said is true”
-1CO 7 intro a25m 0 # 1 Corinthians 07 General Notes
## Structure and formatting
Paul begins to answer a series of questions that the Corinthians may have asked him. The first question is about marriage. The second question is about a slave trying to become free, a Gentile becoming a Jew, or a Jew becoming a Gentile.
## Special concepts in this chapter
### Divorce
Paul says married Christians should not divorce. A Christian married to an unbeliever should not leave their husband or wife. If the unbelieving husband or wife leaves, this is not a sin. Paul advises that, because of the difficult times and being near to time that Jesus will return, it is acceptable to remain unmarried. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/believe]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/sin]])
## Important figures of speech in this chapter
### Euphemisms
Paul uses many euphemisms to discreetly refer to sexual relations. This is often a sensitive topic. Many cultures do not wish to speak openly about these matters. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-euphemism]])
+1CO 7 intro a25m 0 # 1 Corinthians 07 General Notes
## Structure and formatting
Paul begins to answer a series of questions that the Corinthians may have asked him. The first question is about marriage. The second question is about a slave trying to become free, a Gentile becoming a Jew, or a Jew becoming a Gentile.
## Special concepts in this chapter
### Divorce
Paul says married Christians should not divorce. A Christian married to an unbeliever should not leave their husband or wife. If the unbelieving husband or wife leaves, this is not a sin. Paul advises that, because of the difficult times and being near to time that Jesus will return, it is acceptable to remain unmarried. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/believe]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/sin]])
## Important figures of speech in this chapter
### Euphemisms
Paul uses many euphemisms to discreetly refer to sexual relations. This is often a sensitive topic. Many cultures do not wish to speak openly about these matters. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-euphemism]])
1CO 7 1 iue7 0 Connecting Statement: Paul gives the believers some specific instructions on marriage.
1CO 7 1 y4lx δὲ 1 Now Paul is introducing a new topic in his teaching.
1CO 7 1 jq21 ὧν ἐγράψατε 1 the issues you wrote about The Corinthians had written a letter to Paul to ask for answers to certain questions.
@@ -359,7 +359,7 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo
1CO 7 40 hwz4 τὴν ἐμὴν γνώμην 1 my judgment “my understanding of God’s word”
1CO 7 40 hd7f μακαριωτέρα 1 happier more contented, more joyful
1CO 7 40 pse4 οὕτως μείνῃ 1 lives as she is “remains unmarried”
-1CO 8 intro c8l6 0 # 1 Corinthians 08 General Notes
## Structure and formatting
In Chapters 8-10, Paul answers the question: “Is it acceptable to eat meat that has been sacrificed to an idol?”
## Special concepts in this chapter
### Meat sacrificed to idols
Paul answers this question by saying that idols are gods that do not really exist. Therefore nothing is wrong with the meat. Christians are free to eat it. However, someone who does not understand this may see a Christian eating it. They may then be encouraged to eat the meat as an act of worship to the idol.
+1CO 8 intro c8l6 0 # 1 Corinthians 08 General Notes
## Structure and formatting
In Chapters 8-10, Paul answers the question: “Is it acceptable to eat meat that has been sacrificed to an idol?”
## Special concepts in this chapter
### Meat sacrificed to idols
Paul answers this question by saying that idols are gods that do not really exist. Therefore nothing is wrong with the meat. Christians are free to eat it. However, someone who does not understand this may see a Christian eating it. They may then be encouraged to eat the meat as an act of worship to the idol.
1CO 8 1 jf6h figs-exclusive 0 General Information: “We” means Paul and, though specifically writing to the Corinthian believers, includes all believers. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
1CO 8 1 nzt4 0 Connecting Statement: Paul reminds the believers that though idols have no power, believers must be careful not to affect the weaker believers who might think they care about the idols. He tells believers to be careful with the liberty believers have in Christ.
1CO 8 1 cep1 περὶ δὲ 1 Now about Paul uses this phrase to move on to the next question the Corinthians had asked him.
@@ -387,7 +387,7 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo
1CO 8 11 g5tn ἀπόλλυται…ὁ ἀσθενῶν 1 the one who is weak…is destroyed The brother or sister who is not strong in his or her faith will sin or lose his or her faith.
1CO 8 13 i8tb διόπερ 1 Therefore “Because what I have just said is true”
1CO 8 13 vf92 figs-metonymy εἰ βρῶμα σκανδαλίζει 1 if food causes to stumble **Food** here is a metonym for the person eating the food. Alternate translation: “if I cause by eating” or “if I, because of what I eat, cause” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
-1CO 9 intro z8d4 0 # 1 Corinthians 09 General Notes
## Structure and formatting
Paul defends himself in this chapter. Some people claimed that he was trying to gain financially from the church.
## Special concepts in this chapter
### Earning money from the church
People accused Paul of just wanting money from the church. Paul answered that he rightfully could get money from the church. The Old Testament taught that those who worked should get their living from their work. He and Barnabas purposefully never used this right and earned their own living.
## Important figures of speech in this chapter
### Metaphor
Paul uses many metaphors in this chapter. These metaphors teach complex truths. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter
### Contextualization
This passage is important because Paul “contextualizes” ministering the gospel to different audiences. This means that Paul makes himself and the gospel understandable without his actions hindering the gospel being received. The translator should take extra care to preserve aspects of this “contextualization” if possible. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/goodnews]])
### Rhetorical questions
Paul uses many rhetorical questions in this chapter. He uses them to emphasize various points as he teaches the Corinthians. (See: rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion)
+1CO 9 intro z8d4 0 # 1 Corinthians 09 General Notes
## Structure and formatting
Paul defends himself in this chapter. Some people claimed that he was trying to gain financially from the church.
## Special concepts in this chapter
### Earning money from the church
People accused Paul of just wanting money from the church. Paul answered that he rightfully could get money from the church. The Old Testament taught that those who worked should get their living from their work. He and Barnabas purposefully never used this right and earned their own living.
## Important figures of speech in this chapter
### Metaphor
Paul uses many metaphors in this chapter. These metaphors teach complex truths. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter
### Contextualization
This passage is important because Paul “contextualizes” ministering the gospel to different audiences. This means that Paul makes himself and the gospel understandable without his actions hindering the gospel being received. The translator should take extra care to preserve aspects of this “contextualization” if possible. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/goodnews]])
### Rhetorical questions
Paul uses many rhetorical questions in this chapter. He uses them to emphasize various points as he teaches the Corinthians. (See: rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion)
1CO 9 1 fu7x 0 Connecting Statement: Paul explains how he uses the liberty he has in Christ.
1CO 9 1 mdm4 figs-rquestion οὐκ εἰμὶ ἐλεύθερος 1 Am I not free? Paul uses this rhetorical question to remind the Corinthians of the rights he has. Alternate translation: “I am a free person.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
1CO 9 1 dbp9 figs-rquestion οὐκ εἰμὶ ἀπόστολος 1 Am I not an apostle? Paul uses this rhetorical question to remind the Corinthians of who he is and the rights he has. Alternate translation: “I am an apostle.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
@@ -441,7 +441,7 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo
1CO 9 25 bfe4 figs-metaphor φθαρτὸν στέφανον…ἄφθαρτον 1 a wreath that is perishable…one that is imperishable A wreath is a bunch of leaves twisted together. Wreaths were given as prizes to athletes who won games and races. Paul speaks of eternal life as if it were a wreath that would never dry up. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1CO 9 26 k64n figs-metaphor ἐγὼ…οὕτως τρέχω, ὡς οὐκ ἀδήλως; οὕτως πυκτεύω, ὡς οὐκ ἀέρα δέρων 1 I do not run without purpose or box by beating the air Here, **running** and **boxing** are both metaphors for living the Christian life and serving God. This can be stated in positive form. Alternate translation: “I know very well why I am running, and I know what I am doing when I box” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]])
1CO 9 27 blb7 figs-activepassive μή…αὐτὸς ἀδόκιμος γένωμαι 1 I myself may not be disqualified This passive sentence can be rephrased to an active form. The judge of a race or competition is a metaphor for God. Alternate translation: “the judge will not disqualify me” or “God will not say that I have failed to obey the rules” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
-1CO 10 intro abcd 0 # 1 Corinthians 10 General Notes
## Structure and formatting
Chapters 8-10 together answer the question: “Is it acceptable to eat meat that has been sacrificed to an idol?”
In this chapter, Paul uses the exodus to warn people not to sin. Then, he returns to discussing meat offered to idols. He uses the Lord’s Supper as an example. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/sin]])
## Special concepts in this chapter
### Exodus
Paul uses the experiences of Israel leaving Egypt and roaming the desert as a warning to the believers. Although the Israelites all followed Moses, they all died on the way. None of them reached the Promised Land. Some worshiped an idol, some tested God, and some grumbled. Paul warns Christians not to sin. We can resist temptation because God provides a way of escape. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/promisedland]])
### Eating meat sacrificed to idol
Paul discusses meat offered to idols. Christians are allowed to eat, but it may hurt others. So when buying meat or eating with a friend, do not ask if it has been offered to idols. But if someone tells you it has been offered to idols, don’t eat it for the sake of that person. Do not offend anyone. Seek to save them instead. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/save]])
### Rhetorical questions
Paul uses many rhetorical questions in this chapter. He uses them to emphasize important points as he teaches the Corinthians. (See: rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion)
+1CO 10 intro abcd 0 # 1 Corinthians 10 General Notes
## Structure and formatting
Chapters 8-10 together answer the question: “Is it acceptable to eat meat that has been sacrificed to an idol?”
In this chapter, Paul uses the exodus to warn people not to sin. Then, he returns to discussing meat offered to idols. He uses the Lord’s Supper as an example. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/sin]])
## Special concepts in this chapter
### Exodus
Paul uses the experiences of Israel leaving Egypt and roaming the desert as a warning to the believers. Although the Israelites all followed Moses, they all died on the way. None of them reached the Promised Land. Some worshiped an idol, some tested God, and some grumbled. Paul warns Christians not to sin. We can resist temptation because God provides a way of escape. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/promisedland]])
### Eating meat sacrificed to idol
Paul discusses meat offered to idols. Christians are allowed to eat, but it may hurt others. So when buying meat or eating with a friend, do not ask if it has been offered to idols. But if someone tells you it has been offered to idols, don’t eat it for the sake of that person. Do not offend anyone. Seek to save them instead. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/save]])
### Rhetorical questions
Paul uses many rhetorical questions in this chapter. He uses them to emphasize important points as he teaches the Corinthians. (See: rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion)
1CO 10 1 r66h 0 Connecting Statement: Paul reminds them of the example of their ancient Jewish fathers’ experiences with immorality and idolatry.
1CO 10 1 g34f figs-exclusive οἱ πατέρες ἡμῶν 1 our fathers Paul is referring to the time of Moses in the book of Exodus when Israel fled through the Red Sea as the Egyptian army pursued them. The word **our** refers to himself and the Corinthians and is inclusive. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
1CO 10 1 v4c6 διὰ τῆς θαλάσσης διῆλθον 1 passed through the sea This sea is known by two names, the Red Sea and the Sea of Reeds.
@@ -503,7 +503,7 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo
1CO 10 33 kj14 πάντα…ἀρέσκω 1 try to please all people “make all people glad”
1CO 10 33 b4jv μὴ ζητῶν τὸ ἐμαυτοῦ σύμφορον 1 I do not seek my benefit “I do not do things I desire for myself”
1CO 10 33 hd2z τῶν πολλῶν 1 the many as many people as possible
-1CO 11 intro abce 0 # 1 Corinthians 11 General Notes
## Structure and formatting
This is the beginning of a new section of the letter (Chapters 11-14). Paul now talks about proper church services. In this chapter, he deals with two different problems: women in the church services (verses 1-16) and the Lord’s Supper (verses 17-34).
## Special concepts in this chapter
### Proper conduct in a church service
### Disorderly women
Paul’s instructions here are debated among scholars. There may have been women who were abusing their Christian freedom and causing disorder in the church by going against established cultural customs. The disorder that their actions created would have caused him to be concerned.
### The Lord’s Supper
There were problems in how the Corinthians were handling the Lord’s Supper. They did not act in a unified manner. During the feast celebrated along with the Lord’s Supper, some of them ate their own food without sharing. Some of them got drunk while the poor people remained hungry. Paul taught that the believers dishonored Christ’s death if they participated in the Lord’s Supper while they were sinning or while they were in broken relationships with each other. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/sin]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/reconcile]])
## Important figures of speech in this chapter
### Rhetorical questions
Paul uses rhetorical questions to scold the people for their unwillingness to follow the rules for worship he has suggested. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
### The head
Paul uses “head” as a metonym for authority in verse 3 and also to refer to a person’s actual head in verse 4 and following. Since they are so close together, it is likely that Paul intentionally used “head” in this way. This would show that the ideas in these verses were connected. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
+1CO 11 intro abce 0 # 1 Corinthians 11 General Notes
## Structure and formatting
This is the beginning of a new section of the letter (Chapters 11-14). Paul now talks about proper church services. In this chapter, he deals with two different problems: women in the church services (verses 1-16) and the Lord’s Supper (verses 17-34).
## Special concepts in this chapter
### Proper conduct in a church service
### Disorderly women
Paul’s instructions here are debated among scholars. There may have been women who were abusing their Christian freedom and causing disorder in the church by going against established cultural customs. The disorder that their actions created would have caused him to be concerned.
### The Lord’s Supper
There were problems in how the Corinthians were handling the Lord’s Supper. They did not act in a unified manner. During the feast celebrated along with the Lord’s Supper, some of them ate their own food without sharing. Some of them got drunk while the poor people remained hungry. Paul taught that the believers dishonored Christ’s death if they participated in the Lord’s Supper while they were sinning or while they were in broken relationships with each other. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/sin]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/reconcile]])
## Important figures of speech in this chapter
### Rhetorical questions
Paul uses rhetorical questions to scold the people for their unwillingness to follow the rules for worship he has suggested. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
### The head
Paul uses “head” as a metonym for authority in verse 3 and also to refer to a person’s actual head in verse 4 and following. Since they are so close together, it is likely that Paul intentionally used “head” in this way. This would show that the ideas in these verses were connected. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
1CO 11 1 h5fg 0 Connecting Statement: After reminding them to follow him the way he follows Christ, Paul gives some specific instructs in how women and men are to live as believers.
1CO 11 2 qsk9 πάντα μου μέμνησθε 1 you remember me in everything “you think of me at all times” or “you always try act as I would want you to act” The Corinthians had not forgotten who Paul was or what he had taught them.
1CO 11 3 k5um θέλω δὲ 1 Now I want Possible meanings are (1) “Because of this, I want” or (2) “However, I want.”
@@ -568,7 +568,7 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo
1CO 11 33 nky5 ἀλλήλους ἐκδέχεσθε 1 wait for one another “allow the others to arrive before beginning the meal”
1CO 11 34 v2uh ἐν οἴκῳ ἐσθιέτω 1 let him eat at home “let him eat before attending this gathering”
1CO 11 34 x1l8 figs-metonymy μὴ εἰς κρίμα 1 not be for judgment “it will not be an occasion for God to discipline you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
-1CO 12 intro abcf 0 # 1 Corinthians 12 General Notes
## Structure and formatting
### Gifts of the Holy Spirit
This chapter begins a new section. Chapters 12-14 discuss spiritual gifts within the church.
## Special concepts in this chapter
### The Church, the body of Christ
This is an important metaphor in Scripture. The Church has many different parts. Each part has different functions. They combine to make one church. All of the different parts are necessary. Each part is to be concerned for all the other parts, even those that seem less important. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter
### “No one can say, ‘Jesus is Lord,’ except by the Holy Spirit.”
In reading the Old Testament, the Jews would have substituted the word “Lord” for the word “Yahweh.” This sentence probably means that no one can say that Jesus is Yahweh, God in the flesh, without the Holy Spirit’s influence drawing them to accept this truth. If this statement is translated poorly, it can have unintended theological consequences.
+1CO 12 intro abcf 0 # 1 Corinthians 12 General Notes
## Structure and formatting
### Gifts of the Holy Spirit
This chapter begins a new section. Chapters 12-14 discuss spiritual gifts within the church.
## Special concepts in this chapter
### The Church, the body of Christ
This is an important metaphor in Scripture. The Church has many different parts. Each part has different functions. They combine to make one church. All of the different parts are necessary. Each part is to be concerned for all the other parts, even those that seem less important. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter
### “No one can say, ‘Jesus is Lord,’ except by the Holy Spirit.”
In reading the Old Testament, the Jews would have substituted the word “Lord” for the word “Yahweh.” This sentence probably means that no one can say that Jesus is Yahweh, God in the flesh, without the Holy Spirit’s influence drawing them to accept this truth. If this statement is translated poorly, it can have unintended theological consequences.
1CO 12 1 da2e 0 Connecting Statement: Paul lets them know that God has given special gifts to believers. These gifts are to help the body of believers.
1CO 12 1 i3k7 figs-doublenegatives οὐ θέλω ὑμᾶς ἀγνοεῖν 1 I do not want you to be uninformed This can be stated as a positive. Alternate translation: “I want you to know” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]])
1CO 12 2 hbt8 figs-metaphor ἦτε, πρὸς τὰ εἴδωλα τὰ ἄφωνα ὡς ἂν ἤγεσθε, ἀπαγόμενοι 1 you were led astray to idols who could not speak, in whatever ways you were led by them Here, **led astray** is a metaphor for being persuaded to do something wrong. Being led astray to idols represents being wrongly persuaded to worship idols. The phrases “were led astray” and “you were led by them” can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: “you were persuaded in some way to worship idols who cannot speak” or “you believed lies somehow and so you worshiped idols who cannot speak” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
@@ -613,7 +613,7 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo
1CO 12 30 d3k8 figs-rquestion μὴ πάντες διερμηνεύουσιν? 1 Do all of them interpret tongues? This can be a statement. Alternate translation: “Not all of them interpret tongues.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
1CO 12 30 ab9e διερμηνεύουσιν 1 interpret This means to tell what someone has said in a language to others who do not understand that language. See how this is translated in [1 Corinthians 2:13](../02/13.md).
1CO 12 31 vb1m ζηλοῦτε…τὰ χαρίσματα τὰ μείζονα 1 earnestly desire the greater gifts. Possible meanings are (1) “You must eagerly seek from God the gifts that best help the church.” or (2) “You are eagerly looking for gifts that you think are greater because you think they are more exciting to have.”
-1CO 13 intro abcg 0 # 1 Corinthians 13 General Notes
## Structure and formatting
Paul seems to interrupt his teaching about spiritual gifts. However, this chapter probably serves a larger function in his teaching.
## Special concepts in this chapter
### Love
Love is the most important characteristic of the believer. This chapter fully describes love. Paul tells why love is more important than the gifts of the Spirit. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/love]])
## Important figures of speech in this chapter
### Metaphor
Paul uses many different metaphors in this chapter. He uses these metaphors to instruct the Corinthians, especially on difficult topics. Readers often need spiritual discernment to understand these teachings. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
+1CO 13 intro abcg 0 # 1 Corinthians 13 General Notes
## Structure and formatting
Paul seems to interrupt his teaching about spiritual gifts. However, this chapter probably serves a larger function in his teaching.
## Special concepts in this chapter
### Love
Love is the most important characteristic of the believer. This chapter fully describes love. Paul tells why love is more important than the gifts of the Spirit. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/love]])
## Important figures of speech in this chapter
### Metaphor
Paul uses many different metaphors in this chapter. He uses these metaphors to instruct the Corinthians, especially on difficult topics. Readers often need spiritual discernment to understand these teachings. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1CO 13 1 n8lm 0 Connecting Statement: Having just talked about the gifts that God gave to believers, Paul emphasizes what is more important.
1CO 13 1 cm2n figs-hyperbole ταῖς γλώσσαις…τῶν ἀγγέλων 1 the tongues of…angels Possible meanings are (1) Paul is exaggerating for the sake of effect and does not believe that people speak the language that angels use or (2) Paul thinks that some who speak in tongues actually speak the language that angels use. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
1CO 13 1 k2gk figs-metaphor γέγονα χαλκὸς ἠχῶν ἢ κύμβαλον ἀλαλάζον 1 I have become a noisy gong or a clanging cymbal I have become like instruments that make loud, annoying sounds (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
@@ -632,7 +632,7 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo
1CO 13 12 qp7g figs-ellipsis ἐπιγνώσομαι 1 I will know fully The word “Christ” is understood. Alternate translation: “I will know Christ fully” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
1CO 13 12 i28w figs-activepassive καθὼς καὶ ἐπεγνώσθην 1 just as I have also been fully known This can be stated as active. Alternate translation: “just as Christ has known me fully” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
1CO 13 13 nt1y figs-abstractnouns πίστις, ἐλπίς, ἀγάπη 1 faith, hope, and love These abstract nouns can be expressed in phrases with verbs. Alternate translation: “we must trust the Lord, be confident that he will do what he has promised, and love him and others” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
-1CO 14 intro abch 0 # 1 Corinthians 14 General Notes
## Structure and formatting
In this chapter, Paul returns to discussing spiritual gifts.
Some translations set what is quoted from the Old Testament farther to the right on the page than the rest of the text. The ULT does this with the words of verse 21.
## Special concepts in this chapter
### Tongues
Scholars disagree on the exact meaning of the gift of tongues. Paul describes the gift of tongues as a sign for unbelievers. It does not serve the whole church, unless someone interprets what is spoken. It is very important that the church uses this gift properly.
### Prophecy
Scholars disagree on the exact meaning of prophecy as a spiritual gift. Paul says prophets can build up the entire church. He describes prophecy as a gift for believers. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/prophet]])
+1CO 14 intro abch 0 # 1 Corinthians 14 General Notes
## Structure and formatting
In this chapter, Paul returns to discussing spiritual gifts.
Some translations set what is quoted from the Old Testament farther to the right on the page than the rest of the text. The ULT does this with the words of verse 21.
## Special concepts in this chapter
### Tongues
Scholars disagree on the exact meaning of the gift of tongues. Paul describes the gift of tongues as a sign for unbelievers. It does not serve the whole church, unless someone interprets what is spoken. It is very important that the church uses this gift properly.
### Prophecy
Scholars disagree on the exact meaning of prophecy as a spiritual gift. Paul says prophets can build up the entire church. He describes prophecy as a gift for believers. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/prophet]])
1CO 14 1 vl57 0 Connecting Statement: Paul wants them to know that though teaching is more important because it instructs people, it must be done with love.
1CO 14 1 x938 figs-123person διώκετε τὴν ἀγάπην 1 Pursue love Paul speaks of love as if it were a person. “Follow after love” or “Work hard to love people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]])
1CO 14 1 ki3l μᾶλλον…ἵνα προφητεύητε 1 especially that you may prophesy “and work especially hard to be able to prophesy”
@@ -687,7 +687,7 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo
1CO 14 38 l68a figs-activepassive ἀγνοείτω 1 let him be ignorant This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: “you should not recognize him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
1CO 14 39 jvr7 τὸ λαλεῖν μὴ κωλύετε γλώσσαις 1 do not forbid anyone from speaking in tongues Paul makes it clear that speaking in tongues at a church gathering is permissible and acceptable.
1CO 14 40 d7ia πάντα δὲ εὐσχημόνως καὶ κατὰ τάξιν γινέσθω 1 But let all things be done properly and in order Paul is stressing that church gatherings should be held in an orderly manner. Alternate translation: “But do all things properly and in order” or “But do everything in an orderly, appropriate way”
-1CO 15 intro abci 0 # 1 Corinthians 15 General Notes
## Structure and formatting
### Resurrection
This chapter includes a very important teaching about the resurrection of Jesus. The Greek people did not believe that a person could live after they died. Paul defends the resurrection of Jesus. He teaches why it is important to all believers. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/resurrection]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/believe]])
## Special concepts in this chapter
### Resurrection
Paul presents the resurrection as the ultimate proof that Jesus is God. Christ is the first of many who God will raise to life. The resurrection is central to the gospel. Few doctrines are as important as this one. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/goodnews]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/other/raise]])
## Important figures of speech in this chapter
Paul uses many different figures of speech in this chapter. He uses them to express difficult theological teachings in a way that people can understand.
+1CO 15 intro abci 0 # 1 Corinthians 15 General Notes
## Structure and formatting
### Resurrection
This chapter includes a very important teaching about the resurrection of Jesus. The Greek people did not believe that a person could live after they died. Paul defends the resurrection of Jesus. He teaches why it is important to all believers. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/resurrection]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/believe]])
## Special concepts in this chapter
### Resurrection
Paul presents the resurrection as the ultimate proof that Jesus is God. Christ is the first of many who God will raise to life. The resurrection is central to the gospel. Few doctrines are as important as this one. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/goodnews]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/other/raise]])
## Important figures of speech in this chapter
Paul uses many different figures of speech in this chapter. He uses them to express difficult theological teachings in a way that people can understand.
1CO 15 1 gc6n 0 Connecting Statement: Paul reminds them that it is the gospel that saves them and he tells them again what the gospel is. Then he gives them a short history lesson, which ends with what will yet happen.
1CO 15 1 la9v γνωρίζω…ὑμῖ 1 make known to you “help you remember”
1CO 15 1 xv53 figs-metaphor ἐν ᾧ…ἑστήκατε 1 on which you stand Paul is speaking of the Corinthians as if they were a house and the gospel as if it were the foundation on which the house was standing. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
@@ -799,7 +799,7 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo
1CO 15 58 k4c4 0 Connecting Statement: Paul wants believers, while they work for the Lord, to remember the changed, resurrected bodies that God is going to give them.
1CO 15 58 j1pl figs-metaphor ἑδραῖοι γίνεσθε, ἀμετακίνητοι 1 be steadfast and immovable Paul speaks of someone who lets nothing stop him from carrying out his decisions as if he could not be physically moved. Alternate translation: “be determined” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1CO 15 58 zn8f figs-metaphor περισσεύοντες ἐν τῷ ἔργῳ τοῦ Κυρίου πάντοτε 1 Always abound in the work of the Lord Paul speaks of efforts made in working for the Lord as if they were objects that a person could acquire more of. Alternate translation: “Always work for the Lord faithfully” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
-1CO 16 intro abcj 0 # 1 Corinthians 16 General Notes
## Structure and formatting
Paul briefly covers many topics in this chapter. It was common in the ancient Near East for the last part of letters to have personal greetings.
## Special concepts in this chapter
### Preparation for his coming
Paul gave practical instructions to help prepare the Corinthian church for his visit. He told them to start collecting money every Sunday for the believers in Jerusalem. He hoped to come and spend the winter with them. He told them to help Timothy when he came. He had hoped Apollos would go to them, but Apollos did not think it was the right time. Paul also told them to obey Stephanus. Finally, he sent his greetings to everyone.
+1CO 16 intro abcj 0 # 1 Corinthians 16 General Notes
## Structure and formatting
Paul briefly covers many topics in this chapter. It was common in the ancient Near East for the last part of letters to have personal greetings.
## Special concepts in this chapter
### Preparation for his coming
Paul gave practical instructions to help prepare the Corinthian church for his visit. He told them to start collecting money every Sunday for the believers in Jerusalem. He hoped to come and spend the winter with them. He told them to help Timothy when he came. He had hoped Apollos would go to them, but Apollos did not think it was the right time. Paul also told them to obey Stephanus. Finally, he sent his greetings to everyone.
1CO 16 1 zh6u 0 Connecting Statement: In his closing notes, Paul reminds the Corinthian believers to collect money for the needy believers in Jerusalem. He reminds them that Timothy will come to them before he goes to Paul.
1CO 16 1 yer5 εἰς τοὺς ἁγίους 1 for the saints Paul was collecting money from his churches for the poor Jewish Christians in Jerusalem and Judea.
1CO 16 1 kh6h ὥσπερ διέταξα 1 as I directed “as I gave specific instructions”
diff --git a/en_tn_48-2CO.tsv b/en_tn_48-2CO.tsv
index 134e0a578..2a4d7060e 100644
--- a/en_tn_48-2CO.tsv
+++ b/en_tn_48-2CO.tsv
@@ -1,6 +1,6 @@
Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNote
-2CO front intro ur4j 0 # Introduction to 2 Corinthians
## Part 1: General Introduction
### Outline of the Book of 2 Corinthians
1. Paul thanks God for the Corinthian Christians (1:1-11)
1. Paul explains his conduct and his ministry (1:12-7:16)
1. Paul speaks about contributing money for the Jerusalem church (8:1-9:15)
1. Paul defends his authority as an apostle (10:1-13:10)
1. Paul gives final greetings and encouragement (13:11-14)
### Who wrote the Book of 2 Corinthians?
Paul was the author. He was from the city of Tarsus. He had been known as Saul in his early life. Before becoming a Christian, Paul was a Pharisee. He persecuted Christians. After he became a Christian, he traveled several times throughout the Roman Empire telling people about Jesus.
Paul started the church in Corinth. He was staying in the city of Ephesus when he wrote this letter.
### What is the Book of 2 Corinthians about?
In 2 Corinthians, Paul continued to write about the conflicts among the Christians in the city of Corinth. It is clear in this letter that the Corinthians had obeyed his previous instructions to them. In 2 Corinthians, Paul encouraged them to live in a way that would please God.
Paul also wrote to assure them that Jesus Christ sent him as an apostle to preach the Gospel. Paul wanted them to understand this, because a group of Jewish Christians opposed what he was doing. They claimed Paul was not sent by God and he was teaching a false message. This group of Jewish Christians wanted Gentile Christians to obey the law of Moses.
### How should the title of this book be translated?
Translators may choose to call this book by its traditional title, “Second Corinthians.” Or they may choose a clearer title, such as “Paul’s Second Letter to the Church in Corinth.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
## Part 2: Important Religious and Cultural Concepts
### What was the city of Corinth like?
Corinth was a major city located in ancient Greece. Because it was near the Mediterranean Sea, many travelers and traders came to buy and sell goods there. This resulted in the city having people from many different cultures. The city was famous for having people who lived in immoral ways. The people worshipped Aphrodite, the Greek goddess of love. As part of the ceremonies honoring Aphrodite, her worshipers had sexual intercourse with temple prostitutes.
### What did Paul mean by “false apostles” (11:13)?
These were Jewish Christians. They taught that Gentile Christians had to obey the law of Moses in order to follow Christ. Christian leaders had met in Jerusalem and decided on the matter (See: Acts 15). However, it is clear that there were still some groups that disagreed with what the leaders in Jerusalem decided.
## Part 3: Important Translation Issues
### Singular and plural “you”
In this book, the word “I” refers to Paul. Also, the word “you” is almost always plural and refers to the believers in Corinth. There are two exceptions to this: 6:2 and 12:9. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-you]])
### How are the ideas of “holy” and “sanctify” represented in 2 Corinthians in the ULT?
The scriptures use such words to indicate any one of various ideas. For this reason, it is often difficult for translators to represent them well in their versions. In translating into English, the ULT uses the following principles:
* Sometimes the meaning in a passage implies moral holiness. Especially important for understanding the gospel is the fact that God considers Christians to be sinless because they are united to Jesus Christ. Another related fact is that God is perfect and faultless. A third fact is that Christians are to conduct themselves in a blameless, faultless manner in life. In these cases, the ULT uses “holy,” “holy God,” “holy ones,” or “holy people.”
* The meaning in most passages in 2 Corinthians is a simple reference to Christians without implying any particular role filled by them. In these cases, the ULT uses “believer” or “believers.” (See: 1:1; 8:4; 9:1, 12; 13:13)
* Sometimes the meaning in the passage implies the idea of someone or something set apart for God alone. In these cases, the ULT uses “set apart,” “dedicated to,” “reserved for,” or “sanctified.”
The UST will often be helpful as translators think about how to represent these ideas in their own versions.
### What did Paul mean by expressions like “in Christ” and “in the Lord”?
This kind of expression occurs in 1:19, 20; 2:12, 17; 3:14; 5:17, 19, 21; 10:17; 12:2, 19; and 13:4. Paul meant to express the idea of a very close union with Christ and the believers. At the same time, he often intended other meanings as well. See, for example, “A door was opened for me in the Lord,” (2:12) where Paul specifically meant that a door was opened for Paul by the Lord.
Please see the introduction to the Book of Romans for more details about this kind of expression.
### What does it mean to be a “new creation” in Christ (5:17)?
Paul’s message was that God makes Christians part of a “new world” when a person believes in Christ. God gives a new world of holiness, peace, and joy. In this new world, believers have a new nature that has been given them by the Holy Spirit. Translators should try to express this idea.
### What are the major issues in the text of the Book of 2 Corinthians?
* “and in your love for us” (8:7). Many versions, including the ULT and UST, read this way. However, many other versions read, “and in our love for you.” There is strong evidence that each reading is original. Translators should probably follow the reading preferred by other versions in their region.
(See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants]])
-2CO 1 intro tsh3 0 # 2 Corinthians 01 General Notes
## Structure and formatting
The first paragraph reflects a common way to begin a letter in the ancient Near East.
## Special Concepts
### Paul’s integrity
People were criticizing Paul and saying he was not sincere. He refutes them by explaining his motives for what he was doing.
### Comfort
Comfort is a major theme of this chapter. The Holy Spirit comforts Christians. The Corinthians probably were afflicted and needed to be comforted.
## Important figures of speech in this chapter
### Rhetorical question
Paul uses two rhetorical questions to defend himself against a charge of not being sincere. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter
### We
Paul uses the pronoun “we”. This likely represents at least Timothy and himself. It may also include other people.
### Guarantee
Paul says the Holy Spirit is the guarantee, which means pledge or down-payment, of a Christian’s eternal life. Christians are securely saved. But they will not experience all of God’s given promises until after they die. The Holy Spirit is a personal guarantee that this will happen. This idea comes from a business term. A person gives some valuable item to another person as a “guarantee” that they will repay money. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/eternity]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/save]])
+2CO front intro ur4j 0 # Introduction to 2 Corinthians
## Part 1: General Introduction
### Outline of the Book of 2 Corinthians
1. Paul thanks God for the Corinthian Christians (1:1-11)
1. Paul explains his conduct and his ministry (1:12-7:16)
1. Paul speaks about contributing money for the Jerusalem church (8:1-9:15)
1. Paul defends his authority as an apostle (10:1-13:10)
1. Paul gives final greetings and encouragement (13:11-14)
### Who wrote the Book of 2 Corinthians?
Paul was the author. He was from the city of Tarsus. He had been known as Saul in his early life. Before becoming a Christian, Paul was a Pharisee. He persecuted Christians. After he became a Christian, he traveled several times throughout the Roman Empire telling people about Jesus.
Paul started the church in Corinth. He was staying in the city of Ephesus when he wrote this letter.
### What is the Book of 2 Corinthians about?
In 2 Corinthians, Paul continued to write about the conflicts among the Christians in the city of Corinth. It is clear in this letter that the Corinthians had obeyed his previous instructions to them. In 2 Corinthians, Paul encouraged them to live in a way that would please God.
Paul also wrote to assure them that Jesus Christ sent him as an apostle to preach the Gospel. Paul wanted them to understand this, because a group of Jewish Christians opposed what he was doing. They claimed Paul was not sent by God and he was teaching a false message. This group of Jewish Christians wanted Gentile Christians to obey the law of Moses.
### How should the title of this book be translated?
Translators may choose to call this book by its traditional title, “Second Corinthians.” Or they may choose a clearer title, such as “Paul’s Second Letter to the Church in Corinth.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
## Part 2: Important Religious and Cultural Concepts
### What was the city of Corinth like?
Corinth was a major city located in ancient Greece. Because it was near the Mediterranean Sea, many travelers and traders came to buy and sell goods there. This resulted in the city having people from many different cultures. The city was famous for having people who lived in immoral ways. The people worshipped Aphrodite, the Greek goddess of love. As part of the ceremonies honoring Aphrodite, her worshipers had sexual intercourse with temple prostitutes.
### What did Paul mean by “false apostles” (11:13)?
These were Jewish Christians. They taught that Gentile Christians had to obey the law of Moses in order to follow Christ. Christian leaders had met in Jerusalem and decided on the matter (See: Acts 15). However, it is clear that there were still some groups that disagreed with what the leaders in Jerusalem decided.
## Part 3: Important Translation Issues
### Singular and plural “you”
In this book, the word “I” refers to Paul. Also, the word “you” is almost always plural and refers to the believers in Corinth. There are two exceptions to this: 6:2 and 12:9. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-you]])
### How are the ideas of “holy” and “sanctify” represented in 2 Corinthians in the ULT?
The scriptures use such words to indicate any one of various ideas. For this reason, it is often difficult for translators to represent them well in their versions. In translating into English, the ULT uses the following principles:
* Sometimes the meaning in a passage implies moral holiness. Especially important for understanding the gospel is the fact that God considers Christians to be sinless because they are united to Jesus Christ. Another related fact is that God is perfect and faultless. A third fact is that Christians are to conduct themselves in a blameless, faultless manner in life. In these cases, the ULT uses “holy,” “holy God,” “holy ones,” or “holy people.”
* The meaning in most passages in 2 Corinthians is a simple reference to Christians without implying any particular role filled by them. In these cases, the ULT uses “believer” or “believers.” (See: 1:1; 8:4; 9:1, 12; 13:13)
* Sometimes the meaning in the passage implies the idea of someone or something set apart for God alone. In these cases, the ULT uses “set apart,” “dedicated to,” “reserved for,” or “sanctified.”
The UST will often be helpful as translators think about how to represent these ideas in their own versions.
### What did Paul mean by expressions like “in Christ” and “in the Lord”?
This kind of expression occurs in 1:19, 20; 2:12, 17; 3:14; 5:17, 19, 21; 10:17; 12:2, 19; and 13:4. Paul meant to express the idea of a very close union with Christ and the believers. At the same time, he often intended other meanings as well. See, for example, “A door was opened for me in the Lord,” (2:12) where Paul specifically meant that a door was opened for Paul by the Lord.
Please see the introduction to the Book of Romans for more details about this kind of expression.
### What does it mean to be a “new creation” in Christ (5:17)?
Paul’s message was that God makes Christians part of a “new world” when a person believes in Christ. God gives a new world of holiness, peace, and joy. In this new world, believers have a new nature that has been given them by the Holy Spirit. Translators should try to express this idea.
### What are the major issues in the text of the Book of 2 Corinthians?
* “and in your love for us” (8:7). Many versions, including the ULT and UST, read this way. However, many other versions read, “and in our love for you.” There is strong evidence that each reading is original. Translators should probably follow the reading preferred by other versions in their region.
(See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants]])
+2CO 1 intro tsh3 0 # 2 Corinthians 01 General Notes
## Structure and formatting
The first paragraph reflects a common way to begin a letter in the ancient Near East.
## Special Concepts
### Paul’s integrity
People were criticizing Paul and saying he was not sincere. He refutes them by explaining his motives for what he was doing.
### Comfort
Comfort is a major theme of this chapter. The Holy Spirit comforts Christians. The Corinthians probably were afflicted and needed to be comforted.
## Important figures of speech in this chapter
### Rhetorical question
Paul uses two rhetorical questions to defend himself against a charge of not being sincere. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter
### We
Paul uses the pronoun “we”. This likely represents at least Timothy and himself. It may also include other people.
### Guarantee
Paul says the Holy Spirit is the guarantee, which means pledge or down-payment, of a Christian’s eternal life. Christians are securely saved. But they will not experience all of God’s given promises until after they die. The Holy Spirit is a personal guarantee that this will happen. This idea comes from a business term. A person gives some valuable item to another person as a “guarantee” that they will repay money. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/eternity]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/save]])
2CO 1 1 epd2 0 General Information: After Paul’s greeting to the church in Corinth, he writes about suffering and comfort through Jesus Christ. Timothy is with him as well. The word “you” throughout this letter refers to the people of the church in Corinth and to the rest of the Christians in that area. Possibly Timothy writes on parchment paper the words that Paul says.
2CO 1 1 mel3 Παῦλος…τῇ ἐκκλησίᾳ τοῦ Θεοῦ τῇ οὔσῃ ἐν Κορίνθῳ 1 Paul…to the church of God that is in Corinth Your language may have a particular way of introducing the author of a letter and its intended audience. Alternate translation: “I, Paul…wrote this letter to you, the church of God that is in Corinth”
2CO 1 1 f59u Τιμόθεος ὁ ἀδελφὸς 1 Timothy our brother This indicates that both Paul and the Corinthians knew Timothy and considered him to be their spiritual brother.
@@ -95,7 +95,7 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo
2CO 2 17 x86y εἰλικρινείας 1 sincerity “pure motives”
2CO 2 17 u2zb ἐν Χριστῷ λαλοῦμεν 1 we speak in Christ “we speak as people who are joined to Christ” or “we speak with the authority of Christ”
2CO 2 17 q4dc figs-ellipsis κατέναντι Θεοῦ 1 before God Paul and his coworkers preach the gospel with the awareness that God is watching them. Alternate translation: “we speak in the presence of God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
-2CO 3 intro f7rh 0 # 2 Corinthians 03 General Notes
## Structure and formatting
Paul continues his defense. Paul views the Corinthian Christians as the proof of his work.
## Special concepts in this chapter
### Law of Moses
Paul alludes to God giving the Ten Commandments on stone tablets. This represents the law of Moses. The law was good because it came from God. But God punished the Israelites because they disobeyed it. This chapter may be difficult for translators to understand if the Old Testament has not yet been translated. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/lawofmoses]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/covenant]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/reveal]])
## Important figures of speech in this chapter
### Metaphors
Paul uses many metaphors used in this chapter to explain complex spiritual truths. It is unclear whether this makes Paul’s teachings easier or more difficult to understand. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter
### “This is a covenant not of the letter but of the Spirit.”
Paul contrasts the old and new covenants. The new covenant is not a system of rules and regulations. Here, **Spirit** probably refers to the Holy Spirit. It may also refer to the new covenant being “spiritual” in nature. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/spirit]])
+2CO 3 intro f7rh 0 # 2 Corinthians 03 General Notes
## Structure and formatting
Paul continues his defense. Paul views the Corinthian Christians as the proof of his work.
## Special concepts in this chapter
### Law of Moses
Paul alludes to God giving the Ten Commandments on stone tablets. This represents the law of Moses. The law was good because it came from God. But God punished the Israelites because they disobeyed it. This chapter may be difficult for translators to understand if the Old Testament has not yet been translated. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/lawofmoses]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/covenant]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/reveal]])
## Important figures of speech in this chapter
### Metaphors
Paul uses many metaphors used in this chapter to explain complex spiritual truths. It is unclear whether this makes Paul’s teachings easier or more difficult to understand. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter
### “This is a covenant not of the letter but of the Spirit.”
Paul contrasts the old and new covenants. The new covenant is not a system of rules and regulations. Here, **Spirit** probably refers to the Holy Spirit. It may also refer to the new covenant being “spiritual” in nature. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/spirit]])
2CO 3 1 m1k8 0 Connecting Statement: Paul reminds them that he is not boasting as he tells them about what he has done through Christ.
2CO 3 1 um8x figs-rquestion ἀρχόμεθα πάλιν ἑαυτοὺς συνιστάνειν? 1 Are we beginning to praise ourselves again? Paul uses this question to emphasize that they are not bragging about themselves. Alternate translation: “We are not beginning to praise ourselves again” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
2CO 3 1 y8yc figs-rquestion ἢ μὴ χρῄζομεν, ὥς τινες, συστατικῶν ἐπιστολῶν πρὸς ὑμᾶς ἢ ἐξ ὑμῶν? 1 We do not need letters of recommendation to you or from you, like some people, do we? Paul says this to express that the Corinthians already know about Paul and Timothy’s good reputation. The question prompts a negative answer. Alternate translation: “We certainly do not need letters of recommendation to you or from you, like some people do” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
@@ -151,7 +151,7 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo
2CO 3 18 rc9x figs-activepassive τὴν αὐτὴν εἰκόνα μεταμορφούμεθα 1 are being transformed into the same image The Spirit is changing believers to be glorious like him. This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: “The Lord is transforming us into his same glorious likeness” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
2CO 3 18 bx5b ἀπὸ δόξης εἰς δόξαν 1 from glory to glory “from one amount of glory to another amount of glory.” This means that the Spirit is constantly increasing the glory of believers.
2CO 3 18 mw3v καθάπερ ἀπὸ Κυρίου 1 just as from the Lord “just as this comes from the Lord”
-2CO 4 intro rx1c 0 # 2 Corinthians 04 General Notes
## Structure and formatting
This chapter begins with the word “therefore.” This connects it to what the previous chapter teaches. How these chapters are divided may be confusing to the reader.
## Special concepts in this chapter
### Ministry
Paul ministers to people by telling them about Christ. He does not try to trick people into believing. If they do not understand the gospel, it is because the problem is ultimately spiritual. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/spirit]])
## Important figures of speech in this chapter
### Light and darkness
The Bible often speaks of unrighteous people, people who do not do what pleases God, as if they were walking around in darkness. It speaks of light as if it were what enables those sinful people to become righteous, to understand what they are doing wrong and begin to obey God. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/righteous]])
### Life and death
Paul does not refer here to physical life and death. Life represents the new life a Christian has in Jesus. Death represents the old way of living before believing in Jesus. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/life]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/other/death]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/faith]])
## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter
### Hope
Paul uses a repeated pattern in a purposeful way. He makes a statement. Then he denies a seemingly opposite or contradictory statement or gives an exception. Together these give the reader hope in difficult circumstances. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/hope]])
+2CO 4 intro rx1c 0 # 2 Corinthians 04 General Notes
## Structure and formatting
This chapter begins with the word “therefore.” This connects it to what the previous chapter teaches. How these chapters are divided may be confusing to the reader.
## Special concepts in this chapter
### Ministry
Paul ministers to people by telling them about Christ. He does not try to trick people into believing. If they do not understand the gospel, it is because the problem is ultimately spiritual. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/spirit]])
## Important figures of speech in this chapter
### Light and darkness
The Bible often speaks of unrighteous people, people who do not do what pleases God, as if they were walking around in darkness. It speaks of light as if it were what enables those sinful people to become righteous, to understand what they are doing wrong and begin to obey God. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/righteous]])
### Life and death
Paul does not refer here to physical life and death. Life represents the new life a Christian has in Jesus. Death represents the old way of living before believing in Jesus. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/life]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/other/death]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/faith]])
## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter
### Hope
Paul uses a repeated pattern in a purposeful way. He makes a statement. Then he denies a seemingly opposite or contradictory statement or gives an exception. Together these give the reader hope in difficult circumstances. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/hope]])
2CO 4 1 lyi4 0 Connecting Statement: Paul writes that he is honest in his ministry by preaching Christ, not praising himself. He shows the death and the life of Jesus in how he lives so that life can work in the Corinthian believers.
2CO 4 1 ix7n figs-exclusive ἔχοντες τὴν διακονίαν ταύτην 1 having this ministry Here the word **we** refers to Paul and his coworker, but not to the Corinthians. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
2CO 4 1 h1ud figs-explicit καθὼς ἠλεήθημεν 1 and just as we have received mercy This phrase explains how Paul and his coworkers “have this ministry.” It is a gift that God has given to them through his mercy. Alternate translation: “because God has shown us mercy” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
@@ -264,7 +264,7 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo
2CO 5 21 ebz2 τὸν μὴ γνόντα ἁμαρτίαν 1 The one who did not know sin “Christ is the one who never sinned”
2CO 5 21 zm9e δικαιοσύνη Θεοῦ ἐν αὐτῷ 1 the righteousness of God in him “God did this…the righteousness of God in Christ”
2CO 5 21 kmt9 figs-explicit ἵνα ἡμεῖς γενώμεθα δικαιοσύνη Θεοῦ ἐν αὐτῷ 1 so that we might become the righteousness of God in him The phrase **the righteousness of God** refers to the righteousness that God requires and which comes from God. Alternate translation: “so that we might have God’s righteousness in us through Christ” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-2CO 6 intro f5qu 0 # 2 Corinthians 06 General Notes
## Structure and formatting
Some translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with verses 2 and 16-18, which are words from the Old Testament.
## Special concepts in this chapter
### Servants
Paul refers to Christians as servants of God. God calls Christians to serve him in all circumstances. Paul describes some of the difficult circumstances in which he and his companions served God.
## Important figures of speech in this chapter
### Contrasts
Paul uses four pairs of contrasts: righteousness versus lawlessness, light versus darkness, Christ versus Satan, and the temple of God versus idols. These contrasts show a difference between Christians and non-Christians. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/righteous]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/other/light]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/other/darkness]])
### Light and darkness
The Bible often speaks of unrighteous people, people who do not do what pleases God, as if they were walking around in darkness. It speaks of light as if it were what enables those sinful people to become righteous, to understand what they are doing wrong and begin to obey God. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/righteous]])
### Rhetorical questions
Paul uses a series of rhetorical questions to teach his readers. All of these questions make essentially the same point: Christians should not intimately fellowship with those who live in sin. Paul repeats these questions for emphasis. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/sin]])
## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter
### We
Paul likely uses the pronoun “we” to represent at least Timothy and himself. It may also include other people.
+2CO 6 intro f5qu 0 # 2 Corinthians 06 General Notes
## Structure and formatting
Some translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with verses 2 and 16-18, which are words from the Old Testament.
## Special concepts in this chapter
### Servants
Paul refers to Christians as servants of God. God calls Christians to serve him in all circumstances. Paul describes some of the difficult circumstances in which he and his companions served God.
## Important figures of speech in this chapter
### Contrasts
Paul uses four pairs of contrasts: righteousness versus lawlessness, light versus darkness, Christ versus Satan, and the temple of God versus idols. These contrasts show a difference between Christians and non-Christians. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/righteous]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/other/light]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/other/darkness]])
### Light and darkness
The Bible often speaks of unrighteous people, people who do not do what pleases God, as if they were walking around in darkness. It speaks of light as if it were what enables those sinful people to become righteous, to understand what they are doing wrong and begin to obey God. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/righteous]])
### Rhetorical questions
Paul uses a series of rhetorical questions to teach his readers. All of these questions make essentially the same point: Christians should not intimately fellowship with those who live in sin. Paul repeats these questions for emphasis. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/sin]])
## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter
### We
Paul likely uses the pronoun “we” to represent at least Timothy and himself. It may also include other people.
2CO 6 1 in53 0 General Information: In verse 2, Paul quotes a portion from the prophet Isaiah.
2CO 6 1 kf1d 0 Connecting Statement: Paul summarizes how working together for God is supposed to be.
2CO 6 1 tbr6 figs-explicit συνεργοῦντες 1 Working together Paul is implying that he and Timothy are working with God. Alternate translation: “Working together with God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
@@ -309,7 +309,7 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo
2CO 6 17 fe1z 0 General Information: Paul quotes portions from the Old Testament prophets, Isaiah and Ezekiel.
2CO 6 17 z5ld figs-activepassive ἀφορίσθητε 1 be separate This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: “set yourselves apart” or “allow me to set you apart” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
2CO 6 17 c8jq figs-doublenegatives ἀκαθάρτου μὴ ἅπτεσθε 1 Touch no unclean thing This can be stated in positive terms. Alternate translation: “Touch only things that are clean” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]])
-2CO 7 intro hg36 0 # 2 Corinthians 07 General Notes
## Structure and formatting
In verses 2-4, Paul finishes his defense. He then writes about Titus’ return and the comfort it brought.
## Special concepts in this chapter
### Clean and unclean
Christians are “clean” in the sense that God has cleansed them from sin. They do not need to be concerned with being clean according to the law of Moses. Ungodly living can still make a Christian unclean. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/clean]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/lawofmoses]])
### Sadness and sorrow
The words “sad” and “sorrow” in this chapter indicate that the Corinthians were upset to the point of repenting. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/repent]])
## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter
### We
Paul likely uses the pronoun “we” to represent at least Timothy and himself. It may also include other people.
### Original situation
This chapter discusses in detail a previous situation. We can figure out some aspects of this situation from the information in this chapter. But it is best not to include this type of implicit information in a translation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+2CO 7 intro hg36 0 # 2 Corinthians 07 General Notes
## Structure and formatting
In verses 2-4, Paul finishes his defense. He then writes about Titus’ return and the comfort it brought.
## Special concepts in this chapter
### Clean and unclean
Christians are “clean” in the sense that God has cleansed them from sin. They do not need to be concerned with being clean according to the law of Moses. Ungodly living can still make a Christian unclean. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/clean]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/lawofmoses]])
### Sadness and sorrow
The words “sad” and “sorrow” in this chapter indicate that the Corinthians were upset to the point of repenting. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/repent]])
## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter
### We
Paul likely uses the pronoun “we” to represent at least Timothy and himself. It may also include other people.
### Original situation
This chapter discusses in detail a previous situation. We can figure out some aspects of this situation from the information in this chapter. But it is best not to include this type of implicit information in a translation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
2CO 7 1 e7t9 0 Connecting Statement: Paul continues to remind them to be separated from sin and to seek holiness purposefully.
2CO 7 1 h5xv ἀγαπητοί 1 Beloved “You whom I love” or “Dear friends”
2CO 7 1 fv49 καθαρίσωμεν ἑαυτοὺς 1 let us cleanse ourselves Here Paul is saying to stay away from any form of sin that would affect one’s relationship with God.
@@ -352,7 +352,7 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo
2CO 7 15 d87j figs-abstractnouns τὴν πάντων ὑμῶν ὑπακοήν 1 the obedience of all of you This noun “obedience” can be stated with a verb, “obey.” Alternate translation: “how all of you obeyed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
2CO 7 15 g9bz figs-doublet μετὰ φόβου καὶ τρόμου ἐδέξασθε αὐτόν 1 you welcomed him with fear and trembling Here, **fear** and **trembling** share similar meanings and emphasize the intensity of fear. Alternate translation: “you welcomed him with great reverence” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
2CO 7 15 q47h μετὰ φόβου καὶ τρόμου 1 with fear and trembling Possible meanings are (1) “with great reverence for God” or (2) “with great reverence for Titus.”
-2CO 8 intro kl7m 0 # 2 Corinthians 08 General Notes
## Structure and formatting
Chapters 8 and 9 begin a new section. Paul writes about how churches in Greece helped needy believers in Jerusalem.
Some translations set quotations from the Old Testament farther to the right on the page than the rest of the text. The ULT does this with the quoted words of verse 15.
## Special concepts in this chapter
### Gift to the church in Jerusalem
The church in Corinth started preparing to give money to the poor believers in Jerusalem. The churches in Macedonia also had given generously. Paul sends Titus and two other believers to Corinth to encourage the Corinthians to give generously. Paul and the others will carry the money to Jerusalem. They want people to know it is being done honestly.
## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter
### We
Paul likely uses the pronoun “we” to represent at least Timothy and himself. It may also include other people.
### Paradox
A “paradox” is a true statement that appears to describe something impossible. These words in verse 2 are a paradox: “the abundance of their joy and the extremity of their poverty have produced great riches of generosity.” In verse 3 Paul explains how their poverty produced riches. Paul also uses riches and poverty in other paradoxes. ([2 Corinthians 8:2](./02.md))
+2CO 8 intro kl7m 0 # 2 Corinthians 08 General Notes
## Structure and formatting
Chapters 8 and 9 begin a new section. Paul writes about how churches in Greece helped needy believers in Jerusalem.
Some translations set quotations from the Old Testament farther to the right on the page than the rest of the text. The ULT does this with the quoted words of verse 15.
## Special concepts in this chapter
### Gift to the church in Jerusalem
The church in Corinth started preparing to give money to the poor believers in Jerusalem. The churches in Macedonia also had given generously. Paul sends Titus and two other believers to Corinth to encourage the Corinthians to give generously. Paul and the others will carry the money to Jerusalem. They want people to know it is being done honestly.
## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter
### We
Paul likely uses the pronoun “we” to represent at least Timothy and himself. It may also include other people.
### Paradox
A “paradox” is a true statement that appears to describe something impossible. These words in verse 2 are a paradox: “the abundance of their joy and the extremity of their poverty have produced great riches of generosity.” In verse 3 Paul explains how their poverty produced riches. Paul also uses riches and poverty in other paradoxes. ([2 Corinthians 8:2](./02.md))
2CO 8 1 mm8g 0 Connecting Statement: Having explained his changed plans and his ministry direction, Paul talks about giving.
2CO 8 1 d1mj figs-activepassive τὴν χάριν τοῦ Θεοῦ τὴν δεδομένην ἐν ταῖς ἐκκλησίαις τῆς Μακεδονίας 1 the grace of God that has been given to the churches of Macedonia This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: “the grace that God has given to the churches of Macedonia” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
2CO 8 2 fsq8 figs-personification ἡ περισσεία τῆς χαρᾶς αὐτῶν καὶ ἡ κατὰ βάθους πτωχεία αὐτῶν, ἐπερίσσευσεν εἰς τὸ πλοῦτος τῆς ἁπλότητος αὐτῶν 1 the abundance of their joy and the extremity of their poverty have produced great riches of generosity Paul speaks of “joy” and “poverty” as if they were living things that can produce generosity. Alternate translation: “because of the people’s great joy and extreme poverty, they have become very generous” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
@@ -397,7 +397,7 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo
2CO 8 23 lat3 εἴτε ἀδελφοὶ ἡμῶν 1 As for our brothers This refers to the two other men who will accompany Titus.
2CO 8 23 u8lx figs-activepassive ἀπόστολοι ἐκκλησιῶν 1 they are sent by the churches This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: “the churches have sent them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
2CO 8 23 a8v2 figs-abstractnouns δόξα Χριστοῦ 1 an honor to Christ This can be stated with a verbal phrase. Alternate translation: “They will cause people to honor Christ” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
-2CO 9 intro lt8d 0 # 2 Corinthians 09 General Notes
## Structure and formatting
Some translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with verse 9, which is quoted from the Old Testament.
## Important figures of speech in this chapter
### Metaphors
Paul uses three agricultural metaphors. He uses them to teach about giving to needy believers. The metaphors help Paul explain that God will reward those who give generously. Paul does not say how or when God will reward them. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/other/reward]])
+2CO 9 intro lt8d 0 # 2 Corinthians 09 General Notes
## Structure and formatting
Some translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with verse 9, which is quoted from the Old Testament.
## Important figures of speech in this chapter
### Metaphors
Paul uses three agricultural metaphors. He uses them to teach about giving to needy believers. The metaphors help Paul explain that God will reward those who give generously. Paul does not say how or when God will reward them. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/other/reward]])
2CO 9 1 rd2g translate-names 0 General Information: When Paul refers to Achaia, he is talking about a Roman province located in southern Greece where Corinth is located. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
2CO 9 1 wc5l 0 Connecting Statement: Paul continues on the subject of giving. He wants to make sure that the collection of their offering for the needy believers in Jerusalem takes place before he comes so that it does not seem as though he takes advantage of them. He talks about how giving blesses the giver and glorifies God.
2CO 9 1 fxs3 figs-explicit τῆς διακονίας τῆς εἰς τοὺς ἁγίους 1 the ministry that is for the saints This refers to the collection of money to give to the believers in Jerusalem. The full meaning of this statement can be made explicit. Alternate translation: “the ministry for the believers in Jerusalem” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
@@ -427,7 +427,7 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo
2CO 9 13 plj4 figs-activepassive διὰ τῆς δοκιμῆς τῆς διακονίας ταύτης 1 Because of the proof of this ministry This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: “Because this service has tested and proven you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
2CO 9 13 ze14 δοξάζοντες τὸν Θεὸν ἐπὶ τῇ ὑποταγῇ τῆς ὁμολογίας ὑμῶν εἰς τὸ εὐαγγέλιον τοῦ Χριστοῦ, καὶ ἁπλότητι τῆς κοινωνίας εἰς αὐτοὺς καὶ εἰς πάντας 1 they glorify God for your obedience…the generosity of your sharing with them and with everyone Paul says that the Corinthians will glorify God both by being faithful to Jesus and by giving generously to other believers who have need.
2CO 9 15 es8c ἐπὶ τῇ ἀνεκδιηγήτῳ αὐτοῦ δωρεᾷ 1 for his inexpressible gift “for his gift, which words cannot describe.” Possible meanings are (1) that this gift refers to “the very great grace” that God has given to the Corinthians, which has led them to be so generous or (2) that this gift refers to Jesus Christ, whom God gave to all believers.
-2CO 10 intro abcd 0 # 2 Corinthians 10 General Notes
## Structure and formatting
Some translations set quotations from the Old Testament farther to the right on the page than the rest of the text. The ULT does this with the quoted words of verse 17.
In this chapter, Paul returns to defending his authority. He also compares the way he speaks and the way he writes.
## Special concepts in this chapter
### Boasting
“Boasting” is often thought of as bragging, which is not good. But in this letter “boasting” means confidently exulting or rejoicing.
## Important figures of speech in this chapter
### Metaphor
In verses 3-6, Paul uses many metaphors from war. He probably uses them as part of a larger metaphor about Christians being spiritually at war. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter
### Flesh
“Flesh” is possibly a metaphor for a person’s sinful nature. Paul is not teaching that our physical bodies are sinful. Paul appears to be teaching that as long as Christians are alive (“in the flesh”), we will continue to sin. But our new nature will be fighting against our old nature. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/flesh]])
+2CO 10 intro abcd 0 # 2 Corinthians 10 General Notes
## Structure and formatting
Some translations set quotations from the Old Testament farther to the right on the page than the rest of the text. The ULT does this with the quoted words of verse 17.
In this chapter, Paul returns to defending his authority. He also compares the way he speaks and the way he writes.
## Special concepts in this chapter
### Boasting
“Boasting” is often thought of as bragging, which is not good. But in this letter “boasting” means confidently exulting or rejoicing.
## Important figures of speech in this chapter
### Metaphor
In verses 3-6, Paul uses many metaphors from war. He probably uses them as part of a larger metaphor about Christians being spiritually at war. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter
### Flesh
“Flesh” is possibly a metaphor for a person’s sinful nature. Paul is not teaching that our physical bodies are sinful. Paul appears to be teaching that as long as Christians are alive (“in the flesh”), we will continue to sin. But our new nature will be fighting against our old nature. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/flesh]])
2CO 10 1 yc1g 0 Connecting Statement: Paul shifts the subject from giving to affirming his authority to teach as he does.
2CO 10 1 gq7j figs-abstractnouns διὰ τῆς πραΰτητος καὶ ἐπιεικείας τοῦ Χριστοῦ 1 by the meekness and gentleness of Christ The word **humility** and **gentleness** are abstract nouns, and can be expressed in another way. Alternate translation: “I am humble and gentle as I do so, because Christ has made me that way” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
2CO 10 2 i6hh τοὺς λογιζομένους 1 those who regard “who think that”
@@ -466,7 +466,7 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo
2CO 10 18 h81t ὁ ἑαυτὸν συνιστάνων 1 who commends himself This means that he provides enough evidence for each person who hears him to decide whether he is right or wrong. See how “recommend ourselves” is translated in [2 Corinthians 4:2](../04/02.md).
2CO 10 18 n5v6 figs-activepassive ἐστιν δόκιμος 1 is approved This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: “whom the Lord approves” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
2CO 10 18 sy2r figs-ellipsis ὃν ὁ Κύριος συνίστησιν 1 the one whom the Lord commends You can make clear the understood information. Alternate translation: “the one whom the Lord recommends is the one of whom the Lord approves” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
-2CO 11 intro abce 0 # 2 Corinthians 11 General Notes
## Structure and formatting
In this chapter, Paul continues defending his authority.
## Special concepts in this chapter
### False teaching
The Corinthians were quick to accept false teachers. They taught things about Jesus and the gospel that were different and not true. Unlike these false teachers, Paul sacrificially served the Corinthians. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/goodnews]])
### Light
Light is commonly used in the New Testament as a metaphor. Paul here uses light to indicate the revealing of God and his righteousness. Darkness describes sin. Sin seeks to remain hidden from God. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/other/light]], [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/righteous]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/other/darkness]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/sin]])
## Important figures of speech in this chapter
### Metaphor
Paul begins this chapter with an extended metaphor. He compares himself to the father of a bride who is giving a pure, virgin bride to her bridegroom. Wedding practices change depending on the cultural background. But the idea of helping to present someone as a grown and holy child is explicitly pictured in this passage. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/holy]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
### Irony
This chapter is full of irony. Paul is hoping to shame the Corinthian believers with his irony.
“You tolerate these things well enough!” Paul thinks that they should not tolerate the way the false apostles treated them. Paul does not think they are really apostles at all.
The statement, “For you gladly put up with fools. You are wise yourselves!” means that the Corinthian believers think they were very wise but Paul does not agree.
“I will say to our shame that we were too weak to do that.” Paul is speaking about behavior he thinks is very wrong in order to avoid it. He is speaking as if he thinks he is wrong for not doing it. He uses a rhetorical question also as irony. “Did I sin by humbling myself so you might be exalted?” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-irony]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/apostle]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
### Rhetorical questions
In refuting the false apostles claiming to be superior, Paul uses a series of rhetorical questions. Each question is coupled with an answer: “Are they Hebrews? So am I. Are they Israelites? So am I. Are they descendants of Abraham? So am I. Are they servants of Christ? (I speak as though I were out of my mind.) I am more.”
He also uses a series of rhetorical questions to empathize with his converts: “Who is weak, and I am not weak? Who has caused another to fall into sin, and I do not burn within?”
### “Are they servants of Christ?”
This is sarcasm, a special type of irony used to mock or insult. Paul does not believe these false teachers actually serve Christ, only that they pretend to do so.
## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter
### Paradox
A “paradox” is a true statement that appears to describe something impossible. This sentence in verse 30 is a paradox: “If I must boast, I will boast about what shows my weaknesses.” Paul does not explain why he would boast in his weakness until 2 Corinthians 12:9. ([2 Corinthians 11:30](./30.md))
+2CO 11 intro abce 0 # 2 Corinthians 11 General Notes
## Structure and formatting
In this chapter, Paul continues defending his authority.
## Special concepts in this chapter
### False teaching
The Corinthians were quick to accept false teachers. They taught things about Jesus and the gospel that were different and not true. Unlike these false teachers, Paul sacrificially served the Corinthians. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/goodnews]])
### Light
Light is commonly used in the New Testament as a metaphor. Paul here uses light to indicate the revealing of God and his righteousness. Darkness describes sin. Sin seeks to remain hidden from God. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/other/light]], [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/righteous]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/other/darkness]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/sin]])
## Important figures of speech in this chapter
### Metaphor
Paul begins this chapter with an extended metaphor. He compares himself to the father of a bride who is giving a pure, virgin bride to her bridegroom. Wedding practices change depending on the cultural background. But the idea of helping to present someone as a grown and holy child is explicitly pictured in this passage. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/holy]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
### Irony
This chapter is full of irony. Paul is hoping to shame the Corinthian believers with his irony.
“You tolerate these things well enough!” Paul thinks that they should not tolerate the way the false apostles treated them. Paul does not think they are really apostles at all.
The statement, “For you gladly put up with fools. You are wise yourselves!” means that the Corinthian believers think they were very wise but Paul does not agree.
“I will say to our shame that we were too weak to do that.” Paul is speaking about behavior he thinks is very wrong in order to avoid it. He is speaking as if he thinks he is wrong for not doing it. He uses a rhetorical question also as irony. “Did I sin by humbling myself so you might be exalted?” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-irony]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/apostle]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
### Rhetorical questions
In refuting the false apostles claiming to be superior, Paul uses a series of rhetorical questions. Each question is coupled with an answer: “Are they Hebrews? So am I. Are they Israelites? So am I. Are they descendants of Abraham? So am I. Are they servants of Christ? (I speak as though I were out of my mind.) I am more.”
He also uses a series of rhetorical questions to empathize with his converts: “Who is weak, and I am not weak? Who has caused another to fall into sin, and I do not burn within?”
### “Are they servants of Christ?”
This is sarcasm, a special type of irony used to mock or insult. Paul does not believe these false teachers actually serve Christ, only that they pretend to do so.
## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter
### Paradox
A “paradox” is a true statement that appears to describe something impossible. This sentence in verse 30 is a paradox: “If I must boast, I will boast about what shows my weaknesses.” Paul does not explain why he would boast in his weakness until 2 Corinthians 12:9. ([2 Corinthians 11:30](./30.md))
2CO 11 1 t7ks 0 Connecting Statement: Paul continues to affirm his apostleship.
2CO 11 1 r4q6 ἀνείχεσθέ μου μικρόν τι ἀφροσύνης 1 bear with me in a little bit of foolishness “allow me to act like a fool”
2CO 11 2 m6vl ζηλῶ…ζήλῳ 1 jealous…jealousy These words speak of a good, strong desire that the Corinthians be faithful to Christ, and that no one should persuade them to leave him.
@@ -538,7 +538,7 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo
2CO 11 32 j7de πιάσαι με 1 to arrest me “so that they might catch and arrest me”
2CO 11 33 i8xa figs-activepassive ἐν σαργάνῃ, ἐχαλάσθην 1 I was lowered in a basket This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: “some people put me in a basket and lowered me to the ground” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
2CO 11 33 aw7d figs-metonymy τὰς χεῖρας αὐτοῦ 1 from his hands Paul uses the governor’s hands as metonymy for the governor. Alternate translation: “from the governor” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
-2CO 12 intro abcf 0 # 2 Corinthians 12 General Notes
## Structure and formatting
Paul continues defending his authority in this chapter.
When Paul was with the Corinthians, he proved himself to be an apostle by his powerful deeds. He had not ever taken anything from them. Now that he is coming for the third time, he will still not take anything. He hopes that when he visits, he will not need to be harsh with them. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/apostle]])
## Special concepts in this chapter
### Paul’s vision
Paul now defends his authority by telling about a wonderful vision of heaven. Although he speaks in the third person in verses 2-5, verse 7 indicates that he was the person who experienced the vision. It was so great, God gave him a physical handicap to keep him humble. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/heaven]])
### Third heaven
Many scholars believe the “third” heaven is the dwelling place of God. This is because Scripture also uses “heaven” to refer to the sky (the “first” heaven) and the universe (the “second” heaven).
## Important figures of speech in this chapter
### Rhetorical questions
Paul uses many rhetorical questions as he defends himself against his enemies who accused him: “For how were you less important than the rest of the churches, except that I was not a burden to you?” “Did Titus take advantage of you? Did we not walk in the same way? Did we not walk in the same steps?” and “Do you think all of this time we have been defending ourselves to you?” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
### Sarcasm
Paul uses sarcasm, a special type of irony, when he reminds them how he had helped them at no cost. He says, “Forgive me for this wrong!” He also uses regular irony when he says: “But, since I am so crafty, I am the one who caught you by deceit.” He uses it to introduce his defense against this accusation by showing how impossible it was to be true. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-irony]])
## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter
### Paradox
A “paradox” is a true statement that appears to describe something impossible. This sentence in verse 5 is a paradox: “I will not boast, except about my weaknesses.” Most people do not boast about being weak. This sentence in verse 10 is also a paradox: “For whenever I am weak, then I am strong.” In verse 9, Paul explains why both of these statements are true. ([2 Corinthians 12:5](./05.md))
+2CO 12 intro abcf 0 # 2 Corinthians 12 General Notes
## Structure and formatting
Paul continues defending his authority in this chapter.
When Paul was with the Corinthians, he proved himself to be an apostle by his powerful deeds. He had not ever taken anything from them. Now that he is coming for the third time, he will still not take anything. He hopes that when he visits, he will not need to be harsh with them. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/apostle]])
## Special concepts in this chapter
### Paul’s vision
Paul now defends his authority by telling about a wonderful vision of heaven. Although he speaks in the third person in verses 2-5, verse 7 indicates that he was the person who experienced the vision. It was so great, God gave him a physical handicap to keep him humble. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/heaven]])
### Third heaven
Many scholars believe the “third” heaven is the dwelling place of God. This is because Scripture also uses “heaven” to refer to the sky (the “first” heaven) and the universe (the “second” heaven).
## Important figures of speech in this chapter
### Rhetorical questions
Paul uses many rhetorical questions as he defends himself against his enemies who accused him: “For how were you less important than the rest of the churches, except that I was not a burden to you?” “Did Titus take advantage of you? Did we not walk in the same way? Did we not walk in the same steps?” and “Do you think all of this time we have been defending ourselves to you?” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
### Sarcasm
Paul uses sarcasm, a special type of irony, when he reminds them how he had helped them at no cost. He says, “Forgive me for this wrong!” He also uses regular irony when he says: “But, since I am so crafty, I am the one who caught you by deceit.” He uses it to introduce his defense against this accusation by showing how impossible it was to be true. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-irony]])
## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter
### Paradox
A “paradox” is a true statement that appears to describe something impossible. This sentence in verse 5 is a paradox: “I will not boast, except about my weaknesses.” Most people do not boast about being weak. This sentence in verse 10 is also a paradox: “For whenever I am weak, then I am strong.” In verse 9, Paul explains why both of these statements are true. ([2 Corinthians 12:5](./05.md))
2CO 12 1 iwn3 0 Connecting Statement: In defending his apostleship from God, Paul continues to state specific things that have happened to him since he became a believer.
2CO 12 1 iur3 ἐλεύσομαι 1 I will go on to “I will continue talking, but now about”
2CO 12 1 rb42 figs-hendiadys ὀπτασίας καὶ ἀποκαλύψεις Κυρίου 1 visions and revelations from the Lord Possible meanings are (1) Paul uses the words **visions** and **revelations** to mean the same thing in hendiadys for emphasis. Alternate translation: “things that the Lord has allowed only me to see” or (2) Paul is speaking of two different things. Alternate translation: “secret things that the Lord has let me see with my eyes and other secrets that he has told me about” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys]])
@@ -606,7 +606,7 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo
2CO 12 21 rh22 figs-abstractnouns ἐπὶ τῇ ἀκαθαρσίᾳ 1 of the impurity The abstract noun impurity can be translated as “things that do not please God.” Alternate translation: “of secretly thinking about and desiring things that do not please God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
2CO 12 21 rn6u figs-abstractnouns ἐπὶ τῇ…πορνείᾳ 1 of the…sexual immorality The abstract noun “immorality” can be translated as “immoral deeds.” Alternate translation: “of doing sexually immoral deeds” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
2CO 12 21 yyr5 figs-abstractnouns ἐπὶ τῇ…ἀσελγείᾳ 1 of the…lustful indulgence The abstract noun “indulgence” can be translated using a verbal phrase. Alternate translation: “of…doing things that satisfy immoral sexual desire” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
-2CO 13 intro abcg 0 # 2 Corinthians 13 General Notes
## Structure and formatting
In this chapter, Paul finishes defending his authority. He then concludes the letter with a final greeting and blessing.
## Special concepts in this chapter
### Preparation
Paul instructs the Corinthians as he prepares to visit them. He is hoping to avoid needing to discipline anyone in the church so he can visit them joyfully. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/disciple]])
## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter
### Power and weakness
Paul repeatedly uses the contrasting words “power” and “weakness” in this chapter. The translator should use words that are understood to be opposites of each other.
### “Examine yourselves to see if you are in the faith. Test yourselves.”
Scholars are divided over what these sentences mean. Some scholars say that Christians are to test themselves to see whether their actions align with their Christian faith. The context favors this understanding. Others say these sentences mean that Christians should look at their actions and question whether they are genuinely saved. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/faith]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/save]])
+2CO 13 intro abcg 0 # 2 Corinthians 13 General Notes
## Structure and formatting
In this chapter, Paul finishes defending his authority. He then concludes the letter with a final greeting and blessing.
## Special concepts in this chapter
### Preparation
Paul instructs the Corinthians as he prepares to visit them. He is hoping to avoid needing to discipline anyone in the church so he can visit them joyfully. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/disciple]])
## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter
### Power and weakness
Paul repeatedly uses the contrasting words “power” and “weakness” in this chapter. The translator should use words that are understood to be opposites of each other.
### “Examine yourselves to see if you are in the faith. Test yourselves.”
Scholars are divided over what these sentences mean. Some scholars say that Christians are to test themselves to see whether their actions align with their Christian faith. The context favors this understanding. Others say these sentences mean that Christians should look at their actions and question whether they are genuinely saved. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/faith]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/save]])
2CO 13 1 y8fz 0 Connecting Statement: Paul establishes that Christ is speaking through him and that Paul is wanting to restore them, encourage them, and unify them.
2CO 13 1 slj1 figs-activepassive ἐπὶ στόματος δύο μαρτύρων καὶ τριῶν σταθήσεται πᾶν ῥῆμα 1 Every matter must be established by the evidence of two or three witnesses This can be stated as active. Alternate translation: “Believe that someone has done something wrong only after two or three people have said the same thing” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
2CO 13 2 fxl6 τοῖς λοιποῖς πᾶσιν 1 all the rest “all you other people”
diff --git a/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv b/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv
index df243fb56..2b8406ae3 100644
--- a/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv
+++ b/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv
@@ -1,6 +1,6 @@
Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNote
-GAL front intro i6u9 0 # Introduction to Galatians
## Part 1: General Introduction
### Outline of the Book of Galatians
1. Paul declares his authority as an apostle of Jesus Christ; he says that he is surprised by the false teachings that the Christians in Galatia have accepted from other people (1:1-10).
1. Paul says that people are saved by trusting in Christ alone, not by keeping the law (1:11-2:21).
1. God puts people right with himself only when they trust in Christ; the example of Abraham; the curse which the law brings (and not a means of salvation); slavery and freedom compared and illustrated by Hagar and Sarah (3:1-4:31).
1. When people are joined to Christ, they become free from having to keep the law of Moses. They are also free to live as the Holy Spirit guides them. They are free to refuse the demands of sin. They are free to bear each other’s burdens (5:1-6:10).
1. Paul warns the Christians not to trust in being circumcised and in keeping the law of Moses. Instead, they must trust in Christ (6:11-18).
### Who wrote the Book of Galatians?
Paul from the city of Tarsus was the author. He had been known as Saul in his early life. Before becoming a Christian, Paul was a Pharisee. He persecuted Christians. After he began to trust in Jesus Christ, he traveled several times throughout the Roman Empire telling people about Jesus.
It is uncertain when Paul wrote this letter and where he was when he wrote it. Some scholars think Paul was in the city of Ephesus and wrote this letter after the second time he traveled to tell people about Jesus. Other scholars think Paul was in the city of Antioch in Syria and wrote the letter soon after the first time he traveled.
### What is the Book of Galatians about?
Paul wrote this letter to both Jewish and non-Jewish Christians in the region of Galatia. He wanted to write against the false teachers who said that Christians need to follow the law of Moses. Paul defended the gospel by explaining that a person is saved by believing in Jesus Christ. People are saved as result of God being kind and not as a result of people doing good works. No person can perfectly obey the law. Any attempt to please God by obeying the law of Moses will only result in God condemning them. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/goodnews]], [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/save]], [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/faith]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/lawofmoses]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/works]])
### How should the title of this book be translated?
Translators may choose to call this book by its traditional title, “Galatians.” Or they may choose a clearer title, such as “Paul’s Letter to the Church in Galatia.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
## Part 2: Important Religious and Cultural Concepts
### What does it mean to “live like Jews” (2:14)?
To “live like Jews” means to obey the law of Moses, even though one trusts in Christ. The people among the early Christians who taught that this was necessary were called “Judaizers.”
## Part 3: Important Translation Issues
### How did Paul use the terms “law” and “grace” in the Book of Galatians?
These terms are used in a unique way in Galatians. There is an important teaching in Galatians about Christian living. Under the law of Moses, righteous or holy living required a person to obey a set of rules and regulations. As Christians, holy living is now motivated by grace. This means that Christians have freedom in Christ and are not required to obey a specific set of rules. Instead, Christians are to live a holy life because they are thankful that God has been so kind to them. This is called “the law of Christ.” (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/righteous]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/holy]])
### What did Paul mean by the expression “in Christ,” “in the Lord,” etc.?
This kind of expression occurs in 1:22; 2:4, 17; 3:14, 26, 28; 5:6, 10. Paul meant to express the idea of a very close union with Christ and the believers. At the same time, he often intended other meanings as well. See, for example, “when we seek for God to justify us in Christ” (2:17), where Paul spoke of being justified by means of Christ.
Please see the introduction to the Book of Romans for more details about this kind of expression.
### What are the major issues in the text of the Book of Galatians?
* “Foolish Galatians, whose evil eye has harmed you? Was not Jesus Christ depicted as crucified before your eyes” (3:1)? The ULT, UST, and the other modern versions have this reading. However, older versions of the Bible add, “[so] that ye should not obey the truth.” Translators are advised not to include this expression. However, if in the translators’ region there are older Bible versions that have the passage, the translators can include it. If it is translated, it should be put inside square brackets ([]) to indicate that it is probably not original to Galatians. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants]])
(See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants]])
-GAL 1 intro f3n5 0 # Galatians 01 General Notes
## Structure and formatting
Paul started this letter differently than his other letters. He adds that he was “not an apostle from men nor by human agency, but through Jesus Christ and God the Father, who raised him from the dead ones.” Paul probably included these words because false teachers were opposing him and trying to undermine his authority.
## Special concepts in this chapter
### Heresy
God eternally saves people only through the true, biblical gospel. God condemns any other version of the gospel. Paul asks God to curse those who teach a false gospel. They might not be saved. They should be treated as non-Christians. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/save]], [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/eternity]], [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/goodnews]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/condemn]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/curse]])
### Paul’s qualifications
Some people in the early church were teaching that Gentiles needed to obey the law of Moses. To refute this teaching, in verses 13-16 Paul explains how he was formerly a zealous Jew. But God still needed to save him and show him the true gospel. As a Jew, and the apostle to Gentile people, Paul was uniquely qualified to address this issue. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/lawofmoses]])
## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter
### “You are turning so quickly to a different gospel”
The Book of Galatians is one of Paul’s earliest letters in Scripture. It shows that heresies troubled even the early church. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+GAL front intro i6u9 0 # Introduction to Galatians
## Part 1: General Introduction
### Outline of the Book of Galatians
1. Paul declares his authority as an apostle of Jesus Christ; he says that he is surprised by the false teachings that the Christians in Galatia have accepted from other people (1:1-10).
1. Paul says that people are saved by trusting in Christ alone, not by keeping the law (1:11-2:21).
1. God puts people right with himself only when they trust in Christ; the example of Abraham; the curse which the law brings (and not a means of salvation); slavery and freedom compared and illustrated by Hagar and Sarah (3:1-4:31).
1. When people are joined to Christ, they become free from having to keep the law of Moses. They are also free to live as the Holy Spirit guides them. They are free to refuse the demands of sin. They are free to bear each other’s burdens (5:1-6:10).
1. Paul warns the Christians not to trust in being circumcised and in keeping the law of Moses. Instead, they must trust in Christ (6:11-18).
### Who wrote the Book of Galatians?
Paul from the city of Tarsus was the author. He had been known as Saul in his early life. Before becoming a Christian, Paul was a Pharisee. He persecuted Christians. After he began to trust in Jesus Christ, he traveled several times throughout the Roman Empire telling people about Jesus.
It is uncertain when Paul wrote this letter and where he was when he wrote it. Some scholars think Paul was in the city of Ephesus and wrote this letter after the second time he traveled to tell people about Jesus. Other scholars think Paul was in the city of Antioch in Syria and wrote the letter soon after the first time he traveled.
### What is the Book of Galatians about?
Paul wrote this letter to both Jewish and non-Jewish Christians in the region of Galatia. He wanted to write against the false teachers who said that Christians need to follow the law of Moses. Paul defended the gospel by explaining that a person is saved by believing in Jesus Christ. People are saved as result of God being kind and not as a result of people doing good works. No person can perfectly obey the law. Any attempt to please God by obeying the law of Moses will only result in God condemning them. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/goodnews]], [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/save]], [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/faith]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/lawofmoses]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/works]])
### How should the title of this book be translated?
Translators may choose to call this book by its traditional title, “Galatians.” Or they may choose a clearer title, such as “Paul’s Letter to the Church in Galatia.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
## Part 2: Important Religious and Cultural Concepts
### What does it mean to “live like Jews” (2:14)?
To “live like Jews” means to obey the law of Moses, even though one trusts in Christ. The people among the early Christians who taught that this was necessary were called “Judaizers.”
## Part 3: Important Translation Issues
### How did Paul use the terms “law” and “grace” in the Book of Galatians?
These terms are used in a unique way in Galatians. There is an important teaching in Galatians about Christian living. Under the law of Moses, righteous or holy living required a person to obey a set of rules and regulations. As Christians, holy living is now motivated by grace. This means that Christians have freedom in Christ and are not required to obey a specific set of rules. Instead, Christians are to live a holy life because they are thankful that God has been so kind to them. This is called “the law of Christ.” (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/righteous]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/holy]])
### What did Paul mean by the expression “in Christ,” “in the Lord,” etc.?
This kind of expression occurs in 1:22; 2:4, 17; 3:14, 26, 28; 5:6, 10. Paul meant to express the idea of a very close union with Christ and the believers. At the same time, he often intended other meanings as well. See, for example, “when we seek for God to justify us in Christ” (2:17), where Paul spoke of being justified by means of Christ.
Please see the introduction to the Book of Romans for more details about this kind of expression.
### What are the major issues in the text of the Book of Galatians?
* “Foolish Galatians, whose evil eye has harmed you? Was not Jesus Christ depicted as crucified before your eyes” (3:1)? The ULT, UST, and the other modern versions have this reading. However, older versions of the Bible add, “[so] that ye should not obey the truth.” Translators are advised not to include this expression. However, if in the translators’ region there are older Bible versions that have the passage, the translators can include it. If it is translated, it should be put inside square brackets ([]) to indicate that it is probably not original to Galatians. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants]])
(See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants]])
+GAL 1 intro f3n5 0 # Galatians 01 General Notes
## Structure and formatting
Paul started this letter differently than his other letters. He adds that he was “not an apostle from men nor by human agency, but through Jesus Christ and God the Father, who raised him from the dead ones.” Paul probably included these words because false teachers were opposing him and trying to undermine his authority.
## Special concepts in this chapter
### Heresy
God eternally saves people only through the true, biblical gospel. God condemns any other version of the gospel. Paul asks God to curse those who teach a false gospel. They might not be saved. They should be treated as non-Christians. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/save]], [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/eternity]], [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/goodnews]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/condemn]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/curse]])
### Paul’s qualifications
Some people in the early church were teaching that Gentiles needed to obey the law of Moses. To refute this teaching, in verses 13-16 Paul explains how he was formerly a zealous Jew. But God still needed to save him and show him the true gospel. As a Jew, and the apostle to Gentile people, Paul was uniquely qualified to address this issue. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/lawofmoses]])
## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter
### “You are turning so quickly to a different gospel”
The Book of Galatians is one of Paul’s earliest letters in Scripture. It shows that heresies troubled even the early church. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
GAL 1 1 m4ss figs-you 0 General Information: Paul, an apostle, writes this letter to the churches in the area of Galatia. Unless noted otherwise, all instances of “you” and “your” in this letter refer to the Galatians and are plural. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-you]])
GAL 1 1 d1kd τοῦ ἐγείραντος αὐτὸν 1 the one who raised him “the one who caused him to live again”
GAL 1 2 d737 figs-gendernotations ἀδελφοί 1 brothers Here this means fellow Christians, including both men and women, since all believers in Christ are members of one spiritual family, with God as their heavenly Father. Alternate translation: “brothers and sisters” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
@@ -40,7 +40,7 @@ GAL 1 20 h3cb figs-litotes ἃ δὲ γράφω ὑμῖν, ἰδοὺ, ἐνώ
GAL 1 21 m25a κλίματα τῆς Συρίας 1 regions of Syria “part of the world called Syria”
GAL 1 22 y6l4 ἤμην δὲ ἀγνοούμενος τῷ προσώπῳ ταῖς ἐκκλησίαις τῆς Ἰουδαίας, ταῖς ἐν Χριστῷ 1 But I was unknown by face to the churches of Judea that are in Christ “None of the people in the churches of Judea that are in Christ had ever met me”
GAL 1 23 z8qt μόνον δὲ ἀκούοντες ἦσαν 1 But they were only hearing “But they only knew what they heard others saying about me”
-GAL 2 intro xe28 0 # Galatians 02 General Notes
## Structure and formatting
Paul continues to defend the true gospel. This began in [Galatians 1:11](../../gal/01/11.md).
## Special concepts in this chapter
### Freedom and slavery
Throughout this letter, Paul contrasts freedom and slavery. The Christian is free in Christ to do many different things. But the Christian who attempts to follow the law of Moses needs to follow the whole law. Paul describes trying to follow the law as a type of slavery. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/lawofmoses]])
## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter
### “I do not negate the grace of God”
Paul teaches that, if a Christian attempts to follow the law of Moses, they do not understand the grace God has shown to them. This is a fundamental error. But Paul uses the words “I do not negate the grace of God” as a type of hypothetical situation. The purpose of this statement could be seen as, “If you could be saved by following the law, then it would negate the grace of God.” (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/grace]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hypo]])
+GAL 2 intro xe28 0 # Galatians 02 General Notes
## Structure and formatting
Paul continues to defend the true gospel. This began in [Galatians 1:11](../../gal/01/11.md).
## Special concepts in this chapter
### Freedom and slavery
Throughout this letter, Paul contrasts freedom and slavery. The Christian is free in Christ to do many different things. But the Christian who attempts to follow the law of Moses needs to follow the whole law. Paul describes trying to follow the law as a type of slavery. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/lawofmoses]])
## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter
### “I do not negate the grace of God”
Paul teaches that, if a Christian attempts to follow the law of Moses, they do not understand the grace God has shown to them. This is a fundamental error. But Paul uses the words “I do not negate the grace of God” as a type of hypothetical situation. The purpose of this statement could be seen as, “If you could be saved by following the law, then it would negate the grace of God.” (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/grace]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hypo]])
GAL 2 1 zt61 0 Connecting Statement: Paul continues to give the history of how he learned the gospel from God, not the apostles.
GAL 2 1 zth5 ἀνέβην 1 I went up “I traveled.” Jerusalem is located in hilly country. The Jews also viewed Jerusalem as the place on earth that is closest to heaven, so Paul may have been speaking figuratively, or it may be that it was reflecting the difficult, uphill, journey to get to Jerusalem.
GAL 2 2 msv4 τοῖς δοκοῦσιν 1 to those who seemed to be important “to the most important leaders among the believers”
@@ -154,7 +154,7 @@ GAL 3 27 v6n1 ὅσοι γὰρ εἰς Χριστὸν ἐβαπτίσθητε
GAL 3 27 di9v figs-metaphor Χριστὸν ἐνεδύσασθε 1 have put on Christ Possible meanings are (1) this is a metaphor meaning that they have been united to Christ. Alternate translation: “have become united with Christ” or “belong to Christ” or (2) this is a metaphor meaning that they have become like Christ. Alternate translation: “have become like Christ” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
GAL 3 28 tyb8 οὐκ ἔνι Ἰουδαῖος οὐδὲ Ἕλλην, οὐκ ἔνι δοῦλος οὐδὲ ἐλεύθερος, οὐκ ἔνι ἄρσεν καὶ θῆλυ 1 There is neither Jew nor Greek, there is neither slave nor free, there is neither male nor female “God sees no difference between Jew and Greek, slave and free, male and female”
GAL 3 29 qp4z figs-metaphor κληρονόμοι 1 heirs The people to whom God has made promises are spoken of as if they were to inherit property and wealth from a family member. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
-GAL 4 intro h6gw 0 # Galatians 04 General Notes
## Structure and formatting
Some translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with verse 27, which is quoted from the Old Testament.
## Special concepts in this chapter
### Sonship
Sonship is a complex issue. Scholars have many views on Israel’s sonship. Paul uses sonship to teach how being under the law differs from being free in Christ. Not all of Abraham’s physical descendants inherited God’s promises to him. Only his descendants through Isaac and Jacob inherited the promises. And God only adopts into his family those who follow Abraham spiritually through faith. They are children of God with an inheritance. Paul calls them “children of promise.” (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/inherit]], [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/promise]], [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/spirit]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/faith]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/adoption]])
## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter
### Abba, Father
“Abba” is an Aramaic word. In ancient Israel, people used it to informally refer to their fathers. Paul “transliterates” its sounds by writing them with Greek letters. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-transliterate]])
+GAL 4 intro h6gw 0 # Galatians 04 General Notes
## Structure and formatting
Some translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with verse 27, which is quoted from the Old Testament.
## Special concepts in this chapter
### Sonship
Sonship is a complex issue. Scholars have many views on Israel’s sonship. Paul uses sonship to teach how being under the law differs from being free in Christ. Not all of Abraham’s physical descendants inherited God’s promises to him. Only his descendants through Isaac and Jacob inherited the promises. And God only adopts into his family those who follow Abraham spiritually through faith. They are children of God with an inheritance. Paul calls them “children of promise.” (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/inherit]], [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/promise]], [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/spirit]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/faith]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/adoption]])
## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter
### Abba, Father
“Abba” is an Aramaic word. In ancient Israel, people used it to informally refer to their fathers. Paul “transliterates” its sounds by writing them with Greek letters. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-transliterate]])
GAL 4 1 fr5u 0 Connecting Statement: Paul continues to remind the Galatian believers that Christ came to redeem those who were under the law, and that he made them no more slaves but sons.
GAL 4 1 n5yb οὐδὲν διαφέρει 1 he is no different from “he is the same as”
GAL 4 2 bd5a ἐπιτρόπους 1 guardians people with legal responsibility for children
@@ -215,7 +215,7 @@ GAL 4 29 c9lf figs-metaphor κατὰ σάρκα 1 according to the flesh This r
GAL 4 29 gt1e κατὰ Πνεῦμα 1 according to the Spirit “because of something the Spirit did”
GAL 4 31 sy8u ἀδελφοί 1 brothers See how you translated this in [Galatians 1:2](../01/02.md).
GAL 4 31 y3c2 figs-ellipsis ἀλλὰ τῆς ἐλευθέρας 1 but of the free woman The words “we are children” are understood from the previous phrase. This can be translated as a separate sentence. Alternate translation: “rather, we are children of the free woman” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
-GAL 5 intro bcg3 0 # Galatians 05 General Notes
## Structure and formatting
Paul continues writing about the law of Moses as something that traps or enslaves a person. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/lawofmoses]])
## Special concepts in this chapter
### Fruit of the Spirit
The phrase “the fruit of the Spirit” is not plural, even though it begins a list of several things. Translators should keep the singular form if possible. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/other/fruit]])
## Important figures of speech in this chapter
### Illustrations
Paul uses several metaphors in this chapter to illustrate his points and help explain complicated issues. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter
### “You are cut off from Christ, you who would be justified by the law; you no longer experience grace.”
Some scholars think Paul teaches that being circumcised causes a person to lose their salvation. Other scholars think Paul means that obeying the law to try to get right with God will keep a person from being saved by grace. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/grace]])
+GAL 5 intro bcg3 0 # Galatians 05 General Notes
## Structure and formatting
Paul continues writing about the law of Moses as something that traps or enslaves a person. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/lawofmoses]])
## Special concepts in this chapter
### Fruit of the Spirit
The phrase “the fruit of the Spirit” is not plural, even though it begins a list of several things. Translators should keep the singular form if possible. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/other/fruit]])
## Important figures of speech in this chapter
### Illustrations
Paul uses several metaphors in this chapter to illustrate his points and help explain complicated issues. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter
### “You are cut off from Christ, you who would be justified by the law; you no longer experience grace.”
Some scholars think Paul teaches that being circumcised causes a person to lose their salvation. Other scholars think Paul means that obeying the law to try to get right with God will keep a person from being saved by grace. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/grace]])
GAL 5 1 up16 0 Connecting Statement: Paul applies the allegory by reminding the believers to use their liberty in Christ because all the law is fulfilled in loving neighbors as ourselves.
GAL 5 1 kuu9 figs-explicit τῇ ἐλευθερίᾳ, ἡμᾶς Χριστὸς ἠλευθέρωσεν 1 For freedom Christ has set us free “It is so that we can be free that Christ has set us free.” It is implied that **Christ** sets believers **free** from the old covenant. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
GAL 5 1 xd2m figs-metaphor τῇ ἐλευθερίᾳ, ἡμᾶς Χριστὸς ἠλευθέρωσεν 1 For freedom Christ has set us free Here, **freedom** from the old covenant is a metaphor for not being obligated to obey it. Alternate translation: “Christ has set us free from the old covenant so that we might be free” or “Christ has set us free so that we might live as free people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
@@ -277,7 +277,7 @@ GAL 5 24 m3nm figs-personification τὴν σάρκα…σὺν τοῖς παθ
GAL 5 25 h9hd εἰ ζῶμεν Πνεύματι 1 If we live by the Spirit “Since God’s Spirit has caused us to be alive”
GAL 5 25 sq7b figs-metaphor Πνεύματι καὶ στοιχῶμεν 1 let us also walk by the Spirit Here, **walk** is a metaphor for living every day. Alternate translation: “let us allow the Holy Spirit to guide us so we do things that please and honor God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
GAL 5 26 a9x9 μὴ γινώμεθα 1 Let us not become “We should not be”
-GAL 6 intro bv8h 0 # Galatians 06 General Notes
## Structure and formatting
This chapter concludes Paul’s letter. His final words address some issues that do not seem to be connected to the rest of his letter.
### Brothers
Paul writes the words in this chapter to Christians. He calls them “brothers.” This refers to Paul’s Christian brothers and not his Jewish brothers.
## Special concepts in this chapter
### New Creation
People who are born again are a new creation in Christ. Christians have been given new life in Christ. They have a new nature in them after they come to faith in Christ. To Paul, this is more significant than a person’s ancestry. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/bornagain]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/faith]])
## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter
### Flesh
This is a complex issue. “Flesh” is contrasted with “spirit.” In this chapter, flesh is also used to refer to the physical body. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/flesh]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/sin]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/spirit]])
+GAL 6 intro bv8h 0 # Galatians 06 General Notes
## Structure and formatting
This chapter concludes Paul’s letter. His final words address some issues that do not seem to be connected to the rest of his letter.
### Brothers
Paul writes the words in this chapter to Christians. He calls them “brothers.” This refers to Paul’s Christian brothers and not his Jewish brothers.
## Special concepts in this chapter
### New Creation
People who are born again are a new creation in Christ. Christians have been given new life in Christ. They have a new nature in them after they come to faith in Christ. To Paul, this is more significant than a person’s ancestry. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/bornagain]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/faith]])
## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter
### Flesh
This is a complex issue. “Flesh” is contrasted with “spirit.” In this chapter, flesh is also used to refer to the physical body. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/flesh]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/sin]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/spirit]])
GAL 6 1 x8zg 0 Connecting Statement: Paul teaches believers how they should treat other believers and how God rewards.
GAL 6 1 ss7l ἀδελφοί 1 Brothers See how you translated this in [Galatians 1:2](../01/02.md).
GAL 6 1 vm8f ἐὰν…ἄνθρωπος 1 if a man “if anyone among you”
diff --git a/en_tn_50-EPH.tsv b/en_tn_50-EPH.tsv
index 35a4bee48..af089d390 100644
--- a/en_tn_50-EPH.tsv
+++ b/en_tn_50-EPH.tsv
@@ -1,6 +1,6 @@
Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNote
-EPH front intro e3di 0 # Introduction to Ephesians
## Part 1: General Introduction
### Outline of Ephesians
1. Greeting and prayer for the spiritual blessings in Christ (1:1-23)
1. Sin and salvation (2:1-10)
1. Unity and peace (2:11-22)
1. Mystery of Christ in the believers, made known (3:1-13)
1. Prayer for riches of his glory to make the believers strong (3:14-21)
1. Unity of the Spirit, building up the Body of Christ (4:1-16)
1. New life (4:17-32)
1. Imitators of God (5:1-21)
1. 1 Wives and husbands; children and parents; slaves and masters (5:22-6:9)
11. Armor of God (6:10-20)
1. Final greeting (6:21-24)
### Who wrote the Book of Ephesians?
Paul wrote Ephesians. Paul was from the city of Tarsus. He had been known as Saul in his early life. Before becoming a Christian, Paul was a Pharisee. He persecuted Christians. After he became a Christian, he traveled several times throughout the Roman Empire telling people about Jesus.
The Apostle Paul helped start the church in Ephesus on one of his trips. He also lived in Ephesus for a year and a half and helped the believers there. Paul probably wrote this letter while he was in prison in Rome.
### What is the Book of Ephesians about?
Paul wrote this letter to the Christians in Ephesus to explain God’s love for them in Christ Jesus. He described the blessings that God was giving them because they were now united with Christ. He explained that all believers are united together, whether Jew or Gentile. Paul also wanted to encourage them to live in a way that pleases God.
### How should the title of this book be translated?
Translators may choose to call this book by its traditional title, “Ephesians.” Or they may choose a clearer title, such as “Paul’s Letter to the Church in Ephesus” or “A Letter to the Christians in Ephesus.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
## Part 2: Important Religious and Cultural Concepts
### What was the “mystery” in the book of Ephesians?
The expression translated in the ULT as “mystery” or “hidden” occurs six times. By it, Paul always meant something that God had to reveal to human beings because they could not know it on their own. It always referred to something about how God planned to save mankind. Sometimes it was about his plan to bring about peace between himself and mankind. Sometimes it was more specifically about his plan to save both Jews and Gentiles by uniting them through Christ. This hidden truth was that Gentiles are now able to benefit from the promises of Christ as equals with the Jews.
### What did Paul say about salvation and righteous living?
Paul said much about salvation and righteous living in this letter and in many of his letters. He said that God has been very kind and saved Christians because they believe in Jesus. Therefore, after they become Christians, they should live in a righteous way to show that they have faith in Christ. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/righteous]])
## Part 3: Important Translation Issues
### Singular and plural “you”
In this book, the word “I” refers to Paul. The word “you” is almost always plural and refers to the believers who may read this letter. The three exceptions to this are: 5:14, 6:2, and 6:3. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-you]])
### What did Paul mean by the “new self” or the “new man”?
When Paul spoke of the “new self” or the “new man,” he meant the new nature that a believer receives from the Holy Spirit. This new nature was created in God’s image (See: 4:24). The phrase “new man” is also used for God bringing about peace between Jews and Gentiles. God brought them together as one people group that belong to him (See: 2:15).
### How are the ideas of “holy” and “sanctify” represented in Ephesians in the ULT?
The scriptures use such words to indicate any one of several ideas. For this reason, it is often difficult for translators to represent them well in their versions. In translating into English, the ULT uses the following principles:
* Sometimes the meaning in a passage implies moral holiness. Especially important for understanding the gospel is the use of “holy” to express the fact that God views Christians as sinless because they are united to Jesus Christ. Another use of “holy” is to express the idea that God is perfect and faultless. A third use is to express the idea that Christians are to conduct themselves in a blameless, faultless manner in life. In these cases, the ULT uses “holy,” “holy God,” “holy ones,” or “saints.” (See: 1:1, 4)
* Sometimes the meaning in a passage indicates a simple reference to Christians without implying any particular role filled by them. In these cases, the ULT uses “saint” or “saints.”
* Sometimes the meaning in a passage implies the idea of someone or something set apart for God alone. In these cases, the ULT uses “set apart,” “dedicated to,” or “reserved for.” (See: 3:5)
The UST will often be helpful as translators think about how to represent these ideas in their own versions.
### What did Paul mean by the expression “in Christ,” “in the Lord,” etc.?
This kind of expression occurs in 1:1, 3, 4, 6, 7, 9, 10, 11, 12, 13, 15, 20; 2:6, 7, 10, 13, 15, 16, 18, 21, 22; 3:5, 6, 9, 11, 12, 21; 4:1, 17, 21, 32; 5:8, 18, 19; 6:1, 10, 18, 21. Paul meant to express the idea of a very close union between Christ and the believers. Please see the introduction to the book of Romans for more details about this kind of expression.
### What are the major issues in the text of the book of Ephesians?
* “in Ephesus” (1:1). Some of the earliest manuscripts do not include this phrase. It is likely that Paul intended this letter to be read in many churches, including Ephesus and many other cities. He may have originally left a blank space for the city name to be filled in by those copying the letter and carrying it to different cities. But “Ephesus” is the only name found on manuscripts that have a city name. Therefore, the ULT, UST, and many modern versions include it.
* “because we are members of his body” (5:30). Most modern versions, including the ULT and UST, read in this way. Some older versions read, “because we are members of his body and of his bones.” Translators might decide to choose the second reading if other versions in their area have it that way. If translators choose the second reading, they should put the additional words inside square brackets ([]) to indicate that they are probably not original to the book of Ephesians.
(See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants]])
-EPH 1 intro fg42 0 # Ephesians 01 General Notes
## Structure and formatting
### “I pray”
Paul structures part of this chapter like a prayer of praise to God. But Paul is not just talking to God. He is teaching the church in Ephesus. He also tells the Ephesians how he is praying for them.
## Special concepts in this chapter
### Predestination
Many scholars believe this chapter teaches on a subject known as “predestination.” See the use of the word “predestine” in 1:5, 11. Some scholars take this to indicate that God has, from before the foundation of the world, chosen some people to save. Christians have different views on what the Bible teaches on this subject, so translators need to take extra care when translating this chapter. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/predestine]])
+EPH front intro e3di 0 # Introduction to Ephesians
## Part 1: General Introduction
### Outline of Ephesians
1. Greeting and prayer for the spiritual blessings in Christ (1:1-23)
1. Sin and salvation (2:1-10)
1. Unity and peace (2:11-22)
1. Mystery of Christ in the believers, made known (3:1-13)
1. Prayer for riches of his glory to make the believers strong (3:14-21)
1. Unity of the Spirit, building up the Body of Christ (4:1-16)
1. New life (4:17-32)
1. Imitators of God (5:1-21)
1. 1 Wives and husbands; children and parents; slaves and masters (5:22-6:9)
11. Armor of God (6:10-20)
1. Final greeting (6:21-24)
### Who wrote the Book of Ephesians?
Paul wrote Ephesians. Paul was from the city of Tarsus. He had been known as Saul in his early life. Before becoming a Christian, Paul was a Pharisee. He persecuted Christians. After he became a Christian, he traveled several times throughout the Roman Empire telling people about Jesus.
The Apostle Paul helped start the church in Ephesus on one of his trips. He also lived in Ephesus for a year and a half and helped the believers there. Paul probably wrote this letter while he was in prison in Rome.
### What is the Book of Ephesians about?
Paul wrote this letter to the Christians in Ephesus to explain God’s love for them in Christ Jesus. He described the blessings that God was giving them because they were now united with Christ. He explained that all believers are united together, whether Jew or Gentile. Paul also wanted to encourage them to live in a way that pleases God.
### How should the title of this book be translated?
Translators may choose to call this book by its traditional title, “Ephesians.” Or they may choose a clearer title, such as “Paul’s Letter to the Church in Ephesus” or “A Letter to the Christians in Ephesus.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
## Part 2: Important Religious and Cultural Concepts
### What was the “mystery” in the book of Ephesians?
The expression translated in the ULT as “mystery” or “hidden” occurs six times. By it, Paul always meant something that God had to reveal to human beings because they could not know it on their own. It always referred to something about how God planned to save mankind. Sometimes it was about his plan to bring about peace between himself and mankind. Sometimes it was more specifically about his plan to save both Jews and Gentiles by uniting them through Christ. This hidden truth was that Gentiles are now able to benefit from the promises of Christ as equals with the Jews.
### What did Paul say about salvation and righteous living?
Paul said much about salvation and righteous living in this letter and in many of his letters. He said that God has been very kind and saved Christians because they believe in Jesus. Therefore, after they become Christians, they should live in a righteous way to show that they have faith in Christ. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/righteous]])
## Part 3: Important Translation Issues
### Singular and plural “you”
In this book, the word “I” refers to Paul. The word “you” is almost always plural and refers to the believers who may read this letter. The three exceptions to this are: 5:14, 6:2, and 6:3. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-you]])
### What did Paul mean by the “new self” or the “new man”?
When Paul spoke of the “new self” or the “new man,” he meant the new nature that a believer receives from the Holy Spirit. This new nature was created in God’s image (See: 4:24). The phrase “new man” is also used for God bringing about peace between Jews and Gentiles. God brought them together as one people group that belong to him (See: 2:15).
### How are the ideas of “holy” and “sanctify” represented in Ephesians in the ULT?
The scriptures use such words to indicate any one of several ideas. For this reason, it is often difficult for translators to represent them well in their versions. In translating into English, the ULT uses the following principles:
* Sometimes the meaning in a passage implies moral holiness. Especially important for understanding the gospel is the use of “holy” to express the fact that God views Christians as sinless because they are united to Jesus Christ. Another use of “holy” is to express the idea that God is perfect and faultless. A third use is to express the idea that Christians are to conduct themselves in a blameless, faultless manner in life. In these cases, the ULT uses “holy,” “holy God,” “holy ones,” or “saints.” (See: 1:1, 4)
* Sometimes the meaning in a passage indicates a simple reference to Christians without implying any particular role filled by them. In these cases, the ULT uses “saint” or “saints.”
* Sometimes the meaning in a passage implies the idea of someone or something set apart for God alone. In these cases, the ULT uses “set apart,” “dedicated to,” or “reserved for.” (See: 3:5)
The UST will often be helpful as translators think about how to represent these ideas in their own versions.
### What did Paul mean by the expression “in Christ,” “in the Lord,” etc.?
This kind of expression occurs in 1:1, 3, 4, 6, 7, 9, 10, 11, 12, 13, 15, 20; 2:6, 7, 10, 13, 15, 16, 18, 21, 22; 3:5, 6, 9, 11, 12, 21; 4:1, 17, 21, 32; 5:8, 18, 19; 6:1, 10, 18, 21. Paul meant to express the idea of a very close union between Christ and the believers. Please see the introduction to the book of Romans for more details about this kind of expression.
### What are the major issues in the text of the book of Ephesians?
* “in Ephesus” (1:1). Some of the earliest manuscripts do not include this phrase. It is likely that Paul intended this letter to be read in many churches, including Ephesus and many other cities. He may have originally left a blank space for the city name to be filled in by those copying the letter and carrying it to different cities. But “Ephesus” is the only name found on manuscripts that have a city name. Therefore, the ULT, UST, and many modern versions include it.
* “because we are members of his body” (5:30). Most modern versions, including the ULT and UST, read in this way. Some older versions read, “because we are members of his body and of his bones.” Translators might decide to choose the second reading if other versions in their area have it that way. If translators choose the second reading, they should put the additional words inside square brackets ([]) to indicate that they are probably not original to the book of Ephesians.
(See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants]])
+EPH 1 intro fg42 0 # Ephesians 01 General Notes
## Structure and formatting
### “I pray”
Paul structures part of this chapter like a prayer of praise to God. But Paul is not just talking to God. He is teaching the church in Ephesus. He also tells the Ephesians how he is praying for them.
## Special concepts in this chapter
### Predestination
Many scholars believe this chapter teaches on a subject known as “predestination.” See the use of the word “predestine” in 1:5, 11. Some scholars take this to indicate that God has, from before the foundation of the world, chosen some people to save. Christians have different views on what the Bible teaches on this subject, so translators need to take extra care when translating this chapter. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/predestine]])
EPH 1 1 kx1g figs-you 0 General Information: Paul names himself as the writer of this letter to the believers in the church at Ephesus (and elsewhere). Except where noted, all instances of “you” and “your” refer to the Ephesian believers as well as to all believers, and so are plural. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-you]])
EPH 1 1 ilf2 Παῦλος, ἀπόστολος Χριστοῦ Ἰησοῦ…τοῖς ἁγίοις τοῖς οὖσιν 1 Paul, an apostle of Christ Jesus … to the saints who are Your language may have a particular way of introducing the author of a letter and the intended audience. Alternate translation: “I, Paul, an apostle of Jesus Christ … write this letter to you, God’s holy people”
EPH 1 1 u73p figs-metaphor ἐν Χριστῷ Ἰησοῦ 1 in Christ Jesus The phrase **in Christ Jesus** and similar expressions are metaphors that frequently occur in the New Testament letters. They express the strongest kind of relationship possible between Christ and those who believe in him, picturing believers as being surrounded by Christ. Alternate Translation: “in close relationship to Christ Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
@@ -153,7 +153,7 @@ EPH 2 21 ljt5 figs-metaphor ἐν ᾧ…ἐν Κυρίῳ 1 In whom … in the L
EPH 2 22 u55j figs-metaphor ἐν ᾧ 1 in whom This can be translated as “in Christ,” which is a metaphor that expresses the strongest kind of relationship possible between Christ and those who believe in him. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
EPH 2 22 b4c8 figs-metaphor καὶ ὑμεῖς συνοικοδομεῖσθε, εἰς κατοικητήριον τοῦ Θεοῦ ἐν Πνεύματι 1 you also are being built together as a dwelling place for God in the Spirit This describes how believers are being put together to become a **place** where **God** will permanently live through the power of the Holy **Spirit**. Alternate translation: “you also are being joined to this group where God lives by his Spirit” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
EPH 2 22 e52h figs-activepassive καὶ ὑμεῖς συνοικοδομεῖσθε 1 you also are being built together This can be stated as active. Alternate translation: “God is also building you together” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
-EPH 3 intro gha7 0 # Ephesians 03 General Notes
## Structure and formatting
### “I pray”
Paul structures part of this chapter as a prayer to God. But Paul is not just talking to God. He is both praying for and instructing the church in Ephesus.
## Special concepts in this chapter
### Mystery
Paul refers to the church as a “mystery.” The role of the church in the plans of God was once not known. But God has now revealed it. Part of this mystery involves the Gentiles having equal standing with the Jews in the plans of God.
+EPH 3 intro gha7 0 # Ephesians 03 General Notes
## Structure and formatting
### “I pray”
Paul structures part of this chapter as a prayer to God. But Paul is not just talking to God. He is both praying for and instructing the church in Ephesus.
## Special concepts in this chapter
### Mystery
Paul refers to the church as a “mystery.” The role of the church in the plans of God was once not known. But God has now revealed it. Part of this mystery involves the Gentiles having equal standing with the Jews in the plans of God.
EPH 3 1 w896 0 Connecting Statement: To make clear the hidden truth about the church to believers, Paul refers back to the oneness of Jews and Gentiles and how believers from both groups form part of the one group that worships God, like the stones that form one temple.
EPH 3 1 jb9u grammar-connect-logic-result τούτου χάριν 1 For this reason The connecting phrase **For this reason** introduces a reason-result relationship. The reason is what Paul talked about in Chapter 2, that Christ showed his grace by removing the division between Jews and Gentiles and making them into one group. The result is that Paul prays for the Gentiles. Use a phrase in your language that connects a reason to a result. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
EPH 3 1 abd6 figs-explicit τούτου χάριν 1 For this reason You may need to make explicit what the reason is. Alternate translation: “because of God’s grace to you” You may also need to make explicit here what the result is, as in the UST, because Paul does not state the result until 3:14, that he prays for them. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
@@ -210,7 +210,7 @@ EPH 3 20 m7gi 0 Connecting Statement: Paul concludes his prayer with a blessin
EPH 3 20 zxj3 τῷ δὲ 1 And to him “Now to God, who”
EPH 3 20 zxt3 ποιῆσαι ὑπέρ ἐκ περισσοῦ ὧν αἰτούμεθα ἢ νοοῦμεν 1 to do exceedingly abundantly above all that we ask or think “to do much more than all that we ask or think” or “to do things that are much greater than anything that we ask him for or think about”
EPH 3 21 ab12 figs-abstractnouns αὐτῷ ἡ δόξα ἐν τῇ ἐκκλησίᾳ 1 to him be the glory in the church The word **glory** is an abstract noun. Alternate translation: “may God’s people glorify him” or “may God’s people praise him for how great he is” See the UST (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
-EPH 4 intro ang8 0 # Ephesians 04 General Notes
## Structure and formatting
Some translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with verse 8, which is quoted from the Old Testament.
## Special concepts in this chapter
### Spiritual gifts
Spiritual gifts are specific supernatural abilities that the Holy Spirit gives to Christians after they come to believe in Jesus. These spiritual gifts were foundational to developing the church. Paul lists here only some of the spiritual gifts. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/faith]])
### Unity
Paul considers it very important that the church is united. This is a major theme of this chapter.
## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter
### Old man and new man
The term “old man” probably refers to the sinful nature with which a person is born. The “new man” is the new nature or new life that God gives a person after they come to believe in Christ.
+EPH 4 intro ang8 0 # Ephesians 04 General Notes
## Structure and formatting
Some translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with verse 8, which is quoted from the Old Testament.
## Special concepts in this chapter
### Spiritual gifts
Spiritual gifts are specific supernatural abilities that the Holy Spirit gives to Christians after they come to believe in Jesus. These spiritual gifts were foundational to developing the church. Paul lists here only some of the spiritual gifts. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/faith]])
### Unity
Paul considers it very important that the church is united. This is a major theme of this chapter.
## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter
### Old man and new man
The term “old man” probably refers to the sinful nature with which a person is born. The “new man” is the new nature or new life that God gives a person after they come to believe in Christ.
EPH 4 1 sb64 0 Connecting Statement: Because of what Paul has been writing to the Ephesians, he tells them how they should live their lives as believers and again emphasizes that believers are to agree with each other.
EPH 4 1 abda grammar-connect-logic-result οὖν 1 Therefore The connecting word **Therefore** introduces a reason-result relationship. The reason is that God will be glorified in the church for all generations. The result is that believers should walk in a way that is worthy of the Lord. Use a phrase in your language that connects a reason to a result. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
EPH 4 1 uss5 ὁ δέσμιος ἐν Κυρίῳ 1 the prisoner for the Lord “someone who is in prison because he serves the Lord”
diff --git a/en_tn_51-PHP.tsv b/en_tn_51-PHP.tsv
index db02b8c27..e235ef07c 100644
--- a/en_tn_51-PHP.tsv
+++ b/en_tn_51-PHP.tsv
@@ -1,6 +1,6 @@
Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNote
-PHP front intro pv9j 0 # Introduction to Philippians
## Part 1: General Introduction
### Outline of the Book of the Philippians
1. Greeting, thanksgiving and prayer (1:1-11)
1. Paul’s report on his ministry (1:12-26)
1. Instructions
- To be steadfast (1:27-30)
- To be united (2:1-2)
- To be humble (2:3-11)
- To work out our salvation with God working in you (2:12-13)
- To be innocent and light (2:14-18)
1. Timothy and Epaphroditus (2:19-30)
1. Warning about false teachers (3:1-4:1)
1. Personal instruction (4:2-5)
1. Rejoice and do not be anxious (4:4-6)
1. Final remarks
- Values (4:8-9)
- Contentment (4:10-20)
- Final Greetings (4:21-23)
### Who wrote the Book Philippians?
Paul wrote Philippians. Paul was from the city of Tarsus. He had been known as Saul in his early life. Before becoming a Christian, Paul was a Pharisee. He persecuted Christians. After he became a Christian, he traveled several times throughout the Roman Empire telling people about Jesus.
Paul wrote this letter while in prison in Rome.
### What is the Book of Philippians about?
Paul wrote this letter to the believers in Philippi, a city in Macedonia. He wrote it to thank the Philippians for the gift they had sent him. He wanted to tell them about how he was doing in prison and to encourage them to rejoice even if they are suffering. He also wrote to them about a man named Epaphroditus. He was the one who brought the gift to Paul. While visiting Paul, Epaphroditus became ill. So, Paul decided to send him back to Philippi. Paul encouraged the believers in Philippi to welcome and to be kind to Epaphroditus when he returns.
### How should the title of this book be translated?
Translators may choose to call this book by its traditional title, “Philippians.” Or they may choose a clearer title, such as “Paul’s Letter to the Church in Philippi,” or “A Letter to the Christians in Philippi.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
## Part 2: Important Religious and Cultural Concepts
### What was the city of Philippi like?
Philip, the father of Alexander the Great, founded Philippi in the region of Macedonia. This meant that the citizens of Philippi were also considered citizens of Rome. The people of Philippi were proud of being citizens of Rome. But Paul told the believers that they are citizens of heaven (3:20).
## Part 3: Important Translation Issues
### Singular and plural “you”
In this book, the word “I” refers to Paul. The word “you” is almost always plural and refers to the believers in Philippi. The exception to this is 4:3. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-you]])
### Who were the “enemies of the cross of Christ” (3:18) in this letter?
The “enemies of the cross of Christ” were probably people who called themselves believers, but they did not obey God’s commands. They thought that freedom in Christ meant that believers could do whatever they desired and God would not punish them (3:19).
### Why were the words “joy” and “rejoice” frequently used in this letter?
Paul was in prison when he wrote this letter (1:7). Even though he suffered, Paul said many times that he was joyful because God had been kind to him through Jesus Christ. He wanted to encourage his readers to have the same trust in Jesus Christ. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-irony]])
### What does Paul mean by the expression “in Christ,” “in the Lord,” etc.?
This kind of expression occurs in 1:1, 8, 13, 14, 26, 27; 2:1, 5, 19, 24, 29; 3:1, 3, 9, 14; 4:1, 2, 4, 7, 10, 13, 19, 21. Paul meant to express the idea of a very close union with Christ and the believers. See the introduction to the Book of Romans for more details about this kind of expression.
### What are the major issues in the text of the Book of Philippians?
* Some versions have “Amen” at the end of the final verse in the letter (4:23). The ULT, UST, and other many modern versions do not. If “Amen” is included, it should be put inside square brackets ([]) to indicate that it is probably not original to the Book of Philippians.
(See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants]])
-PHP 1 intro kd3g 0 # Philippians 01 General Notes
## Structure and formatting
Paul includes a prayer in the beginning of this letter. At that time, religious leaders sometimes began informal letters with a prayer.
## Special concepts in this chapter
### The day of Christ
This probably refers to the day when Christ returns. Paul often connected the return of Christ with motivating godly living. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/godly]])
## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter
### Paradox
A paradox is a true statement that appears to describe something impossible. This statement in verse 21 is a paradox: “to die is gain.” In verse 23 Paul explains why this is true. ([Philippians 1:21](../../php/01/21.md))
+PHP front intro pv9j 0 # Introduction to Philippians
## Part 1: General Introduction
### Outline of the Book of the Philippians
1. Greeting, thanksgiving and prayer (1:1-11)
1. Paul’s report on his ministry (1:12-26)
1. Instructions
- To be steadfast (1:27-30)
- To be united (2:1-2)
- To be humble (2:3-11)
- To work out our salvation with God working in you (2:12-13)
- To be innocent and light (2:14-18)
1. Timothy and Epaphroditus (2:19-30)
1. Warning about false teachers (3:1-4:1)
1. Personal instruction (4:2-5)
1. Rejoice and do not be anxious (4:4-6)
1. Final remarks
- Values (4:8-9)
- Contentment (4:10-20)
- Final Greetings (4:21-23)
### Who wrote the Book Philippians?
Paul wrote Philippians. Paul was from the city of Tarsus. He had been known as Saul in his early life. Before becoming a Christian, Paul was a Pharisee. He persecuted Christians. After he became a Christian, he traveled several times throughout the Roman Empire telling people about Jesus.
Paul wrote this letter while in prison in Rome.
### What is the Book of Philippians about?
Paul wrote this letter to the believers in Philippi, a city in Macedonia. He wrote it to thank the Philippians for the gift they had sent him. He wanted to tell them about how he was doing in prison and to encourage them to rejoice even if they are suffering. He also wrote to them about a man named Epaphroditus. He was the one who brought the gift to Paul. While visiting Paul, Epaphroditus became ill. So, Paul decided to send him back to Philippi. Paul encouraged the believers in Philippi to welcome and to be kind to Epaphroditus when he returns.
### How should the title of this book be translated?
Translators may choose to call this book by its traditional title, “Philippians.” Or they may choose a clearer title, such as “Paul’s Letter to the Church in Philippi,” or “A Letter to the Christians in Philippi.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
## Part 2: Important Religious and Cultural Concepts
### What was the city of Philippi like?
Philip, the father of Alexander the Great, founded Philippi in the region of Macedonia. This meant that the citizens of Philippi were also considered citizens of Rome. The people of Philippi were proud of being citizens of Rome. But Paul told the believers that they are citizens of heaven (3:20).
## Part 3: Important Translation Issues
### Singular and plural “you”
In this book, the word “I” refers to Paul. The word “you” is almost always plural and refers to the believers in Philippi. The exception to this is 4:3. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-you]])
### Who were the “enemies of the cross of Christ” (3:18) in this letter?
The “enemies of the cross of Christ” were probably people who called themselves believers, but they did not obey God’s commands. They thought that freedom in Christ meant that believers could do whatever they desired and God would not punish them (3:19).
### Why were the words “joy” and “rejoice” frequently used in this letter?
Paul was in prison when he wrote this letter (1:7). Even though he suffered, Paul said many times that he was joyful because God had been kind to him through Jesus Christ. He wanted to encourage his readers to have the same trust in Jesus Christ. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-irony]])
### What does Paul mean by the expression “in Christ,” “in the Lord,” etc.?
This kind of expression occurs in 1:1, 8, 13, 14, 26, 27; 2:1, 5, 19, 24, 29; 3:1, 3, 9, 14; 4:1, 2, 4, 7, 10, 13, 19, 21. Paul meant to express the idea of a very close union with Christ and the believers. See the introduction to the Book of Romans for more details about this kind of expression.
### What are the major issues in the text of the Book of Philippians?
* Some versions have “Amen” at the end of the final verse in the letter (4:23). The ULT, UST, and other many modern versions do not. If “Amen” is included, it should be put inside square brackets ([]) to indicate that it is probably not original to the Book of Philippians.
(See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants]])
+PHP 1 intro kd3g 0 # Philippians 01 General Notes
## Structure and formatting
Paul includes a prayer in the beginning of this letter. At that time, religious leaders sometimes began informal letters with a prayer.
## Special concepts in this chapter
### The day of Christ
This probably refers to the day when Christ returns. Paul often connected the return of Christ with motivating godly living. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/godly]])
## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter
### Paradox
A paradox is a true statement that appears to describe something impossible. This statement in verse 21 is a paradox: “to die is gain.” In verse 23 Paul explains why this is true. ([Philippians 1:21](../../php/01/21.md))
PHP 1 1 c255 0 General Information: Paul and Timothy wrote this letter to the church at Philippi. Because Paul writes later in the letter saying “I,” it is generally assumed that he is the author and that Timothy, who is with him, writes as Paul speaks.
PHP 1 1 law0 figs-you 0 General Information: All instances of “you” and “your” in the letter refer to the believers in the Philippian church and are plural. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-you]])
PHP 1 1 xk9z figs-exclusive 0 General Information: The word **our** probably refers to all believers in Christ, including Paul, Timothy, and the Philippian believers. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
@@ -78,7 +78,7 @@ PHP 1 28 i9yt figs-you μὴ πτυρόμενοι ἐν μηδενὶ 1 do not b
PHP 1 28 l495 ἥτις ἐστὶν αὐτοῖς ἔνδειξις ἀπωλείας, ὑμῶν δὲ σωτηρίας, καὶ τοῦτο ἀπὸ Θεοῦ 1 This is a sign to them of their destruction, but of your salvation—and this from God “Your courage will show them that God will destroy them. It will also show you that God will save you”
PHP 1 28 nb4b καὶ τοῦτο ἀπὸ Θεοῦ 1 and this from God “and this is from God.” Possible meanings are the word **this** refers to (1) the believers’ courage or (2) the sign or (3) destruction and salvation.
PHP 1 30 x4z3 τὸν αὐτὸν ἀγῶνα ἔχοντες, οἷον εἴδετε ἐν ἐμοὶ, καὶ νῦν ἀκούετε ἐν ἐμοί 1 having the same struggle which you saw in me, and now you hear in me “suffering in the same way that you saw me suffer, and that you hear I am still suffering”
-PHP 2 intro ixw8 0 # Philippians 02 General Notes
## Structure and formatting
Some translations, like the ULT, set apart the lines of verses 6-11. These verses describe the example of Christ. They teach important truths about the person of Jesus.
## Special concepts in this chapter
### Practical instructions
In this chapter Paul gives many practical instructions to the church in Philippi.
## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter
### “If there is any”
This appears to be a type of hypothetical statement. However, it is not a hypothetical statement, because it expresses something that is true. The translator may also translate this phrase as “Since there is.”
+PHP 2 intro ixw8 0 # Philippians 02 General Notes
## Structure and formatting
Some translations, like the ULT, set apart the lines of verses 6-11. These verses describe the example of Christ. They teach important truths about the person of Jesus.
## Special concepts in this chapter
### Practical instructions
In this chapter Paul gives many practical instructions to the church in Philippi.
## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter
### “If there is any”
This appears to be a type of hypothetical statement. However, it is not a hypothetical statement, because it expresses something that is true. The translator may also translate this phrase as “Since there is.”
PHP 2 1 xye5 0 Connecting Statement: Paul advises the believers to have unity and humility and reminds them of Christ’s example.
PHP 2 1 b1q7 εἴ τις…παράκλησις ἐν Χριστῷ 1 If there is any encouragement in Christ “if Christ has encouraged you” or “if you are encouraged because of Christ”
PHP 2 1 k1b2 εἴ τι παραμύθιον ἀγάπης 1 if any comfort of love The phrase **of love** probably refers to Christ’s love for the Philippians. Alternate translation: “if his love has given you any comfort” or “if his love for you has comforted you in any way”
@@ -134,7 +134,7 @@ PHP 2 29 y95x προσδέχεσθε οὖν αὐτὸν 1 Therefore welcome h
PHP 2 29 qx14 ἐν Κυρίῳ μετὰ πάσης χαρᾶς 1 in the Lord with all joy “as a fellow believer in the Lord with all joy” or “with the great joy we have because the Lord Jesus loves us”
PHP 2 30 ns1y figs-metaphor μέχρι θανάτου ἤγγισεν 1 that he came near even to death Paul here speaks of **death** as if it were a place that one could go to. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
PHP 2 30 g98z figs-metaphor ἀναπληρώσῃ τὸ ὑμῶν ὑστέρημα, τῆς πρός με λειτουργίας 1 he might make up your lack of service to me Paul speaks of his needs as if they were a container that Epaphroditus filled with good things for Paul. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
-PHP 3 intro btx3 0 # Philippians 03 General Notes
## Structure and formatting
In verses 4-8, Paul lists how he qualifies for being considered a righteous Jew. In every way, Paul was an exemplary Jew. But he contrasts this with the greatness of knowing Jesus. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/righteous]])
## Special concepts in this chapter
### Dogs
The people of the ancient Near East used dogs as an image to refer to people in a negative way. Not all cultures use the term “dogs” in this way.
### Resurrected Bodies
We know very little about what people will be like in heaven. Paul teaches here that Christians will have some kind of glorious body and will be free from sin. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/heaven]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/sin]])
## Important figures of speech in this chapter
### Prize
Paul uses an extended illustration to describe the Christian life. The goal of the Christian life is attempting to grow to be like Christ until a person dies. We can never achieve this goal perfectly, but we must strive for it.
+PHP 3 intro btx3 0 # Philippians 03 General Notes
## Structure and formatting
In verses 4-8, Paul lists how he qualifies for being considered a righteous Jew. In every way, Paul was an exemplary Jew. But he contrasts this with the greatness of knowing Jesus. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/righteous]])
## Special concepts in this chapter
### Dogs
The people of the ancient Near East used dogs as an image to refer to people in a negative way. Not all cultures use the term “dogs” in this way.
### Resurrected Bodies
We know very little about what people will be like in heaven. Paul teaches here that Christians will have some kind of glorious body and will be free from sin. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/heaven]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/sin]])
## Important figures of speech in this chapter
### Prize
Paul uses an extended illustration to describe the Christian life. The goal of the Christian life is attempting to grow to be like Christ until a person dies. We can never achieve this goal perfectly, but we must strive for it.
PHP 3 1 e79h 0 Connecting Statement: In order to warn his fellow believers about Jews who would try to get them to follow the old laws, Paul gives his own testimony about when he persecuted believers.
PHP 3 1 s3bx τὸ λοιπόν, ἀδελφοί μου 1 As to the rest, my brothers “Now moving along, my brothers” or “Concerning other matters, my brothers”
PHP 3 1 zu9l ἀδελφοί 1 brothers See how you translated this in [Philippians 1:12](../01/12.md).
diff --git a/en_tn_52-COL.tsv b/en_tn_52-COL.tsv
index c4f7a6eb0..94c580dcd 100644
--- a/en_tn_52-COL.tsv
+++ b/en_tn_52-COL.tsv
@@ -1,6 +1,6 @@
Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNote
-COL front intro d9hy 0 # Introduction to Colossians
## Part 1: General Introduction
### Outline of the Book of Colossians
1. Greeting, thanksgiving, and prayer (1:1-12)
1. The person and work of Christ
- Deliverance and redemption (1:13-14)
- Christ: the Image of the invisible God, and the One who is over all creation (1:15-17)
- Christ is the Head of the Church, and the Church trusts in him (1:18-2:7)
1. Tests of faithfulness
- Warnings against false teachers (2:8-19)
- True godliness is not rigid rules and unbending traditions (2:20-23)
1. Teaching and living
- Life in Christ (3:1-4)
- Old and new life (3:5-17)
- Christian family (3:18-4:1)
1. Christian behavior (4:2-6)
1. Closing and greetings
- Paul thanks Tychicus and Onesimus (4:7-9)
- Paul sends greetings from his associates (4:10-14)
- Paul gives directions to Archippus and the Christians in Laodicea (4:15-17)
- Paul’s personal greeting (4:18)
### Who wrote the Book of Colossians?
Paul wrote the Book of Colossians. Paul was from the city of Tarsus. He had been known as Saul in his early life. Before becoming a Christian, Paul was a Pharisee. He persecuted Christians. After he became a Christian, he traveled several times throughout the Roman Empire telling people about Jesus.
Paul wrote this letter while in prison in Rome.
### What is the Book of Colossians about?
Paul wrote this letter to the believers in the Asia Minor city of Colossae. The main purpose of this letter was to defend the gospel against false teachers. He did this by praising Jesus as the image of God, sustainer of all things, and head of the church. Paul wanted them to understand that only Christ is needed for God to accept them.
### How should the title of this book be translated?
Translators may choose to call this book by its traditional title, “Colossians.” Or they may choose a clearer title, such as “Paul’s Letter to the Church in Colossae,” or “A Letter to the Christians in Colossae.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
## Part 2: Important Religious and Cultural Concepts
### What were the religious issues that the church in Colossae struggled with?
In the church in Colossae, there were false teachers. Their exact teaching is unknown. But they probably taught their followers to worship angels and to obey strict rules about religious ceremonies. They probably also taught that a person must be circumcised and can only eat certain types of food. Paul said these false teachings came from the minds of men and not from God.
### How did Paul use the imagery of heaven and earth?
In this letter, Paul frequently spoke of heaven as “above.” He distinguished it from the earth, which Scripture speaks of as being “below.” The purpose of this imagery was to teach Christians to live in a way that honors God who lives in heaven above. Paul is not teaching that the earth or the physical world is evil. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/evil]])
## Part 3: Important Translation Issues
### How are the ideas of “holy” and “sanctify” represented in Colossians in the ULT?
The scriptures use such words to indicate any one of various ideas. For this reason, it is often difficult for translators to represent them well in their versions. In Colossians, these words usually indicate a simple reference to Christians without implying any particular role filled by them. So Colossians in the ULT uses “believers” or “those who believe in him.” (See: 1:2, 12, 26)
### Was Jesus created or is he eternal?
Jesus was not a created being but has always existed as God. Jesus also became a human being. There is potential for confusion in Colossians 1:15 where it says Jesus “is the firstborn of all creation.” This statement means that Jesus is dominant over all of creation. It does not mean that he was the first thing God created. Translators should be careful not to imply that Jesus is a created being.
### What does Paul mean by the expression “in Christ,” “in the Lord,” etc.?
Paul meant to express the idea of a very close union with Christ and the believers. See the introduction to the book of Romans for more details about this kind of expression.
### What are the major issues in the text of the Book of Colossians?
For the following verses, some modern versions of the Bible differ from older versions. The ULT text has the modern reading and puts the older reading in a footnote. If a translation of the Bible exists in the general region, translators should consider using the reading found in those versions. If not, translators are advised to follow the modern reading.
* “May grace be to you, and peace from God our Father” (1:2). Some older versions have a longer reading: “Grace to you and peace from God our Father and the Lord Jesus Christ.”
* “Epaphras, our beloved fellow servant, who is a faithful servant of Christ on our behalf” (1:7). Some older versions read “for you”: “Epaphras, our beloved fellow servant, a faithful servant of Christ for you.”
* “the Father, who has made you able to have a share in the inheritance of the believers in light” (1:12). Some older versions read, “the Father, who has qualified us for a share in the inheritance in light.”
* “In his Son we have redemption” (1:14). Some older versions read, “In his Son we have redemption through his blood.”
* “and forgave us all of our trespasses” (2:13). Some older versions read: “and forgave you all of your trespasses.”
* “When Christ appears, who is your life” (3:4). Some older versions read, “When Christ appears, who is our life.”
* “It is for these things that the wrath of God is coming on the sons of disobedience” (3:6). The ULT, UST, and many other modern versions read this way. However, some modern and older versions read, “It is for these things that the wrath of God is coming.”
* “I sent him to you for this, that you might know the matters about us” (4:8). Some older versions read, “I sent him to you for this, that he might know the matters about you.”
(See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants]])
-COL 1 intro gtm3 0 # Colossians 01 General Notes
## Structure and formatting
As in a typical letter, Paul begins his letter in verses 1-2 by introducing Timothy and himself to the Christians in Colossae.
Paul writes much of this chapter around two subjects: who Christ is, and what Christ has done for the Christian.
## Special concepts in this chapter
### Secret truth
Paul refers to a “secret truth” in this chapter. The role of the church in the plans of God was once unknown. But God has now revealed it. Part of this involves the Gentiles having equal standing with the Jews in the plans of God. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/reveal]])
## Important figures of speech in this chapter
### Images for Christian living
Paul uses many different images to describe Christian living. In this chapter, he uses the images of “walking” and “bearing fruit.” (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/other/fruit]])
## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter
### Paradox
A paradox is a true statement that appears to describe something impossible. Verse 24 is a paradox: “Now I rejoice in my sufferings for you.” People do not usually rejoice when they suffer. But in verses 25-29 Paul explains why his suffering is good. ([Colossians 1:24](../../col/01/24.md))
+COL front intro d9hy 0 # Introduction to Colossians
## Part 1: General Introduction
### Outline of the Book of Colossians
1. Greeting, thanksgiving, and prayer (1:1-12)
1. The person and work of Christ
- Deliverance and redemption (1:13-14)
- Christ: the Image of the invisible God, and the One who is over all creation (1:15-17)
- Christ is the Head of the Church, and the Church trusts in him (1:18-2:7)
1. Tests of faithfulness
- Warnings against false teachers (2:8-19)
- True godliness is not rigid rules and unbending traditions (2:20-23)
1. Teaching and living
- Life in Christ (3:1-4)
- Old and new life (3:5-17)
- Christian family (3:18-4:1)
1. Christian behavior (4:2-6)
1. Closing and greetings
- Paul thanks Tychicus and Onesimus (4:7-9)
- Paul sends greetings from his associates (4:10-14)
- Paul gives directions to Archippus and the Christians in Laodicea (4:15-17)
- Paul’s personal greeting (4:18)
### Who wrote the Book of Colossians?
Paul wrote the Book of Colossians. Paul was from the city of Tarsus. He had been known as Saul in his early life. Before becoming a Christian, Paul was a Pharisee. He persecuted Christians. After he became a Christian, he traveled several times throughout the Roman Empire telling people about Jesus.
Paul wrote this letter while in prison in Rome.
### What is the Book of Colossians about?
Paul wrote this letter to the believers in the Asia Minor city of Colossae. The main purpose of this letter was to defend the gospel against false teachers. He did this by praising Jesus as the image of God, sustainer of all things, and head of the church. Paul wanted them to understand that only Christ is needed for God to accept them.
### How should the title of this book be translated?
Translators may choose to call this book by its traditional title, “Colossians.” Or they may choose a clearer title, such as “Paul’s Letter to the Church in Colossae,” or “A Letter to the Christians in Colossae.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
## Part 2: Important Religious and Cultural Concepts
### What were the religious issues that the church in Colossae struggled with?
In the church in Colossae, there were false teachers. Their exact teaching is unknown. But they probably taught their followers to worship angels and to obey strict rules about religious ceremonies. They probably also taught that a person must be circumcised and can only eat certain types of food. Paul said these false teachings came from the minds of men and not from God.
### How did Paul use the imagery of heaven and earth?
In this letter, Paul frequently spoke of heaven as “above.” He distinguished it from the earth, which Scripture speaks of as being “below.” The purpose of this imagery was to teach Christians to live in a way that honors God who lives in heaven above. Paul is not teaching that the earth or the physical world is evil. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/evil]])
## Part 3: Important Translation Issues
### How are the ideas of “holy” and “sanctify” represented in Colossians in the ULT?
The scriptures use such words to indicate any one of various ideas. For this reason, it is often difficult for translators to represent them well in their versions. In Colossians, these words usually indicate a simple reference to Christians without implying any particular role filled by them. So Colossians in the ULT uses “believers” or “those who believe in him.” (See: 1:2, 12, 26)
### Was Jesus created or is he eternal?
Jesus was not a created being but has always existed as God. Jesus also became a human being. There is potential for confusion in Colossians 1:15 where it says Jesus “is the firstborn of all creation.” This statement means that Jesus is dominant over all of creation. It does not mean that he was the first thing God created. Translators should be careful not to imply that Jesus is a created being.
### What does Paul mean by the expression “in Christ,” “in the Lord,” etc.?
Paul meant to express the idea of a very close union with Christ and the believers. See the introduction to the book of Romans for more details about this kind of expression.
### What are the major issues in the text of the Book of Colossians?
For the following verses, some modern versions of the Bible differ from older versions. The ULT text has the modern reading and puts the older reading in a footnote. If a translation of the Bible exists in the general region, translators should consider using the reading found in those versions. If not, translators are advised to follow the modern reading.
* “May grace be to you, and peace from God our Father” (1:2). Some older versions have a longer reading: “Grace to you and peace from God our Father and the Lord Jesus Christ.”
* “Epaphras, our beloved fellow servant, who is a faithful servant of Christ on our behalf” (1:7). Some older versions read “for you”: “Epaphras, our beloved fellow servant, a faithful servant of Christ for you.”
* “the Father, who has made you able to have a share in the inheritance of the believers in light” (1:12). Some older versions read, “the Father, who has qualified us for a share in the inheritance in light.”
* “In his Son we have redemption” (1:14). Some older versions read, “In his Son we have redemption through his blood.”
* “and forgave us all of our trespasses” (2:13). Some older versions read: “and forgave you all of your trespasses.”
* “When Christ appears, who is your life” (3:4). Some older versions read, “When Christ appears, who is our life.”
* “It is for these things that the wrath of God is coming on the sons of disobedience” (3:6). The ULT, UST, and many other modern versions read this way. However, some modern and older versions read, “It is for these things that the wrath of God is coming.”
* “I sent him to you for this, that you might know the matters about us” (4:8). Some older versions read, “I sent him to you for this, that he might know the matters about you.”
(See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants]])
+COL 1 intro gtm3 0 # Colossians 01 General Notes
## Structure and formatting
As in a typical letter, Paul begins his letter in verses 1-2 by introducing Timothy and himself to the Christians in Colossae.
Paul writes much of this chapter around two subjects: who Christ is, and what Christ has done for the Christian.
## Special concepts in this chapter
### Secret truth
Paul refers to a “secret truth” in this chapter. The role of the church in the plans of God was once unknown. But God has now revealed it. Part of this involves the Gentiles having equal standing with the Jews in the plans of God. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/reveal]])
## Important figures of speech in this chapter
### Images for Christian living
Paul uses many different images to describe Christian living. In this chapter, he uses the images of “walking” and “bearing fruit.” (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/other/fruit]])
## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter
### Paradox
A paradox is a true statement that appears to describe something impossible. Verse 24 is a paradox: “Now I rejoice in my sufferings for you.” People do not usually rejoice when they suffer. But in verses 25-29 Paul explains why his suffering is good. ([Colossians 1:24](../../col/01/24.md))
COL 1 1 h5gl 0 General Information: Though this letter is from Paul and Timothy to the Colossian believers, later in the letter Paul makes it clear that he is the writer. Most likely Timothy was with him and wrote the words down as Paul spoke.
COL 1 1 nlf1 figs-exclusive 0 General Information: Throughout this letter the words “we,” “our,” and “ours” include the Colossians unless noted otherwise. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
COL 1 1 bqvt figs-you 0 General Information: The words “you,” “your,” and “yours” refer to the Colossian believers and so are plural unless noted otherwise. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-you]])
@@ -143,7 +143,7 @@ COL 2 21 v9e7 0 Connecting Statement: The rhetorical question that begins with
COL 2 21 b392 μὴ ἅψῃ! μηδὲ γεύσῃ! μηδὲ θίγῃς! 1 You may not handle, nor taste, nor touch! Paul is quoting what other people have been telling the Colossians.
COL 2 23 y2dc ἅτινά…λόγον μὲν ἔχοντα σοφίας ἐν ἐθελοθρησκείᾳ καὶ ταπεινοφροσύνῃ, ἀφειδίᾳ σώματος 1 These, having indeed a word of wisdom in self-made religion and false humility and severity of the body “These rules that seem wise to unbelieving people because they allow those who follow them to appear humble because they hurt their own bodies”
COL 2 23 e7p5 ἐστιν…οὐκ ἐν τιμῇ τινι πρὸς πλησμονὴν τῆς σαρκός 1 are not of any value against the indulgence of the flesh “do not help you stop following your human desires”
-COL 3 intro qtl2 0 # Colossians 03 General Notes
## Structure and formatting
The second part of this chapter parallels Ephesians 5 and 6.
## Special concepts in this chapter
### Old and new self
The old and new self mean the same as the old and new man. The term “old man” probably refers to the sinful nature with which a person is born. The “new man” is the new nature or new life that God gives a person after they come to believe in Christ. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/sin]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/faith]])
## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter
### Character
Many of the things Paul encourages his readers to pursue or avoid are not actions but character qualities. Because of this, they may be difficult to translate. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
### “The things above”
Where God dwells is often pictured as being located “above.” Paul says to “seek the things above” and to “think about the things above.” He is implying Christians should seek and think about heavenly and godly things.
+COL 3 intro qtl2 0 # Colossians 03 General Notes
## Structure and formatting
The second part of this chapter parallels Ephesians 5 and 6.
## Special concepts in this chapter
### Old and new self
The old and new self mean the same as the old and new man. The term “old man” probably refers to the sinful nature with which a person is born. The “new man” is the new nature or new life that God gives a person after they come to believe in Christ. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/sin]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/faith]])
## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter
### Character
Many of the things Paul encourages his readers to pursue or avoid are not actions but character qualities. Because of this, they may be difficult to translate. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
### “The things above”
Where God dwells is often pictured as being located “above.” Paul says to “seek the things above” and to “think about the things above.” He is implying Christians should seek and think about heavenly and godly things.
COL 3 1 ya97 0 Connecting Statement: Paul warns the believers that because they are one with Christ, they ought not do certain things.
COL 3 1 r5yh figs-idiom εἰ οὖν 1 If, therefore This is an idiom that means “Because.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
COL 3 1 t1jv figs-idiom συνηγέρθητε τῷ Χριστῷ 1 you have been raised with Christ Here to be **raised** is an idiom for causing someone who has died to become alive again. Possible meanings are (1) because God has caused Christ to come alive again, God has already given the believers in Colossae new spiritual life. Alternate translation: “God has given you new life because you belong to Christ” or (2) because God has caused Christ to come alive again, the believers in Colossae can know that after they die they will live with Christ. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
@@ -201,7 +201,7 @@ COL 3 24 p3pw figs-metaphor τῆς κληρονομίας 1 of the inheritance
COL 3 25 u5lx ὁ…ἀδικῶν, κομιεῖται ὃ ἠδίκησεν 1 the one who does unrighteousness will receive what he did unrighteously The phrase **receive the what he did unrighteously** means to be punished for bad actions. Alternate translation: “anyone who does unrighteousness will be punished for those things” or “God will punish anyone who does what is unrighteous”
COL 3 25 ak8j ἀδικῶν 1 who does unrighteousness who actively does wrong of any kind
COL 3 25 c9fx figs-abstractnouns οὐκ ἔστιν προσωπολημψία 1 there is no favoritism The abstract noun **favoritism** can be expressed with the verb “favor.” To favor some people is to judge them by different standards so the result is better for them than for others who do the same actions. Alternate translation: “God does not favor anyone” or “God judges everyone by the same standard” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
-COL 4 intro nm3y 0 # Colossians 04 General Notes
## Structure and formatting
[Colossians 4:1](../../col/04/01.md) appears to belong with the topics of Chapter 3 instead of Chapter 4.
## Special concepts in this chapter
### “In my own hand”
It was common in the ancient Near East for the author to speak and someone else to write down the words. Many of the New Testament letters were written this way. Paul wrote the final greeting himself.
## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter
### Secret truth
Paul refers to a “secret truth” in this chapter. The role of the church in the plans of God was once unknown. But God has now revealed it. Part of this involves the Gentiles having equal standing with the Jews in the plans of God. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/reveal]])
+COL 4 intro nm3y 0 # Colossians 04 General Notes
## Structure and formatting
[Colossians 4:1](../../col/04/01.md) appears to belong with the topics of Chapter 3 instead of Chapter 4.
## Special concepts in this chapter
### “In my own hand”
It was common in the ancient Near East for the author to speak and someone else to write down the words. Many of the New Testament letters were written this way. Paul wrote the final greeting himself.
## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter
### Secret truth
Paul refers to a “secret truth” in this chapter. The role of the church in the plans of God was once unknown. But God has now revealed it. Part of this involves the Gentiles having equal standing with the Jews in the plans of God. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/reveal]])
COL 4 1 qhd2 0 Connecting Statement: After speaking to masters, Paul ends his special instructions to the different kinds of believers in the church at Colossae.
COL 4 1 ae3y figs-doublet τὸ δίκαιον καὶ τὴν ἰσότητα 1 what is right and fair These words mean almost the same thing and are used to emphasize the things that are morally correct. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
COL 4 1 t9wy καὶ ὑμεῖς ἔχετε Κύριον ἐν οὐρανῷ 1 you also have a master in heaven God wants the relationship between an earthly master and his slave to be loving the way God, the heavenly **master**, loves his earthly servants, including the earthly slaves’ masters.
diff --git a/en_tn_53-1TH.tsv b/en_tn_53-1TH.tsv
index 45dc3106c..217716e15 100644
--- a/en_tn_53-1TH.tsv
+++ b/en_tn_53-1TH.tsv
@@ -1,6 +1,6 @@
Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNote
-1TH front intro jp2y 0 # Introduction to 1 Thessalonians
## Part 1: General Introduction
### Outline of the Book of 1 Thessalonians
1. Greeting (1:1)
1. Prayer of thanksgiving for the Thessalonian Christians (1:2-10)
1. Paul’s ministry in Thessalonica (2:1-16)
1. Paul’s concerns for their spiritual growth
- Like a mother (2:7)
- Like a father (2:11)
1. Paul sends Timothy to the Thessalonians and Timothy reports back to Paul (3:1-13)
1. Practical instructions
- Live to please God (4:1-12)
- Comfort regarding those who have died (4:12-18)
- Christ’s return is a motive for godly living (5:1-11)
1. Closing blessings, thanks, and prayers (5:12-28)
### Who wrote 1 Thessalonians?
Paul wrote 1 Thessalonians. Paul was from the city of Tarsus. He had been known as Saul in his early life. Before becoming a Christian, Paul was a Pharisee. He persecuted Christians. After he became a Christian, he traveled several times throughout the Roman Empire telling people about Jesus.
Paul wrote this letter while staying in the city of Corinth. Of all Paul’s letters that are in the Bible, many scholars think 1 Thessalonians was the first letter Paul wrote.
### What is the Book of 1 Thessalonians about?
Paul wrote this letter to the believers in the city of Thessalonica. He wrote it after the Jews in the city forced him to leave. In this letter he said he considered his visit to them a success, even though he was forced to leave.
Paul responded to the news from Timothy about the Thessalonian believers. The believers there were being persecuted. He encouraged them to continue living in a way that pleased God. He also comforted them by explaining what happens to those who die before Christ returns.
### How should the title of this book be translated?
Translators may choose to call this book by its traditional title, “1 Thessalonians” or “First Thessalonians.” They may instead prefer to choose a clearer title, such as “Paul’s First Letter to the Church in Thessalonica,” or “The First Letter to the Christians in Thessalonica.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
## Part 2: Important Religious and Cultural Concepts
### What is the “second coming” of Jesus?
Paul wrote much in this letter about Jesus’ eventual return to Earth. When Jesus returns, he will judge all mankind. He will also rule over creation, and there will be peace everywhere.
### What happens to those who die before the return of Christ?
Paul made clear that those who die before Christ’s return will come back to life and be with Jesus. They will not remain dead forever. Paul wrote this to encourage the Thessalonians. For some of them worried that those who died would miss the great day when Jesus returns.
## Part 3: Important Translation Issues
### What did Paul mean by expressions like “in Christ” and “in the Lord.”?
Paul meant to express the idea of a very a close union with Christ and the believers. Please see the introduction to the Book of Romans for more details about this kind of expression.
### What are the major issues in the text of the Book of 1 Thessalonians?
For the following verses, modern versions of the Bible differ from older versions. The ULT text has the modern reading and puts the older reading in a footnote. If a translation of the Bible exists in the general region, translators should consider using the reading found in those versions. If not, translators are advised to follow the modern reading.
* “May grace and peace be to you” (1:1). Some older versions read: “Grace and peace to you from God our Father and the Lord Jesus Christ.”
* “Instead, we were as gentle among you as a mother comforting her own children.” (2:7) Other modern versions and older versions read, “Instead, we were like babies among you, as when a mother comforts her own children.”
* “Timothy, our brother and fellow worker for God” (3:2). Some other versions read: “Timothy, our brother and servant of God.”
(See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants]])
-1TH 1 intro y8c5 0 # 1 Thessalonians 01 General Notes
## Structure and formatting
Verse 1 formally introduces this letter. Letters in the ancient Near East commonly had introductions of this type.
## Special concepts in this chapter
### Hardship
Other people persecuted the Christians in Thessalonica. But the Christians there handled it well. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+1TH front intro jp2y 0 # Introduction to 1 Thessalonians
## Part 1: General Introduction
### Outline of the Book of 1 Thessalonians
1. Greeting (1:1)
1. Prayer of thanksgiving for the Thessalonian Christians (1:2-10)
1. Paul’s ministry in Thessalonica (2:1-16)
1. Paul’s concerns for their spiritual growth
- Like a mother (2:7)
- Like a father (2:11)
1. Paul sends Timothy to the Thessalonians and Timothy reports back to Paul (3:1-13)
1. Practical instructions
- Live to please God (4:1-12)
- Comfort regarding those who have died (4:12-18)
- Christ’s return is a motive for godly living (5:1-11)
1. Closing blessings, thanks, and prayers (5:12-28)
### Who wrote 1 Thessalonians?
Paul wrote 1 Thessalonians. Paul was from the city of Tarsus. He had been known as Saul in his early life. Before becoming a Christian, Paul was a Pharisee. He persecuted Christians. After he became a Christian, he traveled several times throughout the Roman Empire telling people about Jesus.
Paul wrote this letter while staying in the city of Corinth. Of all Paul’s letters that are in the Bible, many scholars think 1 Thessalonians was the first letter Paul wrote.
### What is the Book of 1 Thessalonians about?
Paul wrote this letter to the believers in the city of Thessalonica. He wrote it after the Jews in the city forced him to leave. In this letter he said he considered his visit to them a success, even though he was forced to leave.
Paul responded to the news from Timothy about the Thessalonian believers. The believers there were being persecuted. He encouraged them to continue living in a way that pleased God. He also comforted them by explaining what happens to those who die before Christ returns.
### How should the title of this book be translated?
Translators may choose to call this book by its traditional title, “1 Thessalonians” or “First Thessalonians.” They may instead prefer to choose a clearer title, such as “Paul’s First Letter to the Church in Thessalonica,” or “The First Letter to the Christians in Thessalonica.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
## Part 2: Important Religious and Cultural Concepts
### What is the “second coming” of Jesus?
Paul wrote much in this letter about Jesus’ eventual return to Earth. When Jesus returns, he will judge all mankind. He will also rule over creation, and there will be peace everywhere.
### What happens to those who die before the return of Christ?
Paul made clear that those who die before Christ’s return will come back to life and be with Jesus. They will not remain dead forever. Paul wrote this to encourage the Thessalonians. For some of them worried that those who died would miss the great day when Jesus returns.
## Part 3: Important Translation Issues
### What did Paul mean by expressions like “in Christ” and “in the Lord.”?
Paul meant to express the idea of a very a close union with Christ and the believers. Please see the introduction to the Book of Romans for more details about this kind of expression.
### What are the major issues in the text of the Book of 1 Thessalonians?
For the following verses, modern versions of the Bible differ from older versions. The ULT text has the modern reading and puts the older reading in a footnote. If a translation of the Bible exists in the general region, translators should consider using the reading found in those versions. If not, translators are advised to follow the modern reading.
* “May grace and peace be to you” (1:1). Some older versions read: “Grace and peace to you from God our Father and the Lord Jesus Christ.”
* “Instead, we were as gentle among you as a mother comforting her own children.” (2:7) Other modern versions and older versions read, “Instead, we were like babies among you, as when a mother comforts her own children.”
* “Timothy, our brother and fellow worker for God” (3:2). Some other versions read: “Timothy, our brother and servant of God.”
(See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants]])
+1TH 1 intro y8c5 0 # 1 Thessalonians 01 General Notes
## Structure and formatting
Verse 1 formally introduces this letter. Letters in the ancient Near East commonly had introductions of this type.
## Special concepts in this chapter
### Hardship
Other people persecuted the Christians in Thessalonica. But the Christians there handled it well. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1TH 1 1 dp37 0 General Information: Paul identifies himself as the writer of the letter and greets the church at Thessalonica.
1TH 1 1 ms5e figs-explicit Παῦλος, καὶ Σιλουανὸς, καὶ Τιμόθεος; τῇ ἐκκλησίᾳ 1 Paul and Silvanus and Timothy to the church The UST makes clear that it was Paul who wrote this letter. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1TH 1 1 luw5 figs-metonymy χάρις ὑμῖν καὶ εἰρήνη 1 Grace and peace to you The terms **Grace** and **peace** are metonyms for the person who acts toward people in a kindly and peaceful manner. Alternate translation: “May God be kind to you and give you peace” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
@@ -157,7 +157,7 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo
1TH 4 17 l5l1 figs-exclusive ἡμεῖς οἱ ζῶντες 1 we who are alive Here, **we** refers to all believers who have not died. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
1TH 4 17 wvi8 σὺν αὐτοῖς 1 with them The word **them** refers to the dead believers who were made alive again.
1TH 4 17 se1y ἁρπαγησόμεθα ἐν νεφέλαις εἰς ἀπάντησιν τοῦ Κυρίου εἰς ἀέρα 1 will be caught up … in the clouds to meet the Lord in the air “will be pulled up … to meet the Lord Jesus in the sky”
-1TH 5 intro ay3d 0 # 1 Thessalonians 05 General Notes
## Structure and formatting
Paul concludes his letter in a way that was typical of letters in the ancient Near East.
## Special concepts in this chapter
### Day of the Lord
The exact time of the coming day of the Lord will be a surprise to the world. This is what the simile “like a thief in the night” means. Because of this, Christians are to live prepared for the coming of the Lord. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/dayofthelord]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-simile]])
### Quench the Spirit
This means to ignore or work against the Holy Spirit’s guidance and work.
+1TH 5 intro ay3d 0 # 1 Thessalonians 05 General Notes
## Structure and formatting
Paul concludes his letter in a way that was typical of letters in the ancient Near East.
## Special concepts in this chapter
### Day of the Lord
The exact time of the coming day of the Lord will be a surprise to the world. This is what the simile “like a thief in the night” means. Because of this, Christians are to live prepared for the coming of the Lord. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/dayofthelord]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-simile]])
### Quench the Spirit
This means to ignore or work against the Holy Spirit’s guidance and work.
1TH 5 1 i2vm figs-exclusive 0 General Information: In this chapter the words “we” and “us” refer to Paul, Silvanus, and Timothy, unless otherwise noted. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
1TH 5 1 caue figs-you 0 General Information: The word **you** is plural and refers to the believers at the church of Thessalonica. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-you]])
1TH 5 1 z1s6 0 Connecting Statement: Paul continues talking about the day Jesus will come back.
diff --git a/en_tn_54-2TH.tsv b/en_tn_54-2TH.tsv
index 44282a9f3..66e52738d 100644
--- a/en_tn_54-2TH.tsv
+++ b/en_tn_54-2TH.tsv
@@ -1,6 +1,6 @@
Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNote
-2TH front intro krd6 0 # Introduction to 2 Thessalonians
## Part 1: General Introduction
### Outline of the Book of 2 Thessalonians
1. Greetings and thanksgiving (1:1-3)
1. Christians suffering from persecution
- They are worthy of the kingdom of God and of his promise of relief from trials (1:4-7)
- God will judge those who persecute Christians (1:8-12)
1. Some believers’ misunderstanding about the second coming of Christ
- Christ’s return has not yet happened (2:1-2)
- Instruction about the events that will precede the return of Christ (2:3-12)
1. Paul’s confidence that God will save the Thessalonian Christians
- His call to “stand firm” (2:13-15)
- His prayer that God will comfort them (2:16-17)
1. Paul requests that the Thessalonian believers pray for him (3:1-5)
1. Paul give commands about idle believers (3:6-15)
1. Closing (3:16-17)
### Who wrote 2 Thessalonians?
Paul wrote 2 Thessalonians. He was from the city of Tarsus. He had been known as Saul in his early life. Before becoming a Christian, Paul was a Pharisee. He persecuted Christians. After he became a Christian, he traveled several times throughout the Roman Empire telling people about Jesus.
Paul wrote this letter while staying in the city of Corinth.
### What is the Book of 2 Thessalonians about?
Paul wrote this letter to the believers in the city of Thessalonica. He encouraged the believers because they were being persecuted. He told them to continue living in a way that pleased God. And he wanted to teach them again about Christ’s return.
### How should the title of this book be translated?
Translators may choose to call this book by its traditional title, “2 Thessalonians” or “Second Thessalonians.” Or they may choose a clearer title, such as “Paul’s Second Letter to the Church in Thessalonica,” or “The Second Letter to the Christians in Thessalonica.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
## Part 2: Important Religious and Cultural Concepts
### What is the “second coming” of Jesus?
Paul wrote much in this letter about Jesus’ eventual return to Earth. When Jesus returns, he will judge all mankind. He will also rule over creation. And he will cause there to be peace everywhere. Paul also explained that a “man of lawlessness” will come before Christ’s return. This person will obey Satan and cause many people to oppose God. But Jesus will destroy this person when he returns.
## Part 3: Important Translation Issues
### What did Paul mean by the expression “in Christ,” “in the Lord,” etc.?
Paul meant to express the idea of a very close union with Christ and the believers. Please see the introduction to the Book of Romans for more details about this kind of expression.
### What are the major issues in the text of the Book of 2 Thessalonians?
For the following verses, modern versions of the Bible differ from older versions. The ULT text has the modern reading and puts the older reading in a footnote. If a translation of the Bible exists in the general region, translators should consider using the reading found in those versions. If not, translators are advised to follow the modern reading.
* “and the man of lawlessness is revealed” (2:3). The ULT, UST, and most modern versions read this way. Older versions have, “and the man of sin is revealed.”
* “For God chose you as the firstfruits for salvation” (2:13) The ULT, UST, and some other versions read this way. Other versions have, “For God chose you from the first for salvation.”
(See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants]])
-2TH 1 intro m987 0 # 2 Thessalonians 01 General Notes
## Structure and formatting
Verses 1-2 formally introduce this letter. Letters in the ancient Near East commonly had introductions of this type.
## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter
### Paradox
A paradox is a true statement that appears to describe something impossible. A paradox occurs in verses 4-5: “We talk about your patience and faith in all your persecutions. We talk about the afflictions that you endure. This is a sign of God’s righteous judgment.” People would not normally think that believing in God while being persecuted is a sign of God’s righteous judgment. But in verses 5-10, Paul explains how God will reward those who believe in him and how he will judge those who afflict them. ([2 Thessalonians 1:4-5](./04.md))
+2TH front intro krd6 0 # Introduction to 2 Thessalonians
## Part 1: General Introduction
### Outline of the Book of 2 Thessalonians
1. Greetings and thanksgiving (1:1-3)
1. Christians suffering from persecution
- They are worthy of the kingdom of God and of his promise of relief from trials (1:4-7)
- God will judge those who persecute Christians (1:8-12)
1. Some believers’ misunderstanding about the second coming of Christ
- Christ’s return has not yet happened (2:1-2)
- Instruction about the events that will precede the return of Christ (2:3-12)
1. Paul’s confidence that God will save the Thessalonian Christians
- His call to “stand firm” (2:13-15)
- His prayer that God will comfort them (2:16-17)
1. Paul requests that the Thessalonian believers pray for him (3:1-5)
1. Paul give commands about idle believers (3:6-15)
1. Closing (3:16-17)
### Who wrote 2 Thessalonians?
Paul wrote 2 Thessalonians. He was from the city of Tarsus. He had been known as Saul in his early life. Before becoming a Christian, Paul was a Pharisee. He persecuted Christians. After he became a Christian, he traveled several times throughout the Roman Empire telling people about Jesus.
Paul wrote this letter while staying in the city of Corinth.
### What is the Book of 2 Thessalonians about?
Paul wrote this letter to the believers in the city of Thessalonica. He encouraged the believers because they were being persecuted. He told them to continue living in a way that pleased God. And he wanted to teach them again about Christ’s return.
### How should the title of this book be translated?
Translators may choose to call this book by its traditional title, “2 Thessalonians” or “Second Thessalonians.” Or they may choose a clearer title, such as “Paul’s Second Letter to the Church in Thessalonica,” or “The Second Letter to the Christians in Thessalonica.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
## Part 2: Important Religious and Cultural Concepts
### What is the “second coming” of Jesus?
Paul wrote much in this letter about Jesus’ eventual return to Earth. When Jesus returns, he will judge all mankind. He will also rule over creation. And he will cause there to be peace everywhere. Paul also explained that a “man of lawlessness” will come before Christ’s return. This person will obey Satan and cause many people to oppose God. But Jesus will destroy this person when he returns.
## Part 3: Important Translation Issues
### What did Paul mean by the expression “in Christ,” “in the Lord,” etc.?
Paul meant to express the idea of a very close union with Christ and the believers. Please see the introduction to the Book of Romans for more details about this kind of expression.
### What are the major issues in the text of the Book of 2 Thessalonians?
For the following verses, modern versions of the Bible differ from older versions. The ULT text has the modern reading and puts the older reading in a footnote. If a translation of the Bible exists in the general region, translators should consider using the reading found in those versions. If not, translators are advised to follow the modern reading.
* “and the man of lawlessness is revealed” (2:3). The ULT, UST, and most modern versions read this way. Older versions have, “and the man of sin is revealed.”
* “For God chose you as the firstfruits for salvation” (2:13) The ULT, UST, and some other versions read this way. Other versions have, “For God chose you from the first for salvation.”
(See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants]])
+2TH 1 intro m987 0 # 2 Thessalonians 01 General Notes
## Structure and formatting
Verses 1-2 formally introduce this letter. Letters in the ancient Near East commonly had introductions of this type.
## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter
### Paradox
A paradox is a true statement that appears to describe something impossible. A paradox occurs in verses 4-5: “We talk about your patience and faith in all your persecutions. We talk about the afflictions that you endure. This is a sign of God’s righteous judgment.” People would not normally think that believing in God while being persecuted is a sign of God’s righteous judgment. But in verses 5-10, Paul explains how God will reward those who believe in him and how he will judge those who afflict them. ([2 Thessalonians 1:4-5](./04.md))
2TH 1 1 b6vf 0 General Information: Paul is the author of this letter, but he includes Silvanus and Timothy as senders of the letter. He begins by greeting the church at Thessalonica.
2TH 1 1 nrxt figs-exclusive 0 General Information: The words “we” and “us” refer to Paul, Silvanus, and Timothy, unless otherwise noted. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
2TH 1 1 x4lj figs-you 0 General Information: The word “you” is plural and refers to the believers at the church of Thessalonica. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-you]])
diff --git a/en_tn_55-1TI.tsv b/en_tn_55-1TI.tsv
index 78b9d5609..be1fe6e15 100644
--- a/en_tn_55-1TI.tsv
+++ b/en_tn_55-1TI.tsv
@@ -1,5 +1,5 @@
Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNote
-1TI front intro wy83 0 # Introduction to 1 Timothy
## Part 1: General Introduction
### Outline of the Book of 1 Timothy
In this letter, Paul alternates between personal commands to Timothy that empower him to act as his representative and with his authority, and instructions for how followers of Jesus should live in community.
1. Greetings (1:1-2)
2. Paul commands Timothy to tell people not to teach false doctrines (1:3-20)
3. Paul gives instructions about how to re-establish order and decency in the church (2:1-15)
4. Paul gives instructions about how to ensure that elders and deacons are properly qualified (3:1-13)
5. Paul commands Timothy regarding his own personal conduct (3:14-5:2)
6. Paul gives instructions to ensure church support for worthy widows (5:3-16) and elders (5:17-20)
7. Paul commands Timothy that he must be impartial (5:21-25)
8. Paul gives instructions to ensure order in master-servant relationships (6:1-2a)
9. Paul commands Timothy regarding how he should teach and conduct himself (6:2b-16)
10. Paul gives instructions for how people who are rich should live (6:17-19)
11. Paul commands Timothy to guard what has been entrusted to his care (6:20-21a)
12. Closing blessing to the whole church (6:21b)
### Who wrote the Book of 1 Timothy?
A man named Paul wrote 1 Timothy. Paul was from the city of Tarsus. He had been known as Saul in his early life. Before becoming a Christian, Paul was a Pharisee. He persecuted Christians. After he became a Christian, he traveled several times throughout the Roman Empire telling people about Jesus.
Paul may have written other letters to Timothy, but this is the earliest one that we still have. That is why it is known as 1 Timothy or First Timothy. Timothy was Paul’s disciple and close friend. Paul probably wrote this letter near the end of his life.
### What is the Book of 1 Timothy about?
Paul had left Timothy in the city of Ephesus to help the believers there. Paul wrote this letter to instruct Timothy about various matters. The topics he addressed included church worship, qualifications for church leaders, and warnings against false teachers. This letter shows how Paul was training Timothy to be a leader among the churches while Timothy himself trained other leaders.
### How should the title of this book be translated?
Translators may choose to call this book by its customary title, “1 Timothy” or “First Timothy.” Or they may choose a different title, such as “Paul’s First Letter to Timothy.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
## Part 2: Important Religious and Cultural Concepts
### What is discipleship?
Discipleship is the process of making people to be disciples of Christ. The goal of discipleship is to encourage other Christians to be more like Christ. This letter gives many instructions about how a leader should train a less mature Christian. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/disciple]])
## Part 3: Important Translation Issues
### What did Paul mean by the expression “in Christ”?
Paul meant to express the idea of a very close union with Christ and the believers. Please see the introduction to the Book of Romans for more details about this kind of expression.
### What are the major textual issues in the text of the book of 1 Timothy?
In [6:5](../06/05.md), the oldest Greek manuscripts differ from later Greek manuscripts. Modern translations may also differ depending on the Greek manuscript that they translate from. The ULT text translates the Greek from the oldest manuscripts and puts the differences from later manuscripts in a footnote. If a translation of the Bible exists in the general region, translators should consider following the decision in that translation. If not, translators are advised to follow the oldest Greek manuscripts as reflected in the ULT text. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants]])
+1TI front intro wy83 0 # Introduction to 1 Timothy
## Part 1: General Introduction
### Outline of the Book of 1 Timothy
In this letter, Paul alternates between personal commands to Timothy that empower him to act as his representative and with his authority, and instructions for how followers of Jesus should live in community.
1. Greetings (1:1-2)
2. Paul commands Timothy to tell people not to teach false doctrines (1:3-20)
3. Paul gives instructions about how to re-establish order and decency in the church (2:1-15)
4. Paul gives instructions about how to ensure that elders and deacons are properly qualified (3:1-13)
5. Paul commands Timothy regarding his own personal conduct (3:14-5:2)
6. Paul gives instructions to ensure church support for worthy widows (5:3-16) and elders (5:17-20)
7. Paul commands Timothy that he must be impartial (5:21-25)
8. Paul gives instructions to ensure order in master-servant relationships (6:1-2a)
9. Paul commands Timothy regarding how he should teach and conduct himself (6:2b-16)
10. Paul gives instructions for how people who are rich should live (6:17-19)
11. Paul commands Timothy to guard what has been entrusted to his care (6:20-21a)
12. Closing blessing to the whole church (6:21b)
### Who wrote the Book of 1 Timothy?
A man named Paul wrote 1 Timothy. Paul was from the city of Tarsus. He had been known as Saul in his early life. Before becoming a Christian, Paul was a Pharisee. He persecuted Christians. After he became a Christian, he traveled several times throughout the Roman Empire telling people about Jesus.
Paul may have written other letters to Timothy, but this is the earliest one that we still have. That is why it is known as 1 Timothy or First Timothy. Timothy was Paul’s disciple and close friend. Paul probably wrote this letter near the end of his life.
### What is the Book of 1 Timothy about?
Paul had left Timothy in the city of Ephesus to help the believers there. Paul wrote this letter to instruct Timothy about various matters. The topics he addressed included church worship, qualifications for church leaders, and warnings against false teachers. This letter shows how Paul was training Timothy to be a leader among the churches while Timothy himself trained other leaders.
### How should the title of this book be translated?
Translators may choose to call this book by its customary title, “1 Timothy” or “First Timothy.” Or they may choose a different title, such as “Paul’s First Letter to Timothy.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
## Part 2: Important Religious and Cultural Concepts
### What is discipleship?
Discipleship is the process of making people to be disciples of Christ. The goal of discipleship is to encourage other Christians to be more like Christ. This letter gives many instructions about how a leader should train a less mature Christian. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/disciple]])
## Part 3: Important Translation Issues
### What did Paul mean by the expression “in Christ”?
Paul meant to express the idea of a very close union with Christ and the believers. Please see the introduction to the Book of Romans for more details about this kind of expression.
### What are the major textual issues in the text of the book of 1 Timothy?
In [6:5](../06/05.md), the oldest Greek manuscripts differ from later Greek manuscripts. Modern translations may also differ depending on the Greek manuscript that they translate from. The ULT text translates the Greek from the oldest manuscripts and puts the differences from later manuscripts in a footnote. If a translation of the Bible exists in the general region, translators should consider following the decision in that translation. If not, translators are advised to follow the oldest Greek manuscripts as reflected in the ULT text. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants]])
1TI 1 intro a4v2 0 # 1 Timothy 01 General Notes
## Structure and formatting
Paul formally introduces this letter in verses 1-2. Writers often began letters in this way in the ancient Near East.
## Special concepts in this chapter
### Spiritual children
In this chapter, Paul calls Timothy a “son” and his “child.” Paul discipled Timothy as a Christian and a church leader. Paul may also have led him to believe in Christ. Therefore, Paul called Timothy his “son in the faith.” (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/disciple]], [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/faith]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/spirit]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
### Metaphor
In this chapter Paul speaks figuratively of people who are not fulfilling the purpose of their faith as if they had “missed the mark” that they were aiming at, as if they had “turned away” down a wrong path, and as if they had been “shipwrecked.” He speaks figuratively of following Jesus faithfully as “fighting the good fight.”
1TI 1 1 i3zz Παῦλος 1 Paul In the culture of this time, letter writers would give their own names first. Your language may have a particular way of introducing the author of a letter, and if it would be helpful to your readers, you could use it here. Immediately after introducing the writer, you might also want to indicate to whom the letter was written. Alternate translation: “I, Paul, am the one writing this letter to you, Timothy”
1TI 1 1 xl6d κατ’ ἐπιταγὴν Θεοῦ 1 by the command of God Alternate translation: “by the authority of God”
diff --git a/en_tn_56-2TI.tsv b/en_tn_56-2TI.tsv
index 671c67732..2d245c364 100644
--- a/en_tn_56-2TI.tsv
+++ b/en_tn_56-2TI.tsv
@@ -1,5 +1,5 @@
Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNote
-2TI front intro s7fk 0 # Introduction to 2 Timothy
## Part 1: General Introduction
### Outline of the book of 2 Timothy
1. Paul greets Timothy and encourages him to endure hardship as he serves God (1:1-2:13).
2. Paul gives general instructions to Timothy (2:14–26).
3. Paul warns Timothy about future events and instructs him about how to carry out his service to God (3:1-4:8).
4. Paul makes personal remarks (4:9-22).
### Who wrote the book of 2 Timothy?
Paul wrote 2 Timothy. He was from the city of Tarsus. He had been known as Saul in his early life. Before becoming a Christian, Paul was a Pharisee. He persecuted Christians. After he became a Christian, he traveled several times throughout the Roman Empire telling people about Jesus.
This book is the second letter Paul wrote to Timothy. Timothy was his disciple and close friend. Paul wrote this letter while in prison in Rome. Paul would die soon after writing this letter.
### What is the book of 2 Timothy about?
Paul had left Timothy in the city of Ephesus to help the believers there. Paul wrote this letter to instruct Timothy about various matters. The topics he addressed include warnings about false teachers and advice about enduring difficult situations. This letter also shows how Paul was training Timothy to be a leader among the churches.
### How should the title of this book be translated?
Translators may choose to call this book by its traditional title, “2 Timothy” or “Second Timothy.” Or they may choose a different title, such as “Paul’s Second Letter to Timothy” or “The Second Letter to Timothy.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
## Part 2: Important Religious and Cultural Concepts
### What is the soldier imagery in 2 Timothy?
As Paul waited in prison, knowing he would die soon, he spoke of being a soldier of Jesus Christ. Soldiers have to obey to their leaders. In the same way, Christians have to obey Jesus. As “soldiers” of Christ, believers are to obey his commands, even if they die as a result.
### What does it mean that God inspired Scripture?
God is the true author of Scripture. He inspired the human authors who wrote the books. That means God in some way caused the people to write what they wrote. This is why the Bible is also referred to as God’s word. This implies several things about it. First, everything that the Bible teaches is free from error and can be trusted. Second, God will always preserve his Scripture for every generation of people. Third, God’s word should be translated into all the world’s languages.
## Part 3: Important Translation Issues
### Singular and plural “you”
In this book, the word “I” refers to Paul. Here the word “you” is almost always singular and refers to Timothy. The exception to this is 4:22. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-you]])
### Inclusive and exclusive “we” and “us”
In this book, “we” and “us” include the writer, Paul, the recipient, Timothy, and all believers. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
### What did Paul mean by the expressions “in Christ,” “in the Lord,” etc.?
Paul meant to express the idea of a very close union between Christ and the believers. Please see the introduction to the book of Romans for more details about this kind of expression.
### What are the major textual issues in the text of the book of 2 Timothy?
For the following verses, the oldest Greek manuscripts differ from later Greek manuscripts. Modern translations may also differ depending on the Greek manuscript that they translate from. The ULT text translates the Greek from the oldest manuscripts, and puts the differences from later manuscripts in a footnote. If a translation of the Bible already exists in the general region, translators should consider following the decision in that translation. If not, translators are advised to follow the oldest Greek manuscripts as reflected in the ULT text.
* “Because of this, I was appointed a preacher, an apostle, and a teacher” (1:11). Some later manuscripts read, “Because of this, I was appointed a preacher, an apostle, and a teacher to the Gentiles.”
* “Warn them before God” (2:14). Some later manuscripts read, “Warn them before the Lord.”
(See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants]])
+2TI front intro s7fk 0 # Introduction to 2 Timothy
## Part 1: General Introduction
### Outline of the book of 2 Timothy
1. Paul greets Timothy and encourages him to endure hardship as he serves God (1:1-2:13).
2. Paul gives general instructions to Timothy (2:14–26).
3. Paul warns Timothy about future events and instructs him about how to carry out his service to God (3:1-4:8).
4. Paul makes personal remarks (4:9-22).
### Who wrote the book of 2 Timothy?
Paul wrote 2 Timothy. He was from the city of Tarsus. He had been known as Saul in his early life. Before becoming a Christian, Paul was a Pharisee. He persecuted Christians. After he became a Christian, he traveled several times throughout the Roman Empire telling people about Jesus.
This book is the second letter Paul wrote to Timothy. Timothy was his disciple and close friend. Paul wrote this letter while in prison in Rome. Paul would die soon after writing this letter.
### What is the book of 2 Timothy about?
Paul had left Timothy in the city of Ephesus to help the believers there. Paul wrote this letter to instruct Timothy about various matters. The topics he addressed include warnings about false teachers and advice about enduring difficult situations. This letter also shows how Paul was training Timothy to be a leader among the churches.
### How should the title of this book be translated?
Translators may choose to call this book by its traditional title, “2 Timothy” or “Second Timothy.” Or they may choose a different title, such as “Paul’s Second Letter to Timothy” or “The Second Letter to Timothy.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
## Part 2: Important Religious and Cultural Concepts
### What is the soldier imagery in 2 Timothy?
As Paul waited in prison, knowing he would die soon, he spoke of being a soldier of Jesus Christ. Soldiers have to obey to their leaders. In the same way, Christians have to obey Jesus. As “soldiers” of Christ, believers are to obey his commands, even if they die as a result.
### What does it mean that God inspired Scripture?
God is the true author of Scripture. He inspired the human authors who wrote the books. That means God in some way caused the people to write what they wrote. This is why the Bible is also referred to as God’s word. This implies several things about it. First, everything that the Bible teaches is free from error and can be trusted. Second, God will always preserve his Scripture for every generation of people. Third, God’s word should be translated into all the world’s languages.
## Part 3: Important Translation Issues
### Singular and plural “you”
In this book, the word “I” refers to Paul. Here the word “you” is almost always singular and refers to Timothy. The exception to this is 4:22. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-you]])
### Inclusive and exclusive “we” and “us”
In this book, “we” and “us” include the writer, Paul, the recipient, Timothy, and all believers. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
### What did Paul mean by the expressions “in Christ,” “in the Lord,” etc.?
Paul meant to express the idea of a very close union between Christ and the believers. Please see the introduction to the book of Romans for more details about this kind of expression.
### What are the major textual issues in the text of the book of 2 Timothy?
For the following verses, the oldest Greek manuscripts differ from later Greek manuscripts. Modern translations may also differ depending on the Greek manuscript that they translate from. The ULT text translates the Greek from the oldest manuscripts, and puts the differences from later manuscripts in a footnote. If a translation of the Bible already exists in the general region, translators should consider following the decision in that translation. If not, translators are advised to follow the oldest Greek manuscripts as reflected in the ULT text.
* “Because of this, I was appointed a preacher, an apostle, and a teacher” (1:11). Some later manuscripts read, “Because of this, I was appointed a preacher, an apostle, and a teacher to the Gentiles.”
* “Warn them before God” (2:14). Some later manuscripts read, “Warn them before the Lord.”
(See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants]])
2TI 1 intro p5lf 0 # 2 Timothy 01 General Notes
## Structure and formatting
Paul formally introduces this letter in verses 1-2. Writers often began letters in this way in the ancient Near East.
## Special concepts in this chapter
### Spiritual children
Paul discipled Timothy as a Christian and a church leader. Paul may also have led him to believe in Christ. Therefore, Paul calls Timothy “beloved child.” So even though Paul was not Timothy’s father, Paul speaks of his relationship with Timothy as that of a father and son in a spiritual sense. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter
### Persecution
Paul was in prison when he wrote this letter. Paul encourages Timothy to be willing to suffer for the gospel.
2TI 1 1 p001 translate-names Παῦλος 1 Paul This is the name of a man, the author of the letter. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
2TI 1 1 ha4l Παῦλος 1 Paul This letter follows the normal custom of the time by beginning with the name and identity of the author, then mentioning the recipient (in verse 2). Your language may have a particular way of introducing the author of a letter. If so, you can use it in your translation. Alternate translation: “I, Paul, am writing this letter”
diff --git a/en_tn_57-TIT.tsv b/en_tn_57-TIT.tsv
index 28fc4cead..2043287b8 100644
--- a/en_tn_57-TIT.tsv
+++ b/en_tn_57-TIT.tsv
@@ -1,5 +1,5 @@
Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNote
-TIT front intro m2jl 0 # Introduction to Titus
## Part 1: General Introduction
### Outline of the Book of Titus
1. Paul instructs Titus to appoint godly leaders. (1:1-16)
2. Paul instructs Titus to train people to live godly lives. (2:1-3:11)
3. Paul ends by sharing some of his plans and sending greetings to various believers. (3:12-15)
### Who wrote the Book of Titus?
Paul wrote the Book of Titus. Paul was from the city of Tarsus. He had been known as Saul in his early life. Before becoming a Christian, Paul was a Pharisee. He persecuted Christians. After he became a Christian, he traveled several times throughout the Roman Empire telling people about Jesus.
### What is the Book of Titus about?
Paul wrote this letter to Titus, his fellow worker, who was leading the churches on the island of Crete. Paul instructed him about selecting church leaders. Paul also described how the believers should behave towards each other. He also encouraged them all to live in a way that pleases God.
### How should the title of this book be translated?
Translators may choose to call this book by its traditional title, “Titus.” Or they may choose a clearer title, such as “Paul’s Letter to Titus” or “A Letter to Titus”. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
## Part 2: Important Religious and Cultural Concepts
### In what roles can people serve within the church?
There are some teachings in the Book of Titus about whether a woman or divorced man can serve in positions of leadership within the church. Scholars disagree about the meaning of these teachings. Further study on these issues may be necessary before translating this book.
## Part 3: Important Translation Issues
### Singular and plural **you**
In this book, the word **I** refers to Paul. Also, the word **you** is almost always singular and refers to Titus. The exception to this is 3:15. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-you]])
### What is the meaning of **God our Savior**?
This is a common phrase in this letter. Paul meant to make the readers think about how God forgave them in Christ for sinning against him, and by forgiving them he saved them from being punished when he judges all people. A similar phrase in this letter is **our great God and Savior Jesus Christ**.
+TIT front intro m2jl 0 # Introduction to Titus
## Part 1: General Introduction
### Outline of the Book of Titus
1. Paul instructs Titus to appoint godly leaders. (1:1-16)
2. Paul instructs Titus to train people to live godly lives. (2:1-3:11)
3. Paul ends by sharing some of his plans and sending greetings to various believers. (3:12-15)
### Who wrote the Book of Titus?
Paul wrote the Book of Titus. Paul was from the city of Tarsus. He had been known as Saul in his early life. Before becoming a Christian, Paul was a Pharisee. He persecuted Christians. After he became a Christian, he traveled several times throughout the Roman Empire telling people about Jesus.
### What is the Book of Titus about?
Paul wrote this letter to Titus, his fellow worker, who was leading the churches on the island of Crete. Paul instructed him about selecting church leaders. Paul also described how the believers should behave towards each other. He also encouraged them all to live in a way that pleases God.
### How should the title of this book be translated?
Translators may choose to call this book by its traditional title, “Titus.” Or they may choose a clearer title, such as “Paul’s Letter to Titus” or “A Letter to Titus”. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
## Part 2: Important Religious and Cultural Concepts
### In what roles can people serve within the church?
There are some teachings in the Book of Titus about whether a woman or divorced man can serve in positions of leadership within the church. Scholars disagree about the meaning of these teachings. Further study on these issues may be necessary before translating this book.
## Part 3: Important Translation Issues
### Singular and plural **you**
In this book, the word **I** refers to Paul. Also, the word **you** is almost always singular and refers to Titus. The exception to this is 3:15. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-you]])
### What is the meaning of **God our Savior**?
This is a common phrase in this letter. Paul meant to make the readers think about how God forgave them in Christ for sinning against him, and by forgiving them he saved them from being punished when he judges all people. A similar phrase in this letter is **our great God and Savior Jesus Christ**.
TIT 1 intro c7me 0 # Titus 01 General Notes
## Structure and formatting
Paul formally introduces this letter in verses 1-4. Writers often began letters in this way in the ancient Near East.
In verses 6-9, Paul lists several qualities that a man must have if he is to be an elder in the church. (See: rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns) Paul gives a similar list in 1 Timothy 3.
## Special concepts in this chapter
### Elders
The church has used different titles for church leaders. Some titles include overseer, elder, pastor, and bishop.
## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter
### Should, may, must
The ULT uses different words that indicate requirements or obligations. These verbs have different levels of force associated with them. The subtle differences may be difficult to translate. The UST translates these verbs in a more general way.
TIT 1 1 rtc9 figs-abstractnouns κατὰ πίστιν 1 for the faith **Faith** is an abstract noun. Here it refers to believing or trusting in Jesus. If it is more clear in your language, you can translate it with a verb such as these, as in the UST. Alternate Translation: “to strengthen the faith” or “to help [God’s chosen people] to trust him more” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
TIT 1 1 xyz8 figs-abstractnouns ἐπίγνωσιν 1 the knowledge Here, **knowledge** is an abstract noun. If it is clearer in your language, you can use a verb such as “to know,” as in the UST. Paul wants people to know the true message about God and Christ so that they can live in a way that pleases God. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
diff --git a/en_tn_58-PHM.tsv b/en_tn_58-PHM.tsv
index 78576f46c..a787a5646 100644
--- a/en_tn_58-PHM.tsv
+++ b/en_tn_58-PHM.tsv
@@ -1,5 +1,5 @@
Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNote
-PHM front intro sz2w 0 # Introduction to Philemon
## Part 1: General Introduction
### Outline of the Book of Philemon
1. Paul greets Philemon (1:1-3)
2. Paul makes requests of Philemon about Onesimus (1:4-21)
3. Conclusion (1:22-25)
### Who wrote the Book of Philemon?
Paul wrote Philemon. Paul was from the city of Tarsus. He had been known as Saul in his early life. Before becoming a Christian, Paul was a Pharisee. He persecuted Christians. After he became a Christian, he traveled several times throughout the Roman Empire telling people about Jesus.
Paul was in a prison when he wrote this letter.
### What is the Book of Philemon about?
Paul wrote this letter to a man named Philemon. Philemon was a Christian who lived in the city of Colossae. He owned a slave named Onesimus. Onesimus had run away from Philemon and possibly stole something from him as well. Onesimus went to Rome and visited Paul in prison.
Paul told Philemon that he was sending Onesimus back to him. Philemon had the right to execute Onesimus according to Roman law. But Paul said that Philemon should accept Onesimus back as a Christian brother. He even suggested that Philemon should allow Onesimus to come back to Paul and help him in prison.
### How should the title of this book be translated?
Translators may choose to call this book by its traditional title, “Philemon.” Or they may choose a clearer title, such as “Paul’s Letter to Philemon” or “The Letter Paul wrote to Philemon.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
## Part 2: Important Religious and Cultural Concepts
### Does this letter approve of the practice of slavery?
Paul sent Onesimus back to his former master. But that did not mean Paul thought slavery was an acceptable practice. Instead, Paul was more concerned with people serving God in whatever situation they were in.
### What does Paul mean by the expression “in Christ,” “in the Lord,” etc.?
Paul meant to express the idea of a very close union with Christ and the believers. See the introduction to the Book of Romans for more details about this kind of expression.
## Part 3: Important Translation Issues
### Singular and plural “you”
In this book, the word “I” refers to Paul. The word “you” is almost always singular and refers to Philemon. The two exceptions to this are 1:22 and 1:25. There “you” refers to Philemon and the believers that met at his house. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-you]])
+PHM front intro sz2w 0 # Introduction to Philemon
## Part 1: General Introduction
### Outline of the Book of Philemon
1. Paul greets Philemon (1:1-3)
2. Paul makes requests of Philemon about Onesimus (1:4-21)
3. Conclusion (1:22-25)
### Who wrote the Book of Philemon?
Paul wrote Philemon. Paul was from the city of Tarsus. He had been known as Saul in his early life. Before becoming a Christian, Paul was a Pharisee. He persecuted Christians. After he became a Christian, he traveled several times throughout the Roman Empire telling people about Jesus.
Paul was in a prison when he wrote this letter.
### What is the Book of Philemon about?
Paul wrote this letter to a man named Philemon. Philemon was a Christian who lived in the city of Colossae. He owned a slave named Onesimus. Onesimus had run away from Philemon and possibly stole something from him as well. Onesimus went to Rome and visited Paul in prison.
Paul told Philemon that he was sending Onesimus back to him. Philemon had the right to execute Onesimus according to Roman law. But Paul said that Philemon should accept Onesimus back as a Christian brother. He even suggested that Philemon should allow Onesimus to come back to Paul and help him in prison.
### How should the title of this book be translated?
Translators may choose to call this book by its traditional title, “Philemon.” Or they may choose a clearer title, such as “Paul’s Letter to Philemon” or “The Letter Paul wrote to Philemon.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
## Part 2: Important Religious and Cultural Concepts
### Does this letter approve of the practice of slavery?
Paul sent Onesimus back to his former master. But that did not mean Paul thought slavery was an acceptable practice. Instead, Paul was more concerned with people serving God in whatever situation they were in.
### What does Paul mean by the expression “in Christ,” “in the Lord,” etc.?
Paul meant to express the idea of a very close union with Christ and the believers. See the introduction to the Book of Romans for more details about this kind of expression.
## Part 3: Important Translation Issues
### Singular and plural “you”
In this book, the word “I” refers to Paul. The word “you” is almost always singular and refers to Philemon. The two exceptions to this are 1:22 and 1:25. There “you” refers to Philemon and the believers that met at his house. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-you]])
PHM 1 1 sg4f figs-you 0 General Information: Three times Paul identifies himself as the author of this letter. Evidently Timothy was with him and probably wrote the words down as Paul said them. Paul greets others who meet for church at Philemon’s house. All instances of “I,” “me,” and “my” refer to Paul. Philemon is the main person to whom this letter is written. All instances of “you” and “your” refer to him and are singular unless otherwise noted. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-you]])
PHM 1 1 niq3 figs-exclusive Παῦλος, δέσμιος Χριστοῦ Ἰησοῦ, καὶ Τιμόθεος, ὁ ἀδελφὸς; Φιλήμονι 1 Paul, a prisoner of Christ Jesus, and the brother Timothy to Philemon Your language may have a particular way of introducing the authors of a letter. Alternate translation: “I, Paul, a prisoner of Christ Jesus, and Timothy, our brother, are writing this letter to Philemon” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
PHM 1 1 cgs4 δέσμιος Χριστοῦ Ἰησοῦ 1 a prisoner of Christ Jesus “a prisoner for the sake of Christ Jesus.” People who opposed Paul’s preaching had punished him by putting him into prison.
diff --git a/en_tn_59-HEB.tsv b/en_tn_59-HEB.tsv
index 8fe4deb6c..1751c97ad 100644
--- a/en_tn_59-HEB.tsv
+++ b/en_tn_59-HEB.tsv
@@ -1,6 +1,6 @@
Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNote
-HEB front intro xy4n 0 # Introduction to Hebrews
## Part 1: General Introduction
### Outline of the Book of Hebrews
1. Jesus is superior to God’s prophets and angels (1:1-4:13)
1. Jesus is superior to the priests who serve in the temple in Jerusalem (4:14-7:28)
1. Jesus’ ministry is superior to the old covenant that God made with his people (8:1-10:39)
1. What faith is like (11:1-40)
1. Encouragement to be faithful to God (12:1-29)
1. Concluding encouragements and greetings (13:1-25)
### Who wrote the Book of Hebrews?
No one knows who wrote Hebrews. Scholars have suggested several different people who could possibly be the author. Possible authors are Paul, Luke, and Barnabas. The date of writing is also not known. Most scholars think it was written before A.D. 70. Jerusalem was destroyed in A.D. 70, but the writer of this letter spoke about Jerusalem as if it had not yet been destroyed.
### What is the Book of Hebrews about?
In the Book of Hebrews, the author shows that Jesus fulfilled Old Testament prophecies. The author did this in order to encourage the Jewish Christians and to explain that Jesus is better than anything that the old covenant had to offer. Jesus is the perfect High Priest. Jesus was also the perfect sacrifice. Animal sacrifices became useless because Jesus’ sacrifice was once and for all time. Therefore, Jesus is the one and only way for people to be accepted by God.
### How should the title of this book be translated?
Translators may choose to call this book by its traditional title, “Hebrews.” Or they may choose a clearer title, such as “The Letter to the Hebrews” or “A Letter to the Jewish Christians.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
## Part 2: Important Religious and Cultural Concepts
### Can readers understand this book without knowing about the sacrifices and the work of the priests required in the Old Testament?
It would be very difficult for readers to understand this book without understanding these matters. Translators might consider explaining some of these Old Testament concepts in notes or in an introduction to this book.
### How is the idea of blood used in the Book of Hebrews?
Beginning in [Hebrews 9:7](../../heb/09/07.md), the idea of blood is often used as metonymy to represent the death of any animal that was sacrificed according to God’s covenant with Israel. The author also used blood to represent the death of Jesus Christ. Jesus became the perfect sacrifice so that God would forgive people for sinning against him. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
Beginning in [Hebrews 9:19](../../heb/09/19.md), the author used the idea of sprinkling as a symbolic action. Old Testament priests sprinkled the blood of the animals sacrificed. This was a symbol of the benefits of the animal’s death being applied to the people or to an object. This showed that the people or the object was acceptable to God. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]])
## Part 3: Important Translation Issues
### How are the ideas of “holy” and “sanctify” represented in Hebrews in the ULT?
The scriptures use such words to indicate any one of various ideas. For this reason, it is often difficult for translators to represent them well in their versions. In translating into English, the ULT uses the following principles:
* Sometimes the meaning in a passage implies moral holiness. Especially important for understanding the gospel is the fact that God views Christians as sinless because they are united to Jesus Christ. Another related fact is that God is perfect and faultless. A third fact that Christians are to conduct themselves in a blameless, faultless manner in life. In these cases, the ULT uses “holy,” “holy God,” “holy ones,” or “holy people.”
* Sometimes the meaning indicates a simple reference to Christians without implying any particular role filled by them. In these cases, the ULT uses “believer” or “believers.” (See: 6:10; 13:24)
* Sometimes the meaning implies the idea of someone or something set apart for God alone. In these cases, the ULT uses “sanctify,” “set apart,” “dedicated to,” or “reserved for.” (See: 2:11: 9:13; 10:10, 14, 29; 13:12)
The UST will often be helpful as translators think about how to represent these ideas in their own versions.
### What are the major issues in the text of the Book of Hebrews?
For the following verses, modern versions of the Bible differ from older versions. The ULT text has the modern reading and puts the older reading in a footnote. If a translation of the Bible exists in the general region, translators should consider using the reading found in those versions. If not, translators are advised to follow the modern reading.
* “you crowned him with glory and honor” (2:7). Some older versions read, “you crowned him with glory and honor and you have put him over the works of your hands.”
* “those who did not unite in faith with those who obeyed” (4:2). Some older versions read, “those who heard it without joining faith to it.”
* “Christ came as a high priest of the good things that have come” (9:11). Some modern versions and older versions read, “Christ came as a high priest of the good things that are to come.”
* “on those who were prisoners” (10:34). Some older versions read, “of me in my chains.”
* “They were stoned. They were sawn in two. They were killed with the sword” (11:37). Some older versions read, “They were stoned. They were sawn in two. They were tempted. They were killed with the sword.”
* “If even an animal touches the mountain, it must be stoned” (12:20). Some older versions read, “If even an animal touches the mountain, it must be stoned or shot with an arrow.”
(See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants]])
-HEB 1 intro aaf9 0 # Hebrews 01 General Notes
## Structure and formatting
This chapter describes how Jesus is more important to us than the angels are.
Some translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with the poetry in 1:5, 7-13, which are words from the Old Testament.
### “Our ancestors”
The writer wrote this letter to Christians who had grown up as Jews. This is why the letter is called “Hebrews.”
## Important figures of speech in this chapter
### Rhetorical questions
The author uses rhetorical questions as a way of proving Jesus is better than the angels. Both he and the readers know the answers to the questions, and the writer knows that as the readers think about the answers to the questions, they will realize that God’s Son is more important than any of the angels.
### Poetry
Jewish teachers, like the Old Testament prophets, would put their most important teachings in the form of poetry so that the hearers would be able to learn and remember them.
+HEB front intro xy4n 0 # Introduction to Hebrews
## Part 1: General Introduction
### Outline of the Book of Hebrews
1. Jesus is superior to God’s prophets and angels (1:1-4:13)
1. Jesus is superior to the priests who serve in the temple in Jerusalem (4:14-7:28)
1. Jesus’ ministry is superior to the old covenant that God made with his people (8:1-10:39)
1. What faith is like (11:1-40)
1. Encouragement to be faithful to God (12:1-29)
1. Concluding encouragements and greetings (13:1-25)
### Who wrote the Book of Hebrews?
No one knows who wrote Hebrews. Scholars have suggested several different people who could possibly be the author. Possible authors are Paul, Luke, and Barnabas. The date of writing is also not known. Most scholars think it was written before A.D. 70. Jerusalem was destroyed in A.D. 70, but the writer of this letter spoke about Jerusalem as if it had not yet been destroyed.
### What is the Book of Hebrews about?
In the Book of Hebrews, the author shows that Jesus fulfilled Old Testament prophecies. The author did this in order to encourage the Jewish Christians and to explain that Jesus is better than anything that the old covenant had to offer. Jesus is the perfect High Priest. Jesus was also the perfect sacrifice. Animal sacrifices became useless because Jesus’ sacrifice was once and for all time. Therefore, Jesus is the one and only way for people to be accepted by God.
### How should the title of this book be translated?
Translators may choose to call this book by its traditional title, “Hebrews.” Or they may choose a clearer title, such as “The Letter to the Hebrews” or “A Letter to the Jewish Christians.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
## Part 2: Important Religious and Cultural Concepts
### Can readers understand this book without knowing about the sacrifices and the work of the priests required in the Old Testament?
It would be very difficult for readers to understand this book without understanding these matters. Translators might consider explaining some of these Old Testament concepts in notes or in an introduction to this book.
### How is the idea of blood used in the Book of Hebrews?
Beginning in [Hebrews 9:7](../../heb/09/07.md), the idea of blood is often used as metonymy to represent the death of any animal that was sacrificed according to God’s covenant with Israel. The author also used blood to represent the death of Jesus Christ. Jesus became the perfect sacrifice so that God would forgive people for sinning against him. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
Beginning in [Hebrews 9:19](../../heb/09/19.md), the author used the idea of sprinkling as a symbolic action. Old Testament priests sprinkled the blood of the animals sacrificed. This was a symbol of the benefits of the animal’s death being applied to the people or to an object. This showed that the people or the object was acceptable to God. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]])
## Part 3: Important Translation Issues
### How are the ideas of “holy” and “sanctify” represented in Hebrews in the ULT?
The scriptures use such words to indicate any one of various ideas. For this reason, it is often difficult for translators to represent them well in their versions. In translating into English, the ULT uses the following principles:
* Sometimes the meaning in a passage implies moral holiness. Especially important for understanding the gospel is the fact that God views Christians as sinless because they are united to Jesus Christ. Another related fact is that God is perfect and faultless. A third fact that Christians are to conduct themselves in a blameless, faultless manner in life. In these cases, the ULT uses “holy,” “holy God,” “holy ones,” or “holy people.”
* Sometimes the meaning indicates a simple reference to Christians without implying any particular role filled by them. In these cases, the ULT uses “believer” or “believers.” (See: 6:10; 13:24)
* Sometimes the meaning implies the idea of someone or something set apart for God alone. In these cases, the ULT uses “sanctify,” “set apart,” “dedicated to,” or “reserved for.” (See: 2:11: 9:13; 10:10, 14, 29; 13:12)
The UST will often be helpful as translators think about how to represent these ideas in their own versions.
### What are the major issues in the text of the Book of Hebrews?
For the following verses, modern versions of the Bible differ from older versions. The ULT text has the modern reading and puts the older reading in a footnote. If a translation of the Bible exists in the general region, translators should consider using the reading found in those versions. If not, translators are advised to follow the modern reading.
* “you crowned him with glory and honor” (2:7). Some older versions read, “you crowned him with glory and honor and you have put him over the works of your hands.”
* “those who did not unite in faith with those who obeyed” (4:2). Some older versions read, “those who heard it without joining faith to it.”
* “Christ came as a high priest of the good things that have come” (9:11). Some modern versions and older versions read, “Christ came as a high priest of the good things that are to come.”
* “on those who were prisoners” (10:34). Some older versions read, “of me in my chains.”
* “They were stoned. They were sawn in two. They were killed with the sword” (11:37). Some older versions read, “They were stoned. They were sawn in two. They were tempted. They were killed with the sword.”
* “If even an animal touches the mountain, it must be stoned” (12:20). Some older versions read, “If even an animal touches the mountain, it must be stoned or shot with an arrow.”
(See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants]])
+HEB 1 intro aaf9 0 # Hebrews 01 General Notes
## Structure and formatting
This chapter describes how Jesus is more important to us than the angels are.
Some translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with the poetry in 1:5, 7-13, which are words from the Old Testament.
### “Our ancestors”
The writer wrote this letter to Christians who had grown up as Jews. This is why the letter is called “Hebrews.”
## Important figures of speech in this chapter
### Rhetorical questions
The author uses rhetorical questions as a way of proving Jesus is better than the angels. Both he and the readers know the answers to the questions, and the writer knows that as the readers think about the answers to the questions, they will realize that God’s Son is more important than any of the angels.
### Poetry
Jewish teachers, like the Old Testament prophets, would put their most important teachings in the form of poetry so that the hearers would be able to learn and remember them.
HEB 1 1 c5f3 0 General Information: Although this letter does not mention the recipients to whom it was sent, the author wrote particularly to Hebrews (Jews), who would have understood the many Old Testament references.
HEB 1 1 c5f4 0 General Information: This prologue lays the background for the whole book: the unsurpassing greatness of the Son — the Son is greater than all. The book begins with emphasizing that the Son is better than the prophets and the angels.
HEB 1 2 scr8 ἐπ’ ἐσχάτου τῶν ἡμερῶν τούτων 1 in these last days “in these final days.” This phrase refers to the time when Jesus began his ministry, extending until God establishes his complete rule in his creation.
@@ -47,7 +47,7 @@ HEB 1 13 s6k7 translate-symaction κάθου ἐκ δεξιῶν μου 1 Sit at
HEB 1 13 ulp5 figs-metaphor ἕως ἂν θῶ τοὺς ἐχθρούς σου, ὑποπόδιον τῶν ποδῶν σου 1 until I make your enemies a stool for your feet Christ’s enemies are spoken of as if they will become an object on which a king rests his feet. This image represents defeat and dishonor for his enemies. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
HEB 1 14 fk5v figs-rquestion οὐχὶ πάντες εἰσὶν λειτουργικὰ πνεύματα…κληρονομεῖν σωτηρίαν? 1 Are not all angels spirits…inherit salvation? The author uses this question to remind the readers that angels are not as powerful as Christ, but they have a different role. Alternate translation: “All angels are spirits who…inherit salvation.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
HEB 1 14 v541 figs-metaphor διὰ τοὺς μέλλοντας κληρονομεῖν σωτηρίαν 1 for those who will inherit salvation Receiving what God has promised believers is spoken of as if it were inheriting property and wealth from a family member. Alternate translation: “for those whom God will save” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
-HEB 2 intro s2gd 0 # Hebrews 02 General Notes
## Structure and formatting
This chapter is about how Jesus is better than Moses, the greatest Israelite.
Some translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with the poetry in 2:6-8, 12-13, which are words from the Old Testament.
## Special concepts in this chapter
### Brothers
The author probably uses the term “brothers” to refer to Christians who grew up as Jews.
+HEB 2 intro s2gd 0 # Hebrews 02 General Notes
## Structure and formatting
This chapter is about how Jesus is better than Moses, the greatest Israelite.
Some translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with the poetry in 2:6-8, 12-13, which are words from the Old Testament.
## Special concepts in this chapter
### Brothers
The author probably uses the term “brothers” to refer to Christians who grew up as Jews.
HEB 2 1 x7px 0 Connecting Statement: This is the first of five urgent warnings the author gives.
HEB 2 1 c72f figs-exclusive δεῖ…ἡμᾶς 1 we must Here, **we** refers to the author and includes his audience. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
HEB 2 1 ayd1 figs-metaphor μήποτε παραρυῶμεν 1 so that we do not drift away from it Possible meanings for this metaphor are (1) people who stop believing in God’s word are spoken of as if they were drifting away, like a boat drifts from its position in the water. Alternate translation: “so that we do not stop believing it” or (2) people who stop obeying God’s words are spoken of as if they were drifting away, like a boat drifts from its position in the water. Alternate translation: “so that we do not stop obeying it” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
@@ -106,7 +106,7 @@ HEB 2 17 v3pw τοῖς ἀδελφοῖς ὁμοιωθῆναι 1 like his br
HEB 2 17 u6ch εἰς τὸ ἱλάσκεσθαι τὰς ἁμαρτίας τοῦ λαοῦ 1 he would bring about the pardon of the people’s sins Christ’s death on the cross means that God can forgive sins. Alternate translation: “he would make it possible for God to forgive people’s sins”
HEB 2 18 xde4 figs-activepassive πειρασθείς 1 was tempted This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: “Satan tempted him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
HEB 2 18 a3a6 figs-activepassive πειραζομένοις 1 who are tempted This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: “whom Satan is tempting” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
-HEB 3 intro mu26 0 # Hebrews 03 General Notes
## Structure and formatting
Some translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with the poetry in 3:7-11,15, which are words from the Old Testament.
## Special concepts in this chapter
### Brothers
The author probably uses the term “brothers” to refer to Christians who grew up as Jews.
## Important figures of speech in this chapter
### Harden your hearts
A person who hardens his heart is a person who will not listen to or obey God. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
### Rhetorical questions
The author uses rhetorical questions as a way of warning his readers. Both he and the readers know the answers to the questions, and the writer knows that as the readers think about the answers to the questions, they will realize that they need to listen to God and obey him.
+HEB 3 intro mu26 0 # Hebrews 03 General Notes
## Structure and formatting
Some translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with the poetry in 3:7-11,15, which are words from the Old Testament.
## Special concepts in this chapter
### Brothers
The author probably uses the term “brothers” to refer to Christians who grew up as Jews.
## Important figures of speech in this chapter
### Harden your hearts
A person who hardens his heart is a person who will not listen to or obey God. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
### Rhetorical questions
The author uses rhetorical questions as a way of warning his readers. Both he and the readers know the answers to the questions, and the writer knows that as the readers think about the answers to the questions, they will realize that they need to listen to God and obey him.
HEB 3 1 m1cv 0 Connecting Statement: This second warning is longer and more detailed and includes chapters 3 and 4. The writer begins by showing that Christ is better than his servant Moses.
HEB 3 1 tp7e figs-metaphor ἀδελφοὶ ἅγιοι 1 holy brothers Here, **brothers** refer to fellow Christians, including both men and women. Alternate translation: “holy brothers and sisters” or “my holy fellow believers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
HEB 3 1 af15 figs-metonymy κλήσεως ἐπουρανίου, μέτοχοι 1 you share in a heavenly calling Here, **heavenly** represents God. Alternate translation: “God has called us together” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
@@ -157,7 +157,7 @@ HEB 3 17 aha2 translate-numbers τεσσεράκοντα ἔτη 1 forty years
HEB 3 18 l1gc figs-rquestion τίσιν δὲ ὤμοσεν μὴ εἰσελεύσεσθαι εἰς τὴν κατάπαυσιν αὐτοῦ, εἰ μὴ τοῖς ἀπειθήσασιν? 1 To whom did he swear that they would not enter his rest, if it was not to those who disobeyed him? The author uses this question to teach his readers. Alternate translation: “And it was to those who disobeyed that he swore they would not enter his rest.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
HEB 3 18 q16u figs-metaphor μὴ εἰσελεύσεσθαι εἰς τὴν κατάπαυσιν αὐτοῦ 1 they would not enter his rest The peace and security provided by God are spoken of as if they were rest that he can give, and as if they were a place to which people could go. Alternate translation: “they would not enter the place of rest” or “they would not experience his blessings of rest” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
HEB 3 19 x18z figs-abstractnouns δι’ ἀπιστίαν 1 because of unbelief The abstract noun “unbelief” can be translated with a verbal phrase. Alternate translation: “because they did not believe him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
-HEB 4 intro u72n 0 # Hebrews 04 General Notes
## Structure and formatting
This chapter tells why Jesus is the greatest high priest.
Some translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with the poetry in 4:3-4, 7, which are words from the Old Testament.
## Special concepts in this chapter
### God’s rest
The word **rest** seems to refer to at least two things in this chapter. It refers to a place or time when God will allow his people to rest from their work ([Hebrews 4:3](../../heb/04/03.md)), and it refers to God resting on the seventh day ([Hebrews 4:4](../../heb/04/04.md)).
+HEB 4 intro u72n 0 # Hebrews 04 General Notes
## Structure and formatting
This chapter tells why Jesus is the greatest high priest.
Some translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with the poetry in 4:3-4, 7, which are words from the Old Testament.
## Special concepts in this chapter
### God’s rest
The word **rest** seems to refer to at least two things in this chapter. It refers to a place or time when God will allow his people to rest from their work ([Hebrews 4:3](../../heb/04/03.md)), and it refers to God resting on the seventh day ([Hebrews 4:4](../../heb/04/04.md)).
HEB 4 1 n98m 0 Connecting Statement: Chapter 4 continues the warning to believers starting in [Hebrews 3:7](../03/07.md). God, through the writer, gives believers a rest of which God’s rest in the creation of the world is a picture.
HEB 4 1 ay25 οὖν 1 Therefore “Because what I have just said is true” or “Since God will certainly punish those who do not obey”
HEB 4 1 zta2 figs-metaphor μήποτε καταλειπομένης ἐπαγγελίας εἰσελθεῖν εἰς τὴν κατάπαυσιν αὐτοῦ, δοκῇ τις ἐξ ὑμῶν ὑστερηκέναι 1 none of you might seem to have failed to reach the promise left behind for you to enter God’s rest God’s promise is spoken of as if it were a gift that God left behind when he visited the people. Alternate translation: “none of you fail to enter into God’s rest, which he promised to us” or “God will allow you all to enter into his rest as he promised us” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
@@ -206,7 +206,7 @@ HEB 4 15 d26h figs-activepassive πεπειρασμένον…κατὰ πάντ
HEB 4 15 fve3 χωρὶς ἁμαρτίας 1 he is without sin “he did not sin”
HEB 4 16 aj1p figs-metonymy τῷ θρόνῳ τῆς χάριτος 1 to the throne of grace “to God’s throne, where there is grace.” Here, **throne** refers to God ruling as king. Alternate translation: “to where our gracious God is sitting on his throne” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
HEB 4 16 py6d figs-metaphor λάβωμεν ἔλεος, καὶ χάριν εὕρωμεν, εἰς εὔκαιρον βοήθειαν 1 we may receive mercy and find grace to help in time of need Here, **mercy** and **grace** are spoken of as if they were objects that can be given or can be found. Alternate translation: “God may be merciful and gracious and help us in time of need” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
-HEB 5 intro b67j 0 # Hebrews 05 General Notes
## Structure and formatting
This chapter is a continuation of the teaching of the previous chapter.
Some translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with the poetry in 5:5-6.
## Special concepts in this chapter
### High priest
Only a high priest could offer sacrifices so that God could forgive sins, so Jesus had to be a high priest. The law of Moses commanded that the high priest be from the tribe of Levi, but Jesus was from the tribe of Judah. God made him a priest like the priest Melchizedek, who lived at the time of Abraham, before there was a tribe of Levi.
## Important figures of speech in this chapter
### Milk and solid food
The writer speaks of Christians who are only able to understand simple things about Jesus as if they were babies, who drink only milk and cannot eat solid food. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
+HEB 5 intro b67j 0 # Hebrews 05 General Notes
## Structure and formatting
This chapter is a continuation of the teaching of the previous chapter.
Some translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with the poetry in 5:5-6.
## Special concepts in this chapter
### High priest
Only a high priest could offer sacrifices so that God could forgive sins, so Jesus had to be a high priest. The law of Moses commanded that the high priest be from the tribe of Levi, but Jesus was from the tribe of Judah. God made him a priest like the priest Melchizedek, who lived at the time of Abraham, before there was a tribe of Levi.
## Important figures of speech in this chapter
### Milk and solid food
The writer speaks of Christians who are only able to understand simple things about Jesus as if they were babies, who drink only milk and cannot eat solid food. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
HEB 5 1 dn18 0 Connecting Statement: The writer describes the sinfulness of the Old Testament priests, then he shows that Christ has a better kind of priesthood, not based on Aaron’s priesthood but on the priesthood of Melchizedek.
HEB 5 1 whq1 figs-activepassive ἐξ ἀνθρώπων λαμβανόμενος 1 chosen from among people This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: “whom God chooses from among the people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
HEB 5 1 ndz7 figs-activepassive καθίσταται 1 is appointed This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: “God appoints” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
@@ -292,7 +292,7 @@ HEB 6 19 vdt3 figs-doublet ἄγκυραν…ἀσφαλῆ…καὶ βεβαί
HEB 6 19 d223 figs-personification ἣν…καὶ εἰσερχομένην εἰς τὸ ἐσώτερον τοῦ καταπετάσματος 1 hope that enters into the inner place behind the curtain Confidence is spoken of as if it were a person who could go into the most holy place of the temple. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
HEB 6 19 aj2m figs-metaphor τὸ ἐσώτερον 1 the inner place This was the most holy place in the temple. It was thought to be the place where God was most intensely present among his people. In this passage, this place stands for heaven and God’s throne room. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
HEB 6 20 zgj6 κατὰ τὴν τάξιν Μελχισέδεκ 1 after the order of Melchizedek This means that Christ as a priest has things in common with Melchizedek as a priest. Alternate translation: “in the same way that Melchizedek was a priest”
-HEB 7 intro y8j3 0 # Hebrews 07 General Notes
## Structure and formatting
Some translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with the poetry in 7:17, 21, which are words from the Old Testament.
## Special concepts in this chapter
### High priest
Only a high priest could offer sacrifices so that God could forgive sins, so Jesus had to be a high priest. The law of Moses commanded that the high priest be from the tribe of Levi, but Jesus was from the tribe of Judah. God made him a priest like the priest Melchizedek, who lived at the time of Abraham, before there was a tribe of Levi.
+HEB 7 intro y8j3 0 # Hebrews 07 General Notes
## Structure and formatting
Some translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with the poetry in 7:17, 21, which are words from the Old Testament.
## Special concepts in this chapter
### High priest
Only a high priest could offer sacrifices so that God could forgive sins, so Jesus had to be a high priest. The law of Moses commanded that the high priest be from the tribe of Levi, but Jesus was from the tribe of Judah. God made him a priest like the priest Melchizedek, who lived at the time of Abraham, before there was a tribe of Levi.
HEB 7 1 mwy8 0 Connecting Statement: The writer of Hebrews continues his comparison of Jesus as priest to Melchizedek as priest.
HEB 7 1 rfc9 translate-names Σαλήμ 1 Salem This is the name of a city. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
HEB 7 1 rx36 figs-explicit Ἀβραὰμ ὑποστρέφοντι ἀπὸ τῆς κοπῆς τῶν βασιλέων 1 Abraham returning from the slaughter of the kings This is refers to when Abraham and his men went and defeated the armies of four kings in order to rescue his nephew, Lot, and his family. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
@@ -349,7 +349,7 @@ HEB 7 28 u5ny ἀνθρώπους…ἔχοντας ἀσθένειαν 1 men w
HEB 7 28 yez2 figs-metonymy ὁ λόγος…τῆς ὁρκωμοσίας, τῆς μετὰ τὸν νόμον, Υἱόν 1 the word of the oath, which came after the law, appointed a Son The “word of the oath” represents God who made the oath. Alternate translation: “God appointed a Son by his oath, which he made after he gave the law” or “after he had given the law, God swore an oath and appointed his Son” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
HEB 7 28 msa4 guidelines-sonofgodprinciples Υἱόν 1 Son This is an important title for Jesus, the Son of God. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples]])
HEB 7 28 fkl3 figs-activepassive τετελειωμένον 1 who has been made perfect This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: “who has completely obeyed God and become mature” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
-HEB 8 intro ks94 0 # Hebrews 08 General Notes
## Structure and formatting
The author finishes describing how and why Jesus is the most important high priest. Then he begins to speak about how the new covenant is better to the covenant God made with Moses. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/covenant]])
Some translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with the poetry in 8:8-12, which are words from the Old Testament.
## Special concepts in this chapter
### New covenant
The author tells how Jesus has established a new covenant that is better than the covenant that God established with the Israelites. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/covenant]])
+HEB 8 intro ks94 0 # Hebrews 08 General Notes
## Structure and formatting
The author finishes describing how and why Jesus is the most important high priest. Then he begins to speak about how the new covenant is better to the covenant God made with Moses. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/covenant]])
Some translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with the poetry in 8:8-12, which are words from the Old Testament.
## Special concepts in this chapter
### New covenant
The author tells how Jesus has established a new covenant that is better than the covenant that God established with the Israelites. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/covenant]])
HEB 8 1 nb8q 0 Connecting Statement: The writer, having shown that Christ’s priesthood is better than the earthly priesthood, shows that the earthly priesthood was a pattern of heavenly things. Christ has a superior ministry, a superior covenant.
HEB 8 1 tw7l δὲ 1 Now This does not mean “at this moment,” but is used to draw attention to the important point that follows.
HEB 8 1 z4dh figs-exclusive λεγομένοις 1 we are saying Even though the author uses the plural pronoun **we**, he is most likely referring only to himself. Because the writer does not include his readers here, The word **we** is exclusive. Alternate translation: “I am saying” or “I am writing” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-pronouns]])
@@ -390,7 +390,7 @@ HEB 8 11 wne2 figs-doublet τὸν πολίτην…τὸν ἀδελφὸν 1 n
HEB 8 11 q5ki figs-metonymy γνῶθι τὸν Κύριον…πάντες εἰδήσουσίν με 1 Know the Lord…will all know me **Know** here stands for acknowledge. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
HEB 8 12 cu1b figs-metonymy ταῖς ἀδικίαις αὐτῶν 1 toward their evil deeds This stands for the people who committed these evil deeds. Alternate translation: “to those who did evil deeds” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
HEB 8 12 a1xr figs-metonymy τῶν ἁμαρτιῶν αὐτῶν οὐ μὴ μνησθῶ ἔτι 1 their sins I will not remember any longer Here, **remember** stands for “think about.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
-HEB 9 intro p8vy 0 # Hebrews 09 General Notes
## Structure and formatting
This chapter describes how Jesus is better than the temple and all its laws and rules. This chapter will be difficult to understand if the first five books of the Old Testament have not yet been translated.
## Special concepts in this chapter
### Will
A will is a legal document that describes what will happen to a person’s property after he dies.
### Blood
In the Old Testament, God had commanded the Israelites to offer sacrifices so that he would forgive their sins. Before they could offer these sacrifices, they had to kill animals and then offer not only the animal’s body but also its blood. Shedding blood is a metaphor for killing an animal or person. Jesus offered his life, his blood, as a sacrifice when he allowed men to kill him. The writer of the Book of Hebrews is saying in this chapter that this sacrifice is better than the sacrifices of the Old Testament. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/covenant]])
### Return of Christ
Jesus will return to finish the work that he began when he died so that God would forgive his people’s sins. He will finish saving those people who are waiting for him. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/save]])
## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter
### First covenant
This refers to the covenant that God made with Moses. However, before he made this covenant, God had made a covenant with Abraham. But this was the first covenant that God had made with the people of Israel. You may decide to translate “the first covenant” as “the earlier covenant.”
+HEB 9 intro p8vy 0 # Hebrews 09 General Notes
## Structure and formatting
This chapter describes how Jesus is better than the temple and all its laws and rules. This chapter will be difficult to understand if the first five books of the Old Testament have not yet been translated.
## Special concepts in this chapter
### Will
A will is a legal document that describes what will happen to a person’s property after he dies.
### Blood
In the Old Testament, God had commanded the Israelites to offer sacrifices so that he would forgive their sins. Before they could offer these sacrifices, they had to kill animals and then offer not only the animal’s body but also its blood. Shedding blood is a metaphor for killing an animal or person. Jesus offered his life, his blood, as a sacrifice when he allowed men to kill him. The writer of the Book of Hebrews is saying in this chapter that this sacrifice is better than the sacrifices of the Old Testament. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/covenant]])
### Return of Christ
Jesus will return to finish the work that he began when he died so that God would forgive his people’s sins. He will finish saving those people who are waiting for him. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/save]])
## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter
### First covenant
This refers to the covenant that God made with Moses. However, before he made this covenant, God had made a covenant with Abraham. But this was the first covenant that God had made with the people of Israel. You may decide to translate “the first covenant” as “the earlier covenant.”
HEB 9 1 af6x 0 Connecting Statement: The writer makes clear to these Jewish believers that the laws and the tabernacle of the old covenant were only pictures of the better, new covenant.
HEB 9 1 av9i οὖν 1 Now This word marks a new part of the teaching.
HEB 9 1 d3vs ἡ πρώτη 1 first covenant See how you translated this in [Hebrews 8:7](../08/07.md).
@@ -469,7 +469,7 @@ HEB 9 26 dq7m figs-metaphor εἰς ἀθέτησιν ἁμαρτίας διὰ
HEB 9 28 p8b6 figs-activepassive ὁ Χριστός ἅπαξ προσενεχθεὶς 1 Christ was offered once This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: “Christ offered himself once” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
HEB 9 28 hv2t figs-metaphor εἰς τὸ…ἀνενεγκεῖν ἁμαρτίας 1 to take away the sins The act of making us innocent rather than guilty for our sins is spoken of as if our sins were physical objects that Christ could carry away from us. Alternate translation: “so that God would forgive the sins” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
HEB 9 28 p6th figs-metonymy τὸ…ἁμαρτίας 1 the sins Here, **sins** mean the guilt that people have before God because of the sins they committed. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
-HEB 10 intro nev1 0 # Hebrews 10 General Notes
## Structure and formatting
In this chapter, the writer finishes describing how Jesus’ sacrifice was better than the sacrifices offered in the Temple. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/lawofmoses]])
Some translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with the poetry in 10:5-7, 15-17, 37-38, which are words from the Old Testament.
## Special concepts in this chapter
### God’s judgment and reward
Holy living is important for Christians. God will hold people accountable for how they lived their Christian life. Even though there will not be eternal condemnation for Christians, ungodly actions do and will have consequences. In addition, faithful living will be rewarded. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/holy]], [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/godly]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/faithful]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/other/reward]])
## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter
### “For it is impossible for the blood of bulls and goats to take away sins”
The sacrifices themselves had no redeeming power. They were effective because they were a display of faith, which was credited to the person offering the sacrifice. It was ultimately the sacrifice of Jesus which then makes these sacrifices “take away sins.” (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/redeem]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/faith]])
### “The covenant that I will make”
It is unclear whether this prophecy was being fulfilled as the author was writing or whether it was to occur later. The translator should try to avoid making a claim about the time this covenant begins. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/prophet]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/covenant]])
+HEB 10 intro nev1 0 # Hebrews 10 General Notes
## Structure and formatting
In this chapter, the writer finishes describing how Jesus’ sacrifice was better than the sacrifices offered in the Temple. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/lawofmoses]])
Some translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with the poetry in 10:5-7, 15-17, 37-38, which are words from the Old Testament.
## Special concepts in this chapter
### God’s judgment and reward
Holy living is important for Christians. God will hold people accountable for how they lived their Christian life. Even though there will not be eternal condemnation for Christians, ungodly actions do and will have consequences. In addition, faithful living will be rewarded. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/holy]], [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/godly]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/faithful]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/other/reward]])
## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter
### “For it is impossible for the blood of bulls and goats to take away sins”
The sacrifices themselves had no redeeming power. They were effective because they were a display of faith, which was credited to the person offering the sacrifice. It was ultimately the sacrifice of Jesus which then makes these sacrifices “take away sins.” (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/redeem]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/faith]])
### “The covenant that I will make”
It is unclear whether this prophecy was being fulfilled as the author was writing or whether it was to occur later. The translator should try to avoid making a claim about the time this covenant begins. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/prophet]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/covenant]])
HEB 10 1 kwq1 0 Connecting Statement: The writer shows the weakness of the law and its sacrifices, why God gave the law, and the perfection of the new priesthood and Christ’s sacrifice.
HEB 10 1 kj83 figs-metaphor σκιὰν…ἔχων ὁ νόμος τῶν μελλόντων ἀγαθῶν 1 the law is only a shadow of the good things to come This speaks about the law as if it were a shadow. The author means the law is not the good things that God had promised. It only hints at the good things that God is going to do. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
HEB 10 1 r6ly οὐκ αὐτὴν τὴν εἰκόνα τῶν πραγμάτων 1 not the real forms of those things themselves “not the real things themselves”
@@ -566,7 +566,7 @@ HEB 10 38 r8mh ὁ…δίκαιός μου…εὐδοκεῖ 1 My righteous…
HEB 10 38 h5bw ὑποστείληται 1 shrinks back stops doing the good thing he is doing
HEB 10 39 i9zh figs-metaphor ὑποστολῆς εἰς ἀπώλειαν 1 who turn back to destruction A person who loses courage and faith are spoken of as if he were stepping back in fear from something. And “destruction” is spoken of as if it were a destination. Alternate translation: “who stop trusting God, which will cause him to destroy us” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
HEB 10 39 dv8y figs-metaphor εἰς περιποίησιν ψυχῆς 1 for keeping our soul Living eternally with God is spoken of as if it were keeping one’s soul. Here, **soul** refers to the whole person. Alternate translation: “, which will result in us living with God forever” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
-HEB 11 intro g4cc 0 # Hebrews 11 General Notes
## Structure
The writer begins this chapter by telling what faith is. Then he gives many examples of people who had faith and how they lived.
## Important concepts in this chapter
### Faith
In both the old and new covenants, God required faith. Some people with faith performed miracles and were very powerful. Other people with faith suffered greatly.
+HEB 11 intro g4cc 0 # Hebrews 11 General Notes
## Structure
The writer begins this chapter by telling what faith is. Then he gives many examples of people who had faith and how they lived.
## Important concepts in this chapter
### Faith
In both the old and new covenants, God required faith. Some people with faith performed miracles and were very powerful. Other people with faith suffered greatly.
HEB 11 1 a371 0 Connecting Statement: The author tells three things about faith in this brief introduction.
HEB 11 1 d95i δὲ 1 Now This word is used here to mark a break in the main teaching. Here the author starts to explain the meaning of “faith.”
HEB 11 1 dne9 ἔστιν…πίστις ἐλπιζομένων ὑπόστασις 1 faith is being sure of the things hoped for This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: “when we have faith, we are sure of the things we hope for” or “faith is what allows a person to confidently expect certain things”
@@ -674,7 +674,7 @@ HEB 11 38 li8j σπηλαίοις, καὶ ταῖς ὀπαῖς τῆς γῆ
HEB 11 39 l5wd figs-activepassive οὗτοι πάντες μαρτυρηθέντες διὰ τῆς πίστεως, οὐκ ἐκομίσαντο τὴν ἐπαγγελίαν 1 Although all these people were approved by God because of their faith, they did not receive the promise This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: “God honored all these because of their faith, but they did not themselves receive what God had promised” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
HEB 11 39 vgw2 figs-metonymy τὴν ἐπαγγελίαν 1 the promise This expression stands for “what God had promised them.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
HEB 11 40 p9uu figs-activepassive ἵνα μὴ χωρὶς ἡμῶν τελειωθῶσιν 1 so that without us, they would not be made perfect This can be stated in positive and active form. Alternate translation: “in order that God would perfect us and them together” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
-HEB 12 intro h1qb 0 # Hebrews 12 General Notes
## Structure and formatting
After telling of the value discipline, the author begins a series of exhortations. (See; [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/exhort]])
Some translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with the poetry in 12:5-6, which are words from the Old Testament.
## Special concepts in this chapter
### Discipline
God wants his people to do what is right. When they do what is wrong, he needs to correct or punish them. He does this just as earthly fathers correct and punish children whom they love. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/discipline]])
+HEB 12 intro h1qb 0 # Hebrews 12 General Notes
## Structure and formatting
After telling of the value discipline, the author begins a series of exhortations. (See; [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/exhort]])
Some translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with the poetry in 12:5-6, which are words from the Old Testament.
## Special concepts in this chapter
### Discipline
God wants his people to do what is right. When they do what is wrong, he needs to correct or punish them. He does this just as earthly fathers correct and punish children whom they love. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/discipline]])
HEB 12 1 jg6w figs-exclusive 0 General Information: The words **we** and **us** refer to the author and his readers. The word **you** is plural and here refers to the readers. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-you]])
HEB 12 1 k8mr 0 Connecting Statement: Because of this great number of Old Testament believers, the author talks of the life of faith that believers should live with Jesus as their example.
HEB 12 1 f6u9 figs-metaphor ἡμεῖς, τοσοῦτον ἔχοντες περικείμενον ἡμῖν νέφος μαρτύρων 1 we are surrounded by such a large cloud of witnesses The writer speaks about the Old Testament believers as if they were a cloud that surrounded the present-day believers. This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: “such a large cloud of witnesses surrounds us” or “there are so many examples of faithful people about whom we learn in the scriptures” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
@@ -761,7 +761,7 @@ HEB 12 28 m44c grammar-connect-words-phrases βασιλείαν…παραλαμ
HEB 12 28 btf6 ἔχωμεν χάριν 1 let us be grateful “let us give thanks”
HEB 12 28 f382 figs-doublet μετὰ εὐλαβείας καὶ δέους 1 with reverence and awe The words **reverence** and **awe** share similar meanings and emphasize the greatness of reverence due to God. Alternate translation: “with great respect and dread” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
HEB 12 29 f899 figs-metaphor ὁ Θεὸς ἡμῶν πῦρ καταναλίσκον 1 our God is a consuming fire God is spoken of here as if he were a fire that can burn up anything. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
-HEB 13 intro c8gg 0 # Hebrews 13 General Notes
## Structure and formatting
The author finishes the list of exhortations he began in chapter 12. Then he asks the readers to pray for him and ends the letter.
Some translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with the poetry in 13:6, which are words from the Old Testament.
## Special concepts in this chapter
### Hospitality
God wants his people to invite other people to come to their homes to eat food and even to sleep. His people should do this even if they do not know well the people they are inviting. In the Old Testament, Abraham and his nephew Lot both showed hospitality to people they did not know. Abraham served a costly meal to them, and then Lot invited them to sleep in his house. They learned later that those people were actually angels.
+HEB 13 intro c8gg 0 # Hebrews 13 General Notes
## Structure and formatting
The author finishes the list of exhortations he began in chapter 12. Then he asks the readers to pray for him and ends the letter.
Some translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with the poetry in 13:6, which are words from the Old Testament.
## Special concepts in this chapter
### Hospitality
God wants his people to invite other people to come to their homes to eat food and even to sleep. His people should do this even if they do not know well the people they are inviting. In the Old Testament, Abraham and his nephew Lot both showed hospitality to people they did not know. Abraham served a costly meal to them, and then Lot invited them to sleep in his house. They learned later that those people were actually angels.
HEB 13 1 sf1n 0 Connecting Statement: In this closing section, the author gives specific instructions to believers on how they are supposed to live.
HEB 13 1 g819 ἡ φιλαδελφία μενέτω 1 Let brotherly love continue “Continue to show your love for other believers as you would for a member of your family”
HEB 13 2 rh7r figs-litotes μὴ ἐπιλανθάνεσθε 1 Do not forget This can be stated in positive form. Alternate translation: “Be sure to remember” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-litotes]])
diff --git a/en_tn_61-1PE.tsv b/en_tn_61-1PE.tsv
index 7876255db..6529c6e9d 100644
--- a/en_tn_61-1PE.tsv
+++ b/en_tn_61-1PE.tsv
@@ -1,6 +1,6 @@
Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNote
-1PE front intro c1uv 0 # Introduction to 1 Peter
## Part 1: General Introduction
### Outline of 1 Peter
1. Introduction (1:1-2)
1. Praise for God’s salvation of the believers (1:3-2:10)
1. Christian living (2:11-4:11)
1. Encouragement to persevere when suffering (4:12-5:11)
1. Closing (5:12-14)
### Who wrote the Book of 1 Peter?
The Book of 1 Peter was written by the Apostle Peter. He wrote the letter to Gentile Christians scattered throughout Asia Minor.
### What is the Book of 1 Peter about?
Peter stated that he wrote this letter for the purpose of “encouraging you and testifying that this is the true grace of God” (5:12).
He encouraged Christians to continue obeying God even when they are suffering. He told them to do this because Jesus will return soon. Peter also gave instructions about Christians submitting to persons in authority.
### How should the title of this book be translated?
Translators may choose to call this book by its traditional title “1 Peter” or “First Peter.” Or they may choose a clearer title, such as “The First Letter from Peter” or “The First Letter Peter Wrote.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
## Part 2: Important Religious and Cultural Concepts
### How were Christians treated in Rome?
Peter probably was in Rome when he wrote this letter. He gave Rome the symbolic name of “Babylon” (5:13). It appears that when Peter wrote this letter, Romans were badly persecuting Christians.
## Part 3: Important Translation Issues
### Singular and plural “you”
In this book, the word “I” refers to Peter, except for two places: [1 Peter 1:16](../01/16.md) and [1 Peter 2:6](../02/06.md). The word “you” is always plural and refers to Peter’s audience. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-you]])
### What are the major issues in the text of the Book of 1 Peter?
* “You made your souls pure by obedience to the truth. This was for the purpose of sincere brotherly love; so love one another earnestly from the heart” (1:22). The ULT, UST, and most other modern versions read this way. Some older versions read, “You made your souls pure by obedience to the truth through the Spirit for the purpose of sincere brotherly love, so love one another earnestly from the heart.”
If a translation of the Bible exists in the general region, translators should consider using the reading found in those versions. If not, translators are advised to follow the modern reading.
(See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants]])
-1PE 1 intro ql4i 0 # 1 Peter 01 General Notes
## Structure and formatting
Peter formally introduces this letter in verses 1-2. Writers often began letters in this way in the ancient Near East.
Some translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with the poetry that is quoted from the Old Testament in 1:24-25.
## Special concepts in this chapter
### What God reveals
When Jesus comes again, everyone will see how good God’s people were to have faith in Jesus. Then God’s people will see how gracious God has been to them, and all people will praise both God and his people.
### Holiness
God wants his people to be holy because God is holy. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/holy]])
### Eternity
Peter tells Christians to live for things that will last forever and not to live for the things of this world, which will end. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/eternity]])
## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter
### Paradox
A paradox is a true statement that appears to describe something impossible. Peter writes that his readers are glad and sad at the same time ([1 Peter 1:6](../01/06.md)). He can say this because they are sad because they are suffering, but they are glad because they know that God will save them “in the last time” ([1 Peter 1:5](../01/05.md))
+1PE front intro c1uv 0 # Introduction to 1 Peter
## Part 1: General Introduction
### Outline of 1 Peter
1. Introduction (1:1-2)
1. Praise for God’s salvation of the believers (1:3-2:10)
1. Christian living (2:11-4:11)
1. Encouragement to persevere when suffering (4:12-5:11)
1. Closing (5:12-14)
### Who wrote the Book of 1 Peter?
The Book of 1 Peter was written by the Apostle Peter. He wrote the letter to Gentile Christians scattered throughout Asia Minor.
### What is the Book of 1 Peter about?
Peter stated that he wrote this letter for the purpose of “encouraging you and testifying that this is the true grace of God” (5:12).
He encouraged Christians to continue obeying God even when they are suffering. He told them to do this because Jesus will return soon. Peter also gave instructions about Christians submitting to persons in authority.
### How should the title of this book be translated?
Translators may choose to call this book by its traditional title “1 Peter” or “First Peter.” Or they may choose a clearer title, such as “The First Letter from Peter” or “The First Letter Peter Wrote.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
## Part 2: Important Religious and Cultural Concepts
### How were Christians treated in Rome?
Peter probably was in Rome when he wrote this letter. He gave Rome the symbolic name of “Babylon” (5:13). It appears that when Peter wrote this letter, Romans were badly persecuting Christians.
## Part 3: Important Translation Issues
### Singular and plural “you”
In this book, the word “I” refers to Peter, except for two places: [1 Peter 1:16](../01/16.md) and [1 Peter 2:6](../02/06.md). The word “you” is always plural and refers to Peter’s audience. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-you]])
### What are the major issues in the text of the Book of 1 Peter?
* “You made your souls pure by obedience to the truth. This was for the purpose of sincere brotherly love; so love one another earnestly from the heart” (1:22). The ULT, UST, and most other modern versions read this way. Some older versions read, “You made your souls pure by obedience to the truth through the Spirit for the purpose of sincere brotherly love, so love one another earnestly from the heart.”
If a translation of the Bible exists in the general region, translators should consider using the reading found in those versions. If not, translators are advised to follow the modern reading.
(See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants]])
+1PE 1 intro ql4i 0 # 1 Peter 01 General Notes
## Structure and formatting
Peter formally introduces this letter in verses 1-2. Writers often began letters in this way in the ancient Near East.
Some translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with the poetry that is quoted from the Old Testament in 1:24-25.
## Special concepts in this chapter
### What God reveals
When Jesus comes again, everyone will see how good God’s people were to have faith in Jesus. Then God’s people will see how gracious God has been to them, and all people will praise both God and his people.
### Holiness
God wants his people to be holy because God is holy. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/holy]])
### Eternity
Peter tells Christians to live for things that will last forever and not to live for the things of this world, which will end. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/eternity]])
## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter
### Paradox
A paradox is a true statement that appears to describe something impossible. Peter writes that his readers are glad and sad at the same time ([1 Peter 1:6](../01/06.md)). He can say this because they are sad because they are suffering, but they are glad because they know that God will save them “in the last time” ([1 Peter 1:5](../01/05.md))
1PE 1 1 g6b4 0 General Information: Peter identifies himself as the writer and identifies and greets the believers to whom he is writing.
1PE 1 1 u3zc figs-metaphor ἐκλεκτοῖς παρεπιδήμοις διασπορᾶς 1 to the elect foreigners of the dispersion Peter speaks of his readers as people who live away from their homes in many different countries. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1PE 1 1 qkl8 Καππαδοκίας…Βιθυνίας 1 Cappadocia…Bithynia Along with the other places that Peter mentions, **Cappadocia** and **Bithynia** were Roman provinces located in what is now the country of Turkey.
@@ -71,7 +71,7 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo
1PE 1 24 hd2f figs-simile πᾶσα δόξα αὐτῆς ὡς ἄνθος χόρτου…τὸ ἄνθος ἐξέπεσεν 1 all its glory is like the flower of the grass…its flower falls off Here the word **glory** refers to beauty or goodness. Isaiah compares the things that people consider to be good or beautiful about humanity to flowers that die quickly. Alternate translation: “all their goodness is as temporary as a flower…it will fall away like a dying flower” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-simile]])
1PE 1 25 aba2 τὸ…ῥῆμα Κυρίου 1 the word of the Lord “the message that comes from the Lord”
1PE 1 25 s11j figs-activepassive τὸ ῥῆμα τὸ εὐαγγελισθὲν 1 the word that has been proclaimed This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: “the gospel that we proclaimed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
-1PE 2 intro a121 0 # 1 Peter 02 General Notes
## Structure and formatting
Some translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with the poetry that is quoted from the Old Testament in 2:6, 7, 8, and 22.
Some translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with the poetry in 2:10.
## Special concepts in this chapter
### Stones
The Bible uses a building made of large stones as a metaphor for the church. Jesus is the cornerstone, the most important stone. The apostles and prophets are the foundation, the part of the building on which all the other stones rest. In this chapter, Christians are the stones that make up the walls of the building. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/cornerstone]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/other/foundation]])
## Important figures of speech in this chapter
### Milk and babies
When Peter tells his readers to “long for pure spiritual milk,” he is using the metaphor of a baby craving his mother’s milk. Peter wants Christians to crave God’s word the same way a baby craves milk. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
+1PE 2 intro a121 0 # 1 Peter 02 General Notes
## Structure and formatting
Some translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with the poetry that is quoted from the Old Testament in 2:6, 7, 8, and 22.
Some translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with the poetry in 2:10.
## Special concepts in this chapter
### Stones
The Bible uses a building made of large stones as a metaphor for the church. Jesus is the cornerstone, the most important stone. The apostles and prophets are the foundation, the part of the building on which all the other stones rest. In this chapter, Christians are the stones that make up the walls of the building. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/cornerstone]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/other/foundation]])
## Important figures of speech in this chapter
### Milk and babies
When Peter tells his readers to “long for pure spiritual milk,” he is using the metaphor of a baby craving his mother’s milk. Peter wants Christians to crave God’s word the same way a baby craves milk. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1PE 2 1 cch5 0 Connecting Statement: Peter continues teaching his readers about holiness and obedience.
1PE 2 1 n3x5 grammar-connect-logic-result οὖν 1 Therefore The word **Therefore** here refers back to everything that Peter has said about being holy and obedient. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
1PE 2 1 g65y figs-metaphor ἀποθέμενοι…πᾶσαν κακίαν, καὶ πάντα δόλον, καὶ ὑποκρίσεις, καὶ φθόνους, καὶ πάσας καταλαλιάς 1 having put aside all evil, and all deceit and hypocrisy and envy, and all slander These sinful actions are spoken of as if they were objects that people could throw away. Alternate translation: “get rid of everything that is evil, and hypocrisy, and envy, and all slander” or “stop being evil, or being deceptive, or being hypocritical, or envying, or slandering” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
@@ -146,7 +146,7 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo
1PE 2 24 ep4s figs-activepassive οὗ τῷ μώλωπι ἰάθητε 1 of whose wounds you were healed This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: “God has healed you because people bruised him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
1PE 2 25 sgt9 figs-simile ἦτε…ὡς πρόβατα πλανώμενοι 1 you as sheep are being led astray Peter speaks about his readers before they believed in Christ as if they had been similar to lost sheep wandering around aimlessly. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-simile]])
1PE 2 25 i5lu figs-metaphor τὸν ποιμένα καὶ ἐπίσκοπον τῶν ψυχῶν ὑμῶν 1 the shepherd and guardian of your souls Peter speaks of Jesus as if he were a **shepherd**. Just as a shepherd protects his sheep, Jesus protects those who trust in him. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
-1PE 3 intro cqf4 0 # 1 Peter 03 General Notes
## Structure and formatting
Some translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with the poetry that is quoted from the Old Testament in 3:10-12.
## Special concepts in this chapter
### “Outward ornaments”
Most people want to look good so other people will like them and think they are good people. Women are especially careful to look good by wearing nice clothes and jewels. Peter is saying that what a woman thinks and says and does are more important to God than how she looks.
### Unity
Peter wanted his readers to agree with each other. More importantly, he wanted them to love each other and be patient with each other.
## Important figures of speech in this chapter
### Metaphor
Peter quotes a psalm that describes God as if he were a person with eyes, ears, and a face. However, God is a spirit, so he does not have physical eyes or ears or a physical face. But he does know what people do, and he does act against wicked people. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
+1PE 3 intro cqf4 0 # 1 Peter 03 General Notes
## Structure and formatting
Some translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with the poetry that is quoted from the Old Testament in 3:10-12.
## Special concepts in this chapter
### “Outward ornaments”
Most people want to look good so other people will like them and think they are good people. Women are especially careful to look good by wearing nice clothes and jewels. Peter is saying that what a woman thinks and says and does are more important to God than how she looks.
### Unity
Peter wanted his readers to agree with each other. More importantly, he wanted them to love each other and be patient with each other.
## Important figures of speech in this chapter
### Metaphor
Peter quotes a psalm that describes God as if he were a person with eyes, ears, and a face. However, God is a spirit, so he does not have physical eyes or ears or a physical face. But he does know what people do, and he does act against wicked people. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1PE 3 1 p454 0 General Information: Peter begins to speak specifically to women who are wives.
1PE 3 1 cj7z ὁμοίως, γυναῖκες, ὑποτασσόμεναι τοῖς ἰδίοις ἀνδράσιν 1 In the same way, wives, submit to your own husbands Just as believers are to “obey every human authority” ([1 Peter 2:13](../02/13.md)) and servants are to “be subject” to their masters ([1 Peter 2:18](../02/18.md)), wives are to **submit** to their **husbands**. The words “obey,” “be subject,” and “submit” translate the same word.
1PE 3 1 wp5p figs-metonymy τινες ἀπειθοῦσιν τῷ λόγῳ 1 some are disobedient to the word Here, **the word** refers to the gospel message. To disobey means that they do not believe. See how you translated a similar phrase in [1 Peter 2:8](../02/08.md). Alternate translation: “some men do not believe the message about Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
@@ -213,7 +213,7 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo
1PE 3 21 jti3 δι’ ἀναστάσεως Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ 1 through the resurrection of Jesus Christ “because of the resurrection of Jesus Christ.” This phrase completes the thought, “This is a symbol of the baptism that saves you now.”
1PE 3 22 g4qh figs-metonymy ὅς ἐστιν ἐν δεξιᾷ Θεοῦ 1 who is at the right hand of God To be at the **right hand of God** is a symbol that God has given Jesus greatest honor and authority over all others. Alternate translation: “who is beside God in the place of honor and authority” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
1PE 3 22 f6jq ὑποταγέντων αὐτῷ 1 after…had been subjected to him “when…had submitted to Jesus Christ”
-1PE 4 intro zh5n 0 # 1 Peter 04 General Notes
## Structure and formatting
Some translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with the poetry that is quoted from the Old Testament in 4:18.
## Special concepts in this chapter
### Ungodly Gentiles
This passage uses the term “Gentiles” to refer to all ungodly people who are not Jews. It does not include Gentiles who have become Christians. “Sensuality, passion, drunkenness, carousings, wild parties, and disgusting acts of idolatry” were actions that characterized or typified the ungodly Gentiles. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/godly]])
### Martyrdom
It is apparent that Peter is speaking to many Christians who are experiencing great persecution and are facing death for their beliefs.
## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter
### “Let it” and “Let none” and “Let him” and “Let those”
Peter uses these phrases to tell his readers what he wants them to do. They are like commands because he wants his readers to obey. But it is as if he is telling one person what he wants other people to do.
+1PE 4 intro zh5n 0 # 1 Peter 04 General Notes
## Structure and formatting
Some translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with the poetry that is quoted from the Old Testament in 4:18.
## Special concepts in this chapter
### Ungodly Gentiles
This passage uses the term “Gentiles” to refer to all ungodly people who are not Jews. It does not include Gentiles who have become Christians. “Sensuality, passion, drunkenness, carousings, wild parties, and disgusting acts of idolatry” were actions that characterized or typified the ungodly Gentiles. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/godly]])
### Martyrdom
It is apparent that Peter is speaking to many Christians who are experiencing great persecution and are facing death for their beliefs.
## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter
### “Let it” and “Let none” and “Let him” and “Let those”
Peter uses these phrases to tell his readers what he wants them to do. They are like commands because he wants his readers to obey. But it is as if he is telling one person what he wants other people to do.
1PE 4 1 b8d4 0 Connecting Statement: Peter continues to teach the believers about Christian living. He begins by giving a conclusion to his thoughts from the previous chapter about Christ’s sufferings.
1PE 4 1 ess6 σαρκὶ 1 in the flesh “in his body”
1PE 4 1 p2rv figs-metaphor ὑμεῖς τὴν αὐτὴν ἔννοιαν ὁπλίσασθε 1 arm yourselves with the same intention The phrase **arm yourselves** makes readers think of soldiers who get their weapons ready for battle. It also pictures **the same intention** as a weapon or perhaps as a piece of armor. Here this metaphor means that believers should be determined in their mind to suffer as Jesus did. Alternate translation: “prepare yourselves with the same thoughts that Christ had” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
@@ -260,7 +260,7 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo
1PE 4 18 wb4v figs-doublet ὁ ἀσεβὴς καὶ ἁμαρτωλὸς 1 the ungodly and the sinner The words **ungodly** and **sinner** mean basically the same thing and emphasize the wickedness of these people. Alternate translation: “ungodly sinners” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
1PE 4 19 qm3u figs-synecdoche παρατιθέσθωσαν τὰς ψυχὰς αὐτῶν 1 let…entrust their souls Here the word **souls** refers to the whole person. Alternate translation: “let…entrust themselves” or “let…entrust their lives” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
1PE 4 19 wih1 figs-abstractnouns ἐν ἀγαθοποιΐᾳ 1 in well-doing The abstract noun **well-doing** can be translated with a verbal phrase. Alternate translation: “while they do good” or “while they live rightly” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
-1PE 5 intro a6d9 0 # 1 Peter 05 General Notes
## Structure and formatting
Most people in the ancient Near East would end a letter the way Peter ends this one.
## Special concepts in this chapter
### Crowns
The crown that the Chief Shepherd will give is a reward, something that people who do something especially good receive. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/other/reward]])
## Important figures of speech in this chapter
### Lion
All animals are afraid of lions because they are fast and strong, and they eat almost every other kind of animal. They also eat people. Satan wants to make God’s people afraid, so Peter uses the simile of a lion to teach his readers that Satan can harm their bodies, but if they trust in God and obey him, they will always be God’s people, and God will care for them. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-simile]])
### Babylon
Babylon was the evil nation that in Old Testament times had destroyed Jerusalem, taken the Jews away from their homes, and ruled over them. Peter uses Babylon as a metaphor for the nation that was persecuting the Christians he was writing to. He could have been referring to Jerusalem because the Jews were persecuting the Christians. Or he could have been referring to Rome because the Romans were persecuting the Christians. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/evil]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
+1PE 5 intro a6d9 0 # 1 Peter 05 General Notes
## Structure and formatting
Most people in the ancient Near East would end a letter the way Peter ends this one.
## Special concepts in this chapter
### Crowns
The crown that the Chief Shepherd will give is a reward, something that people who do something especially good receive. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/other/reward]])
## Important figures of speech in this chapter
### Lion
All animals are afraid of lions because they are fast and strong, and they eat almost every other kind of animal. They also eat people. Satan wants to make God’s people afraid, so Peter uses the simile of a lion to teach his readers that Satan can harm their bodies, but if they trust in God and obey him, they will always be God’s people, and God will care for them. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-simile]])
### Babylon
Babylon was the evil nation that in Old Testament times had destroyed Jerusalem, taken the Jews away from their homes, and ruled over them. Peter uses Babylon as a metaphor for the nation that was persecuting the Christians he was writing to. He could have been referring to Jerusalem because the Jews were persecuting the Christians. Or he could have been referring to Rome because the Romans were persecuting the Christians. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/evil]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1PE 5 1 s8fr 0 General Information: Peter speaks specifically to men who are elders.
1PE 5 1 yb3l figs-metonymy τῆς μελλούσης ἀποκαλύπτεσθαι δόξης 1 of the glory that is about to be revealed This is a reference to Christ’s second coming. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
1PE 5 1 a6ve figs-activepassive τῆς μελλούσης ἀποκαλύπτεσθαι δόξης 1 of the glory that is about to be revealed This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: “of the glory of Christ that God will soon reveal” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
diff --git a/en_tn_62-2PE.tsv b/en_tn_62-2PE.tsv
index a6373b758..dcabfeb83 100644
--- a/en_tn_62-2PE.tsv
+++ b/en_tn_62-2PE.tsv
@@ -1,6 +1,6 @@
Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNote
-2PE front intro mvk9 0 # Introduction to 2 Peter
## Part 1: General Introduction
### Outline of the Book of 2 Peter
1. Introduction (1:1-2)
1. Reminder to live good lives because God has enabled us to (1:3-21)
1. Warning against false teachers (2:1-22)
1. Encouragement to prepare for the second coming of Jesus (3:1-17)
### Who wrote the Book of 2 Peter?
The author identified himself as Simon Peter. Simon Peter was an apostle. He also wrote 1 Peter. Peter probably wrote this letter while in a prison in Rome just before he died. Peter called this letter his second letter, so we can date it after 1 Peter. He addressed the letter to the same audience as his first letter. The audience probably was Christians scattered throughout Asia Minor.
### What is the Book of 2 Peter about?
Peter wrote this letter to encourage believers to live good lives. He warned them about false teachers who were saying Jesus was taking too long to return. He told them that Jesus was not slow in returning. Instead, God was giving people time to repent so that they would be saved.
### How should the title of this book be translated?
Translators may choose to call this book by its traditional title, “2 Peter” or “Second Peter.” Or they may choose a clearer title, such as “The Second Letter from Peter” or “The Second Letter Peter Wrote.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
## Part 2: Important Religious and Cultural Concepts
### Who were the people Peter spoke against?
It is possible that the people Peter spoke against were those who would become known as Gnostics. These teachers distorted the teachings of scripture for their own gain. They lived in immoral ways and taught others to do the same.
### What does it mean that God inspired Scripture?
The doctrine of scripture is a very important one. 2 Peter helps readers to understand that while each writer of scripture had his own distinct way of writing, God is the true author of scripture (1:20-21).
## Part 3: Important Translation Issues
### Singular and plural “you”
In this book, the word “I” refers to Peter. Also, the word “you” is always plural and refers to Peter’s audience. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-you]])
### What are the major issues in the text of the Book of 2 Peter?
For the following verses, some modern versions of the Bible differ from older versions. The ULT text has the modern reading and puts the older reading in a footnote. If a translation of the Bible exists in the general region, translators should consider using the reading found in those versions. If not, translators are advised to follow the modern reading.
* “to be kept in chains of lower darkness until the judgment” (2:4). Some modern versions and older versions have, “to be kept in pits of lower darkness until the judgment.”
* “They enjoy their deceitful actions while they are feasting with you” (2:13). Some versions have, “They enjoy their actions while they are feasting with you in love feasts.”
* “Beor” (2:15). Some other versions read, “Bosor.”
* “The elements will be burned with fire, and the earth and the deeds in it will be revealed” (3:10). Other versions have, “The elements will be burned with fire, and the earth and the deeds in it will be burned up.”
(See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants]])
-2PE 1 intro wjw5 0 # 2 Peter 01 General Notes
## Structure and formatting
Peter formally introduces this letter in verses 1-2. Writers often began letters in this way in the ancient Near East.
## Special concepts in this chapter
### Knowledge of God
Having knowledge of God means to belong to him or to have a relationship with him. Here, “knowledge” is more than just mentally knowing about God. It is a knowledge that causes God to save a person and to give him grace and peace. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/other/know]])
### Living godly lives
Peter teaches that God has given believers all that they need for living godly lives. Therefore, believers should do everything they can to obey God more and more. If believers continue to do this, then they will be effective and productive through their relationship with Jesus. However, if believers do not continue living godly lives, then it is like they have forgotten what God did through Christ to save them. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/godly]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/save]])
## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter
### The truth of Scripture
Peter teaches that the prophecies in Scripture were not made up by men. The Holy Spirit revealed God’s message to the men who spoke them or wrote them down. Also, Peter and the other apostles did not make up the stories they told people about Jesus. They witnessed what Jesus did and heard God call Jesus his son.
+2PE front intro mvk9 0 # Introduction to 2 Peter
## Part 1: General Introduction
### Outline of the Book of 2 Peter
1. Introduction (1:1-2)
1. Reminder to live good lives because God has enabled us to (1:3-21)
1. Warning against false teachers (2:1-22)
1. Encouragement to prepare for the second coming of Jesus (3:1-17)
### Who wrote the Book of 2 Peter?
The author identified himself as Simon Peter. Simon Peter was an apostle. He also wrote 1 Peter. Peter probably wrote this letter while in a prison in Rome just before he died. Peter called this letter his second letter, so we can date it after 1 Peter. He addressed the letter to the same audience as his first letter. The audience probably was Christians scattered throughout Asia Minor.
### What is the Book of 2 Peter about?
Peter wrote this letter to encourage believers to live good lives. He warned them about false teachers who were saying Jesus was taking too long to return. He told them that Jesus was not slow in returning. Instead, God was giving people time to repent so that they would be saved.
### How should the title of this book be translated?
Translators may choose to call this book by its traditional title, “2 Peter” or “Second Peter.” Or they may choose a clearer title, such as “The Second Letter from Peter” or “The Second Letter Peter Wrote.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
## Part 2: Important Religious and Cultural Concepts
### Who were the people Peter spoke against?
It is possible that the people Peter spoke against were those who would become known as Gnostics. These teachers distorted the teachings of scripture for their own gain. They lived in immoral ways and taught others to do the same.
### What does it mean that God inspired Scripture?
The doctrine of scripture is a very important one. 2 Peter helps readers to understand that while each writer of scripture had his own distinct way of writing, God is the true author of scripture (1:20-21).
## Part 3: Important Translation Issues
### Singular and plural “you”
In this book, the word “I” refers to Peter. Also, the word “you” is always plural and refers to Peter’s audience. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-you]])
### What are the major issues in the text of the Book of 2 Peter?
For the following verses, some modern versions of the Bible differ from older versions. The ULT text has the modern reading and puts the older reading in a footnote. If a translation of the Bible exists in the general region, translators should consider using the reading found in those versions. If not, translators are advised to follow the modern reading.
* “to be kept in chains of lower darkness until the judgment” (2:4). Some modern versions and older versions have, “to be kept in pits of lower darkness until the judgment.”
* “They enjoy their deceitful actions while they are feasting with you” (2:13). Some versions have, “They enjoy their actions while they are feasting with you in love feasts.”
* “Beor” (2:15). Some other versions read, “Bosor.”
* “The elements will be burned with fire, and the earth and the deeds in it will be revealed” (3:10). Other versions have, “The elements will be burned with fire, and the earth and the deeds in it will be burned up.”
(See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants]])
+2PE 1 intro wjw5 0 # 2 Peter 01 General Notes
## Structure and formatting
Peter formally introduces this letter in verses 1-2. Writers often began letters in this way in the ancient Near East.
## Special concepts in this chapter
### Knowledge of God
Having knowledge of God means to belong to him or to have a relationship with him. Here, “knowledge” is more than just mentally knowing about God. It is a knowledge that causes God to save a person and to give him grace and peace. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/other/know]])
### Living godly lives
Peter teaches that God has given believers all that they need for living godly lives. Therefore, believers should do everything they can to obey God more and more. If believers continue to do this, then they will be effective and productive through their relationship with Jesus. However, if believers do not continue living godly lives, then it is like they have forgotten what God did through Christ to save them. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/godly]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/save]])
## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter
### The truth of Scripture
Peter teaches that the prophecies in Scripture were not made up by men. The Holy Spirit revealed God’s message to the men who spoke them or wrote them down. Also, Peter and the other apostles did not make up the stories they told people about Jesus. They witnessed what Jesus did and heard God call Jesus his son.
2PE 1 1 n1di 0 General Information: Peter identifies himself as the writer and identifies and greets the believers he is writing to.
2PE 1 1 v381 δοῦλος καὶ ἀπόστολος Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ 1 a servant and apostle of Jesus Christ Peter speaks of being a **servant of Jesus Christ**. He also was given the position and authority of being Christ’s **apostle**.
2PE 1 1 yy7j figs-explicit τοῖς ἰσότιμον…λαχοῦσιν πίστιν 1 to those who have received the same precious faith That these people have **received** **faith** implies that God has given that faith to them. Alternate translation: “to those to whom God has given the same precious faith” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
diff --git a/en_tn_63-1JN.tsv b/en_tn_63-1JN.tsv
index 2e8cba2f0..ba6e27b13 100644
--- a/en_tn_63-1JN.tsv
+++ b/en_tn_63-1JN.tsv
@@ -1,5 +1,5 @@
Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNote
-1JN front intro nl27 0 # Introduction to 1 John
## Part 1: General Introduction
### Outline of the book of 1 John
This is a letter that the apostle John wrote to challenge and correct false teachings that were leading followers of Jesus to believe wrong things and live in wrong ways. At that time, the letter form had distinct opening and closing sections. The main body of the letter came in between.
1. Opening of Letter (1:1-4)
2. Main Body of Letter (1:5–5:12)
* Genuine believers obey God and love one another (1:5–2:17)
* It is false teaching to deny that Jesus is the Messiah (2:18–2:27)
* Genuine children of God do not sin (2:28–3:10)
* Genuine believers help one another sacrificially (3:11–18)
* Genuine believers have confidence in prayer (3:19–24)
* It is false teaching to deny that Jesus became human (4:1–6)
* Genuine believers love one another as God has loved them (4:7–21)
* It is false teaching to deny that Jesus is the Son of God (5:1–12)
1. Closing of Letter (5:13-21)
### Who wrote the book of 1 John?
The author of this letter does not give his name. However, since early Christian times, the church has widely considered the apostle John to be the author. He wrote the Gospel of John, and there are many similarities between the content of that book and this letter. If John did write this letter, he probably did so near the end of his life.
### To whom was the book of 1 John written?
The author wrote this letter to people whom he addresses as “beloved” and, figuratively, as “my little children.” This probably means believers in various churches located in the area where John was then living.
### What is the book of 1 John about?
False teachers were encouraging followers of Jesus to believe wrong things and to live in wrong ways. John wanted to challenge and correct those false teachings so that the people who received his letter would continue to believe the truth they had been taught and live in right ways. The false teachers were saying that these people were not saved; John wanted to assure them that they were saved.
### How should the title of this book be translated?
Translators may choose to call this book by its traditional title, “1 John” or “First John.” They may also choose a different title, such as “The First Letter from John” or “The First Letter John Wrote.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
## Part 2: Important Religious and Cultural Concepts
### Who were the people whom John spoke against?
The false teachers John was challenging seem to have held beliefs similar to what would later become known as Gnosticism. Those false teachers believed that the physical world was evil. They thought that God would not become human, since they considered the physical body to be evil, so they denied that Jesus was God come to earth in human form. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/evil]])
## Part 3: Important Translation Issues
### “sin”
In chapter 1, John says that we should not deny that we have sinned. Rather, if we confess our sin, God will forgive us. In chapter 2, John says that he is writing this letter so that the recipients will not sin, but he adds that if they do sin, Jesus will advocate on their behalf. But in chapter 3, John says that everyone who has been begotten from God and who remains in God does not commit sin and is not able to sin. And in chapter 5, John says that we should not pray for people who are sinning certain ways, although we should pray for people who are sinning in other ways. This may seem confusing and contradictory.
However, the explanation is that the people whose teachings John was writing to challenge and correct were saying that it did not matter what people did in their bodies. This was because they thought physical matter was evil, and so they thought God did not care about it. In effect, they were saying that there was no such thing as sin. So John needed to say, in chapter 1, that sin is real and that everyone has sinned. Some of the believers may have been deceived by the false teaching and committed sins, so John also needed to reassure them that if they repented and confessed their sins, God would forgive them. John says similar things in chapter 2. Then in chapter 3 he explains that the new nature that believers have as children of God is one that does not want to sin and that does not enjoy sinning. So they should recognize that those who excuse or condone sin are not truly children of God, and that as children of God themselves, they can become more and more obedient and free from sin. Finally, in chapter 5, John warns that if a person sins wantonly and continually, this likely means that they have rejected Jesus and are not influenced by the Holy Spirit. He says that in that case, it may not be effective to pray for them. But he then encourages his readers that if a person sins occasionally but feels remorse, he is influenced by the Spirit, and so the prayers of other believers will help him repent and live in a right way again. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/sin]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/faith]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/forgive]])
### “remain”
In this letter, John often uses the word “remain” (which could also be translated as “reside” or “abide”) as a spatial metaphor. John speaks of a believer becoming more faithful to Jesus and knowing Jesus better as if the word of Jesus “remained” in the believer. He speaks of a person being spiritually joined to someone else as if that person “remained” in the other person: He writes that Christians “remain” in Christ and in God, and he says that the Father “remains” in the Son, the Son “remains” in the Father, the Son “remains” in believers, and the Holy Spirit “remains” in believers.
Translators may find it difficult to represent these ideas in their own languages if they try to use exactly the same words and expressions each time. For example, in [2:6](../02/06.md), when John speaks of a believer “remaining” in God, he intends to express the idea of that believer being spiritually unified with God. Accordingly, UST speaks of the believer being “in union with God.” To give another example, for the statement in [2:13](../02/13.md) that “the word of God remains in you,” UST says, “you continue to obey what God commands.” This shows how other expressions can be found that accurately communicate the various ideas that John is expressing through the term “remain.”
### “appear”
In several places in this letter, John uses a term that ULT usually translates as “appear.” This is actually a passive verbal form in Greek, but as is often the case with such forms in that language, it can have an active meaning. When it has an active meaning, it is important to recognize that it does not simply mean “seemed to be there,” as the word “appeared” might suggest. Rather, it means “was there.” This is illustrated well by the use of the term in another New Testament book, 2 Corinthians, in which Paul writes in [5:10](../2co/05/10.md) that “we must all appear before the judgment seat of Christ.” Clearly this does not mean that we must only seem to be present there. Rather, we must actually be there.
Throughout the epistle, it is a subtle matter of interpretation to decide whether John is using the term “appear” in an active sense or in a passive sense. For example, in [1:2](../01/02.md), John applies the term twice to the “Word of life,” that is, to Jesus. But it is not clear whether he is saying that Jesus himself “appeared,” that is, he came to earth, or that he “was made apparent” (made visible), with the emphasis on the idea that God revealed Jesus to the world and in the process revealed himself to the world through Jesus. At each place where John uses this term, notes will call attention to it and discuss what it likely means in that context.
### “the world”
John also uses the term “world” in a variety of senses in this letter. It can mean the earth, something material, the people who live in the world, the people who do not honor God, or the values of the people who do not honor God. Notes will address the meaning of the term “world” in each instance where John uses it.
### “to know”
The verb “to know” is used in two different ways in this letter. Sometimes it is used about knowing a fact, as in 3:2, 3:5, and 3:19. Sometimes it means to experience and understand someone or something, as in 3:1, 3:6, 3:16, and 3:20. Sometimes John uses it in two different senses in the same sentence, as in 2:3, “in this we know that we have known him.” Your languages may have different words for these different meanings, and it would be appropriate to use them in your translation.
### Major textual issues in the text of the book of 1 John
When ancient manuscripts of the Bible differ, ULT puts the readings that scholars consider to be most accurate in its text, but it puts other possibly accurate readings in footnotes. The introductions to each chapter will discuss places where the ancient manuscripts differ in significant ways, and notes will address those places again where they occur in the book. If a translation of the Bible already exists in your region, consider using the readings found in that version. If not, we recommend that you follow the readings in the ULT text. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants]])
+1JN front intro nl27 0 # Introduction to 1 John
## Part 1: General Introduction
### Outline of the book of 1 John
This is a letter that the apostle John wrote to challenge and correct false teachings that were leading followers of Jesus to believe wrong things and live in wrong ways. At that time, the letter form had distinct opening and closing sections. The main body of the letter came in between.
1. Opening of Letter (1:1-4)
2. Main Body of Letter (1:5–5:12)
* Genuine believers obey God and love one another (1:5–2:17)
* It is false teaching to deny that Jesus is the Messiah (2:18–2:27)
* Genuine children of God do not sin (2:28–3:10)
* Genuine believers help one another sacrificially (3:11–18)
* Genuine believers have confidence in prayer (3:19–24)
* It is false teaching to deny that Jesus became human (4:1–6)
* Genuine believers love one another as God has loved them (4:7–21)
* It is false teaching to deny that Jesus is the Son of God (5:1–12)
1. Closing of Letter (5:13-21)
### Who wrote the book of 1 John?
The author of this letter does not give his name. However, since early Christian times, the church has widely considered the apostle John to be the author. He wrote the Gospel of John, and there are many similarities between the content of that book and this letter. If John did write this letter, he probably did so near the end of his life.
### To whom was the book of 1 John written?
The author wrote this letter to people whom he addresses as “beloved” and, figuratively, as “my little children.” This probably means believers in various churches located in the area where John was then living.
### What is the book of 1 John about?
False teachers were encouraging followers of Jesus to believe wrong things and to live in wrong ways. John wanted to challenge and correct those false teachings so that the people who received his letter would continue to believe the truth they had been taught and live in right ways. The false teachers were saying that these people were not saved; John wanted to assure them that they were saved.
### How should the title of this book be translated?
Translators may choose to call this book by its traditional title, “1 John” or “First John.” They may also choose a different title, such as “The First Letter from John” or “The First Letter John Wrote.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
## Part 2: Important Religious and Cultural Concepts
### Who were the people whom John spoke against?
The false teachers John was challenging seem to have held beliefs similar to what would later become known as Gnosticism. Those false teachers believed that the physical world was evil. They thought that God would not become human, since they considered the physical body to be evil, so they denied that Jesus was God come to earth in human form. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/evil]])
## Part 3: Important Translation Issues
### “sin”
In chapter 1, John says that we should not deny that we have sinned. Rather, if we confess our sin, God will forgive us. In chapter 2, John says that he is writing this letter so that the recipients will not sin, but he adds that if they do sin, Jesus will advocate on their behalf. But in chapter 3, John says that everyone who has been begotten from God and who remains in God does not commit sin and is not able to sin. And in chapter 5, John says that we should not pray for people who are sinning certain ways, although we should pray for people who are sinning in other ways. This may seem confusing and contradictory.
However, the explanation is that the people whose teachings John was writing to challenge and correct were saying that it did not matter what people did in their bodies. This was because they thought physical matter was evil, and so they thought God did not care about it. In effect, they were saying that there was no such thing as sin. So John needed to say, in chapter 1, that sin is real and that everyone has sinned. Some of the believers may have been deceived by the false teaching and committed sins, so John also needed to reassure them that if they repented and confessed their sins, God would forgive them. John says similar things in chapter 2. Then in chapter 3 he explains that the new nature that believers have as children of God is one that does not want to sin and that does not enjoy sinning. So they should recognize that those who excuse or condone sin are not truly children of God, and that as children of God themselves, they can become more and more obedient and free from sin. Finally, in chapter 5, John warns that if a person sins wantonly and continually, this likely means that they have rejected Jesus and are not influenced by the Holy Spirit. He says that in that case, it may not be effective to pray for them. But he then encourages his readers that if a person sins occasionally but feels remorse, he is influenced by the Spirit, and so the prayers of other believers will help him repent and live in a right way again. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/sin]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/faith]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/forgive]])
### “remain”
In this letter, John often uses the word “remain” (which could also be translated as “reside” or “abide”) as a spatial metaphor. John speaks of a believer becoming more faithful to Jesus and knowing Jesus better as if the word of Jesus “remained” in the believer. He speaks of a person being spiritually joined to someone else as if that person “remained” in the other person: He writes that Christians “remain” in Christ and in God, and he says that the Father “remains” in the Son, the Son “remains” in the Father, the Son “remains” in believers, and the Holy Spirit “remains” in believers.
Translators may find it difficult to represent these ideas in their own languages if they try to use exactly the same words and expressions each time. For example, in [2:6](../02/06.md), when John speaks of a believer “remaining” in God, he intends to express the idea of that believer being spiritually unified with God. Accordingly, UST speaks of the believer being “in union with God.” To give another example, for the statement in [2:13](../02/13.md) that “the word of God remains in you,” UST says, “you continue to obey what God commands.” This shows how other expressions can be found that accurately communicate the various ideas that John is expressing through the term “remain.”
### “appear”
In several places in this letter, John uses a term that ULT usually translates as “appear.” This is actually a passive verbal form in Greek, but as is often the case with such forms in that language, it can have an active meaning. When it has an active meaning, it is important to recognize that it does not simply mean “seemed to be there,” as the word “appeared” might suggest. Rather, it means “was there.” This is illustrated well by the use of the term in another New Testament book, 2 Corinthians, in which Paul writes in [5:10](../2co/05/10.md) that “we must all appear before the judgment seat of Christ.” Clearly this does not mean that we must only seem to be present there. Rather, we must actually be there.
Throughout the epistle, it is a subtle matter of interpretation to decide whether John is using the term “appear” in an active sense or in a passive sense. For example, in [1:2](../01/02.md), John applies the term twice to the “Word of life,” that is, to Jesus. But it is not clear whether he is saying that Jesus himself “appeared,” that is, he came to earth, or that he “was made apparent” (made visible), with the emphasis on the idea that God revealed Jesus to the world and in the process revealed himself to the world through Jesus. At each place where John uses this term, notes will call attention to it and discuss what it likely means in that context.
### “the world”
John also uses the term “world” in a variety of senses in this letter. It can mean the earth, something material, the people who live in the world, the people who do not honor God, or the values of the people who do not honor God. Notes will address the meaning of the term “world” in each instance where John uses it.
### “to know”
The verb “to know” is used in two different ways in this letter. Sometimes it is used about knowing a fact, as in 3:2, 3:5, and 3:19. Sometimes it means to experience and understand someone or something, as in 3:1, 3:6, 3:16, and 3:20. Sometimes John uses it in two different senses in the same sentence, as in 2:3, “in this we know that we have known him.” Your languages may have different words for these different meanings, and it would be appropriate to use them in your translation.
### Major textual issues in the text of the book of 1 John
When ancient manuscripts of the Bible differ, ULT puts the readings that scholars consider to be most accurate in its text, but it puts other possibly accurate readings in footnotes. The introductions to each chapter will discuss places where the ancient manuscripts differ in significant ways, and notes will address those places again where they occur in the book. If a translation of the Bible already exists in your region, consider using the readings found in that version. If not, we recommend that you follow the readings in the ULT text. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants]])
1JN 1 intro ab9v 0 # 1 John 01 General Notes
## Structure and formatting
1. Opening of the letter (1:1-4)
2. Genuine believers obey God and love one another (1:5–10, continues through 2:17)
## Important translation issues in this chapter
Like many Greek compositions of this time, for stylistic purposes this letter begins with a very long sentence. It goes from the beginning of [1:1](../01/01.md) to the middle of [1:3](../01/03.md). The parts of this sentence are not in the order that is customary in many languages. The direct object comes first, and it is very long, made up of many different clauses. The subject and verb do not come until near the end. And in the middle, there is a long digression. So it will be a challenge to translate.
One approach that might work well in your language would be to create a verse bridge that includes all of 1:1–3. You could break up this long sentence into several smaller sentences, repeating the subject and verb for clarity. This would allow you to present the parts of the sentence in an order that might be more customary in your language and that your readers might understand better. For example:
“So that you will have fellowship with us, we are declaring to you what we have seen and heard. We are declaring to you what was from the beginning, which we have heard, which we have seen with our eyes, which we have looked at and our hands have touched. It has to do with the Word of life. Indeed, the life appeared, and we have seen it, and we are testifying to it. Yes, we are announcing to you the eternal life that was with the Father and that appeared to us.”
If you take this approach, another way to translate the second sentence would be, “We are declaring to you what was from the beginning, what we have heard, what we have seen with our eyes, what we have looked at and our hands have touched.”
Another approach that could also work well, and which would not require a verse bridge, would be to leave the phrases in their present order, but to divide the sentence into three parts at the verse divisions. If you do that, you could also put your translation of the phrase “regarding the Word of life” at the beginning rather than the end of [1:1](../01/01.md) and present it as a topical introduction to the letter. Otherwise, your readers might not get the sense that this is a letter until they reached [1:4](../01/04.md), where John formally states his purpose for writing.
The notes to [1:1–4](../01/01.md) provide further specific suggestions for how to translate this long opening sentence. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-versebridge]])
## Important textual issues in this chapter
In [1:4](../01/04.md), the most accurate ancient manuscripts read “so that our joy may be fulfilled.” ULT follows that reading. However, some other ancient manuscripts read “your joy” instead of “our joy.” If a translation of the Bible already exists in your region, consider using whichever reading is found in that version. If a translation does not already exist, we recommend that you follow the reading in the ULT text. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants]])
1JN 1 1 j363 writing-pronouns ὃ ἦν ἀπ’ ἀρχῆς, ὃ ἀκηκόαμεν, ὃ ἑωράκαμεν τοῖς ὀφθαλμοῖς ἡμῶν, ὃ ἐθεασάμεθα, καὶ αἱ χεῖρες ἡμῶν ἐψηλάφησαν 1 What was from the beginning, which we have heard, which we have seen with our eyes, which we have looked at and our hands have touched See the discussion in the General Notes to this chapter for how to translate the long sentence in [1:1–3](../01/01.md). If you follow the suggestion to translate the phrase “regarding the Word of life” as a topical introduction to this letter, you will already have indicated that the four clauses in this verse refer to a person, Jesus. You could therefore introduce them with the personal pronouns “who” and “whom.” Alternate translation: “He is the one who has existed from all eternity, whom we heard speak, whom we saw with our own eyes, and whom we looked at and touched with our own hands” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
1JN 1 1 j364 figs-idiom ἀπ’ ἀρχῆς 1 from the beginning John uses the phrase **from the beginning** in various ways in this letter. Here it refers to the eternal existence of Jesus. Alternate translation: “from all eternity” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
diff --git a/en_tn_64-2JN.tsv b/en_tn_64-2JN.tsv
index 58f8a293e..fbd26926f 100644
--- a/en_tn_64-2JN.tsv
+++ b/en_tn_64-2JN.tsv
@@ -1,5 +1,5 @@
Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNote
-2JN front intro vpa9 0 # Introduction to 2 John
## Part 1: General Introduction
### Outline of the Book of 2 John
1. Opening of letter (1:1-3)
2. Encouragement and the commandment to love one another (1:4-6)
3. Warning about false teachers (1:7–11)
4. Closing of letter (1:12-13)
### Who wrote the Book of 2 John?
The author of this letter identifies himself only as “the elder.” However, the content of 2 John is similar to the content in John’s gospel. This suggests that the apostle John wrote this letter, and he would have done so near the end of his life.
### To whom was the Book of 2 John written?
The author addresses this letter to someone he calls “the chosen lady” and to “her children” (1:1). Although this could refer to a specific woman and her children, that interpretation is unlikely. More probably, this is a figurative way to refer to a specific congregation and its members. This interpretation is supported by the way that John refers to the congregation with him as “the children of your chosen sister” in verse 13. This would be a readily understandable metaphor, since the word for “church” in Greek is a feminine noun. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
### What is the book of 2 John about?
It appears that John addressed this letter to a specific congregation of believers. John’s purpose in writing this letter to them was to warn his audience about false teachers. John did not want believers helping or giving money to false teachers.
He probably intended this message to be passed on to all believers in general.
### How should the title of this book be translated?
Translators may choose to call this book by its traditional title, “2 John” or “Second John.” Or they may choose a different title, such as “The Second Letter from John” or “The Second Letter John Wrote.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
## Part 2: Important Religious and Cultural Concepts
### What is hospitality?
Hospitality was an important concept in the ancient Near East. It was important to be friendly towards foreigners or outsiders and provide help to them if they needed it. John wanted believers to offer hospitality to guests. However, he did not want believers to offer hospitality to false teachers.
### Who were the people John spoke against?
The people John spoke against may have been those who later became known as Gnostics. These people believed that the physical world was evil. Since the physical body was seen as evil, they did not think that God could become human. Therefore, they believed that Jesus was divine but denied that he was human. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/evil]])
## Part 3: Important Translation Issues
### What are the major textual issues in the text of the Book of 2 John?
In [1:12](../01/12.md), most modern versions of the Bible read “our joy.” There is another traditional reading that says “your joy.” If a version of the Bible already exists in your region, you should consider using the reading of that version in your translation. If not, you may wish to follow the reading that most Bible scholars consider to be authentic and say “our joy.” In this case, “our” would include both John and the letter recipients. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants]])
+2JN front intro vpa9 0 # Introduction to 2 John
## Part 1: General Introduction
### Outline of the Book of 2 John
1. Opening of letter (1:1-3)
2. Encouragement and the commandment to love one another (1:4-6)
3. Warning about false teachers (1:7–11)
4. Closing of letter (1:12-13)
### Who wrote the Book of 2 John?
The author of this letter identifies himself only as “the elder.” However, the content of 2 John is similar to the content in John’s gospel. This suggests that the apostle John wrote this letter, and he would have done so near the end of his life.
### To whom was the Book of 2 John written?
The author addresses this letter to someone he calls “the chosen lady” and to “her children” (1:1). Although this could refer to a specific woman and her children, that interpretation is unlikely. More probably, this is a figurative way to refer to a specific congregation and its members. This interpretation is supported by the way that John refers to the congregation with him as “the children of your chosen sister” in verse 13. This would be a readily understandable metaphor, since the word for “church” in Greek is a feminine noun. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
### What is the book of 2 John about?
It appears that John addressed this letter to a specific congregation of believers. John’s purpose in writing this letter to them was to warn his audience about false teachers. John did not want believers helping or giving money to false teachers.
He probably intended this message to be passed on to all believers in general.
### How should the title of this book be translated?
Translators may choose to call this book by its traditional title, “2 John” or “Second John.” Or they may choose a different title, such as “The Second Letter from John” or “The Second Letter John Wrote.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
## Part 2: Important Religious and Cultural Concepts
### What is hospitality?
Hospitality was an important concept in the ancient Near East. It was important to be friendly towards foreigners or outsiders and provide help to them if they needed it. John wanted believers to offer hospitality to guests. However, he did not want believers to offer hospitality to false teachers.
### Who were the people John spoke against?
The people John spoke against may have been those who later became known as Gnostics. These people believed that the physical world was evil. Since the physical body was seen as evil, they did not think that God could become human. Therefore, they believed that Jesus was divine but denied that he was human. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/evil]])
## Part 3: Important Translation Issues
### What are the major textual issues in the text of the Book of 2 John?
In [1:12](../01/12.md), most modern versions of the Bible read “our joy.” There is another traditional reading that says “your joy.” If a version of the Bible already exists in your region, you should consider using the reading of that version in your translation. If not, you may wish to follow the reading that most Bible scholars consider to be authentic and say “our joy.” In this case, “our” would include both John and the letter recipients. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants]])
2JN 1 1 uspy figs-123person ὁ πρεσβύτερος 1 The elder In this culture, letter writers would give their own names first, referring to themselves in the third person. If that is confusing in your language, you can use the first person here. Or if your language has a particular way of introducing the author of a letter, and if it would be helpful to your readers, you can use it here. Alternate translation: “I, the elder, am writing this letter” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]])
2JN 1 1 z4tk figs-explicit ὁ πρεσβύτερος 1 The elder **The elder** likely means John, the apostle and disciple of Jesus. He refers to himself as **elder** either because of his old age, or because he is a leader in the church, or both. If you have a term for an older, respected leader, you can use it here. Alternate translation: “I, John, am writing this letter” or Alternate translation: “I, John the elder, am writing this letter” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
2JN 1 1 y7hw figs-123person ἐκλεκτῇ κυρίᾳ καὶ τοῖς τέκνοις αὐτῆς 1 to the chosen lady and her children In this culture, letter writers would name the addressees next, referring to them in the third person. If that is confusing in your language, you can use the second person here. Or if your language has a particular way of introducing the person who receives a letter, and if it would be helpful to your readers, you can use it here. Alternate translation: “to you, chosen lady, and to your children” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]])
diff --git a/en_tn_65-3JN.tsv b/en_tn_65-3JN.tsv
index 25939fead..25dd232d8 100644
--- a/en_tn_65-3JN.tsv
+++ b/en_tn_65-3JN.tsv
@@ -1,5 +1,5 @@
Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNote
-3JN front intro kwv9 0 # Introduction to 3 John
## Part 1: General Introduction
### Outline of the Book of 3 John
1. Introduction (1:1)
2. Encouragement and instructions to show hospitality (1:2-8)
3. Diotrephes and Demetrius (1:9-12)
4. Conclusion (1:13-14)
### Who wrote the Book of 3 John?
The letter does not give the name of the author. The author only identified himself as **The elder** (1:1). The letter was probably written by the apostle John near the end of his life.
### What is the Book of 3 John about?
John wrote this letter to a believer named Gaius. He instructed Gaius to be hospitable to fellow believers who were traveling through his area.
### How should the title of this book be translated?
Translators may choose to call this book by its traditional title, “3 John” or “Third John.” Or they may choose a clearer title, such as “The Third Letter from John” or “The Third Letter John Wrote”. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
## Part 2: Important Religious and Cultural Concepts
### What is hospitality?
Hospitality was an important concept in the ancient Near East. It was important to be friendly towards foreigners or outsiders and provide help to them if they needed it. In 2 John, John discouraged Christians from showing hospitality to false teachers. In 3 John, John encouraged Christians to show hospitality to faithful teachers.
## Part 3: Important Translation Issues
### How does the author use family relationships in his letter?
The author used the terms **brother** and **children** in a way that can be confusing. The scriptures often used the term **brothers** to refer to Jews. But in this letter, John used the word to refer to Christians. Also, John called some believers his **children**. These were believers he taught to obey Christ.
John also used the term **Gentile** in a way that could be confusing. The scriptures often used the term **Gentile** to refer to people who are not Jews. But in this letter, John used the word to refer to those who did not believe in Jesus.
+3JN front intro kwv9 0 # Introduction to 3 John
## Part 1: General Introduction
### Outline of the Book of 3 John
1. Introduction (1:1)
2. Encouragement and instructions to show hospitality (1:2-8)
3. Diotrephes and Demetrius (1:9-12)
4. Conclusion (1:13-14)
### Who wrote the Book of 3 John?
The letter does not give the name of the author. The author only identified himself as **The elder** (1:1). The letter was probably written by the apostle John near the end of his life.
### What is the Book of 3 John about?
John wrote this letter to a believer named Gaius. He instructed Gaius to be hospitable to fellow believers who were traveling through his area.
### How should the title of this book be translated?
Translators may choose to call this book by its traditional title, “3 John” or “Third John.” Or they may choose a clearer title, such as “The Third Letter from John” or “The Third Letter John Wrote”. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
## Part 2: Important Religious and Cultural Concepts
### What is hospitality?
Hospitality was an important concept in the ancient Near East. It was important to be friendly towards foreigners or outsiders and provide help to them if they needed it. In 2 John, John discouraged Christians from showing hospitality to false teachers. In 3 John, John encouraged Christians to show hospitality to faithful teachers.
## Part 3: Important Translation Issues
### How does the author use family relationships in his letter?
The author used the terms **brother** and **children** in a way that can be confusing. The scriptures often used the term **brothers** to refer to Jews. But in this letter, John used the word to refer to Christians. Also, John called some believers his **children**. These were believers he taught to obey Christ.
John also used the term **Gentile** in a way that could be confusing. The scriptures often used the term **Gentile** to refer to people who are not Jews. But in this letter, John used the word to refer to those who did not believe in Jesus.
3JN 1 1 rni7 figs-you 0 General Information: This is a personal letter from John to Gaius. All instances of **you** and **your** refer to Gaius and are singular. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-you]])
3JN 1 1 w99t figs-explicit ὁ πρεσβύτερος 1 The elder This refers to John, the apostle and disciple of Jesus. He refers to himself as the **elder** either because of his old age or because he is a leader in the church. The name of the author can be made explicit: “I, John the elder, am writing” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
3JN 1 1 lls6 translate-names Γαΐῳ 1 to … Gaius This is a fellow believer to whom John is writing this letter. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
diff --git a/en_tn_66-JUD.tsv b/en_tn_66-JUD.tsv
index 02966cb93..889f4e279 100644
--- a/en_tn_66-JUD.tsv
+++ b/en_tn_66-JUD.tsv
@@ -1,5 +1,5 @@
Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNote
-JUD front intro xh5n 0 # Introduction to Jude
## Part 1: General Introduction
### Outline of the Book of Jude
1. Introduction (1:1-2)
2. Warning against false teachers (1:3-4)
3. Old Testament examples (1:5-16)
4. Proper response (1:17-23)
5. Praises to God (1:24-25)
### Who wrote the Book of Jude?
The author identified himself as Jude the brother of James. Both Jude and James were half-brothers of Jesus. It is unknown whether this letter was intended for a specific church.
### What is the Book of Jude about?
Jude wrote this letter to warn believers against false teachers. Jude often referred to the Old Testament. This may suggest that Jude was writing to a Jewish Christian audience. This letter and 2 Petter have similar content. They both speak about angels, Sodom and Gomorrah, and false teachers.
### How should the title of this book be translated?
Translators may choose to call this book by its traditional title, “Jude.” Or they may choose a clearer title, such as “The Letter from Jude” or “The Letter Jude Wrote.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
## Part 2: Important Religious and Cultural Concepts
### Who were the people Jude spoke against?
It is possible that the people Jude spoke against were those who would become known as Gnostics. These teachers distorted the teachings of scripture for their own gain. They lived in immoral ways and taught others to do the same.
+JUD front intro xh5n 0 # Introduction to Jude
## Part 1: General Introduction
### Outline of the Book of Jude
1. Introduction (1:1-2)
2. Warning against false teachers (1:3-4)
3. Old Testament examples (1:5-16)
4. Proper response (1:17-23)
5. Praises to God (1:24-25)
### Who wrote the Book of Jude?
The author identified himself as Jude the brother of James. Both Jude and James were half-brothers of Jesus. It is unknown whether this letter was intended for a specific church.
### What is the Book of Jude about?
Jude wrote this letter to warn believers against false teachers. Jude often referred to the Old Testament. This may suggest that Jude was writing to a Jewish Christian audience. This letter and 2 Petter have similar content. They both speak about angels, Sodom and Gomorrah, and false teachers.
### How should the title of this book be translated?
Translators may choose to call this book by its traditional title, “Jude.” Or they may choose a clearer title, such as “The Letter from Jude” or “The Letter Jude Wrote.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
## Part 2: Important Religious and Cultural Concepts
### Who were the people Jude spoke against?
It is possible that the people Jude spoke against were those who would become known as Gnostics. These teachers distorted the teachings of scripture for their own gain. They lived in immoral ways and taught others to do the same.
JUD 1 1 ek3q figs-you 0 General Information: Jude identifies himself as the writer of this letter and greets his readers. He was probably the half-brother of Jesus. There are two other Judes mentioned in the New Testament. The word “you” in this letter refers to the Christians to whom Jude was writing and is always plural. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-you]])
JUD 1 1 npc3 translate-names Ἰούδας 1 Jude **Jude** is the brother of James. Alternate translation: “I am Jude” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
JUD 1 1 m3v1 ἀδελφὸς…Ἰακώβου 1 brother of James **James** and Jude were half brothers of Jesus. Joseph as their physical father, but he was not the physical father or Jesus.
diff --git a/en_tn_67-REV.tsv b/en_tn_67-REV.tsv
index 840072a0b..c6c293a90 100644
--- a/en_tn_67-REV.tsv
+++ b/en_tn_67-REV.tsv
@@ -1,6 +1,6 @@
Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNote
-REV front intro xx8l 0 # Introduction to Revelation
## Part 1: General Introduction
### Outline of the Book of Revelation
1. Opening (1:1-20)
1. Letters to the seven churches (2:1-3:22)
1. Vision of God in heaven, and a vision of the Lamb (4:1-11)
1. The seven seals (6:1-8:1)
1. The seven trumpets (8:2-13:18)
1. Worshipers of the Lamb, the martyrs, and the harvest of wrath (14:1-20)
1. The seven bowls (15:1-18:24)
1. Worship in heaven (19:1-10)
1. The Lamb’s judgment, the destruction of the beast, the thousand years, the destruction of Satan, and the final judgment (20:11-15)
1. The new creation and the new Jerusalem (21:1-22:5)
1. Jesus’ promise to return, the witness from the angels, John’s closing words, Christ’s message to his church, the invitation and the warning (22:6-21)
### Who wrote the Book of Revelation?
The author identified himself as John. This was probably the Apostle John. He wrote the Book of Revelation while on the island of Patmos. The Romans exiled John there for teaching people about Jesus.
### What is the Book of Revelation about?
John wrote the Book of Revelation to encourage believers to remain faithful even when they are suffering. John described visions he had of Satan and his followers fighting against and killing believers. In the visions God causes many terrible things to happen on the earth to punish wicked people. In the end, Jesus defeats Satan and his followers. Then Jesus comforts those who were faithful. And the believers will live forever with God in the new heavens and earth.
### How should the title of this book be translated?
Translators may choose to call this book by one of its traditional titles, “Revelation,” “The Revelation of Jesus Christ,” “The Revelation to Saint John,” or “The Apocalypse of John.” Or they may choose a possibly clearer title, such as “The Things that Jesus Christ Showed to John.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
### What type of writing is the Book of Revelation?
John used a special style of writing to describe his visions. John described what he saw by using many symbols. This style of writing is called symbolic prophecy or apocalyptic literature. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-apocalypticwriting]])
## Part 2: Important Religious and Cultural Concepts
### Are the events of Revelation past or future?
Since early Christian times, scholars have interpreted Revelation differently. Some scholars think John described events that happened during his time. Some scholars think John described events happening from his time until the return of Jesus. Other scholars think John described events that will happen in a short period of time just before Christ returns.
Translators will not need to decide how to interpret the book before they translate it. Translators should leave the prophecies in the tenses that are used in the ULT.
### Are there any other books in the Bible like Revelation?
No other book of the Bible is like the Book of Revelation. But, passages in Ezekiel, Zechariah, and especially Daniel are similar in content and style to Revelation. It may be beneficial to translate Revelation at the same time as Daniel since they have some imagery and style in common.
## Part 3: Important Translation Issues
### Does one need to understand the Book of Revelation to translate it?
One does not need to understand all of the symbols in the Book of Revelation to translate it properly. Translators should not give possible meanings for the symbols or numbers in their translation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-apocalypticwriting]])
### How are the ideas of “holy” and “sanctify” represented in Revelation in the ULT?
The scriptures use these words to indicate any one of various ideas. For this reason, it is often difficult for translators to represent them well in their versions. In translating Revelation into English, the ULT uses the following principles:
* The meaning in two passages indicates moral holiness. Here, the ULT uses “holy.” (See: 14:12; 22:11)
* Usually the meaning in Revelation indicates a simple reference to Christians without implying any particular role filled by them. In these cases, the ULT uses “believer” or “believers.” (See: 5:8; 8:3, 4; 11:18; 13:7; 16:6; 17:6; 18:20, 24; 19:8; 20:9)
* Sometimes the meaning implies the idea of someone or something set apart for God alone. In these cases, the ULT uses “sanctify,” “set apart,” “dedicated to,” or “reserved for.”
The UST will often be helpful as translators think about how to represent these ideas in their own versions.
### Periods of time
John referred to various periods of time in Revelation. For example, there are many references to forty-two months, seven years, and three and a half days. Some scholars think these time periods are symbolic. Other scholars think these are actual time periods. The translator should treat these time periods as referencing actual periods of time. It is then up to the interpreter to determine their significance or what they may represent.
### What are the major issues in the text of the Book of Revelation?
For the following verses, some modern versions of the Bible differ from older versions. The ULT text has the modern reading and puts the older reading in a footnote. If a translation of the Bible exists in the general region, translators should consider using the reading found in those versions. If not, translators are advised to follow the modern reading.
* “‘I am the alpha and the omega,’ says the Lord God, ‘the one who is, and who was, and who is to come, the Almighty’” (1:8). Some versions add the phrase “the Beginning and the End.”
* “the elders prostrated themselves and worshiped” (5:14). Some older versions read, “the twenty-four elders prostrated themselves and worshiped the one who lives forever and ever.”
* “so that a third of it [the earth] was burned up” (8:7). Some older versions do not include this phrase.
* “the one who is and who was” (11:17). Some versions add the phrase “and who is to come.”
* “they are blameless” (14:5). Some versions add the phrase “before the throne of God” (14:5).
* “the one who is and who was, the Holy One” (16:5). Some older versions read, “O Lord, the One who is and who was and who is to be.”
* “The nations will walk by the light of that city” (21:24). Some older versions read, “The nations that are saved will walk by the light of that city.”
* “Blessed are those who wash their robes” (22:14). Some older versions read “Blessed are those who do his commandments.”
* “God will take away his share in the tree of life and in the holy city” (22:19). Some older versions read, “God will take away his share in the book of life and in the holy city.”
(See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants]])
-REV 1 intro u1e2 0 # Revelation 01 General Notes
## Structure and formatting
This chapter explains how the Book of Revelation records the vision John received on the island of Patmos.
Some translations set quotations from the Old Testament farther to the right on the page to make them easier to read. The ULT does this with the quoted words in verse 7.
## Special concepts in this chapter
### Seven churches
John wrote this book to seven actual churches in Asia Minor, which is now the country of Turkey.
### White
The Bible often speaks of something that belongs to a person as being “white.” This is metaphor and metonym for that person living rightly and pleasing God. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/righteous]])
### “Him who is, and who was, and who is to come”
God exists now. He has always existed. He will always exist. Your language may have a different way of saying this.
## Important figures of speech in this chapter
### Blood
Blood is a metonym for death. Jesus “has released us from our sins by his blood.” John means that Jesus saved us from our sins by dying for us. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter
### “He is coming with the clouds”
Jesus went into the clouds when he went up to heaven after God raised him from the dead. When Jesus returns, he will also be “with the clouds.” It is not clear whether he will be sitting or riding on clouds or coming in the clouds or “with the clouds” in some other way. Your translation should express this in a way that is natural in your language.
### “One like a son of man”
This refers to Jesus. You should translate the words “son of man” using the same words as you did in the Gospels for when Jesus called himself the “Son of Man.”
### “The angels of the seven churches”
The word “angels” here can also mean “messengers.” This might refer to heavenly beings, or to the messengers or leaders of these seven churches. John uses the same word “angel” (singular) in verse 1 and in many other places throughout the book. Your translation should also use the same word.
+REV front intro xx8l 0 # Introduction to Revelation
## Part 1: General Introduction
### Outline of the Book of Revelation
1. Opening (1:1-20)
1. Letters to the seven churches (2:1-3:22)
1. Vision of God in heaven, and a vision of the Lamb (4:1-11)
1. The seven seals (6:1-8:1)
1. The seven trumpets (8:2-13:18)
1. Worshipers of the Lamb, the martyrs, and the harvest of wrath (14:1-20)
1. The seven bowls (15:1-18:24)
1. Worship in heaven (19:1-10)
1. The Lamb’s judgment, the destruction of the beast, the thousand years, the destruction of Satan, and the final judgment (20:11-15)
1. The new creation and the new Jerusalem (21:1-22:5)
1. Jesus’ promise to return, the witness from the angels, John’s closing words, Christ’s message to his church, the invitation and the warning (22:6-21)
### Who wrote the Book of Revelation?
The author identified himself as John. This was probably the Apostle John. He wrote the Book of Revelation while on the island of Patmos. The Romans exiled John there for teaching people about Jesus.
### What is the Book of Revelation about?
John wrote the Book of Revelation to encourage believers to remain faithful even when they are suffering. John described visions he had of Satan and his followers fighting against and killing believers. In the visions God causes many terrible things to happen on the earth to punish wicked people. In the end, Jesus defeats Satan and his followers. Then Jesus comforts those who were faithful. And the believers will live forever with God in the new heavens and earth.
### How should the title of this book be translated?
Translators may choose to call this book by one of its traditional titles, “Revelation,” “The Revelation of Jesus Christ,” “The Revelation to Saint John,” or “The Apocalypse of John.” Or they may choose a possibly clearer title, such as “The Things that Jesus Christ Showed to John.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
### What type of writing is the Book of Revelation?
John used a special style of writing to describe his visions. John described what he saw by using many symbols. This style of writing is called symbolic prophecy or apocalyptic literature. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-apocalypticwriting]])
## Part 2: Important Religious and Cultural Concepts
### Are the events of Revelation past or future?
Since early Christian times, scholars have interpreted Revelation differently. Some scholars think John described events that happened during his time. Some scholars think John described events happening from his time until the return of Jesus. Other scholars think John described events that will happen in a short period of time just before Christ returns.
Translators will not need to decide how to interpret the book before they translate it. Translators should leave the prophecies in the tenses that are used in the ULT.
### Are there any other books in the Bible like Revelation?
No other book of the Bible is like the Book of Revelation. But, passages in Ezekiel, Zechariah, and especially Daniel are similar in content and style to Revelation. It may be beneficial to translate Revelation at the same time as Daniel since they have some imagery and style in common.
## Part 3: Important Translation Issues
### Does one need to understand the Book of Revelation to translate it?
One does not need to understand all of the symbols in the Book of Revelation to translate it properly. Translators should not give possible meanings for the symbols or numbers in their translation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-apocalypticwriting]])
### How are the ideas of “holy” and “sanctify” represented in Revelation in the ULT?
The scriptures use these words to indicate any one of various ideas. For this reason, it is often difficult for translators to represent them well in their versions. In translating Revelation into English, the ULT uses the following principles:
* The meaning in two passages indicates moral holiness. Here, the ULT uses “holy.” (See: 14:12; 22:11)
* Usually the meaning in Revelation indicates a simple reference to Christians without implying any particular role filled by them. In these cases, the ULT uses “believer” or “believers.” (See: 5:8; 8:3, 4; 11:18; 13:7; 16:6; 17:6; 18:20, 24; 19:8; 20:9)
* Sometimes the meaning implies the idea of someone or something set apart for God alone. In these cases, the ULT uses “sanctify,” “set apart,” “dedicated to,” or “reserved for.”
The UST will often be helpful as translators think about how to represent these ideas in their own versions.
### Periods of time
John referred to various periods of time in Revelation. For example, there are many references to forty-two months, seven years, and three and a half days. Some scholars think these time periods are symbolic. Other scholars think these are actual time periods. The translator should treat these time periods as referencing actual periods of time. It is then up to the interpreter to determine their significance or what they may represent.
### What are the major issues in the text of the Book of Revelation?
For the following verses, some modern versions of the Bible differ from older versions. The ULT text has the modern reading and puts the older reading in a footnote. If a translation of the Bible exists in the general region, translators should consider using the reading found in those versions. If not, translators are advised to follow the modern reading.
* “‘I am the alpha and the omega,’ says the Lord God, ‘the one who is, and who was, and who is to come, the Almighty’” (1:8). Some versions add the phrase “the Beginning and the End.”
* “the elders prostrated themselves and worshiped” (5:14). Some older versions read, “the twenty-four elders prostrated themselves and worshiped the one who lives forever and ever.”
* “so that a third of it [the earth] was burned up” (8:7). Some older versions do not include this phrase.
* “the one who is and who was” (11:17). Some versions add the phrase “and who is to come.”
* “they are blameless” (14:5). Some versions add the phrase “before the throne of God” (14:5).
* “the one who is and who was, the Holy One” (16:5). Some older versions read, “O Lord, the One who is and who was and who is to be.”
* “The nations will walk by the light of that city” (21:24). Some older versions read, “The nations that are saved will walk by the light of that city.”
* “Blessed are those who wash their robes” (22:14). Some older versions read “Blessed are those who do his commandments.”
* “God will take away his share in the tree of life and in the holy city” (22:19). Some older versions read, “God will take away his share in the book of life and in the holy city.”
(See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants]])
+REV 1 intro u1e2 0 # Revelation 01 General Notes
## Structure and formatting
This chapter explains how the Book of Revelation records the vision John received on the island of Patmos.
Some translations set quotations from the Old Testament farther to the right on the page to make them easier to read. The ULT does this with the quoted words in verse 7.
## Special concepts in this chapter
### Seven churches
John wrote this book to seven actual churches in Asia Minor, which is now the country of Turkey.
### White
The Bible often speaks of something that belongs to a person as being “white.” This is metaphor and metonym for that person living rightly and pleasing God. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/righteous]])
### “Him who is, and who was, and who is to come”
God exists now. He has always existed. He will always exist. Your language may have a different way of saying this.
## Important figures of speech in this chapter
### Blood
Blood is a metonym for death. Jesus “has released us from our sins by his blood.” John means that Jesus saved us from our sins by dying for us. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter
### “He is coming with the clouds”
Jesus went into the clouds when he went up to heaven after God raised him from the dead. When Jesus returns, he will also be “with the clouds.” It is not clear whether he will be sitting or riding on clouds or coming in the clouds or “with the clouds” in some other way. Your translation should express this in a way that is natural in your language.
### “One like a son of man”
This refers to Jesus. You should translate the words “son of man” using the same words as you did in the Gospels for when Jesus called himself the “Son of Man.”
### “The angels of the seven churches”
The word “angels” here can also mean “messengers.” This might refer to heavenly beings, or to the messengers or leaders of these seven churches. John uses the same word “angel” (singular) in verse 1 and in many other places throughout the book. Your translation should also use the same word.
REV 1 1 kv41 0 General Information: This is an introduction to the book of Revelation. It explains that it is a revelation from Jesus Christ and it gives a blessing to those who read it.
REV 1 1 ik5v τοῖς δούλοις αὐτοῦ 1 his servants This refers to people who believe in Christ.
REV 1 1 x8bu ἃ δεῖ γενέσθαι ἐν τάχει 1 what must soon take place “the events that must happen soon”
@@ -66,7 +66,7 @@ REV 1 20 d6ez writing-symlanguage ἀστέρων 1 stars These stars are symbol
REV 1 20 fl5d writing-symlanguage λυχνίας 1 lampstands The lampstands are symbols that represent the seven churches. See how you translated this in [Revelation 1:12](../01/12.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-symlanguage]])
REV 1 20 eek9 ἄγγελοι τῶν ἑπτὰ ἐκκλησιῶν 1 the angels of the seven churches Possible meanings are that these “angels” are (1) heavenly angels who protect the seven churches or (2) human messengers to the seven churches, either messengers who went from John to the churches or the leaders of those churches.
REV 1 20 e25n ἑπτὰ ἐκκλησιῶν 1 seven churches This refers to seven churches that actually existed in Asia Minor at that time. See how you translated this in [Revelation 1:11](../01/11.md).
-REV 2 intro zps2 0 # Revelation 02 General Notes
## Structure and formatting
Chapters 2 and 3 together are usually called the “seven letters to the seven churches.” You may wish to set each letter apart. The reader can then easily see that they are separate letters.
Some translations set quotations from the Old Testament farther to the right on the page than the rest of the text. The ULT does this with the quoted words of verse 27.
## Special concepts in this chapter
### Poverty and wealth
The Christians in Smyrna were poor because they did not have much money. But they were rich spiritually because God would reward them for their suffering. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/spirit]])
### “The devil is about to”
People were about to take some of the Christians in Smyrna and throw them into prison and even kill some of them ([Revelation 2:10](../../rev/02/10.md)). John does not say who these people were. But he does speak of them harming the Christians as if Satan himself were harming them. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
### Balaam, Balak, and Jezebel
Balaam, Balak, and Jezebel were people who lived long before Jesus was born. They all tried to harm the Israelites either by cursing them or by making them want to stop obeying God.
## Important figures of speech in this chapter
### “Let the one who has an ear, hear what the Spirit is saying to the churches”
The writer knew that almost all of his readers had physical ears. The ear here is a metonym for hearing what God says and desiring to obey him. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter
### “The angel of the church”
The word **angel** here can also mean “messenger.” This might refer to the messenger or leader of the church. See how you translated “angel” in [Revelation 1:20](../../rev/01/20.md).
### “The words of the one who”
The verses with these words can be difficult to translate. They do not make complete sentences. You may need to add “These are” to the beginning of these verses. Also, Jesus used these words to speak of himself as if he were speaking of another person. Your language may not allow people to speak of themselves as if they were speaking of other people. Jesus began speaking in [Revelation 1:17](../../rev/01/17.md). He continues to speak through the end of Chapter 3.
+REV 2 intro zps2 0 # Revelation 02 General Notes
## Structure and formatting
Chapters 2 and 3 together are usually called the “seven letters to the seven churches.” You may wish to set each letter apart. The reader can then easily see that they are separate letters.
Some translations set quotations from the Old Testament farther to the right on the page than the rest of the text. The ULT does this with the quoted words of verse 27.
## Special concepts in this chapter
### Poverty and wealth
The Christians in Smyrna were poor because they did not have much money. But they were rich spiritually because God would reward them for their suffering. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/spirit]])
### “The devil is about to”
People were about to take some of the Christians in Smyrna and throw them into prison and even kill some of them ([Revelation 2:10](../../rev/02/10.md)). John does not say who these people were. But he does speak of them harming the Christians as if Satan himself were harming them. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
### Balaam, Balak, and Jezebel
Balaam, Balak, and Jezebel were people who lived long before Jesus was born. They all tried to harm the Israelites either by cursing them or by making them want to stop obeying God.
## Important figures of speech in this chapter
### “Let the one who has an ear, hear what the Spirit is saying to the churches”
The writer knew that almost all of his readers had physical ears. The ear here is a metonym for hearing what God says and desiring to obey him. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter
### “The angel of the church”
The word **angel** here can also mean “messenger.” This might refer to the messenger or leader of the church. See how you translated “angel” in [Revelation 1:20](../../rev/01/20.md).
### “The words of the one who”
The verses with these words can be difficult to translate. They do not make complete sentences. You may need to add “These are” to the beginning of these verses. Also, Jesus used these words to speak of himself as if he were speaking of another person. Your language may not allow people to speak of themselves as if they were speaking of other people. Jesus began speaking in [Revelation 1:17](../../rev/01/17.md). He continues to speak through the end of Chapter 3.
REV 2 1 mn8x 0 General Information: This is the beginning of the Son of Man’s message to the angel of the church in Ephesus.
REV 2 1 kq5r τῷ ἀγγέλῳ 1 the angel Possible meanings are that this “angel” is (1) a heavenly angels who protect this church or (2) a human messenger to the church, either a messenger who went from John to the church or the leader of the churches. See how you translated “angel” in [Revelation 1:20](../01/20.md)
REV 2 1 i92a writing-symlanguage ἀστέρας 1 stars These stars are symbols. They represent the seven angels of the seven churches. See how you translated this in [Revelation 1:16](../01/16.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-symlanguage]])
@@ -155,7 +155,7 @@ REV 2 28 c1zc καὶ δώσω αὐτῷ 1 I will also give him Here, **him**
REV 2 28 g5iy writing-symlanguage τὸν ἀστέρα τὸν πρωϊνόν 1 morning star This is a bright star that sometimes appears early in the morning just before dawn. It was a symbol of victory. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-symlanguage]])
REV 2 29 ilk8 figs-metonymy ὁ ἔχων οὖς, ἀκουσάτω 1 Let the one who has an ear, hear Jesus is emphasizing that what he has just said is important and may take some effort to understand and put into practice. The phrase **has an ear** here is a metonym for the willingness to understand and obey. See how you translated this phrase in [Revelation 2:7](../02/07.md). Alternate translation: “Let the one who is willing to listen, listen to” or “The one who is willing to understand, let him understand and obey” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
REV 2 29 ikm8 figs-123person ὁ…ἀκουσάτω 1 Let the one…hear Since Jesus is speaking directly to his audience, you may prefer to use the second person here. See how you translated this phrase in [Revelation 2:7](../02/07.md). Alternate translation: “If you are willing to listen, listen to” or “If you are willing to understand, then understand and obey” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]])
-REV 3 intro q1l9 0 # Revelation 03 General Notes
## Structure and formatting
Chapters 2 and 3 together are usually called the “seven letters to the seven churches.” You may wish to set each letter apart. The reader can then easily see that they are separate letters.
Some translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with verse 7.
## Special concepts in this chapter
### Seven spirits of God
These spirits are the seven spirits of [Revelation 1:4](../../rev/01/04.md).
### Seven stars
These stars are the seven stars of [Revelation 1:20](../../rev/01/20.md).
## Important metaphors in this chapter
### Look, I am standing at the door and am knocking
Jesus speaks of his desire to have the Christians in Laodicea obey him as if he were a man asking people in a house to allow him to enter and eat with them ([Revelation 3:20](../../rev/03/20.md)). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
### “Let the one who has an ear, hear what the Spirit is saying to the churches”
The speaker knew that almost all of his readers had physical ears. The ear here is a metonym for hearing what God says and desiring to obey him. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter
### “The angel of the church”
The word **angel** here can also mean “messenger.” This might refer to the messenger or leader of the church. See how you translated “angel” in [Revelation 1:20](../../rev/01/20.md).
### “The words of the one who”
The verses with these words can be difficult to translate. They do not make complete sentences. You may need to add “These are” to the beginning of these verses. Also, Jesus used these words to speak of himself as if he were speaking of another person. Your language may not allow people to speak of themselves as if they were speaking of other people. Jesus began speaking in [Revelation 1:17](../../rev/01/17.md). He continues to speak through the end of Chapter 3.
+REV 3 intro q1l9 0 # Revelation 03 General Notes
## Structure and formatting
Chapters 2 and 3 together are usually called the “seven letters to the seven churches.” You may wish to set each letter apart. The reader can then easily see that they are separate letters.
Some translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with verse 7.
## Special concepts in this chapter
### Seven spirits of God
These spirits are the seven spirits of [Revelation 1:4](../../rev/01/04.md).
### Seven stars
These stars are the seven stars of [Revelation 1:20](../../rev/01/20.md).
## Important metaphors in this chapter
### Look, I am standing at the door and am knocking
Jesus speaks of his desire to have the Christians in Laodicea obey him as if he were a man asking people in a house to allow him to enter and eat with them ([Revelation 3:20](../../rev/03/20.md)). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
### “Let the one who has an ear, hear what the Spirit is saying to the churches”
The speaker knew that almost all of his readers had physical ears. The ear here is a metonym for hearing what God says and desiring to obey him. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter
### “The angel of the church”
The word **angel** here can also mean “messenger.” This might refer to the messenger or leader of the church. See how you translated “angel” in [Revelation 1:20](../../rev/01/20.md).
### “The words of the one who”
The verses with these words can be difficult to translate. They do not make complete sentences. You may need to add “These are” to the beginning of these verses. Also, Jesus used these words to speak of himself as if he were speaking of another person. Your language may not allow people to speak of themselves as if they were speaking of other people. Jesus began speaking in [Revelation 1:17](../../rev/01/17.md). He continues to speak through the end of Chapter 3.
REV 3 1 k6b7 0 General Information: This is the beginning of the Son of Man’s message to the angel of the church in Sardis.
REV 3 1 u1zs τῷ ἀγγέλῳ 1 the angel Possible meanings are that this “angel” is (1) a heavenly angels who protect this church or (2) a human messenger to the church, either a messenger who went from John to the church or the leader of the churches. See how you translated “angel” in [Revelation 1:20](../01/20.md).
REV 3 1 q7n9 translate-names Σάρδεσιν 1 Sardis This is the name of a city in the western part of Asia that today is modern Turkey. See how you translated this in [Revelation 1:11](../01/11.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
@@ -221,7 +221,7 @@ REV 3 21 mn2c figs-metonymy καθίσαι μετ’ ἐμοῦ ἐν τῷ θρ
REV 3 21 un17 guidelines-sonofgodprinciples τοῦ Πατρός μου 1 my Father This is an important title for God that describes the relationship between God and Jesus. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples]])
REV 3 22 m13x figs-metonymy ὁ ἔχων οὖς, ἀκουσάτω 1 Let the one who has an ear, hear Jesus is emphasizing that what he has just said is important and may take some effort to understand and put into practice. The phrase **has an ear** here is a metonym for the willingness to understand and obey. See how you translated this phrase in [Revelation 2:7](../02/07.md). Alternate translation: “Let the one who is willing to listen, listen to” or “The one who is willing to understand, let him understand and obey” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
REV 3 22 mjv6 figs-123person ὁ…ἀκουσάτω 1 Let the one…hear Since Jesus is speaking directly to his audience, you may prefer to use the second person here. See how you translated this phrase in [Revelation 2:7](../02/07.md). Alternate translation: “If you are willing to listen, listen to” or “If you are willing to understand, then understand and obey” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]])
-REV 4 intro cl9f 0 # Revelation 04 General Notes
## Structure and formatting
Some translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with verses 8 and 11.
John has finished describing the letters to the churches. He now begins to describe a vision that God showed him.
## Special concepts in this chapter
### Jasper, carnelian, and emerald
These words refer to kinds of special stones that the people in John’s day considered valuable. It may be difficult for you to translate these words if people in your culture do not value special kinds of stones.
### Twenty-four elders
Elders are church leaders. Twenty-four elders may be symbolic of the whole church through the ages. There were twelve tribes in Old Testament Israel and twelve apostles in the New Testament church. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-apocalypticwriting]])
### Seven spirits of God
These spirits are the seven spirits of [Revelation 1:4](../../rev/01/04.md).
### Giving glory to God
God’s glory is the great beauty and radiant majesty that God has because he is God. Other Bible writers describe it as if it were a light so bright that no one can look at it. No one can give God this kind of glory, because it is already his. When people give glory to God or when God receives glory, people say that God has the glory that is his, that it is right for God to have that glory, and that people should worship God because he has that glory. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/glory]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/worthy]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/worship]])
## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter
### Difficult images
Such things as bolts of lightning coming from the throne, lamps that are spirits, and a sea in front of the throne may be difficult to imagine, and so the words for them may be difficult to translate. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-apocalypticwriting]])
+REV 4 intro cl9f 0 # Revelation 04 General Notes
## Structure and formatting
Some translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with verses 8 and 11.
John has finished describing the letters to the churches. He now begins to describe a vision that God showed him.
## Special concepts in this chapter
### Jasper, carnelian, and emerald
These words refer to kinds of special stones that the people in John’s day considered valuable. It may be difficult for you to translate these words if people in your culture do not value special kinds of stones.
### Twenty-four elders
Elders are church leaders. Twenty-four elders may be symbolic of the whole church through the ages. There were twelve tribes in Old Testament Israel and twelve apostles in the New Testament church. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-apocalypticwriting]])
### Seven spirits of God
These spirits are the seven spirits of [Revelation 1:4](../../rev/01/04.md).
### Giving glory to God
God’s glory is the great beauty and radiant majesty that God has because he is God. Other Bible writers describe it as if it were a light so bright that no one can look at it. No one can give God this kind of glory, because it is already his. When people give glory to God or when God receives glory, people say that God has the glory that is his, that it is right for God to have that glory, and that people should worship God because he has that glory. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/glory]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/worthy]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/worship]])
## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter
### Difficult images
Such things as bolts of lightning coming from the throne, lamps that are spirits, and a sea in front of the throne may be difficult to imagine, and so the words for them may be difficult to translate. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-apocalypticwriting]])
REV 4 1 ws2q 0 General Information: John begins to describe his vision of the throne of God.
REV 4 1 vh4i μετὰ ταῦτα 1 After these things “After I had just seen these things” ([Revelation 2:1-3:22](../02/01.md))
REV 4 1 z8r8 figs-metaphor θύρα ἠνεῳγμένη ἐν τῷ οὐρανῷ 1 an open door in heaven This expression stands for the ability that God gave John to see into heaven, at least by means of a vision. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
@@ -251,7 +251,7 @@ REV 4 10 sly8 translate-symaction βαλοῦσιν τοὺς στεφάνους
REV 4 10 wvf9 βαλοῦσιν 1 lay Possible meanings are (1) to place or (2) to throw down forcibly, as of something worthless (“throw,” [Revelation 2:22](../02/22.md)). The reader should understand that the elders are acting respectfully.
REV 4 11 idj1 ὁ Κύριος καὶ ὁ Θεὸς ἡμῶν 1 our Lord and our God “our Lord and God.” This is one person, the one who was sitting on the throne.
REV 4 11 q91l figs-metonymy λαβεῖν τὴν δόξαν καὶ τὴν τιμὴν καὶ τὴν δύναμιν 1 to receive the glory and the honor and the power These are things that God always has. Being praised for having them is spoken of as receiving them. Alternate translation: “to be praised for your glory, honor, and power” or “for everyone to praise you because you are glorious, honorable, and powerful” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
-REV 5 intro g7ey 0 # Revelation 05 General Notes
## Structure and formatting
Some translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this in verses 9-13.
## Special concepts in this chapter
### Sealed scroll
Kings and important people in John’s time wrote important documents on large pieces of paper or animal skin. They then rolled them up and sealed them with wax so they would stay closed. Only the person to whom the document was written had the authority to open it by breaking the seal. In this chapter, “the one who was seated on the throne” had written the scroll. Only the person called “the Lion of the tribe of Judah, the Root of David” and “the Lamb” had the authority to open it. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/other/scroll]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/authority]])
### Twenty-four elders
Elders are church leaders. Twenty-four elders may be symbolic of the whole church through the ages. There were twelve tribes in Old Testament Israel and twelve apostles in the New Testament church. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-apocalypticwriting]])
### Christian prayers
The prayers of Christians are described as incense. Christian prayers have a good smell to God. He is pleased when Christians pray.
### Seven spirits of God
These spirits are the seven spirits of [Revelation 1:4](../../rev/01/04.md).
## Important figures of speech in this chapter
### Metaphors
The “Lion of the tribe of Judah” and the “Root of David” are metaphors that refer to Jesus. Jesus descended from the tribe of Judah and the family of David. Lions are fierce, and all animals and people are afraid of them, so they are a metaphor for a king whom everyone obeys. The words **Root of David** speak of Israel’s King David as if he were a seed that God had planted and of Jesus as if he were a root growing from that seed. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
+REV 5 intro g7ey 0 # Revelation 05 General Notes
## Structure and formatting
Some translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this in verses 9-13.
## Special concepts in this chapter
### Sealed scroll
Kings and important people in John’s time wrote important documents on large pieces of paper or animal skin. They then rolled them up and sealed them with wax so they would stay closed. Only the person to whom the document was written had the authority to open it by breaking the seal. In this chapter, “the one who was seated on the throne” had written the scroll. Only the person called “the Lion of the tribe of Judah, the Root of David” and “the Lamb” had the authority to open it. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/other/scroll]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/authority]])
### Twenty-four elders
Elders are church leaders. Twenty-four elders may be symbolic of the whole church through the ages. There were twelve tribes in Old Testament Israel and twelve apostles in the New Testament church. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-apocalypticwriting]])
### Christian prayers
The prayers of Christians are described as incense. Christian prayers have a good smell to God. He is pleased when Christians pray.
### Seven spirits of God
These spirits are the seven spirits of [Revelation 1:4](../../rev/01/04.md).
## Important figures of speech in this chapter
### Metaphors
The “Lion of the tribe of Judah” and the “Root of David” are metaphors that refer to Jesus. Jesus descended from the tribe of Judah and the family of David. Lions are fierce, and all animals and people are afraid of them, so they are a metaphor for a king whom everyone obeys. The words **Root of David** speak of Israel’s King David as if he were a seed that God had planted and of Jesus as if he were a root growing from that seed. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
REV 5 1 txr5 0 Connecting Statement: John continues to describe what he saw in his vision of the throne of God.
REV 5 1 w3yi καὶ εἶδον 1 Then I saw “After I saw those things, I saw”
REV 5 1 u3br τοῦ καθημένου ἐπὶ τοῦ θρόνου 1 the one who was seated on the throne This is the same “one” as in [Revelation 4:2-3](../04/02.md).
@@ -285,7 +285,7 @@ REV 5 12 gnv1 ἄξιόν ἐστιν τὸ Ἀρνίον τὸ ἐσφαγμέ
REV 5 12 mt28 figs-metonymy λαβεῖν τὴν δύναμιν, καὶ πλοῦτον, καὶ σοφίαν, καὶ ἰσχὺν, καὶ τιμὴν, καὶ δόξαν, καὶ εὐλογίαν 1 to receive power, wealth, wisdom, strength, honor, glory, and praise These are all things that the Lamb has. Being praised for having them is spoken of as receiving them. This can be restated to remove the abstract nouns. See how you translated a similar sentence in [Revelation 4:11](../04/11.md). Alternate translation: “for everyone to honor, glorify, and praise him because he is powerful, wealthy, wise, and strong” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
REV 5 13 sad6 figs-merism ἐν τῷ οὐρανῷ, καὶ ἐπὶ τῆς γῆς, καὶ ὑποκάτω τῆς γῆς 1 in heaven and on the earth and under the earth This means everywhere: the place where God and the angels live, the place where people and animals live, and the place where those who have died are. See how you translated this in [Revelation 5:3](../05/03.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-merism]])
REV 5 13 t3zy τῷ καθημένῳ ἐπὶ τῷ θρόνῳ καὶ τῷ Ἀρνίῳ 1 To the one who sits on the throne and to the Lamb “May he who sits on the throne and the Lamb have”
-REV 6 intro zkn7 0 # Revelation 06 General Notes
## Structure and formatting
The author describes what happened after the Lamb opens each of the first six seals. The Lamb does not open the seventh seal until Chapter 8.
## Special concepts in this chapter
### Seven Seals
Kings and important people in John’s time wrote important documents on large pieces of paper or animal skin. They then rolled them up and sealed them with wax so they would stay closed. Only the person to whom the document was written had the authority to open it by breaking the seal. In this chapter, the Lamb opens the seals. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-apocalypticwriting]])
### The Four Horsemen
As the Lamb opens each of the first four seals, the author describes horsemen riding different colored horses. The colors of the horses seem to symbolize how the rider will affect the earth.
## Important figures of speech in this chapter
### The Lamb
This refers to Jesus. In this chapter, it is also a title for Jesus. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/lamb]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
### Similes
In verses 12-14, the author uses several similes to try to describe the images he sees in the vision. He compares the images to everyday things. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-simile]])
+REV 6 intro zkn7 0 # Revelation 06 General Notes
## Structure and formatting
The author describes what happened after the Lamb opens each of the first six seals. The Lamb does not open the seventh seal until Chapter 8.
## Special concepts in this chapter
### Seven Seals
Kings and important people in John’s time wrote important documents on large pieces of paper or animal skin. They then rolled them up and sealed them with wax so they would stay closed. Only the person to whom the document was written had the authority to open it by breaking the seal. In this chapter, the Lamb opens the seals. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-apocalypticwriting]])
### The Four Horsemen
As the Lamb opens each of the first four seals, the author describes horsemen riding different colored horses. The colors of the horses seem to symbolize how the rider will affect the earth.
## Important figures of speech in this chapter
### The Lamb
This refers to Jesus. In this chapter, it is also a title for Jesus. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/lamb]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
### Similes
In verses 12-14, the author uses several similes to try to describe the images he sees in the vision. He compares the images to everyday things. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-simile]])
REV 6 1 i392 0 Connecting Statement: John continues to describe the events that happened before the throne of God. The Lamb begins to open the seals on the scroll.
REV 6 1 be7p ἔρχου! 1 Come! This is a command to one person, apparently the rider of the white horse who is spoken of in verse 2.
REV 6 2 t2qg figs-activepassive ἐδόθη αὐτῷ στέφανος 1 he was given a crown This kind of crown was a likeness of wreaths of olive branches or laurel leaves, probably hammered out in gold. Examples actually made of leaves were given to victorious athletes to wear on their heads. This can be translated with an active verb. Alternate translation: “he received a crown” or “God gave him a crown (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
@@ -330,7 +330,7 @@ REV 6 17 bd8v figs-metonymy ἦλθεν ἡ ἡμέρα ἡ μεγάλη τῆς
REV 6 17 i7t4 figs-metaphor ἦλθεν 1 has come Existing now is spoken of as having come. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
REV 6 17 cq9e ὀργῆς αὐτῶν 1 their wrath “Their” refers to the one on the throne and the Lamb.
REV 6 17 r1ta figs-metonymy τίς δύναται σταθῆναι? 1 Who is able to stand? Surviving, or staying alive, is spoken of as standing. This question is used to express their great sadness and fear that no one will be able to survive when God punishes them. Alternate translation: “No one can survive” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
-REV 7 intro f27i 0 # Revelation 07 General Notes
## Structure and formatting
Scholars have interpreted parts of this chapter in many different ways. Translators do not need to fully understand what this chapter means to accurately translate its contents. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-apocalypticwriting]])
It is important to accurately translate the large numbers in this chapter. The number 144,000 is twelve times twelve thousand.
Translators should be aware that the tribes of the people of Israel are not listed in this chapter the same as they are generally listed in the Old Testament.
Some translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with verses 5-8 and 15-17.
## Special concepts in this chapter
### Worship
God saves his people and keeps them through times of trouble. His people respond by worshipping him. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/worship]])
## Important figures of speech in this chapter
### The Lamb
This refers to Jesus. In this chapter, it is also a title for Jesus. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+REV 7 intro f27i 0 # Revelation 07 General Notes
## Structure and formatting
Scholars have interpreted parts of this chapter in many different ways. Translators do not need to fully understand what this chapter means to accurately translate its contents. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-apocalypticwriting]])
It is important to accurately translate the large numbers in this chapter. The number 144,000 is twelve times twelve thousand.
Translators should be aware that the tribes of the people of Israel are not listed in this chapter the same as they are generally listed in the Old Testament.
Some translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with verses 5-8 and 15-17.
## Special concepts in this chapter
### Worship
God saves his people and keeps them through times of trouble. His people respond by worshipping him. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/worship]])
## Important figures of speech in this chapter
### The Lamb
This refers to Jesus. In this chapter, it is also a title for Jesus. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
REV 7 1 b1yl 0 General Information: John begins to describe a vision of 144,000 servants of God who become marked with seals. Their marking takes place after the Lamb opens the sixth seal and before he opens the seventh seal.
REV 7 1 id3y τὰς τέσσαρας γωνίας τῆς γῆς 1 the four corners of the earth The earth is spoken of as if it were flat and square like a sheet of paper. The phrase **the four corners** refers to the north, south, east, and west.
REV 7 2 sgq7 figs-metonymy σφραγῖδα Θεοῦ ζῶντος 1 the seal of the living God The word **seal** here refers to a tool that is used to press a mark onto a wax seal. In this case the tool would be used to put a mark on God’s people. Alternate translation: “the marker” or “stamp” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
@@ -390,7 +390,7 @@ REV 8 12 z936 figs-metaphor ἐπλήγη τὸ τρίτον τοῦ ἡλίου
REV 8 12 ukh6 σκοτισθῇ τὸ τρίτον αὐτῶν 1 a third of them turned dark Possible meanings are (1) “one third of the time they were dark” or (2) “one third of the sun, one third of the moon, and one third of the stars became dark”
REV 8 12 t1ag ἡ ἡμέρα μὴ φάνῃ τὸ τρίτον αὐτῆς, καὶ ἡ νὺξ ὁμοίως 1 a third of the day and a third of the night had no light “there was no light during one third of the day and one third of the night” or “they did not shine during one third of the day and one third of the night”
REV 8 13 x375 figs-activepassive ἐκ τῶν λοιπῶν φωνῶν τῆς σάλπιγγος…σαλπίζειν 1 because of the remaining trumpet…angels This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: “because the three angels who have not yet sounded their trumpets are about to sound them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
-REV 9 intro sq5c 0 # Revelation 09 General Notes
## Structure and formatting
In this chapter, John continues to describe what happens when angels sound seven trumpets. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-apocalypticwriting]])
### Woe
John describes several “woes” in the Book of Revelation. This chapter begins to describe three “woes” announced at the end of Chapter 8.
## Special concepts in this chapter
### Animal imagery
This chapter includes several animals: locusts, scorpions, horses, lions, and snakes. Animals convey different qualities or traits. For example, a lion is powerful and dangerous. Translators should use the same animals in their translation if possible. If the animal is unknown, one with similar qualities or traits should be used.
### Bottomless pit
This image is seen several times in the Book of Revelation. It is a picture of hell as being inescapable and the opposite direction as heaven. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/hell]])
### Abaddon and Apollyon
“Abaddon” is a Hebrew word. “Apollyon” is a Greek word. Both words mean “Destroyer.” John used the sounds of the Hebrew word and wrote them with Greek letters. The ULT and UST write the sounds of both words with English letters. Translators are encouraged to transliterate these words using the letters of the target language. The original Greek readers would have understood “Apollyon” to mean “Destroyer.” So translators may also supply what it means in the text or in a footnote. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-transliterate]])
### Repentance
Despite great signs, people are described as not repenting and so remain in their sin. People refusing to repent are also mentioned in Chapter 16. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/repent]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/sin]])
## Important figures of speech in this chapter
### Simile
John uses many similes in this chapter. They help to describe the images that he sees in his vision. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-simile]])
+REV 9 intro sq5c 0 # Revelation 09 General Notes
## Structure and formatting
In this chapter, John continues to describe what happens when angels sound seven trumpets. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-apocalypticwriting]])
### Woe
John describes several “woes” in the Book of Revelation. This chapter begins to describe three “woes” announced at the end of Chapter 8.
## Special concepts in this chapter
### Animal imagery
This chapter includes several animals: locusts, scorpions, horses, lions, and snakes. Animals convey different qualities or traits. For example, a lion is powerful and dangerous. Translators should use the same animals in their translation if possible. If the animal is unknown, one with similar qualities or traits should be used.
### Bottomless pit
This image is seen several times in the Book of Revelation. It is a picture of hell as being inescapable and the opposite direction as heaven. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/hell]])
### Abaddon and Apollyon
“Abaddon” is a Hebrew word. “Apollyon” is a Greek word. Both words mean “Destroyer.” John used the sounds of the Hebrew word and wrote them with Greek letters. The ULT and UST write the sounds of both words with English letters. Translators are encouraged to transliterate these words using the letters of the target language. The original Greek readers would have understood “Apollyon” to mean “Destroyer.” So translators may also supply what it means in the text or in a footnote. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-transliterate]])
### Repentance
Despite great signs, people are described as not repenting and so remain in their sin. People refusing to repent are also mentioned in Chapter 16. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/repent]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/sin]])
## Important figures of speech in this chapter
### Simile
John uses many similes in this chapter. They help to describe the images that he sees in his vision. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-simile]])
REV 9 1 d26c 0 Connecting Statement: The fifth of the seven angels begins to sound his trumpet.
REV 9 1 jim6 εἶδον ἀστέρα ἐκ τοῦ οὐρανοῦ πεπτωκότα 1 I saw a star from heaven that had fallen John saw the star after it had fallen. He did not watch if fall.
REV 9 1 v12j ἡ κλεὶς τοῦ φρέατος τῆς Ἀβύσσου 1 the key to the shaft of the bottomless pit “the key that unlocks the shaft of the bottomless pit”
@@ -460,7 +460,7 @@ REV 10 8 tkq7 ἤκουσα 1 I heard John heard
REV 10 9 x13b λέγει μοι 1 He said to me “The angel said to me”
REV 10 9 tg31 πικρανεῖ 1 make…bitter “make…sour” or “make…acid.” This refers to a bad taste from the stomach after eating something that is not good.
REV 10 11 ahb4 figs-metonymy γλώσσαις 1 languages This refers to the people who speak the languages. Alternate translation: “many language communities” or “many groups of people who speak their own languages” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
-REV 11 intro s117 0 # Revelation 11 General Notes
## Structure and formatting
Some translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with verses 15 and 17-18.
### Woe
John describes several “woes” in the book of Revelation. This chapter describes a second and third “woe” announced at the end of Chapter 8.
## Special concepts in this chapter
### Gentiles
The word “Gentiles” here refers to ungodly people groups and not Gentile Christians. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/godly]])
### Two witnesses
Scholars have suggested many different ideas about these two witnesses. Translators do not need to understand this passage to accurately translate it. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/prophet]])
### Bottomless pit
This image is seen several times in the Book of Revelation. It is a picture of hell as being inescapable and the opposite direction as heaven. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/hell]])
+REV 11 intro s117 0 # Revelation 11 General Notes
## Structure and formatting
Some translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with verses 15 and 17-18.
### Woe
John describes several “woes” in the book of Revelation. This chapter describes a second and third “woe” announced at the end of Chapter 8.
## Special concepts in this chapter
### Gentiles
The word “Gentiles” here refers to ungodly people groups and not Gentile Christians. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/godly]])
### Two witnesses
Scholars have suggested many different ideas about these two witnesses. Translators do not need to understand this passage to accurately translate it. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/prophet]])
### Bottomless pit
This image is seen several times in the Book of Revelation. It is a picture of hell as being inescapable and the opposite direction as heaven. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/hell]])
REV 11 1 ba9b 0 General Information: John begins to describe a vision about receiving a measuring rod and two witnesses that God appointed. This vision also takes place between the blowing of the sixth and seventh trumpets.
REV 11 1 lkn6 figs-activepassive ἐδόθη μοι κάλαμος 1 A reed was given to me This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: “Someone gave me a reed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
REV 11 1 tl86 ἐδόθη μοι…λέγων 1 given to me…I was told The words **me** and **I** refer to John.
@@ -521,7 +521,7 @@ REV 11 19 c7pd figs-activepassive καὶ ἠνοίγη ὁ ναὸς τοῦ Θ
REV 11 19 d9z7 figs-activepassive ὤφθη ἡ κιβωτὸς τῆς διαθήκης τοῦ Κυρίου ἐν τῷ ναῷ αὐτοῦ 1 the ark of his covenant was seen within his temple This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: “I saw the ark of his covenant in his temple” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
REV 11 19 b6ly ἀστραπαὶ 1 flashes of lightning Use your language’s way of describing what lightning looks like each time it appears. See how you translated this in [Revelation 4:5](../04/05.md).
REV 11 19 ap5g φωναὶ, καὶ βρονταὶ 1 rumblings, crashes of thunder These are the loud noises that thunder makes. Use your language’s way of describing the sound of thunder. See how you translated this in [Revelation 4:5](../04/05.md).
-REV 12 intro cq7x 0 # Revelation 12 General Notes
## Structure and formatting
Some translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with verses 10-12.
## Special concepts in this chapter
### Serpent
The Book of Revelation uses imagery from the Old Testament. For example, John refers to Satan as the serpent. This image comes from the account of the Garden of Eden when Satan tempted Eve. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter
### “A great sign was seen in heaven”
By using the passive voice here, John does not say who saw this great sign in heaven. The translation may be difficult when the subject is unclear, if your language does not have a passive voice. Many English translations use the past tense here and say “A great sign appeared in heaven.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-apocalypticwriting]])
+REV 12 intro cq7x 0 # Revelation 12 General Notes
## Structure and formatting
Some translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with verses 10-12.
## Special concepts in this chapter
### Serpent
The Book of Revelation uses imagery from the Old Testament. For example, John refers to Satan as the serpent. This image comes from the account of the Garden of Eden when Satan tempted Eve. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter
### “A great sign was seen in heaven”
By using the passive voice here, John does not say who saw this great sign in heaven. The translation may be difficult when the subject is unclear, if your language does not have a passive voice. Many English translations use the past tense here and say “A great sign appeared in heaven.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-apocalypticwriting]])
REV 12 1 n4ii 0 General Information: John begins to describe a woman who appears in his vision.
REV 12 1 d7pw figs-activepassive σημεῖον μέγα ὤφθη ἐν τῷ οὐρανῷ 1 A great sign appeared in heaven This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: “A great sign appeared in heaven” or “I, John, saw a great sign in heaven” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
REV 12 1 j9yl figs-activepassive γυνὴ περιβεβλημένη τὸν ἥλιον, καὶ ἡ σελήνη ὑποκάτω τῶν ποδῶν αὐτῆς 1 a woman clothed with the sun, and with the moon under her feet This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: “A woman who was wearing the sun and had the moon under her feet” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
@@ -562,7 +562,7 @@ REV 12 15 a9wh αὐτὴν ποταμοφόρητον 1 to sweep her away “t
REV 12 16 i4u5 figs-personification ἤνοιξεν ἡ γῆ τὸ στόμα αὐτῆς, καὶ κατέπιεν τὸν ποταμὸν, ὃν ἔβαλεν ὁ δράκων ἐκ τοῦ στόματος αὐτοῦ 1 The earth opened its mouth and swallowed the river that the dragon was pouring out of his mouth The earth is spoken of as if it were a living thing, and a hole in the earth is spoken of as if it were a mouth that could drink up the water. Alternate translation: “A hole in the ground opened up and the water went down into the hole” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
REV 12 16 lgt7 writing-symlanguage δράκων 1 dragon This was a large, fierce reptile, like a lizard. For Jewish people, it was a symbol of evil and chaos. The dragon is also identified in verse 9 as “the devil or Satan.” See how you translated this in [Revelation 12:3](../12/03.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-symlanguage]])
REV 12 17 t6jf ἐχόντων τὴν μαρτυρίαν Ἰησοῦ 1 hold to the testimony about Jesus The word **testimony** can be translated as a verb. Alternate translation: “continue to testify about Jesus”
-REV 13 intro c9mw 0 # Revelation 13 General Notes
## Structure and formatting
Some translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with the words of verse 10, which are from the Old Testament.
## Important figures of speech in this chapter
### Similes
John uses many similes in this chapter. They help to describe the images that he sees in his vision. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-simile]])
## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter
### Unknown animals
John uses different animals to try to describe what he saw. Some of these animals may not be known in the target language. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
+REV 13 intro c9mw 0 # Revelation 13 General Notes
## Structure and formatting
Some translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with the words of verse 10, which are from the Old Testament.
## Important figures of speech in this chapter
### Similes
John uses many similes in this chapter. They help to describe the images that he sees in his vision. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-simile]])
## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter
### Unknown animals
John uses different animals to try to describe what he saw. Some of these animals may not be known in the target language. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
REV 13 1 su49 0 General Information: John begins to describe a beast who appears in his vision. The word **I** here refers to John.
REV 13 2 k6qh writing-symlanguage δράκων 1 dragon This was a large, fierce reptile, like a lizard. For Jewish people, it was a symbol of evil and chaos. The dragon is also identified as “the devil or Satan.” See how you translated this in [Revelation 12:3](../12/03.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-symlanguage]])
REV 13 2 xa3a ἔδωκεν αὐτῷ ὁ δράκων τὴν δύναμιν αὐτοῦ 1 The dragon gave his power to it The dragon made the beast as powerful as he was. He did not lose his power, however, by giving it to the beast.
@@ -669,7 +669,7 @@ REV 14 20 b1bw ληνὸς 1 winepress This is “the great wine vat” of [Rev
REV 14 20 xt4z ἄχρι τῶν χαλινῶν τῶν ἵππων 1 up to the height of a horse’s bridle “as high as the bridle in a horse’s mouth”
REV 14 20 m2i9 τῶν χαλινῶν 1 bridle a device made of leather straps that goes around a horse’s head and is used for directing the horse
REV 14 20 gdl8 translate-numbers σταδίων χιλίων ἑξακοσίων 1 1,600 stadia “one thousand six hundred stadia” or “sixteen hundred stadia.” A “stadium” is 185 meters. In modern measures this would be about “300 kilometers” or “200 miles.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-numbers]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-bdistance]])
-REV 15 intro zxt7 0 # Revelation 15 General Notes
## Structure and formatting
In this chapter, John describes events and pictures that occur in heaven.
Some translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with verses 3-4.
## Special concepts in this chapter
### “Victorious over the beast”
These people are spiritually victorious. While most spiritual battles cannot be seen, the Book of Revelation pictures spiritual battles as openly occurring. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/spirit]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-apocalypticwriting]])
### “The temple having the tent of witness, was open in heaven”
Scripture elsewhere indicates the earthly temple copied God’s perfect dwelling place in heaven. Here John seems to refer to God’s heavenly dwelling place or temple. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/heaven]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-apocalypticwriting]])
### Songs
The Book of Revelation often describes heaven as a place where people sing. They worship God with songs. This illustrates that heaven is a place where God is always worshiped.
+REV 15 intro zxt7 0 # Revelation 15 General Notes
## Structure and formatting
In this chapter, John describes events and pictures that occur in heaven.
Some translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with verses 3-4.
## Special concepts in this chapter
### “Victorious over the beast”
These people are spiritually victorious. While most spiritual battles cannot be seen, the Book of Revelation pictures spiritual battles as openly occurring. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/spirit]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-apocalypticwriting]])
### “The temple having the tent of witness, was open in heaven”
Scripture elsewhere indicates the earthly temple copied God’s perfect dwelling place in heaven. Here John seems to refer to God’s heavenly dwelling place or temple. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/heaven]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-apocalypticwriting]])
### Songs
The Book of Revelation often describes heaven as a place where people sing. They worship God with songs. This illustrates that heaven is a place where God is always worshiped.
REV 15 1 p98c 0 General Information: This verse is a summary of what will happen in 15:6-16:21.
REV 15 1 l345 figs-doublet μέγα καὶ θαυμαστόν 1 great and marvelous These words have similar meanings and are used for emphasis. Alternate translation: “something that greatly amazed me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
REV 15 1 w6lf ἀγγέλους ἑπτὰ ἔχοντας πληγὰς ἑπτὰ 1 seven angels with seven plagues “seven angels who had authority to send seven plagues on the earth”
@@ -693,7 +693,7 @@ REV 15 6 w9kw ζώνας 1 sashes A sash is a decorative piece of cloth worn on
REV 15 7 s4dj τῶν τεσσάρων ζῴων 1 the four living creatures “living being” or “living thing.” See how you translated “living creatures” in [Revelation 4:6](../04/06.md)
REV 15 7 z1wz figs-explicit ἑπτὰ φιάλας χρυσᾶς, γεμούσας τοῦ θυμοῦ τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 seven golden bowls full of the wrath of God The image of the wine in the bowls can be stated clearly. The word **wrath** here refers to punishment. The wine is a symbol for punishment. Alternate translation: “seven gold bowls full of the wine that represents the wrath of God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]] [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-symlanguage]])
REV 15 8 s67r ἄχρι τελεσθῶσιν αἱ ἑπτὰ πληγαὶ τῶν ἑπτὰ ἀγγέλων 1 until the seven plagues of the seven angels were completed “until the seven angels finished sending the seven plagues to the earth”
-REV 16 intro v1cm 0 # Revelation 16 General Notes
## Structure and formatting
This chapter continues the vision of chapter 15. Together they give the seven plagues that complete the wrath of God. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/wrath]])
Some translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with verses 5-7.
## Special concepts in this chapter
### “I heard a loud voice call out of the temple”
This is the same temple that was mentioned in chapter 15.
### Seven bowls of God’s wrath
This chapter reveals severe judgments. They are pictured as angels pouring out seven bowls of God’s wrath. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter
The tone of this chapter is meant to astonish the reader. Translations should not minimize the vivid language expressed in this chapter.
### Armageddon
This is a Hebrew word. It is the name of a place. John used the sounds of the Hebrew word and wrote them with Greek letters. Translators are encouraged to transliterate it using the letters of the target language. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-transliterate]])
+REV 16 intro v1cm 0 # Revelation 16 General Notes
## Structure and formatting
This chapter continues the vision of chapter 15. Together they give the seven plagues that complete the wrath of God. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/wrath]])
Some translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with verses 5-7.
## Special concepts in this chapter
### “I heard a loud voice call out of the temple”
This is the same temple that was mentioned in chapter 15.
### Seven bowls of God’s wrath
This chapter reveals severe judgments. They are pictured as angels pouring out seven bowls of God’s wrath. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter
The tone of this chapter is meant to astonish the reader. Translations should not minimize the vivid language expressed in this chapter.
### Armageddon
This is a Hebrew word. It is the name of a place. John used the sounds of the Hebrew word and wrote them with Greek letters. Translators are encouraged to transliterate it using the letters of the target language. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-transliterate]])
REV 16 1 nj83 0 Connecting Statement: John continues to describe the part of the vision about the seven angels with the seven plagues. The seven plagues are the seven bowls of God’s wrath.
REV 16 1 t995 ἤκουσα 1 I heard The word **I** refers to John.
REV 16 1 k2nq figs-explicit φιάλας τοῦ θυμοῦ τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 bowls of God’s wrath The image of the wine in the bowls can be stated clearly. The word **wrath** here refers to punishment. The wine is a symbol for punishment. See how you translated a similar phrase in [Revelation 15:7](../15/07.md). Alternate translation: “bowls full of the wine that represents God’s wrath” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]] [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-symlanguage]])
@@ -745,7 +745,7 @@ REV 16 19 g6s8 writing-symlanguage δοῦναι αὐτῇ τὸ ποτήριο
REV 16 20 eb5w 0 Connecting Statement: This is part of the seventh bowl of God’s wrath.
REV 16 20 byn4 figs-metonymy ὄρη οὐχ εὑρέθησαν 1 the mountains were no longer found The inability to see any mountains is metonymy expressing the idea that no mountains existed any longer. Alternate translation: “there were no longer any mountains” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
REV 16 21 i43r translate-bweight ταλαντιαία 1 a talent You may convert this to a modern measure. Alternate translation: “33 kilograms” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-bweight]])
-REV 17 intro ysn1 0 # Revelation 17 General Notes
## Structure and formatting
This chapter begins to describe how God will destroy Babylon.
## Special concepts in this chapter
### Prostitute
Scripture often pictures idolatrous Jews as adulterous people and sometimes as prostitutes. This is not the reference here. The translator should allow this illustration to be vague. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-apocalypticwriting]])
### Seven hills
This possibly refers to the city of Rome, which was known as the city on seven hills. However, the translator should not attempt to identify Rome in the translation.
## Important figures of speech in this chapter
### Metaphors
John uses many different metaphors in this chapter. He explains some of their meanings, but allows them to remain relatively unclear. The translator should attempt to do the same. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter
### “The beast you saw existed, does not exist now, but is about to come up “
This and similar phrases in this chapter contrast the beast with Jesus. Jesus is called “the one who is, and who was, and who is to come” elsewhere in the Book of Revelation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
### Paradox
A paradox is a true statement that appears to describe something impossible. This sentence in 17:11 is a paradox: “the beast…is itself also an eighth king; but it is one of those seven kings.” The translator should not attempt to resolve this paradox. It should remain a mystery. ([Revelation 17:11](../../rev/17/11.md))
+REV 17 intro ysn1 0 # Revelation 17 General Notes
## Structure and formatting
This chapter begins to describe how God will destroy Babylon.
## Special concepts in this chapter
### Prostitute
Scripture often pictures idolatrous Jews as adulterous people and sometimes as prostitutes. This is not the reference here. The translator should allow this illustration to be vague. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-apocalypticwriting]])
### Seven hills
This possibly refers to the city of Rome, which was known as the city on seven hills. However, the translator should not attempt to identify Rome in the translation.
## Important figures of speech in this chapter
### Metaphors
John uses many different metaphors in this chapter. He explains some of their meanings, but allows them to remain relatively unclear. The translator should attempt to do the same. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter
### “The beast you saw existed, does not exist now, but is about to come up “
This and similar phrases in this chapter contrast the beast with Jesus. Jesus is called “the one who is, and who was, and who is to come” elsewhere in the Book of Revelation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
### Paradox
A paradox is a true statement that appears to describe something impossible. This sentence in 17:11 is a paradox: “the beast…is itself also an eighth king; but it is one of those seven kings.” The translator should not attempt to resolve this paradox. It should remain a mystery. ([Revelation 17:11](../../rev/17/11.md))
REV 17 1 ppd7 0 General Information: John begins to describe the part of his vision about the great prostitute.
REV 17 1 c6f4 figs-abstractnouns τὸ κρίμα τῆς πόρνης τῆς μεγάλης 1 the condemnation of the great prostitute The noun “condemnation” can be expressed with the verb “condemn.” Alternate translation: “how God will condemn the great prostitute” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
REV 17 1 f7ry writing-symlanguage τῆς πόρνης τῆς μεγάλης 1 the great prostitute “the prostitute that everyone knows about.” She represents a certain sinful city. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-symlanguage]])
@@ -792,7 +792,7 @@ REV 17 17 el9y figs-activepassive ἄχρι τελεσθήσονται οἱ λ
REV 17 18 w2lu 0 Connecting Statement: The angel finishes speaking to John about the prostitute and the beast.
REV 17 18 md61 figs-metaphor ἔστιν 1 is Here, **is** stands for “represents.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
REV 17 18 uy1m figs-metonymy ἡ πόλις ἡ μεγάλη, ἡ ἔχουσα βασιλείαν 1 the great city that rules When it says that the city rules, it means that the leader of the city rules. Alternate translation: “the great city whose leader rules” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
-REV 18 intro j5qc 0 # Revelation 18 General Notes
## Structure and formatting
Some translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with verses 1-8.
## Special concepts in this chapter
### Prophecy
The angel prophesies about Babylon falling, which here means being destroyed. It is spoken of as having already happened. This is common in prophecy. It emphasizes that the coming judgment will certainly happen. The angel also prophesies that the people will lament over Babylon falling. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/prophet]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/judge]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-apocalypticwriting]])
## Important figures of speech in this chapter
### Metaphors
Prophecy frequently uses metaphors. This chapter has a slightly different apocalyptic style than the Book of Revelation overall. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
+REV 18 intro j5qc 0 # Revelation 18 General Notes
## Structure and formatting
Some translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with verses 1-8.
## Special concepts in this chapter
### Prophecy
The angel prophesies about Babylon falling, which here means being destroyed. It is spoken of as having already happened. This is common in prophecy. It emphasizes that the coming judgment will certainly happen. The angel also prophesies that the people will lament over Babylon falling. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/prophet]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/judge]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-apocalypticwriting]])
## Important figures of speech in this chapter
### Metaphors
Prophecy frequently uses metaphors. This chapter has a slightly different apocalyptic style than the Book of Revelation overall. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
REV 18 1 fl3m figs-personification 0 General Information: The pronouns “she” and “her” refer to the city of Babylon, which is spoken of as if it were a prostitute. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
REV 18 1 xxe5 0 Connecting Statement: Another angel comes down from heaven and speaks. This is a different angel than the one in the previous chapter, who spoke about the prostitute and the beast.
REV 18 2 a2f5 figs-metaphor ἔπεσεν, Βαβυλὼν ἡ μεγάλη 1 Fallen is Babylon the great The angel speaks of Babylon having been destroyed as if it had fallen. See how you translated this in [Revelation 14:8](../14/08.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
@@ -865,7 +865,7 @@ REV 18 23 ja6m figs-metonymy οὐ μὴ ἀκουσθῇ ἐν σοὶ ἔτι
REV 18 23 q8qm figs-metaphor οἱ ἔμποροί σου ἦσαν οἱ μεγιστᾶνες τῆς γῆς 1 your merchants were the princes of the earth The angel speaks of important and powerful people as if they were princes. Alternate translation: “your merchants were like princes of the earth” or “your merchants were the most important men in the world” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
REV 18 23 j3iy figs-activepassive ἐν τῇ φαρμακείᾳ σου ἐπλανήθησαν πάντα τὰ ἔθνη 1 all the nations were deceived by your sorcery This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: “you deceived the people of the nations with your magic spells” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
REV 18 24 s8bp figs-activepassive ἐν αὐτῇ αἷμα προφητῶν καὶ ἁγίων εὑρέθη, καὶ πάντων τῶν ἐσφαγμένων ἐπὶ τῆς γῆς 1 In her the blood of prophets and saints was found, and the blood of all who have been killed on the earth Blood being found there means that the people there were guilty of killing people. Alternate translation: “Babylon is guilty of killing the prophets and believers and all the other people in the world who were killed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
-REV 19 intro h785 0 # Revelation 19 General Notes
## Structure and formatting
The beginning of chapter 19 concludes the topic of Babylon falling.
Some translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with verses 1-8.
## Special concepts in this chapter
### Songs
The Book of Revelation often describes heaven as a place where people sing. They worship God with songs. This illustrates that heaven is a place where God is always worshiped. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/heaven]])
### Wedding celebration
The wedding celebration or feast is an important image in Scripture. Jewish culture often pictured paradise, or life with God after death, as a feast. Here, the wedding feast is for the Lamb, who is Jesus, and his bride, who is all his people.
+REV 19 intro h785 0 # Revelation 19 General Notes
## Structure and formatting
The beginning of chapter 19 concludes the topic of Babylon falling.
Some translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with verses 1-8.
## Special concepts in this chapter
### Songs
The Book of Revelation often describes heaven as a place where people sing. They worship God with songs. This illustrates that heaven is a place where God is always worshiped. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/heaven]])
### Wedding celebration
The wedding celebration or feast is an important image in Scripture. Jewish culture often pictured paradise, or life with God after death, as a feast. Here, the wedding feast is for the Lamb, who is Jesus, and his bride, who is all his people.
REV 19 1 qu5h 0 General Information: This is the next part of John’s vision. Here he describes the rejoicing in heaven over the fall of the great prostitute, who is the city of Babylon.
REV 19 1 lr94 ἤκουσα 1 I heard Here, **I** refers to John.
REV 19 1 nk8x ἁλληλουϊά 1 Hallelujah This word means “Praise God” or “Let us praise God.”
@@ -963,7 +963,7 @@ REV 20 14 lw6b figs-activepassive ὁ θάνατος καὶ ὁ ᾍδης ἐβ
REV 20 14 qv55 writing-symlanguage ὁ θάνατος ὁ δεύτερός 1 the second death “dying a second time.” This is described as eternal punishment in the lake of fire in [Revelation 20:14](../20/14.md) and [Revelation 21:8](../21/08.md). See how you translated this in [Revelation 2:11](../02/11.md). Alternate translation: “the final death in the lake of fire” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-symlanguage]])
REV 20 15 c9pb figs-activepassive εἴ τις οὐχ εὑρέθη…γεγραμμένος 1 If anyone’s name was not found written This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: “If God’s angel did not find a person’s name” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
REV 20 15 wq31 figs-activepassive ἐβλήθη εἰς τὴν λίμνην τοῦ πυρός 1 he was thrown into the lake of fire This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: “the angel threw him into the lake of fire” or “the angel threw him into the place where fire burns forever” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
-REV 21 intro pai8 0 # Revelation 21 General Notes
## Structure and formatting
This chapter gives a detailed picture of the new Jerusalem.
## Special concepts in this chapter
### Second death
Death is a type of separation. The first death is physically dying, when the soul is separated from the body. The second death is being eternally separated from God. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/other/death]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/soul]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/eternity]])
## Important figures of speech in this chapter
### Book of Life
This is a metaphor for eternal life. Those possessing eternal life are said to have their names written in this Book of Life. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter
### New heaven and new earth
It is unclear whether this is an entirely new heaven and earth or if it is remade out of the present heaven and earth. The same is also true of the new Jerusalem. It is possible this will affect translation in some languages. The word “new” in the original language means different and better than the old. It does not mean new in time.
+REV 21 intro pai8 0 # Revelation 21 General Notes
## Structure and formatting
This chapter gives a detailed picture of the new Jerusalem.
## Special concepts in this chapter
### Second death
Death is a type of separation. The first death is physically dying, when the soul is separated from the body. The second death is being eternally separated from God. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/other/death]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/soul]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/eternity]])
## Important figures of speech in this chapter
### Book of Life
This is a metaphor for eternal life. Those possessing eternal life are said to have their names written in this Book of Life. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter
### New heaven and new earth
It is unclear whether this is an entirely new heaven and earth or if it is remade out of the present heaven and earth. The same is also true of the new Jerusalem. It is possible this will affect translation in some languages. The word “new” in the original language means different and better than the old. It does not mean new in time.
REV 21 1 tj16 0 General Information: John begins to describe his vision of the new Jerusalem.
REV 21 1 vks1 εἶδον 1 I saw Here, **I** refers to John.
REV 21 2 er4u figs-simile ὡς νύμφην, κεκοσμημένην τῷ ἀνδρὶ αὐτῆς 1 like a bride adorned for her husband This compares the new Jerusalem to a bride who has made herself beautiful for her bridegroom. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-simile]])
@@ -1010,7 +1010,7 @@ REV 21 26 ps25 οἴσουσιν 1 They will bring “The kings of the earth wi
REV 21 27 n3nh figs-doublenegatives οὐ μὴ εἰσέλθῃ εἰς αὐτὴν πᾶν κοινὸν, καὶ ὁ 1 nothing unclean will ever enter into it, nor anyone This can be stated in positive form. Alternate translation: “only what is clean will ever enter, and never anyone” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]])
REV 21 27 g7fr figs-activepassive εἰ μὴ οἱ γεγραμμένοι ἐν τῷ βιβλίῳ τῆς ζωῆς τοῦ Ἀρνίου 1 but only those whose names are written in the Lamb’s Book of Life This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: “but only those whose names the Lamb wrote in his Book of Life” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
REV 21 27 cw99 writing-symlanguage τοῦ Ἀρνίου 1 the Lamb This is a young sheep. Here is it used symbolically to refer to Christ. See how you translated this in [Revelation 5:6](../05/06.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-symlanguage]])
-REV 22 intro e1ya 0 # Revelation 22 General Notes
## Structure and formatting
This chapter emphasizes that Jesus is coming soon.
## Special concepts in this chapter
### Tree of life
There is probably an intended connection between the tree of life in the Garden of Eden and the tree of life mentioned in this chapter. The curse that began in Eden will end at this time.
## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter
### Alpha and omega
These are the names of the first and last letters in the Greek alphabet. The ULT spells out their names in English. This strategy can serve as a model for translators. Some translators, however, may decide to use the first and last letters in their own alphabet. This would be “A and Z” in English.
+REV 22 intro e1ya 0 # Revelation 22 General Notes
## Structure and formatting
This chapter emphasizes that Jesus is coming soon.
## Special concepts in this chapter
### Tree of life
There is probably an intended connection between the tree of life in the Garden of Eden and the tree of life mentioned in this chapter. The curse that began in Eden will end at this time.
## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter
### Alpha and omega
These are the names of the first and last letters in the Greek alphabet. The ULT spells out their names in English. This strategy can serve as a model for translators. Some translators, however, may decide to use the first and last letters in their own alphabet. This would be “A and Z” in English.
REV 22 1 b1ad 0 Connecting Statement: John continues to describe the new Jerusalem as the angel shows it to him.
REV 22 1 uu7b ἔδειξέν μοι 1 showed me Here, **me** refers to John.
REV 22 1 vl23 ποταμὸν ὕδατος ζωῆς 1 the river of the water of life “the river flowing with life-giving water”